Apple Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08 Apple sur FNAC.COM

 

 

TELECHARGER LE PDF :

http://manuals.info.apple.com/fr/Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08.pdf

 

 

Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :

Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server

Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur

Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide

Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh

Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible

Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide

Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide

Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F

Liste-documentation-apple

Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08

Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br

Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info

Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage

Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F

Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide

Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner

Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur

Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide

Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement

Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f

Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok

Manuale Utente PowerBookG4

Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e

Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch

Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug

Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion

Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier

AppleTV_Setup-Guide

Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f

Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive

Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide

Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software

Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1

PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3

Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération

Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7  Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000

Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010

Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS

Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4

Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation

User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software

iMovie ’08 Premiers contacts Familiarisez vous avec iMovie et révolutionnez la manière dont vous lisez, visualisez, stockez et partagez vos vidéos.2 1 Table des matières Chapitre 1 4 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 5 L’Interface iMovie 5 Une bibliothèque vidéo source unique 6 Exploration et lecture de votre vidéo 6 Création de diaporamas vidéo 6 À propos des formats de fichier vidéo 7 Éléments retenus 8 Avant de commencer 8 Éléments requis Chapitre 2 9 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 9 Étape 1 : importez une séquence dans iMovie 10 Identification du type de votre caméra et importation de séquences vidéo 20 Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo 20 À propos des événements iMovie 22 Affichage de votre vidéo source. 25 Sélection de la vidéo source 26 Marquage de la vidéo comme favorite ou à supprimer 28 Tri (filtrage) de vidéo 29 Étape 3 : améliorez les images vidéo et réglez le volume sonore 29 Rognage d’images vidéo 31 Ajustement du volume des clips 33 Étape 4 : créez un projet iMovie 34 Création d’un projet iMovie 34 Ajout de vidéo à votre projet 36 Ajout de musique de fond à votre projet 38 Suppression des images indésirables dans les clips d’un projet 40 Affichage rapide des modifications 40 Ajout de transitions entre les clips d’un projet 42 Ajout de titres à votre projet 43 Ajout d’effets sonores et de commentaires à votre projet 45 Ajout de photos avec des effets d’animation 47 Étape 5 : partager votre film 48 Publication en vue d’un affichage sur votre iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV 48 Envoi de votre film terminé vers iDVD, iWeb ou d’autres applicationsTable des matières 3 49 Publication directe sur le web 51 Poursuivez votre exploration de iMovie 52 Ressources supplémentaires1 4 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 Voici iMovie ’08, un outil révolutionnaire pour profiter, stocker et partager toutes vos vidéos personnelles. Vous pouvez importer de la vidéo dans iMovie depuis une grande variété de sources et d’appareils pour garder vos mémoires toujours à portée de main. Toutes ces séquences vidéo dont personne ne profite car elles restent dans votre appareil photo numérique ou dans votre caméscope ? Cette boîte pleine de disques et de bandes dans votre armoire ? Ajoutez-les à votre bibliothèque de vidéos pour en profiter à tout moment. Visionnez toutes vos vidéos personnelles sans avoir à déballer votre caméscope ou à le brancher à votre ordinateur ou à votre télévision. Parcourez les événements qui marquent votre vie, un moment après l’autre, année après année, d’une personne à l’autre, depuis un seul et même emplacement. iMovie facilite l’organisation et le classement de vos vidéos, en vous permettant de séparer les meilleures des moins bonnes, et d’accé- der facilement aux parties que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également créer des séquences rapides et simples, ajouter des titres à la vidéo, des transitions de plan, une musique de fond, et des commentaires vocaux. iMovie vous permet de partager avec vos proches vos vidéos sur le Web, sur votre ordinateur, sur votre iPod, iPhone ou sur Apple TV. Avant de suivre l’initiation qui débute dans le chapitre 2, lisez les sections suivantes pour vous familiariser avec les concepts et les outils de lecture, d’organisation et de manipulation de la vidéo d’iMovie. Même si vous avez utilisé les versions précédentes d’iMovie ou d’autres applications de montage vidéo, vous tirerez profit des idées qui font qu’iMovie ’08 est différent de ce que vous avez rencontré jusqu’à présent.Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 5 L’Interface iMovie La fenêtre principale d’iMovie, ci-dessous, est la console à partir de laquelle vous visualisez, organisez et montez vos vidéos. Elle vous permet d’accéder directement à tous les outils que vous pouvez utiliser pour manipuler vos vidéos. Une bibliothèque vidéo source unique Le fait d’importer toutes vos vidéos dans iMovie, quelle que soit leur source, permet de créer une bibliothèque unique appelée bibliothèque vidéo. Dans cette bibliothèque, sélectionnez simplement le nom d’un événement que vous avez enregistré et visualisez son contenu ; c’est aussi simple que d’ouvrir un livre et d’afficher ses pages. Regrouper toutes les vidéos d’un événement unique—vos dernières vacances, par exemple— même si elles proviennent de sources différentes et sont enregistrées dans des formats vidéos différents. Vous pouvez désormais accéder à toutes les vidéos en un simple clic. Bibliothèque de Projet Enumérez tous les projets iMovie que vous avez créés. Barre d’outils iMovie La plupart des outils et des commandes dont vous avez besoin sont disponibles à cet endroit. Bibliothèque d’événements Enumérez les noms de tous les événements que vous avez enregistrés sur vidéo et assemblés Vidéo source Montre le contenu des événement que vous avez sélectionnés dans la Bibliothèque d’événements. Projet iMovie Assembler vos séquences, vos photos, votre musique et plus encore pour créer des vidéos que vous pouvez partager sur le Web, sur votre iPod, ou sur Apple TV. Visualiseur Votre vidéo est lue ici.6 Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 Exploration et lecture de votre vidéo Il n’a jamais été aussi facile de profiter de votre bibliothèque vidéo. Dès que vous sélectionnez un événement, votre vidéo est affichée sous la forme d’une pellicule cinématographique déroulée, ce qui vous permet de visualiser le contenu de chaque image du film. Lorsque vous positionnez le pointeur sur les images, ces dernières se déplacent. Ce « survol » de la vidéo vous permet de visionner un passage précis de façon instantanée sans avoir à rembobiner la bande, effectuer une avance rapide ou sélectionner et lire des clips particuliers. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur la barre d’espace ou double-cliquez n’importe où dans la vidéo pour commencer la lecture à vitesse normale. Création de diaporamas vidéo iMovie facilite la création de vidéos de meilleure qualité et plus rapides. La méthode la plus simple pour créer une vidéo personnelle de qualité consiste à monter un « diaporama vidéo », c’est-à-dire une succession de clips vidéo très courts et de durée identique, reprenant uniquement les meilleurs extraits des vidéos qui se trouvent dans votre bibliothèque. iMovie permet non seulement de réaliser ce diaporama vidéo pratiquement sans effort, mais aussi d’ajouter une musique de fond afin d’obtenir des vidéos personnelles attrayantes et bien rythmées que vous pourrez montrer fièrement à votre entourage. À propos des formats de fichier vidéo Vous pouvez à présent utiliser une multitude d’appareils vidéo pour filmer dans tous les endroits où vous vous rendez. Le caméscope s’est ouvert à de nouveaux formats pour enregistrer sur mini-DVD, disque dur, ou carte mémoire Flash. Même la plupart des appareils photo numériques peuvent enregistrer des vidéos, ainsi que de nombreux autres appareils portables. De plus, chacun de ces appareils peut enregistrer une vidéo dans des formats de fichier vidéo différents. iMovie travaille avec la génération émergente d’appareils enregistreur vidéo. Vous pouvez importer de la vidéo depuis les sources suivantes dans votre bibliothèque vidéo iMovie : Type d’appareil photo Support d’enregistrement Format de fichier vidéo Caméscopes USB (appareils à accès aléatoire, RAD) Disque dur MPEG-2 et AVCHD DVD (petit DVD de 8 cm) Mémoire Flash (carte mémoire) Caméscopes FireWire Cassette Mini DV DV (standard) et HDV (Vidéo haute définition) Appareil photo iSight Disque dur (sur votre ordinateur) Séquence QuickTimeChapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 7 Outre les sources vidéo indiquées ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi ajouter des données vidéo issues de fichiers de séquence stockés au préalable sur un disque dur (y compris celles qui proviennent de projets créés dans iMovie HD). Remarque : un processeur Intel est indispensable pour prendre en charge la vidéo AVCHD. Pour en savoir plus sur les caméscopes AVCHD, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/ilife/systemrequirements.html. Éléments retenus Pour comprendre la manière d’importer la vidéo dans iMovie, puis de l’organiser, de la trier et de la gérer, suivez l’initiation rapide qui débute au chapitre 2. Vous apprendrez comment :  importer la vidéo dans iMovie ;  organiser votre vidéo en événements ;  classer vos segments par ordre de préférence pour les retrouver facilement ;  classer les segments que vous souhaitez supprimer ;  améliorer le son de vos vidéos ;  rogner l’arrière-plan pour créer un gros plan ;  créer un diaporama vidéo ;  ajouter une photo avec des effets panoramique et de zoom (l’effet Ken Burns) ;  partager votre film une fois qu’il est terminé. Appareils photo numériques Mémoire Flash MPEG-2, MPEG-4, etc. Téléphones portables avec appareil photo (ajoutés automatiquement via iPhoto) Type d’appareil photo Support d’enregistrement Format de fichier vidéo8 Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 Avant de commencer Vous pouvez imprimer ce document avant de commencer ou laisser ce fichier PDF ouvert sur votre bureau pendant que vous travaillez. Bien entendu, vous n’êtes pas obligé de terminer cette initiation en une seule fois. Ignorez les parties qui ne vous inté- ressent pas et concentrez-vous sur celles que vous voulez assimiler immédiatement. Dans plusieurs tâches décrites dans ce guide et dans l’Aide iMovie, vous devrez choisir des commandes de menu dans la barre des menus. Les commandes de menu se pré- sentent de la façon suivante : Choisissez Édition > Copier. Le premier terme après Choisissez correspond au nom d’un menu dans la barre des menus d’iMovie. Le terme suivant est l’élément que vous choisissez dans ce menu. Éléments requis Pour terminer toutes les parties de cette initiation, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants :  Une vidéo numérique d’un des appareils énumérés dans le tableau de la page 6, ou une vidéo présente sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou un disque dur externe connecté à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble FireWire.  Au moins plusieurs gigaoctets (Go) d’espace disponible sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou sur un disque dur externe connecté par un câble FireWire. (L’espace nécessaire dépend du format de fichier vidéo que vous utilisez. Vérifiez les instructions relatives à l’importation de vidéo depuis votre appareil enregistreur pour plus d’informations.) Si aucune vidéo n’est disponible, vous pouvez créer un diaporama à l’aide des photos de votre bibliothèque iPhoto. Expérimentez et amusez-vous tout en vous familiarisant avec iMovie.2 9 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Importez des séquences de vos appareils vidéo les plus récents et ressortez vos vieilles bandes des cartons. Avec iMovie, vous pouvez importer, organiser, monter vos séquences et redonner vie à vos souvenirs. Ce guide d’initiation vous montrera comment importer votre vidéo dans iMovie, réorganiser votre Bibliothèque d’événements et lire et parcourir votre séquence vidéo. Vous aurez également la possibilité de trouver et de repérer vos parties préférées pour accéder à vos moments favoris et vous pourrez repérer les parties que vous voulez supprimer. Vous allez ajuster la durée de votre vidéo en appliquant un Trim et la rogner, créer un diaporama vidéo muni de titres, de transitions, de photos et de musique que vous pourrez ensuite partager avec vos amis sur le web ou lire sur votre iPod ou un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) à l’aide de l’Apple TV. Étape 1 : importez une séquence dans iMovie Pour commencer à travailler sur votre séquence vidéo, vous devez d’abord la transférer dans iMovie. L’importation de séquences vidéo dans iMovie ne les efface pas de votre appareil d’enregistrement. Au cours de cette opération, vous allez ouvrir iMovie et importer une séquence vidéo d’un appareil d’enregistrement ou importer un fichier vidéo déjà stocké sur un disque dur ; vous commencerez ensuite à créer votre vidéothèque.10 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour ouvrir iMovie : m Double-cliquez sur l’icône iMovie dans votre dossier Applications ou cliquez sur l’icône correspondante dans le Dock. Lorsque vous ouvrez iMovie pour la première fois, la fenêtre iMovie ci-dessous s’affiche. Identification du type de votre caméra et importation de séquences vidéo Il existe plusieurs méthodes d’importation de séquences vidéo dans iMovie. Suivez les instructions correspondant à votre situation, puis passez à l’« Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo » à la page 20.  Si vous disposez d’un lecteur DVD, d’un disque dur ou d’un caméscope à mémoire flash, consultez la page 11.  Si votre séquence vidéo se trouve sur une bande d’un caméscope numérique équipé d’une interface FireWire, consultez la page 14.  Si vous avez des séquences vidéo dans votre photothèque iPhoto, consultez la page 16.  Si vous voulez enregistrer une séquence vidéo directement dans iMovie, consultez la page 17.  Si votre séquence vidéo se trouve dans un ancien projet iMovie ou sur un disque dur, consultez la page 18. Affichez la liste de vos projets dans la Bibliothè- que de projets. Importez et montez en utilisant les boutons de la barre d’outils iMovie. Affichez la liste de vos événements dans la Bibliothèque d’événements. Parcourez votre vidéo source. Créez votre projet. Affichez votre séquence vidéo dans ce visualiseur.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 11 Caméscopes DVD, HDD ou à mémoire Flash Ces appareils sont connectés à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble USB. On les appelle « appareils à accès aléatoire » (RAD, Random-Access Devices) parce qu’ils permettent de sélectionner et d’importer des clips vidéo de manière aléatoire, ce qui évite d’avoir à lire la vidéo pour l’importer, comme c’est le cas avec les caméscopes traditionnels qui utilisent des cassettes. Remarque : un processeur Intel est indispensable pour prendre en charge la vidéo AVCHD. Pour en savoir plus sur les caméscopes AVCHD, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/ilife/systemrequirements.html. Pour importer une séquence vidéo à partir d’un appareil à accès aléatoire : 1 Placez l’appareil en mode PC ou ordinateur, puis connectez-le à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble USB. (Pour obtenir des instructions sur cette connexion, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’appareil.) L’illustration ci-dessous montre comment connecter un caméscope à un iMac à l’aide d’un câble USB. Lorsque le caméscope est correctement connecté, la fenêtre Importer s’ouvre et affiche tous les clips présents dans l’appareil. La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque votre appareil est correctement connecté.12 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). Remarque : si vous utilisez un caméscope avec DVD, le branchement à votre Mac peut entraîner l’ouverture du lecteur DVD. Dans ce cas, il vous suffit de le fermer. 2 Cliquez sur Importer tout pour importer tous les clips. 3 Dans le menu local Enregistrer dans, choisissez le disque dur sur lequel vous voulez enregistrer la séquence vidéo importée. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV) occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 4 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local.  Pour créer un nouvel événement, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »). Si vous souhaitez créer un nouvel événement pour chaque date d’enregistrement de la vidéo, sélectionnez « Créer un nouvel événement pour chaque jour ». 5 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ».Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 13 6 Cliquez sur OK. Selon la durée de votre vidéo, l’importation dans iMovie et la création de vignettes pour chaque clip peut prendre de quelques minutes à plus d’une heure. La barre de progression de la fenêtre Importation indique le clip en cours d’importation et la vitesse à laquelle l’importation se déroule. 7 Une fois la séquence importée, éteignez votre caméscope et déconnectez-le de l’ordinateur. Importation d’une sélection de séquences vidéo à partir d’un appareil à accès aléatoire : Si vous ne souhaitez pas importer toutes les données vidéo qui se trouvent sur votre appareil, vous avez la possibilité de sélectionner et d’importer uniquement les clips vidéo qui vous intéressent. Vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de lecture sous le visualiseur de la fenêtre Importer pour examiner les clips et sélectionner ceux que vous voulez importer. Pour les besoins de ce guide d’initiation, il est préférable d’importer de 10 à 15 minutes de vidéo comme base de travail. Après avoir connecté votre appareil à votre ordinateur (voir ci-dessus), effectuez l’une des actions suivantes. Pour importer la plupart des clips vidéo : 1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel. 2 Désactivez les cases au-dessous des clips que vous ne souhaitez pas importer. 3 Cliquez sur Importer les clips cochés. 4 Ensuite, suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 3 à 6, à la page 12. Pour importer seulement quelques clips vidéo : 1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel. 2 Cliquez sur Tout décocher. 3 Cochez les cases qui se trouvent sous les clips que vous souhaitez importer. 4 Cliquez sur Importer les clips cochés. 5 Ensuite, suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 3 à 6, à la page 12. Une fois que l’importation de la vidéo est terminée, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection qui se trouve près du menu local Caméra, puis éteignez le caméscope et déconnectez-le de l’ordinateur.14 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Caméscopes numériques équipés d’une interface FireWire Si vous avez un caméscope DV ou HDV mini-DV que vous pouvez connecter à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire, vous importerez les séquences vidéo pendant leur lecture sur la bande. Pour importer de la vidéo à partir d’un caméscope avec connexion FireWire : 1 Placez le caméscope en mode VTR (mode d’enregistrement sur bande vidéo que certains caméscopes appellent mode « Lecture » ou « VCR ») et allumez-le s’il ne le fait pas automatiquement. 2 Connectez votre caméscope à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble FireWire. L’illustration ci-dessous montre comment connecter un caméscope à iMac à l’aide d’un câble FireWire. La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque la caméra est correctement connectée. Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque votre appareil est correctement connecté.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 15 3 Assurez-vous que le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre est défini sur Automatique. 4 Cliquez sur Importer. 5 Dans le menu local Enregistrement dans, choisissez le disque dur sur lequel vous voulez enregistrer la séquence vidéo importée. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV) occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 6 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local.  Pour créer un nouvel événement, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »). Si vous souhaitez créer un nouvel événement pour chaque date d’enregistrement de la vidéo, sélectionnez « Créer un nouvel événement pour chaque jour ». 7 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ». 8 Cliquez sur OK. La bande de votre caméscope se rembobine automatiquement au début ; la vidéo complète sur la bande est importée, puis la bande se rembobine à nouveau. La bande est lue pendant l’importation. Vous pouvez regarder la vidéo pendant la lecture (le son n’est lu que sur le caméscope) ou laisser votre ordinateur poursuivre l’importation pendant que vous êtes ailleurs. Cela peut prendre plus de temps pour importer la vidéo que pour la regarder. Après l’importation, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour générer les vignettes de chaque clip vidéo.16 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 9 Une fois la séquence importée, vous pouvez éteindre votre caméscope et le déconnecter de l’ordinateur. Vidéo de votre photothèque iPhoto Les séquences vidéo de votre appareil photo ou de votre téléphone que vous chargez dans votre photothèque iPhoto sont automatiquement disponibles lorsque vous ouvrez iMovie. Dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, sélectionnez Vidéos iPhoto, puis l’événement que vous voulez. (Pour en savoir plus sur l’ajout de vidéo à votre photothèque iPhoto, ouvrez l’application iPhoto et consultez l’Aide iPhoto.) Remarque : seuls les formats vidéo compatibles avec iMovie sont affichés dans la Bibliothèque d’événements. Importation d’une sélection de séquences vidéo à partir d’un caméscope FireWire Si vous ne voulez pas importer la totalité du contenu de votre cassette, vous pouvez choisir de n’importer que certaines séquences. Pour ce guide d’initiation, il est préférable d’importer au moins 10 à 15 minutes de vidéo sur laquelle vous pourrez travailler. Après avoir connecté votre caméscope à votre ordinateur (voir ci-dessus), procédez comme suit. Pour importer une sélection de séquences vidéo : 1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel. 2 Servez-vous des commandes de lecture de la fenêtre Importer pour rembobiner, effectuer une avance rapide ou visionner votre bande. Lorsque vous avez fini d’examiner votre bande, rembobinez-la jusqu’à l’endroit à partir duquel vous souhaitez commencer l’importation. 3 Cliquez sur Importer, puis suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 5 à 8, à la page 15. La vidéo est importée à partir de l’endroit où vous l’avez arrêtée. 4 Cliquez sur Stop lorsque vous souhaitez arrêter l’importation. Chaque fois que vous interrompez l’importation, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour créer des vignettes de la vidéo importée. 5 Pour importer une autre vidéo, répétez les étapes 2 à 4 décrites ci-dessus. 6 Lorsque l’importation de la vidéo est terminée, vous pouvez éteindre votre caméscope et le déconnecter de l’ordinateur.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 17 Enregistrement de séquences vidéo directement dans iMovie Si votre Mac est équipé d’une webcam iSight intégrée, ou si vous connectez une iSight, une autre webcam compatible ou un caméscope via un câble FireWire, vous pouvez enregistrer de la vidéo directement dans iMovie pour la retravailler. Pour enregistrer directement dans iMovie : 1 Connectez votre iSight si elle n’est pas intégrée (ou votre autre webcam ou votre caméscope équipé d’une interface FireWire). 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer pour ouvrir la fenêtre Importer. 3 Si plusieurs appareils sont connectés à votre ordinateur, sélectionnez la caméra que vous voulez utiliser dans le menu local Appareil. 4 Cliquez sur Capturer. 5 Dans le menu local Enregistrer dans, choisissez le disque sur lequel vous souhaitez stocker la vidéo enregistrée. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo peut occuper plusieurs gigaoctets : vous devez donc vérifier que l’espace disponible est suffisant sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 6 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo enregistrée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour créer un nouvel événement destiné à la vidéo enregistrée, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »).  Pour ajouter la vidéo enregistrée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local. 7 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à commencer l’enregistrement, cliquez sur OK. iMovie commence l’enregistrement immédiatement. 8 Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, cliquez sur Stop quand vous voulez. Vous pouvez démarrer et arrêter l’enregistrement autant de fois que vous le voulez. Chaque fois que vous arrêtez l’enregistrement, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour générer les vignettes qui représentent les séquences vidéo. Chaque fois que vous recommencez à enregistrer, vous pouvez créer un nouvel événement ou cliquer sur OK pour ajouter la nouvelle vidéo au même événement. 9 Lorsque vous avez fini d’enregistrer, cliquez sur Terminé. Bouton Importer18 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Projets iMovie HD ou autres fichiers de films sur votre disque dur Vous pouvez importer les séquences vidéo brutes que vous avez déjà stockées sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou sur un disque dur externe compatible et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Pour importer de la vidéo à partir d’un disque dur : 1 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer des films et recherchez le projet dans la fenêtre Importer. Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). 2 Sélectionnez le disque dans lequel vous voulez stocker l’enregistrement dans le menu local Enregistrer dans. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo peut occuper plusieurs gigaoctets : vous devez donc vérifier que l’espace disponible est suffisant sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 3 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour créer un nouvel événement destiné à la vidéo importée, saisissez son nom dans le champ Nom de l’événement (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »).  Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez Événement existant, puis sélectionnez le nom de ce dernier dans le menu local. 4 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ».Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 19 5 Choisissez ce que vous souhaitez faire des fichiers originaux :  Pour supprimer les fichiers originaux une fois qu’ils ont été copiés dans iMovie, sélectionnez Déplacer les fichiers.  Pour maintenir l’intégrité des fichiers originaux même s’ils ont déjà été copiés dans iMovie, sélectionnez Copier les fichiers. 6 Cliquez sur Importer. Vous pouvez aussi importer des données vidéo d’un projet créé avec iMovie HD. Lorsque vous importez un projet iMovie HD, seules les données vidéo importées à l’origine dans le projet depuis un caméscope sont importées dans iMovie ; les autres données vidéo qui se trouvent dans le projet parce que vous les y avez fait glisser depuis le Finder ne sont pas importées. Les clips dans le Visualiseur sont ajoutés à la vidéothèque et regroupés en tant qu’événement ; les clips dans la chronologie sont placés dans un nouveau projet iMovie. Toutes les transitions sont remplacées par des fondus enchaî- nés. Aucun titre, aucun effet, aucune musique, aucun effet sonore et aucune photo ne sont importés dans iMovie. Tous les marqueurs de chapitre sont également perdus. Pour importer un ancien projet iMovie : 1 Choisissez Fichier > Importer le projet HD iMovie, puis recherchez ce dernier dans la zone de dialogue Importer. Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). Vos projets iMovie se trouvent généralement dans votre dossier Séquences. 2 Sélectionnez le disque dans lequel vous voulez stocker le projet dans le menu local Enregistrer dans. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV) occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.20 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 3 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ». 4 Cliquez sur Importer. Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo Une fois que vous avez importé votre séquence, elle est prête à l’emploi. La vidéo est classée par événement dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, où vous pouvez immédiatement la visualiser, la parcourir, la rechercher ou l’améliorer. À propos des événements iMovie Lorsque vous importez une séquence vidéo dans iMovie et que vous lui attribuez un nom d’événement, un nouvel événement apparaît dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, classé sous l’année où il s’est produit. En cliquant sur le triangle d’affichage d’une année dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, vous affichez tous les événements de cette année-là. Si la vidéo d’un même événement s’étale sur plusieurs jours et que vous avez choisi d’établir une séparation lors de l’importation, chacun de ces jours apparaît dans la liste. Si vous choisissez le nom d’un événement existant lorsque vous importez une nouvelle séquence vidéo, vous regroupez les vidéos de plusieurs sources dans un même événement. Vous pouvez également fusionner plusieurs événements (ou jours d’événements) en un même événement, ou scinder un événement en deux. En fusionnant et en scindant des événements ou en déplaçant des clips vidéo d’un événement à l’autre, vous pouvez organiser vos vidéos en catégories et périodes de temps et les passer en revue comme s’il s’agissait de livres rangés sur une étagère. Ainsi, si vous avez importé depuis plusieurs sources différentes des séquences vidéo tournées pendant des vacances sur les îles Galápagos, vous pourriez regrouper toutes ces séquences vidéo, quelle que soit leur source, sous un seul et unique événement intitulé par exemple, « Vacances aux Galápagos », que vous pourrez retrouver facilement sous l’année pendant laquelle vous êtes parti en vacances là-bas. Si vous sélectionnez un événement dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, vous pouvez voir toutes les vidéos qu’il contient. De même, si vous sélectionnez plusieurs événements à la fois, vous voyez toutes les vidéos qu’ils contiennent.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 21 Pour parcourir plusieurs événements : m Maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande (x) et cliquez sur les noms des événements contenant la vidéo que vous voulez parcourir. m Sélectionnez une année dans la Bibliothèque d’événements pour parcourir tous les événements qu’elle contient. Pour fusionner des événements : m Sélectionnez-les dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, puis choisissez Fichier > Fusionner les événements. Pour scinder un événement en deux parties : m Cliquez sur le clip vidéo que vous voulez placer en premier dans le nouvel événement, puis sélectionnez Fichier > « Scinder l’événement avant le plan ». Pour déplacer un segment vidéo (clip) d’un événement vers un autre : m Faites-le glisser et déposez-le (dans la Bibliothèque d’événements) sur le titre de l’événement dans lequel vous voulez le placer. L’événement apparaît dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, sous l’année dans laquelle le clip le plus récent a été tourné. Vous pouvez également trier votre Bibliothèque d’événements en fonction du disque dur sur lequel les vidéos sont stockées. Lorsque vos événements sont triés par disque dur, vous pouvez parcourir tous les événements d’un disque en sélectionnant le nom de ce disque. Pour trier la Bibliothèque d’événements par disque dur : m Cliquez sur le bouton avec une icône de disque dur dans la partie supérieure de la sous-fenêtre Bibliothèque d’événements. Clips vidéo apparaissant comme des « pellicules cinématographiques » Noms d’événements répertoriés dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, séparés par jour Tri des événements par disque dur22 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour découvrir d’autres options relatives à l’organisation de votre Bibliothèque d’évé- nements, consultez la rubrique « Réorganisation d’événements dans la Bibliothèque d’événements » dans l’Aide iMovie. Affichage de votre vidéo source. Sélectionnez le nom d’un événement que vous avez créé dans la Bibliothèque d’événements et examinez les segments vidéo qu’il contient. La vidéo qui se trouve dans vos événements est appelée vidéo source parce qu’elle reste toujours telle que vous l’avez importée et qu’elle n’est pas modifiée par les opérations de montage réalisées dans iMovie. Elle sert de source à la vidéo que vous pouvez utiliser pour créer des films. Vous pouvez voir le contenu d’une vidéo en observant les images espacées dans le temps, comme si vous examiniez une pellicule cinématographique sur une table lumineuse. Chaque pellicule représente un clip vidéo, c’est-à-dire un segment vidéo qui commence au moment où la caméra a commencé à enregistrer et se termine lorsqu’elle a arrêté d’enregistrer. Généralement, chaque événement comporte plusieurs clips, un pour chaque fois où vous avez démarré et arrêté la caméra pendant l’enregistrement de l’événement. Un ensemble de vignettes assemblées forme une pellicule qui représente un clip vidéo. Une vignette représente une image d’un clip. Les images dentelées indiquent que ce clip continue à la ligne suivante ou représente la suite de la ligne précédente. Plusieurs clips, contenant chacun plusieurs vignettesChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 23 Par défaut, iMovie affiche une image par intervalle de 5 secondes de vidéo du clip ; vous pouvez modifier ce réglage pour « dérouler » (développer) ou « enrouler » (contracter) la pellicule selon vos préférences. La durée de chaque clip est affichée à l’extrême gauche lorsque vous passez le pointeur dessus. Pour agrandir ou réduire les pellicules :  Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes vers la droite pour réduire le nombre d’images affichées par clip et raccourcir ainsi la pellicule.  Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes vers la gauche pour augmenter le nombre d’images affichées par clip et agrandir ainsi la pellicule. L’agrandissement et la réduction des pellicules à l’aide de ce curseur ne modifient votre vidéo en aucune manière : ces opérations modifient uniquement l’affichage pendant votre travail. Lecture de votre vidéo Lorsque vous déplacez le pointeur sur les pellicules, vous remarquez que les images des pellicules se déplacent avec la plus grande image dans le visualiseur. L’image dans le visualiseur correspond au moment de la vidéo, ou à l’image, sur laquelle le pointeur se trouve. Le déplacement du pointeur en avant ou en arrière dans la vidéo porte le nom de défilement : il s’agit d’une manière rapide d’avoir une idée de l’apparence de la vidéo. Lorsque vous parcourez votre vidéo, vous entendez également le son qui se lit en avant ou en arrière suivant que vous avancez ou reculez dans la vidéo. Cela est parfois utile pour rechercher un moment particulier dans votre vidéo. D’autres fois, vous voudrez couper le son. Pour couper le son pendant le défilement : m Dans la barre d’outils d’iMovie, cliquez sur le bouton prévu pour couper le son lors du survol de la vidéo ou choisissez Présentation > Écrémage audio et assurez-vous que l’élément n’est pas coché dans le menu. Pour rétablir le son, appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton. Cela affecte uniquement le défilement, mais pas la lecture du son en vitesse normale. Vous pouvez également lire votre vidéo à la vitesse prévue. Cliquez pour couper le son pendant le défilement24 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour lire la vidéo à n’importe quel endroit, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Placez le pointeur à l’emplacement de la pellicule à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer la lecture, puis appuyez sur la barre d’espace. Si le pointeur est placé sur une bordure de sélection jaune, seule la portion sélectionnée de la vidéo est lue. Pour lire au-delà de la portion de vidéo sélectionnée, placez le pointeur à gauche de la sélection avant d’appuyer sur la barre d’espace. m Double-cliquez dans le clip à l’endroit à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer la lecture. m Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip et sélectionnez Affichage > Lecture. Pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo : m Cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace pendant la lecture. Pour lire des événements sélectionnés à partir du début, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip et sélectionnez Affichage > « Lire depuis le début ». m Appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique inverse (\). m Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque d’événements. Pour lire un événement en plein écran : 1 Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Lire en plein écran » qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque d’événements pour lire l’événement depuis le début ou appuyez sur Commande (x) + G pour commencer la lecture à partir de l’endroit où se trouve le pointeur. 2 Pour rembobiner ou avancer rapidement, déplacez le pointeur, puis cliquez sur la pellicule qui apparaît ; faites défiler la pellicule en avant ou en arrière ou appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour vous déplacer image par image. 3 Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur la touche Échap. Pour ne lire que les images vidéo sélectionnées, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique (/). m Sélectionnez Affichage > Lire la sélection. Cliquez pour commencer la lecture Cliquez ici pour commencer la lecture depuis le début.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 25 Sélection de la vidéo source Chaque clip vidéo est composé de plusieurs images vidéo, apparaissant comme des images fixes, comme les différents clichés qui composent les images d’une pellicule photographique. (Le nombre d’images par seconde de vidéo animée dépend du format vidéo que vous utilisez). Généralement, la manipulation de vidéo dans iMovie consiste à sélectionner des plages d’images vidéo, ou plages d’images, qui ne représentent qu’une petite partie du clip vidéo. Dans certains cas, il se peut toutefois que la plage d’images sélectionnée couvre l’ensemble d’un clip vidéo voire plusieurs clips. Par défaut, lorsque vous cliquez sur un clip vidéo source, iMovie sélectionne quatre secondes de vidéo à partir du point où vous avez cliqué. Vous pouvez ainsi survoler rapidement votre vidéo à la recherche des meilleures scènes, puis cliquer simplement dessus pour sélectionner automatiquement des plages d’images de quatre secondes qui vous permettront de monter un film constitué de plans bien rythmés. (Vous pouvez en outre régler le nombre d’images vidéo qu’un simple clic peut sélectionner via la sousfenêtre Préférences d’iMovie. Pour savoir comment procéder, reportez-vous à la section « Réglage de la sélection automatique d’une plage d’images » dans l’Aide iMovie.) Un bord de sélection jaune apparaît autour de la plage d’images lorsque vous la sélectionnez. Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire une sélection de plage d’images, la recentrer ou sélectionner un clip entier ou plusieurs clips à la fois. Pour sélectionner une plage d’images vidéo dans la bibliothèque des vidéos sources, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Cliquez sur un clip pour sélectionner quatre secondes de vidéo à partir du point où vous avez cliqué. m Faites glisser le curseur sur le clip pour sélectionner autant d’images que vous le voulez. Pour ajuster une sélection de plage d’images, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Faites glisser la poignée située à l’une des extrémités du bord de sélection pour agrandir ou réduire la sélection. m Placez le pointeur au-dessus du point de départ ou de fin souhaité et cliquez tout en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Faites glisser les poignées pourredimensionner la sélection. La bordure jaune délimite l’étendue des images sélectionnées dans un clip.26 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Si vous voulez déplacer la sélection dans une autre plage d’images du même clip sans modifier sa taille, vous pouvez la recentrer. Pour recentrer la sélection : m Faites glisser le haut de la bordure de sélection vers n’importe quel emplacement du clip. m Appuyez sur les touches Flèche droite ou Flèche gauche pour déplacer l’ensemble de la sélection vers la gauche ou la droite image par image. Vous pouvez « faire coulisser » la plage de sélection le long du clip pour déplacer la sélection et sélectionner plusieurs plages de même taille, ce qui permet d’assurer la régularité du rythme d’un film lors de sa création. Pour sélectionner un clip vidéo entier dans la vidéothèque source : m Cliquez sur un clip tout en maintenant enfoncée la touche Option. m Cliquez sur un clip tout en maintenant enfoncée la touche Contrôle et choisissez « Sélectionner le clip entier » dans le menu local qui s’affiche. ? Astuce : Si vous cliquez tout en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, vous faites apparaître des menus contextuels qui peuvent vous aider à travailler de manière plus efficace. Ils vous proposent des options pertinentes en fonction de l’endroit où vous cliquez. Pour sélectionner plusieurs clips vidéo : m Si les clips constituent une série de clips contigus, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj et cliquez sur le premier et le dernier des clips de la plage à sélectionner. m Si les clips ne sont pas contigus, maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande (x) et cliquez sur chaque clip à sélectionner ; pour retirer un clip de la sélection, cliquez à nouveau sur ce clip. Lorsque vous avez sélectionné plusieurs clips, vous pouvez les faire glisser dans un autre événement ou dans un projet iMovie. Vous pouvez aussi modifier l’apparence d’un clip vidéo, puis copier-coller les modifications dans d’autres clips. Pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez « ajustements vidéo » dans l’Aide iMovie. Marquage de la vidéo comme favorite ou à supprimer Avec iMovie, vous trouvez instantanément les meilleurs moments. Vous n’avez pas besoin de parcourir des heures de vidéo, en effectuant des retours et avances rapides à la recherche des passages souhaités. Désormais, en passant rapidement sur votre vidéo, vous pouvez marquer les passages que vous pensez être les meilleurs ou les moins bons, facilitant ainsi le filtrage ultérieur de votre vidéo et la recherche des séquences à retravailler ou à supprimer.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 27 Pour organiser plus finement votre vidéo, vous pouvez également repérer une plage d’images avec des mots-clés. Pour en savoir plus sur le repérage des vidéos et la recherche à l’aide de mots-clés, recherchez les termes « balisage avec mots-clés » dans l’Aide iMovie. Dans cette étape, vous devez sélectionner la portion de la vidéo que vous aimez et la marquer comme favorite ; vous devrez également marquer la portion de vidéo que vous n’aimez pas en vue de la supprimer. Vous devez d’abord définir un filtre pour votre vidéo source pour afficher tous les clips : sélectionnez Tous les clips dans le menu local Afficher sous la Bibliothèque d’événements. Survolez ensuite votre vidéo pour localiser les passages particulièrement intéressants. Pour marquer la vidéo comme favorite : m Sélectionnez une plage d’images, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Marquer comme favorite » dans la barre d’outils iMovie. Une barre verte apparaît en haut de la plage d’images. Menu local Afficher Marquer comme favorite Démarquer Refuser Une barre verte indique que la plage est marquée comme favorite.28 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour marquer une vidéo à supprimer : m Sélectionnez une plage, puis cliquez sur le bouton Refuser de la barre d’outils iMovie. Une barre rouge s’affiche au-dessus de la plage d’images. Pour supprimer une marque : m Sélectionnez une plage que vous avez marquée comme favorite ou que vous avez refusée, puis, dans la barre d’outils d’iMovie, cliquez sur le bouton Démarquer. La barre de couleur disparaît. Tri (filtrage) de vidéo Maintenant que vous avez marqué certaines images vidéo, vous pouvez aisément filtrer la bibliothèque source de façon à ne voir que les meilleures ou les pires sélections. Pour filtrer la bibliothèque source vidéo et afficher les clips favoris ou refusés : m Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes dans le menu local Afficher sous la Bibliothèque d’événements.  Favoris uniquement : affiche uniquement la séquence vidéo que vous avez marquée comme favorite.  Favoris et démarqués : affiche toutes les séquences vidéo que vous avez marquées comme favorites ou que vous n’avez pas marquées. (Affichage par défaut.)  Tous les clips : affiche tous les clips de l’événement sélectionné.  Refusés uniquement : affiche uniquement les clips que vous avez marqués pour être supprimés. Si vous choisissez Refusés uniquement, vous pouvez afficher un aperçu des clips refusés avant de les supprimer. Une barre rouge indique que la plage est marquée pour la suppression (refusée).Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 29 Pour supprimer les clips refusés : 1 Choisissez Présentation > Refusés uniquement ou sélectionnez Refusés uniquement dans le menu local Afficher. 2 Cliquez sur « Placer dans la corbeille » dans le coin supérieur droit au-dessus des clips refusés. Si vous voulez récupérer l’espace disque libéré par les vidéos supprimées, vous devez vider la Corbeille de votre ordinateur. Pour récupérer l’espace disque des clips supprimés : m Cliquez sur le bureau pour activer le Finder, puis choisissez Finder > Vider la Corbeille. Affichage Favoris et démarqués Lorsque vous travaillez dans iMovie, vous préférerez peut-être afficher uniquement la vidéo que vous avez marquée comme favorite ou que vous n’avez pas marquée. Pour cela, revenez à l’affichage par défaut. La vidéo refusée disparaît immédiatement de cet affichage. Pour l’afficher à nouveau, sélectionnez Rejeté dans le menu local Afficher. Pour restaurer l’affichage par défaut (Favoris et démarqués), effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Appuyez sur Commande (x) + L. m Choisissez Favoris et démarqués dans le menu local Afficher. m Choisissez Présentation > Favoris et démarqués. m Si vous êtes en mode Refusés uniquement, cliquez sur l’option « Masquer les projets rejetés » située dans l’angle supérieur droit du navigateur d’événements. Étape 3 : améliorez les images vidéo et réglez le volume sonore Lorsque vous regardez votre vidéo, vous voudrez peut-être améliorer vos moments préférés. Le volume de votre clip favori est peut-être trop élevé ou trop bas. Dans un autre clip, le sujet principal vous gratifie d’un superbe sourire, mais il est un peu trop éloigné. Ou les couleurs mériteraient peut-être une petite correction. Avec iMovie, vous pouvez facilement améliorer l’apparence et le son de votre vidéo. Rognage d’images vidéo De la même manière que vous découpez une photo, avec iMovie vous pouvez créer un plan rapproché du sujet choisi alors que vous n’en aviez pas auparavant. Si vous travaillez avec un format vidéo standard ou de résolution inférieure, le rognage du clip peut créer du grain. Avec la vidéo haute définition, la qualité d’affichage des clips rognés est quasiment la même que celle des originaux.30 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour rogner un clip : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner, puis sur un clip pour le sélectionner. 2 Dans le visualiseur, cliquez sur Rogner. Un rectangle de découpage vert apparaît autour de l’image dans le visualiseur. 3 Faites glisser le rectangle vert pour le redimensionner et le repositionner afin de souligner la partie de l’image que vous voulez mettre en évidence. Le découpage maximal est de 50 % de la taille de l’image originale. Les proportions du rectangle de rognage restent celles du format 16:9 (écran large) si aucun projet n’est sélectionné (dans le cas contraire, les proportions sont celles du projet sélectionné). 4 Pour afficher l’aperçu de votre travail, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture. 5 Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous avez obtenu le résultat souhaité. Le rognage s’applique à l’ensemble du clip. Une icône Rogner apparaît au début du clip. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail. Faites glisser le cadre et redimensionnez-le pour définir la taille et l’emplacement du découpage. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rogner. faire pivoter toute l’image. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour restaurer complètement l’image. Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Icône RognerChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 31 Cliquez dessus pour modifier ou supprimer le rognage à tout moment. Vous pouvez restaurer votre vidéo à sa taille d’origine à tout moment en ouvrant l’éditeur de rognage et en cliquant sur Adapter. Ajustement du volume des clips iMovie offre deux manières simples de régler le volume sonore général de vos clips vidéo : réduction du volume maximal ou réglage de tous les volumes du clip pour qu’ils tiennent dans une plage « normalisée ». Vous effectuez ces deux réglages dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio. Modifications non destructives L’expression « modifications non destructives » signifie que vous pouvez annuler toutes les modifications apportées à votre vidéo (ou aux autres données que vous ajoutez à vos projets iMovie) si, par exemple, vous changez d’avis ou vous n’êtes pas satisfait du résultat. Cela est dû au fait qu’iMovie ne modifie jamais les données originales que vous modifiez ; iMovie ne crée pas non plus une copie de l’original. iMovie stocke simplement les modifications que vous apportez et les applique à nouveau chaque fois que vous visionnez la vidéo, sans qu’il soit nécessaire pour vous de les enregistrer. Pour annuler la dernière action : m Sélectionnez Édition > Annuler [Action]. Pour restaurer les données dans leur état d’origine : 1 Sélectionnez le clip, puis cliquez sur le bouton pour ouvrir l’outil utilisé pour modifier l’image ou le son original. 2 Supprimez les modifications qui ne vous plaisent pas. À la fin de chaque rubrique de ce guide d’initiation, vous trouverez des instructions particulières sur la restauration de vos données.32 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Ajustements audio : m Cliquez sur un clip, puis sur le bouton Ajustements audio. Réglage du volume d’un clip Si le son de l’un de vos clips est trop élevé par rapport à celui de tous les autres ou, à l’inverse, si vous trouvez qu’il n’est pas assez fort, il vous suffit d’augmenter ou de baisser le volume du clip en question. Pour régler le volume d’un clip : 1 Avec la fenêtre Ajustements audio ouverte, cliquez sur un clip pour le sélectionner. 2 Faites glisser le curseur Volume jusqu’au niveau souhaité. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé pour fermer la fenêtre Ajustements audio, ou cliquez sur un autre clip pour régler son volume. Cliquez sur l’icône de réglage audio qui apparaît au début du clip pour ouvrir la fenê- tre Ajustements audio et modifier ou supprimer les réglages audio à tout moment. Cliquez sur « Revenir à l’original » dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio pour restaurer le volume d’origine du clip. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour réinitialiser la plage de volume du clip. Faites glisser le curseur pour régler le volume du clip. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour restaurer les volumes aux niveaux d’origine. Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Cochez cette case pour que le son de ce clip soit prioritaire par rapport au son d’autres clips. Faites glisser le curseur pour régler l’atténuation du volume des autres clips audio et vidéo. Sélectionnez Manuel, puis faites glisser les curseurs pour régler le taux de fondu en entrée ou en sortie du volume du clip. Icône Ajustements audioChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 33 Normalisation du volume des clips Si la voix est trop forte dans un clip et trop faible dans un autre, la normalisation du volume vous permet de redéfinir les niveaux de son de sorte qu’ils soient compris dans la plage de volume de votre choix. Pour normaliser les volumes dans divers clips : 1 Avec la fenêtre Ajustements audio ouverte, cliquez sur un clip pour le sélectionner. 2 Cliquez sur Normaliser le volume. Cela règle le volume du clip à son niveau maximal sans distorsion. 3 Sélectionnez un autre clip, puis cliquez à nouveau sur Normaliser le volume. Les volumes des deux clips sont désormais réglés sur la même plage. 4 Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour tous les autres clips de sorte que leur volume se trouve à l’intérieur de la même plage. Vous pouvez annuler la normalisation audio à tout moment en cliquant sur « Supprimer la normalisation » ou « Revenir à l’original » dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio. Étape 4 : créez un projet iMovie Si vous voulez partager des parties de votre vidéothèque avec des amis, les publier sur le web ou les transférer sur votre iPod ou votre Apple TV, vous pouvez créer un film à l’aide de la vidéo source dans votre vidéothèque et y placer vos meilleurs clips comme vous le voulez. Vous pouvez améliorer votre film avec de la musique de fond, des effets sonores, des commentaires et des photos. iMovie intègre également plusieurs styles de titres très pratiques pour ajouter du texte à votre film, ainsi que des styles de transitions pour passer en douceur d’un clip à l’autre. Commencez par créer un projet iMovie dans lequel vous allez ensuite combiner toutes les pièces de ce qui deviendra votre film. Au cours de cette opération, vous allez commencer un projet iMovie, puis ajouter une vidéo provenant de la bibliothèque source, l’organiser en une séquence qui vous plaît et ajouter de la musique de fond pour créer un diaporama vidéo élémentaire. Ensuite, vous allez supprimer les images inutiles de la vidéo, ajouter des titres et des transitions et terminer votre montage en ajoutant des effets sonores.34 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Création d’un projet iMovie Un projet iMovie peut être aussi simple ou complexe que vous le voulez, en fonction de ce que vous voulez ajouter à votre film en plus de la vidéo de base. Les tâches pré- sentées ici sont organisées dans l’ordre idéal pour tous vos projets iMovie. N’oubliez pas que lorsque vous apportez des modifications ou des ajustements à une vidéo dans iMovie, les données d’origine ne sont pas affectées. Vous pouvez à tout moment annuler les ajustements que vous avez apportés à la vidéo et votre vidéo originale demeure intacte, protégée contre les modifications non souhaitées. N’hésitez donc pas à essayer tout ce qui vous passe par la tête et amusez-vous bien. Pour créer un projet iMovie 1 Choisissez Fichier > Nouveau projet. 2 Tapez un nom pour votre projet. 3 Choisissez les proportions souhaitées pour votre film terminé dans le menu local Proportions. Choisissez les proportions en fonction des dimensions de la vidéo et des photos que vous utiliserez dans votre projet.  Standard (4:3) : produit un film pour l’affichage sur un téléviseur standard TV ou sur le web. S’il est affiché sur un téléviseur haute définition, un espace noir apparaît de chaque côté de la vidéo.  iPhone (3:2) : produit un film pour l’affichage sur iPhone.  Écran large (16:9) : produit un film idéal pour l’affichage sur un écran large ou un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV). Si vous affichez votre film sur un téléviseur standard, des bandes noires apparaîtront en haut et en bas de la vidéo. Vous pouvez mélanger diverses tailles et formats vidéo dans un même projet. Si vous utilisez des vidéos et des photos de tailles différentes, sélectionnez les proportions les mieux adaptées aux données. Si cela provoque l’apparition de bandes noires en haut, en bas ou sur les côtés de certains contenus, vous pouvez ajouter ces derniers à votre projet, puis les rogner pour enlever ces bandes noires. (Pour en savoir plus sur le rognage des images, voir « Rognage d’images vidéo » à la page 29). Ajout de vidéo à votre projet Vous pouvez ajouter autant de séquences vidéo que vous le souhaitez dans un projet : sélectionnez-les à partir d’un ou de plusieurs événements, pour les regrouper dans l’ordre que vous voulez. Lorsque vous ajoutez une plage d’images à votre projet, elle apparaît sous la forme d’un clip entier dans votre projet, même s’il ne s’agissait que d’une partie d’un clip vidéo source.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 35 Lorsque vous ajoutez à votre projet des données vidéo d’un événement, iMovie ne déplace pas celles-ci et ne les duplique pas non plus. Il établit simplement une réfé- rence à la vidéo source. C’est pourquoi, si votre vidéo source est stockée sur un disque dur externe, ce dernier doit être connecté à votre ordinateur lorsque vous travaillez sur un projet faisant référence à la vidéo source. Cela implique également que vous pouvez ajouter le même segment vidéo plusieurs fois si vous voulez le dupliquer dans votre projet, ou ajouter la même séquence vidéo à plusieurs projets. Dans chaque cas, la séquence vidéo fonctionnera comme un clip individuel. Pour créer un diaporama vidéo, vos clips doivent avoir la même taille ou pratiquement la même. En effet, des clips de même taille équilibrent le rythme de votre film. iMovie facilite cette opération grâce à la fonctionnalité de sélection automatique dans la vidéo source, qui permet de sélectionner toujours la même quantité de vidéo en un seul clic. Pour ajouter des clips à votre projet : 1 Cliquez sur un clip de la vidéo source pour sélectionner une plage d’images vidéo que vous voulez inclure dans votre projet. Quatre secondes de vidéo sont automatiquement sélectionnées. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton « Ajouter au projet » au milieu de la barre d’outils iMovie pour ajouter de la vidéo à la fin de votre projet ou faites glisser la sélection là où vous voulez la faire apparaître dans votre projet. 3 Continuez à sélectionner des données vidéo et à les ajouter à votre projet. 4 Dans le projet, faites glisser les clips pour les placer dans l’ordre souhaité. Vous pouvez afficher un aperçu de votre projet en le lisant de l’une des manières suivantes : Pour lire un projet sélectionné à partir du début : m Cliquez sur le bouton Lire le projet sous la Bibliothèque de projets ou appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique inverse (\). Pour lire un projet sélectionné à partir de n’importe quel point : m Double-cliquez sur l’image à partir de laquelle vous voulez lancer la lecture ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace. Pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo de votre projet : m Appuyez sur la barre d’espace ou cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie. Bouton « Ajouter au projet »36 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour lire un clip ou une plage d’images sélectionné(e) dans votre projet : m Appuyez sur la touche Barre Antislash (/). Pour lire en plein écran un projet sélectionné : 1 Choisissez l’endroit à partir duquel vous souhaitez commencer la lecture du projet :  Pour commencer la lecture à partir de la position du pointeur, quelle qu’elle soit, appuyez sur Commande (x) + G.  Pour démarrer la lecture au début du projet, sélectionnez n’importe quel clip de ce dernier, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Lire en plein écran » qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque des projets. 2 Déplacez le pointeur et cliquez sur la pellicule qui apparaît, puis faites défiler la vidéo en avant et en arrière. 3 Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur la touche Échap. Lorsque vous travaillez sur votre projet, vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire les pellicules du projet pour afficher plus ou moins d’images de chaque clip. Les pellicules de votre projet et de votre source vidéo ne sont pas nécessairement agrandies de la même manière. Pour agrandir ou réduire les pellicules d’un projet : m Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes directement sous votre projet. Ajout de musique de fond à votre projet Vous pouvez animer un film en ajoutant une bande son musicale. Si vous avez des morceaux musicaux dans votre bibliothèque iTunes, vous pouvez en faire glisser un pour accompagner votre vidéo. Sinon, vous pouvez essayer d’utiliser l’un des jingles de iLife. Pour ajouter une musique de fond à votre projet iMovie : 1 Choisissez Fenêtre > « Musique et effets sonores » ou cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils d’iMovie. 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre « Musique et effets sonores », cliquez sur iTunes pour voir toute la musique que contient votre bibliothèque iTunes ou cliquez sur le dossier Effets sonores pour rechercher la musique de fond la plus adaptée à votre film. Cliquez sur un fichier audio pour en obtenir un aperçu sonore. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier musical et faites-le glisser dans l’arrière-plan du projet en veillant à ne pas le faire glisser dans un clip.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 37 Une icône représentant la musique sous forme d’un arrière-plan de couleur verte apparaît derrière les clips vidéo. Cet arrière-plan commence au début du clip et continue pendant toute la durée de la chanson ou de la vidéo, suivant celle qui se termine la première. Si la musique dure plus longtemps que la vidéo, un indicateur apparaît à la fin de la vidéo. La musique se termine automatiquement par une baisse progressive du son à la fin de la vidéo. 4 Si vous souhaitez ajuster le point de début et de fin de la musique de fond, cliquez sur l’arrière-plan de couleur verte, puis choisissez Édition > « Appliquer un Trim à la musique ». Le découpeur musical s’ouvre et affiche uniquement le clip de fond musical Dans le clip audio qui correspond à la musique, on peut voir une forme d’onde ; chaque fois que celle-ci est de couleur rose, cela signifie que la musique est associée à des données vidéo, que vous pouvez voir dans le visualiseur en faisant défiler rapidement le clip audio. La forme d’onde de couleur noire correspond à la partie du clip audio qui s’étend au-delà du début ou de la fin de la vidéo. Si vous ajoutez d’autres clips pour rallonger votre vidéo, la musique de fond couvre alors automatiquement les images vidéo supplémentaires. Musique de fond Indicateur de musique Poignée du point fin de la musique Poignée du point de début de la vidéo38 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 5 Pour définir le point de la musique où la vidéo commence (point de début de la vidéo), faites glisser la première poignée de sélection. Lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée du début de la vidéo, la forme d’onde rose se déplace à l’intérieur du clip audio et le visualiseur lit la vidéo correspondante, en indiquant la nouvelle position du point de début de la vidéo. 6 Pour définir l’endroit de la vidéo où la musique se termine (c’est-à-dire, le point de fin de la musique), faites glisser la seconde poignée de sélection. Lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée du point de fin de la musique, la vidéo correspondante est lue dans le visualiseur pour vous aider à trouver le point de fin qui vous convient. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du découpeur pour obtenir un aperçu de votre travail ; cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous êtes satisfait. Pour découvrir d’autres façons d’arranger et de manipuler le son dans iMovie, y compris en ajoutant et en montant plusieurs clips musicaux de fond ou d’effets sonores, en extrayant des clips audio de votre vidéo et en créant des fondus audio en entrée et en sortie, consultez les rubriques d’Aide iMovie sous « Amélioration de l’audio » (dans la section intitulée « Création d’un projet vidéo »). Pour fermer la sous-fenêtre « Musique et effets sonores » : m Cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils iMovie. Pour supprimer la musique de fond : m Cliquez derrière les clips vidéo pour sélectionner la musique, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous venez de créer un simple diaporama vidéo que vous pouvez partager avec votre famille et des amis. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez effectuer d’autres modifications en suivant les instructions des sections ci-dessous. Suppression des images indésirables dans les clips d’un projet Il est facile de supprimer des images superflues aux extrémités d’un clip vidéo dans votre projet iMovie ou de les restaurer dans votre projet à tout moment. Pour effectuer un trim d’un clip vidéo : m Sélectionnez les images que vous voulez conserver et choisissez Édition > Appliquer un Trim à la sélection. Les images jugées indésirables sont supprimées. Si vous changez d’avis, vous pouvez à tout moment restaurer les images éliminées en réajustant la durée du clip (ou la plage d’images) dans votre projet.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 39 Pour ajuster la durée du clip ou la plage d’images : 1 Sélectionnez un clip dans votre projet. 2 Choisissez Édition > Trim ou cliquez sur le bouton de durée du clip situé dans le coin au début du clip (il apparaît lorsque vous placez le pointeur au-dessus du clip et ressemble à une horloge). Le découpeur s’ouvre et affiche uniquement le clip sélectionné. Les poignées de sélection indiquent ses points de début et de fin dans votre projet. 3 Pour ajuster les points de départ et de fin du clip, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Faites glisser les poignées qui se trouvent au début ou à la fin de la sélection.  Maintenez enfoncée la touche Option en appuyant sur la touche Flèche gauche ou Flèche droite pour déplacer le point de départ ou de fin de la sélection image par image. Si le pointeur se trouve à proximité du début de la sélection, c’est le point de départ du clip qui est ajusté, si le pointeur se trouve à proximité de la fin de la sélection, c’est le point de fin du clip qui est ajusté.  Appuyez sur la touche Flèche droite ou Flèche gauche pour déplacer l’ensemble de la plage d’images sélectionnée vers la gauche ou la droite, image par image. 4 Pour obtenir un aperçu des modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du Trimmer, puis, lorsque vous êtes satisfait du résultat, cliquez sur Terminé. Vous pouvez aussi agrandir ou réduire rapidement des clips de votre projet, image par image, sans passer par la fonction Trim. Icône Durée du clip Poignée de fin du clip Poignée de début du clip40 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour ajuster la durée d’un clip image par image : 1 Placez le pointeur à proximité de la fin du clip à ajuster, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Maintenez enfoncée les touches Commande (x) et Option. Lorsque la poignée de sélection orange apparaît à la fin du clip, faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche pour augmenter ou diminuer la durée du clip par incréments d’une image.  Maintenez enfoncée la touche Option en appuyant sur la touche Flèche gauche ou Flèche droite pour augmenter ou diminuer la durée du clip par incréments d’une image. Ajout de transitions entre les clips d’un projet Pour varier et animer votre projet iMovie, vous pouvez insérer des transitions qui évitent le passage brutal d’un clip au suivant dans votre vidéo. Par exemple, vous pouvez fondre les dernières images d’une séquence avec les premières de la séquence suivante ; vous pouvez également créer l’effet qu’une scène repousse la précédente en dehors de l’écran. iMovie intègre plusieurs transitions attractives qui donnent du style à votre projet. Affichage rapide des modifications Une fois que vous avez ajusté la durée d’un clip vidéo ou apporté une autre modification à votre projet, il est parfois utile d’observer les effets de la modification apportée en visionnant quelques secondes de la vidéo pour apporter ensuite d’autres ajustements. iMovie contient des raccourcis clavier facilitant l’affichage des modifications. Pour afficher un bref aperçu de votre modification : m Assurez-vous que votre pointeur se trouve à l’endroit où vous avez apporté la modification, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Appuyez sur la touche Crochet gauche ([) pour lire une seconde de vidéo avant l’endroit où le pointeur se trouve et une seconde après. Si le pointeur se trouve au-dessus de la plage d’images sélectionnée, appuyer sur la touche Crochet gauche ne lit qu’une seconde de vidéo, au début ou à la fin de la sélection, selon l’extrémité de la sélection dont le pointeur est le plus proche.  Appuyez sur la touche Crochet droite (]) pour lire trois secondes de vidéo avant l’endroit où le pointeur se trouve et trois secondes après. Si le pointeur se trouve au-dessus de la plage d’images sélectionnée, appuyer sur la touche Crochet droite ne lit que trois secondes de vidéo, au début ou à la fin de la sélection, selon l’extrémité de la sélection dont le pointeur est le plus proche. Pour d’autres raccourcis clavier permettant de travailler plus efficacement, recherchez « Raccourcis clavier » dans l’Aide iMovie.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 41 Pour ajouter une transition entre deux clips : 1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Transitions ou cliquez sur le bouton Transitions de la barre d’outils iMovie. Dans la sous-fenêtre Transitions, vous pouvez obtenir un aperçu des transitions disponibles en plaçant le pointeur sur chacune d’entre elles. 2 Sélectionnez la transition voulue et faites-la glisser entre deux clips dans votre projet iMovie. Une icône de transition noire apparaît. Pour afficher l’aperçu de la transition dans votre projet : m Double-cliquez n’importe où dans le clip juste en face de la transition pour la lire ou faites-la défiler en faisant glisser le pointeur sur la transition à la vitesse que vous voulez. Si le résultat obtenu ne vous convient pas, vous pouvez à tout moment faire glisser une autre transition dessus pour remplacer l’existante ou la supprimer et ajouter une transition différente. Pour supprimer une transition : m Sélectionnez l’icône de transition de couleur noire, puis appuyez sur la touche Supprimer. Essayez différentes transitions pour voir comment elles apparaissent à différents emplacements de votre projet. Pour fermer la sous-fenêtre Transitions : m Cliquez sur le bouton Transitions de la barre d’outils iMovie. Le temps entre un clip et le suivant est appelé la durée de transition. La durée d’une transition ne peut jamais être supérieure à la moitié de la durée du clip le plus court précédent ou suivant. Par exemple, si vous avez une transition entre une séquence de quatre secondes et une autre de six secondes, sa durée ne peut pas être supérieure à deux secondes. Par défaut, la durée de toutes les transitions de votre projet est définie à une seconde et demie. Vous pouvez modifier la durée des transitions dans la fenêtre des propriétés du projet ou en choisissant Édition > Définir la durée. Pour plus de détails, recherchez « durée des transitions » dans l’Aide iMovie. Vous pouvez également configurer iMovie pour insérer automatiquement la même transition entre tous les clips de votre projet. Pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez « transitions automatiques » dans l’Aide iMovie. Icône de transition42 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Ajout de titres à votre projet Vous pouvez ajouter du texte sur la vidéo à n’importe quel point de votre projet. Par exemple, vous pouvez donner un titre ou un générique à votre film, ou encore utiliser du texte pour identifier une scène ou une personne dans le film. Tous les textes ajoutés sont appelés titres. Pour ajouter un titre à votre vidéo : 1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Titres ou cliquez sur le bouton Titres de la barre d’outils iMovie. 2 Sélectionnez le style de titre que vous voulez et faites-le glisser sur un clip de votre projet iMovie. Lorsque vous passez le titre sur le clip vidéo, une ombre rouge sur le clip indique que le titre sera affiché sur tout le clip, sur le premier tiers ou sur le dernier tiers ; vous pouvez toujours le déplacer et le redimensionner par la suite. Une fois que le titre est en place, il apparaît dans le visualiseur iMovie et une icône de titre bleue apparaît au-dessus du clip vidéo. 3 Dans le visualiseur, sélectionnez le texte de paramètre fictif et tapez le texte voulu. Icône de titre Sélectionnez le texte du paramètre fictif et tapez Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la fenêtre Police et modifier l’apparence du texte. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 43 4 Pour modifier la couleur, la police ou le style du texte, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les polices dans le visualiseur, puis effectuez vos sélections dans la fenêtre Police. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du visualiseur pour obtenir un aperçu de votre travail ; cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous êtes satisfait. Pour raccourcir ou rallonger un titre : m Passez le pointeur sur une extrémité du titre jusqu’à ce qu’il se transforme en ligne verticale, puis faites glisser l’icône de titre d’un côté ou de l’autre. Pour repositionner le titre : m Faites glisser le titre à l’emplacement où vous voulez qu’il apparaisse dans votre vidéo. Vous pouvez même le placer de façon qu’il chevauche deux clips. Pour modifier un titre déjà créé : m Double-cliquez sur l’icône du titre et apportez vos modifications dans le visualiseur. Pour supprimer un titre : m Sélectionnez l’icône du titre et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Ajout d’effets sonores et de commentaires à votre projet Vous pouvez ajouter un effet sonore ou un enregistrement de commentaire à votre projet et l’ancrer à une image vidéo spécifique afin qu’il démarre et s’arrête aux emplacements voulus. Vous pouvez utiliser un fichier audio de votre bibliothèque iTunes ou un effet sonore disponible dans les dossiers Effets sonores. Vous pouvez enregistrer un commentaire directement sur la vidéo dans iMovie. Pour ajouter un effet sonore : 1 Choisissez Fenêtre > « Musique et effets sonores » ou cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils iMovie. 2 Cliquez sur un dossier d’effets sonores pour afficher une liste d’effets ou utilisez le champ de recherche au bas de la sous-fenêtre pour trouver un fichier audio par son nom. Cliquez sur un fichier audio pour en obtenir un aperçu sonore. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier audio et faites-le glisser là où vous voulez commencer sa lecture dans votre projet iMovie. Le pointeur se transforme pour vous permettre de faire glisser les extrémités de l’icône du titre.44 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Une icône de clip audio verte apparaît sous les clips vidéo. 4 Pour repositionner le clip audio sur la vidéo, faites-le glisser là où vous voulez commencer sa lecture dans votre film. 5 Pour le raccourcir, faites glisser la fin du clip vers la gauche. Pour enregistrer un commentaire : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Voix commentaire pour ouvrir la fenêtre Voix hors-champ. 2 Sélectionnez le microphone que vous voulez utiliser dans le menu local Enregistrer depuis. 3 Faites glisser le curseur Volume d’entrée vers la droite ou vers la gauche :  Si vous avez une voix douce, faites glisser le curseur Volume d’entrée vers la droite pour augmenter le volume de l’enregistrement.  Si vous avez une voix forte, faites-le glisser vers la gauche pour le diminuer. 4 Faites glisser le curseur Réduction de bruit au maximum vers la droite pour éliminer les bruits ambiants autant que possible. Si vous voulez conserver un peu de bruit de fond dans votre enregistrement, faites glisser le curseur vers la gauche. 5 Sélectionnez « Amélioration de la voix » si vous voulez adoucir le son de la voix enregistrée. 6 Si vous souhaitez entendre l’audio tout en enregistrant votre voix hors-champ, cochez la case « Lire l’audio du projet lors de l’enregistrement » et branchez des écouteurs afin que l’audio ne passe pas par le micro. Pour couper l’audio alors que vous enregistrez votre voix hors-champ, décochez la case. 7 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à commencer, cliquez sur le point du clip où vous voulez commencer le commentaire. iMovie compte à rebours de trois à un. Icône d’effet sonore Indicateurs de niveau sonore Gauche et DroiteChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 45 8 Commencez à parler lorsque vous y êtes invité. Parlez fort et distinctement dans le microphone de l’ordinateur, en veillant à ce que les indicateurs de niveau Droite et Gauche restent dans le vert. La couleur jaune indique que vous parlez légèrement trop fort ; rouge indique que vous parlez beaucoup trop fort et que votre voix sera déformée (“hachée”) dans l’enregistrement. 9 Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace. Pour raccourcir un commentaire : m Faites glisser la fin de l’icône de commentaire vers la gauche. Il n’est pas possible d’allonger le commentaire au-delà de sa longueur d’origine. Pour déplacer un commentaire dans votre projet : m Faites glisser le clip audio jusqu’à l’image vidéo sur laquelle vous voulez que sa lecture commence. Pour supprimer un commentaire : m Sélectionnez son icône et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Ajout de photos avec des effets d’animation Pour ajouter un peu de variété à vos films, vous pouvez ajouter des photos de votre bibliothèque iPhoto. Les images fixes s’animent lorsque vous vous servez des effets Ken Burns de panoramique et de zoom puisque ceux-ci donnent l’impression que la caméra balaie l’image fixe tout en s’en approchant ou en s’en éloignant. Pour ajouter une photo : 1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Photos ou cliquez sur le bouton Photos de la barre d’outils iMovie. 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre Photos, recherchez celle que vous voulez. Vous pouvez utiliser le champ de recherche au bas de la sous-fenêtre pour trouver une photo par son nom. 3 Faites glisser la photo jusqu’à l’endroit où vous souhaitez la voir apparaître dans votre projet. Par défaut, iMovie définit une durée de 4 secondes pour les photos et applique l’effet Ken Burns. En fonction de la configuration du curseur des vignettes de votre projet, la photo peut se dérouler comme une pellicule. 4 Pour modifier la durée de la photo dans votre projet, cliquez sur le bouton Durée dans le coin inférieur de la photo (il apparaît lorsque vous placez le pointeur presque à la fin du clip) et tapez le nombre de secondes que vous voulez que votre photo reste à l’écran dans votre film. Si l’effet Ken Burns dans votre photo ne vous plaît pas, vous pouvez le modifier ou le supprimer.46 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour modifier l’effet Ken Burns : 1 Sélectionnez la photo dans votre projet, puis cliquez sur le bouton Rogner de la barre d’outils d’iMovie. 2 Dans le visualiseur, cliquez sur Ken Burns. Deux rectangles de rognage apparaissent dans le visualiseur. Le rectangle de rognage vert indique l’endroit où commence l’effet Ken Burns et le rectangle de rognage rouge celui où il se termine. Vous pouvez rapidement échanger les positions des rectangles de rognage rouge et vert en cliquant sur le petit bouton orné de deux flèches à l’inté- rieur du rectangle de rognage sélectionné . 3 Faites glisser pour redimensionner et repositionner le rectangle de rognage vert de façon à mettre en surbrillance le début souhaité pour l’effet Ken Burns. 4 Faites-le glisser pour redimensionner et repositionner le rectangle rouge jusqu’à ce qu’il affiche en surbrillance la position finale de l’effet Ken Burns. Les rectangles de rognage conservent toujours les proportions que vous avez choisies pour votre projet. 5 Pour afficher l’aperçu de votre travail, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture. Faites glisser et redimensionnez le rectangle de rognage rouge pour définir la position finale. Cliquez ici pour faire pivoter toute l’image. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rogner l’image sans effet d’animation. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rétablir l’image de sorte qu’elle retrouve sa taille complète et soit dénuée d’effets d’animation. Faites glisser et redimensionnez le rectangle de rognage vert pour définir la position de début. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour créer ou modifier l’effet Ken Burns. Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail. Cliquez pour intervertir la position des points de début et de fin.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 47 6 Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous avez obtenu le résultat souhaité. Une icône Rogner apparaît au début du clip. La même icône de rognage indique que le clip a simplement été rogné, qu’on l’a fait pivoté ou que l’effet Ken Burns lui a été ajouté. Cliquez dessus pour modifier ou supprimer le rognage à tout moment. Ouvrez l’éditeur de rognage et cliquez sur Adapter pour supprimer l’effet Ken Burns et restaurer la taille d’origine de votre vidéo à tout moment. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une image dans iMovie. Pour savoir comment procéder, recherchez les rubriques sur le pivotement des images dans l’Aide iMovie. Étape 5 : partager votre film Avec iMovie, vous pouvez partager votre film de différentes façons : dans un format adapté pour une visualisation sur le web, sur votre ordinateur, sur un iPod, sur iPhone, sur une Apple TV ou sur tout autre appareil. Vous pouvez même publier votre film terminé directement dans votre galerie MobileMe ou sur YouTube. Quelle que soit la manière que vous choisissez pour visualiser votre film, iMovie permet d’exporter facilement le fichier d’un film au format adéquat. Au cours de cette étape, vous allez finaliser votre film dans n’importe laquelle des quatre tailles, chacune étant adaptée à la plupart des utilisations. Icône Rogner Pivotement et rognage des images Les boutons de rotation qui apparaissent lorsque vous rognez des images ou lorsque vous appliquez l’effet Ken Burns permettent de modifier l’orientation de l’image par tranches de 90 degrés. Si votre photo ou votre vidéo a été prise avec la caméra retournée, vous pouvez la redresser. De la même manière, vous pouvez rogner des photos ou des vidéos qui n’ont pas les proportions choisies pour votre projet. Lorsque vous exportez votre film, il prend les dimensions de la vidéo ou de la photo la plus large qu’il contient, ce qui peut entraî- ner l’apparition de bandes noires à gauche et à droite de l’image (« pillar box ») ou en haut et en bas de l’image (« letterbox »). Le rognage de photos ou de vidéos pour s’adapter aux mêmes dimensions évite ce phénomène.48 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Publication en vue d’un affichage sur votre iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV Si vous voulez regarder votre film sur votre iPod, votre iPhone ou votre Apple TV, vous devez d’abord transférer votre film terminé dans iTunes. Pour créer un film prêt à être visualisé sur iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV : 1 Choisissez Partager > iTunes. 2 Sélectionnez la ou les tailles de film souhaitées. Les films de taille moyenne sont préférables pour la lecture sur un iPod ; les films de grande taille sont particulièrement indiqués si vous avez l’intention de les regarder sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV). Pour votre iPhone, il est recommandé de créer des films de petite taille et adaptés aux appareils mobiles. Il se peut que certaines options relatives au choix de la taille ne soient pas disponibles. Cela est dû au fait que la taille des données originales du projet n’est pas suffisante pour un rendu dans la ou les tailles en question. Si vos données d’origine ne sont pas en haute définition, iMovie ne produira pas le film en grande taille. Le rendu du projet peut prendre un certain temps, notamment si vous avez choisi de rendre plusieurs tailles à la fois. Une fois rendus, vos films sont affichés dans votre bibliothèque de films iTunes d’où vous pouvez les télécharger sur votre iPod ou votre iPhone, ou les regarder sur votre téléviseur haute définition via Apple TV. Envoi de votre film terminé vers iDVD, iWeb ou d’autres applications Une fois que le montage de votre film est terminé dans iMovie, vous pouvez le publier dans le navigateur multimédia d’où il pourra être utilisé avec d’autres applications Apple. Pour créer un film prêt à être utilisé avec iWeb, iDVD, GarageBand et d’autres applications : 1 Choisissez Partager > Navigateur multimédia. 2 Sélectionnez la ou les tailles souhaitées pour votre film en fonction de l’utilisation que vous comptez en faire. Il se peut que certaines options relatives au choix de la taille ne soient pas disponibles. Cela est dû au fait que la taille des données originales du projet n’est pas suffisante pour un rendu dans la ou les tailles en question. Si vos données d’origine ne sont pas en haute définition, iMovie ne produira pas le film en grande taille. Le rendu du projet peut prendre un certain temps, notamment si vous avez choisi de rendre plusieurs tailles à la fois. Une fois rendus, vos films apparaîtront dans le Navigateur multimédia et vous pourrez les utiliser avec iDVD, iWeb et GarageBand. Lorsque votre projet est finalisé pour le partage, des icônes apparaissent à côté de son nom dans la Bibliothèque de projets pour indiquer les tailles finalisées.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 49 Si vous voulez encore modifier votre projet, iMovie vous avertit qu’il sera différent des versions partagées dans iTunes et dans le Navigateur multimédia. Les icônes de partage disparaissent tant que vous n’avez pas à nouveau finalisé le projet. Si vous finalisez à nouveau le projet, les versions finalisées précédentes sont supprimées. Si vous souhaitez conserver des copies de vos films rendus de façon à pouvoir y accé- der sans utiliser le Navigateur multimédia ni iTunes, reportez-vous aux rubriques de l’Aide d’iMovie qui traitent du partage et de l’exportation. Publication directe sur le web Si vous possédez un compte MobileMe, vous pouvez publier votre film dès qu’il est terminé. Pour publier votre film directement dans votre galerie MobileMe : 1 Sélectionnez votre projet dans la bibliothèque des projets, puis choisissez Partager > Galerie MobileMe 2 Tapez un nom pour votre film dans le champ Titre, puis, si vous le souhaitez, saisissez dans le champ Description une brève description que les spectateurs pourront lire. 3 Sélectionnez une taille pour la publication de façon à optimiser l’affichage pour vos amis ou votre famille qui ont des connexions Internet plus ou moins rapides. 4 Si vous voulez que les gens puissent télécharger des copies de votre film, cochez la case « Autoriser le téléchargement de la séquence ». 5 Si vous voulez limiter l’accès de votre film aux personnes autorisées, cochez la case « Masquer le projet sur la page d’accueil de ma galerie ». 6 Cliquez sur Publier. iMovie télécharge automatiquement votre film vers votre galerie MobileMe. Une fois que le film a été téléchargé dans votre galerie MobileMe, la barre de titre du projet dans iMovie affiche « Publié sur MobileMe ». Des boutons permettant d'accéder à la page web du film sont également affichés et des notifications sont envoyées à vos amis. Indique que le projet est rendu dans n’importe laquelle des quatre tailles Indique que le projet est publié sur le web Indique que le projet a été modifié depuis sa dernière publication sur le web50 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 7 Pour visiter la page web de votre film, cliquez sur Visiter. 8 Pour informer vos amis que vous avez publié ce nouveau film, cliquez sur « Recommander à un ami ». Si vous n’avez pas de compte MobileMe, vous pouvez vous abonner à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/mobileme. Vous pouvez aussi publier votre film sur YouTube. Pour publier votre projet sur YouTube : 1 Sélectionnez votre projet dans la bibliothèque des projets, puis choisissez Partager > YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez votre compte dans le menu local Compte. Si vous n’avez pas de compte YouTube, vous pouvez en ouvrir un en cliquant sur Ajouter et en créant un compte sur le site web YouTube. 3 Tapez un nom pour votre film dans le champ Titre, puis saisissez une brève description que les spectateurs liront dans le champ Description. 4 Tapez des mots-clés dans le champ Étiquettes de façon que les utilisateurs trouvent facilement votre film s’ils le cherchent sur le site YouTube. 5 Sélectionnez une taille de publication. La taille Moyenne est recommandée. 6 Si vous ne voulez pas que votre film soit publiquement disponible, sélectionnez « Rendre ce film privé ». 7 Cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Publier pour accepter les conditions du service offert par YouTube. iMovie télécharge automatiquement votre film sur le site web de YouTube. Lorsque le film est téléchargé sur le site web YouTube, la barre de titre du projet dans iMovie affiche « Publié sur YouTube ». Elle affiche également les boutons qui vous amè- nent à la page web du film et envoie des notifications à vos amis. 8 Pour visiter la page web de votre film, cliquez sur Visiter. 9 Pour informer vos amis que vous avez publié ce nouveau film, cliquez sur « Recommander à un ami ». Lorsque votre projet est publié, une icône s’affiche à côté de son nom dans la Bibliothèque de projets pour indiquer sa publication. Si vous voulez modifier votre projet par la suite, iMovie vous avertit qu’il sera différent de la version publiée ; un signal d’alerte apparaît au-dessus de l’icône de publication tant que vous n’avez pas à nouveau publié le film.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 51 Poursuivez votre exploration de iMovie Félicitations, vous avez terminé votre initiation ! Maintenant que vous vous êtes familiarisé avec les principaux outils et fonctionnalités de iMovie, vous pouvez continuer à importer et à profiter de vos vidéos quand vous le souhaitez, et à créer et à partager d’autres films. Dans l’Aide iMovie, vous trouverez d’autres conseils pour travailler avec des vidéos et du son, ainsi que bien d’autres choses encore, entre autres :  Régler les couleurs et la luminosité, ainsi que d’autres paramètres de qualité des images.  Repérer votre vidéo avec des mots-clés pour retrouver facilement des moments particuliers.  Personnaliser votre espace de travail en fonction de votre style de travail.  Partager votre film avec une multitude de formats et d’appareils iMovie vous permet de créer des films dans de nombreux formats différents pour que vous puissiez le visionner sur pratiquement tout type de support numérique, et notamment :  l’envoyer par courrier électronique ;  le graver sur un DVD à l’aide d’iDVD ;  l’enregistrer sous forme de séquence QuickTime sous divers formats. Pour en savoir plus sur le partage de films, consultez les rubriques traitant du partage des films dans l’Aide iMovie. iMovie offre des outils sophistiqués afin de travailler plus rapidement et plus facilement avec votre vidéo, une fois que vous connaissez les bases. Grâce à ces outils, vous pouvez effectuer la plupart des tâches mentionnées dans ce guide d’initiation, y compris l’amélioration et le repérage de votre vidéo à l’aide de mots-clés. Pour en savoir plus sur les outils sophistiqués, consultez les rubriques traitant de leur utilisation dans l’Aide iMovie.52 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Ressources supplémentaires Vous pouvez consulter diverses sources pour obtenir de l’aide supplémentaire sur l’utilisation de iMovie :  Aide à l’écran : iMovie est fourni avec un système d’aide intégré. Lorsque l’application iMovie est ouverte, choisissez Aide > Aide iMovie. Lorsque l’Aide s’ouvre, tapez un mot ou une expression dans le champ de recherche situé en haut de la page ou cliquez sur l’une des zones de rubriques pour trouver des informations détaillées sur un sujet en particulier.  Didacticiels multimédias (www.apple.com/fr/ilife/tutorials/imovie/) : ces courtes initiations à la vidéo montrent comment effectuer des tâches courantes dans iMovie. Pour y accéder, choisissez Aide, puis cliquez sur How-To Videos. (Ces initiations vidéo sont disponibles uniquement dans certaines langues.)  Site web d’assistance iMovie (www.apple.com/fr/support/imovie) : consultez ce site pour accéder à des forums de discussion, ainsi qu’à des informations de dépannage et à des mises à jour de logiciels.www.apple.com/ilife/imovie © 2008 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, Apple TV, FireWire, GarageBand, iDVD, iLife, iMac, iMovie, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iSight, iTunes et QuickTime sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. MobileMe est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. Les autres noms de produit et d’entreprise mentionnés dans le présent document peuvent être des marques appartenant à leur détenteurs respectifs. F019-1282 iPod shuffle Guide des fonctions2 1 Table des matières Chapitre 1 3 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 4 Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod shuffle 4 Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle 5 Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle 7 Recharge de la batterie 8 Voyants d’état Chapitre 2 11 Chargement et lecture de musique 11 À propos d’iTunes 12 Importation de musique dans votre bibliothèque iTunes 15 Organisation de votre musique 16 Chargement de musique sur l’iPod shuffle 19 Lecture de musique Chapitre 3 23 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 23 Utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe Chapitre 4 24 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle 24 Écouteurs Apple Earphones 25 Le socle pour iPod shuffle 25 L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter 25 Accessoires disponibles Chapitre 5 26 Astuces et dépannage 30 Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle Chapitre 6 31 Sécurité et manipulation 31 Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité 33 Informations importantes sur la manipulation Chapitre 7 34 En savoir plus, service et assistance1 3 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Apple vous félicite pour l’acquisition de votre iPod shuffle. Lisez ce chapitre pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités de l’iPod shuffle, sur la manière d’utiliser ses commandes et plus encore. Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle, vous devez déposer des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur puis charger ces fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle. Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle pour :  charger des chansons et les écouter lorsque vous êtes en déplacement ;  écouter des podcasts, des sortes d’émissions de radio téléchargeables sur Internet ;  écouter des livres audio achetés sur l’iTunes Store ou audible.com ;  stocker ou sauvegarder des fichiers et autres données en utilisant l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe.4 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod shuffle Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle Les commandes simples de l’iPod shuffle vous permettent de lire des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts aisément. Port de sortie casque Bouton Précédent/ Retour rapide Bouton Lecture/Pause Bouton Suivant/ Avance rapide Bouton Baisser le volume (-) Bouton d'alimentation Voyant d'état supérieur Bouton Augmenter le volume (+) Bouton de mode aléatoire Voyant d'état inférieur OFF Pour : procédez ainsi : Activer ou désactiver l’iPod shuffle Faites glisser le bouton d’alimentation (la couleur verte indique que l’iPod shuffle est activé). Lancer la lecture d’un morceau (ou autre) Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Mettre un morceau en pause Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Régler le volume Appuyez sur les boutons Augmenter le volume (?) ou Baisser le volume (D). Définir l’ordre de lecture des morceaux Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire (vers ¡ pour activer la lecture aléatoire, vers / pour la désactiver et lire dans l’ordre). Passer à la piste suivante Appuyez sur Suivant/Avance rapide (‘). Revenir au début d’une piste Appuyez sur Précédent/Retour rapide (]). Lancer la lecture de la piste précédente Appuyez deux fois sur Précédent/Retour rapide (]). Aller à la première piste Appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement. Effectuer une avance ou un retour rapide Maintenez enfoncé Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) ou Précédent/ Retour rapide (]).Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 5 Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur pour y charger des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio ainsi que pour recharger sa batterie. Déconnectez l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous avez terminé. Connexion de l’iPod shuffle Pour connecter l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur : m Branchez le socle de l’iPod shuffle, inclus, sur un port USB de votre ordinateur puis placez l’iPod shuffle sur le socle. Remarque : branchez le socle sur un port USB à forte alimentation pour recharger la batterie de l’iPod shuffle. Il est recommandé d’utiliser un port USB 2.0. N’utilisez pas le port USB du clavier. La première fois que vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur l’ordinateur, l’Assistant réglages de l’iPod vous aide à configurer l’iPod shuffle et à le synchroniser avec votre bibliothèque iTunes. Désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle (pour ne pas les activer par mégarde) Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant environ trois secondes (jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état soit de couleur orange et clignote trois fois). Répétez l’opération pour activer à nouveau les boutons (le voyant d’état passe alors au vert et clignote trois fois). réinitialiser l’iPod shuffle (si votre iPod shuffle ne répond plus) Retirez l’iPod shuffle du socle. Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez 5 secondes puis rallumez-le. rechercher le numéro de série de l’iPod shuffle Observez l’encoche située sous la pince de l’ iPod shuffleou bien sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à l’ordinateur) et cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. Pour : procédez ainsi :6 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Important : une fois l’iPod shuffle synchronisé avec la bibliothèque iTunes d’un ordinateur, un message s’affichera chaque fois que vous brancherez l’iPod shuffle sur un autre ordinateur et vous demandera si vous souhaitez le synchroniser avec la bibliothèque de cet ordinateur. Si vous voulez conserver la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle, cliquez sur Annuler. Vous pouvez également cliquez sur Transférer les achats, ce qui vous permettra de conserver le contenu de l’iPod shuffle et de copier les morceaux achetés qui y sont présents sur la bibliothèque iTunes du nouvel ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’Aide iTunes. Déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle Il est important de ne pas débrancher l’iPod shuffle de votre ordinateur lorsque des fichiers audio sont en cours de chargement ou lorsque l’iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant que disque externe. Pour savoir si vous pouvez débrancher l’iPod shuffle, observez la partie supérieure de la fenêtre d’iTunes ou le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle. Important : si le message « Ne pas déconnecter » s’affiche dans iTunes ou si le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle est de couleur orange et clignote, vous devez éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher. Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager les fichiers de l’iPod shuffle. Si vous activez le mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme disque (voir la page 23), vous devrez toujours éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher. Pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle : m Dans iTunes, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C) situé à côté de l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. Si vous utilisez un Mac : pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez également faire glisser l’icône iPod shuffle du bureau vers la Corbeille. Si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows, vous pouvez aussi éjecter l’iPod shuffle en cliquant sur l’icône « Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité » située dans la zone de notification du PC et en sélectionnant votre iPod shuffle. Pour débrancher l’iPod shuffle : m Retirez l’iPod shuffle du socle.Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 7 Recharge de la batterie L’iPod shuffle dispose d’une batterie interne et rechargeable. Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, rechargez entièrement la batterie lors de la première utilisation de l’iPod shuffle. Il faut environ deux heures pour recharger une batterie vide jusqu’à 80 % et quatre heures pour la recharger complètement. Si l’iPod shuffle n’a pas été utilisé pendant un moment, il est possible qu’une recharge de sa batterie soit nécessaire. Pour recharger la batterie via votre ordinateur : m Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation à l’aide du socle de l’iPod shuffle, inclus. Votre ordinateur doit être allumé et non pas en mode veille (certains modèles de Macintosh permettent cependant de recharger l’iPod shuffle même en mode veille). Lorsque la batterie est en cours de recharge, le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle est de couleur orange. Une fois la batterie complètement rechargée, le voyant passe au vert. Remarque : si l’iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant que disque dur (voir la page 23) ou si des morceaux ou des réglages sont en cours de chargement sur l’iPod shuffle depuis iTunes, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote, ce qui vous indique qu’il est nécessaire d’éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher. Si le voyant d’état ne s’allume pas, il est possible que l’iPod shuffle ne soit pas connecté à un port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation. Essayez de le connecter à un autre port USB de votre ordinateur. Remarque : vous pouvez charger de la musique lorsque la batterie est en cours de recharge. Si vous souhaitez recharger l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous n’êtes pas devant votre ordinateur, vous pouvez brancher l’iPod shuffle sur un adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter, disponible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/.8 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Pour recharger la batterie via un adaptateur iPod USB Power Adapter : 1 Connectez l’adaptateur CA à une prise électrique (si nécessaire). 2 Branchez le connecteur USB du socle de l’iPod shuffle sur l’adaptateur secteur. 3 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à une prise de courant en état de fonctionnement. 4 Placez l’iPod shuffle sur le socle. Vous pouvez déconnecter et utiliser l’iPod shuffle avant qu’il ne soit complètement rechargé. Remarque : les batteries rechargeables ont un nombre limité de cycles de recharge. La durée de vie de la batterie et le nombre de cycles de recharge varient en fonction de l’utilisation et des réglages du matériel. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur le site www.apple.com/fr/batteries. Vérification de l’état de la batterie Lorsque vous allumez l’iPod shuffle ou lorsque vous le débranchez de l’ordinateur ou de l’adaptateur secteur, le voyant d’état vous indique quelle est la charge approximative de la batterie. Consultez le tableau de la section suivante. Si l’iPod shuffle est déjà allumé, il est possible de vérifier l’état de la batterie sans interrompre la lecture en cours : pour ce faire, éteignez puis rallumez très rapidement l’iPod shuffle. Voyants d’état L’iPod shuffle est doté de deux voyants d’état : un en haut et un autre en bas. Ils vous permettent de savoir quand un bouton est activé, de connaître l’état de la batterie, de savoir si le mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque est activé ou encore de détecter un éventuel problème. AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter, lisez les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment vous en servir. Adaptateur CA Adaptateur secteur USB iPod Câble du socle de l'iPod shuffleChapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 9 À l’allumage ou lors du débranchement de l’iPod vert Charge suffisante (entre 30 et 100 %) orange Charge faible (entre 10 et 30 %) rouge Charge très faible (moins de 10 %) inactif Aucune charge vert et deux fois orange en alternance (10 secondes) ERREUR : l’iPod shuffle doit être restauré Lorsque l’iPod est branché orange (en permanence) En cours de recharge vert (en permanence) Entièrement rechargé orange et clignotant (en permanence) Ne le débranchez pas (synchronisation avec iTunes en cours ou mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme disque activé) À l’appui sur les boutons vert Lecture (’) vert (1 minute) Pause (’) Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert, puis trois fois orange Boutons désactivés orange, puis trois fois vert Boutons activés vert Augmentation (?) ou baisse (D) du volume trois fois orange Limite de volume fixée par l’utilisateur atteinte. Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert Augmentation (?) ou baisse (D) du volume inactif Volume maximum ou coupé. trois fois orange Limite de volume fixée par l’utilisateur atteinte vert Piste précédente (]) Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert Retour rapide (]) vert Piste suivante (]) Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert Avance rapide (‘) N’importe quel bouton orange Pas d’action en cours (les boutons sont désactivés) vert et orange en alternance (2 secondes) ERREUR : pas de musique chargée sur l’appareil10 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Lorsque l’iPod shuffle est en cours de lecture rouge et clignotant (en permanence) Batterie presque déchargée2 11 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Grâce à l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez emporter avec vous toute votre musique, où que vous alliez. Lisez ce chapitre pour apprendre à charger de la musique et à l’écouter sur votre iPod shuffle. Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle en important tout d’abord des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts (sortes d’émissions radio) sur votre ordinateur puis en les chargeant sur l’iPod shuffle. Lisez ce qui suit pour en savoir plus sur les étapes de ce processus, notamment sur :  le transfert de musique à partir de votre collection de CD, votre disque dur ou l’iTunes Store (qui fait partie d’iTunes et n’est disponible que dans certains pays) vers l’application iTunes de votre ordinateur ;  l’organisation de votre musique et des autres fichiers audio en liste de lectures ;  le chargement de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts sur l’iPod shuffle ;  l’écoute de musique ou de tout autre fichier audio lorsque vous êtes en déplacement. À propos d’iTunes iTunes est l’application que vous devez utiliser pour synchroniser de la musique, des livres audio et des podcasts avec l’iPod shuffle. Elle s’ouvre automatiquement dès que vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. Ce guide vous explique comment utiliser iTunes pour importer des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur, créer des compilations personnelles de vos morceaux préférés (appelées listes de lecture), les charger sur l’iPod shuffle et définir les réglages de l’iPod shuffle. iTunes possède également bien d’autres fonctionnalités. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez iTunes puis choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes.12 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Importation de musique dans votre bibliothèque iTunes Pour écouter de la musique sur l’iPod shuffle, il vous faut tout d’abord la transférer depuis la bibliothèque iTunes de votre ordinateur. Il existe trois façons d’importer de la musique dans la bibliothèque iTunes :  En achetant de la musique et des livres audio ou en téléchargeant des podcasts en ligne à partir de l’iTunes Store.  En y important de la musique à partir de CD audio.  En y ajoutant de la musique et des données audio déjà stockées sur votre ordinateur. Achat de musique et téléchargement de podcasts via l’iTunes Store Si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet, vous pouvez facilement acheter et télé- charger des morceaux, des albums et des livres audio en ligne via l’iTunes Store. Vous pouvez également vous abonner à des podcasts, des sortes d’émissions de radio, et les télécharger. Pour acheter de la musique en ligne via l’iTunes Store, vous devez configurer un compte Apple dans iTunes, rechercher les morceaux voulus, puis les acheter. Si vous disposez déjà d’un compte Apple ou d’un compte America Online (AOL, disponible uniquement dans certains pays), vous pouvez vous en servir pour vous inscrire à l’iTunes Store et acheter des morceaux. Pour entrer dans l’iTunes Store : m Ouvrez iTunes, puis :  Si vous disposez déjà d’un compte iTunes, choisissez Store > Ouvrir une session.  Si vous n’avez pas encore de compte iTunes, choisissez Store > Créer un compte. Suivez alors les instructions à l’écran pour configurer un compte Apple ou bien saisissez les données de votre compte Apple ou AOL existant.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 13 Pour rechercher des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts : Vous pouvez parcourir l’iTunes Store ou y faire une recherche pour trouver un album, un morceau ou un artiste. Ouvrez iTunes puis cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sousfenêtre Source.  Pour parcourir l’iTunes Store, choisissez un genre musical dans le menu local Genre, cliquez sur l’un des morceaux ou l’une des publications ou bien cliquez sur le bouton Explorer dans la fenêtre iTunes Store.  Pour naviguer à la recherche de podcasts, cliquez sur le lien Podcasts situé dans la fenêtre principale de l’iTunes Store.  Pour faire une recherche dans l’iTunes Store, tapez le nom d’un album, d’un morceau, d’un artiste ou d’un compositeur dans le champ Rechercher iTunes Store.  Pour limiter votre recherche, tapez du texte dans la zone Rechercher iTunes Store, appuyez sur la touche Retour ou Entrée de votre clavier, puis cliquez sur les éléments de la barre de recherche. Par exemple, pour limiter la recherche à des titres de morceaux et à des albums, cliquez sur MUSIQUE.  Pour rechercher une combinaison d’éléments, cliquez sur Recherche avancée dans la fenêtre de l’iTunes Store.  Pour revenir à la page principale de l’iTunes Store, cliquez sur le bouton Accueil dans l’angle supérieur gauche de la fenêtre principale de l’iTunes Store. Pour acheter un morceau, un album ou un livre audio : 1 Cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sous-fenêtre Source puis recherchez l’élément que vous souhaitez acheter. Vous pouvez double-cliquer sur un morceau ou un autre élément pour en écouter un extrait et vous assurer que c’est bien celui que vous voulez. 2 Cliquez sur Acheter le morceau, Acheter l’album ou Acheter le livre. L’élément est alors téléchargé sur votre ordinateur et le prix est débité de la carte de crédit indiquée sur votre compte Apple ou AOL. Pour télécharger un podcast ou vous y abonner : 1 Cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Podcasts dans la partie gauche de la page principale de l’iTunes Store. 3 Recherchez le podcast que vous souhaitez télécharger.  Pour télécharger un seul épisode de podcast, cliquez sur le bouton Obtenir l’épisode situé à côté de l’épisode.  Pour vous abonner à un podcast, cliquez sur le bouton S’abonner situé à côté de l’image du podcast. iTunes télécharge l’épisode le plus récent. Les nouveaux épisodes disponibles seront automatiquement téléchargés sur iTunes lorsque vous vous connecterez à Internet.14 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Importation de musique dans iTunes à partir de CD audio Suivez ces instructions pour importer de la musique de vos CD dans iTunes. Pour importer de la musique dans iTunes à partir d’un CD audio : 1 Insérez un CD dans votre ordinateur puis ouvrez iTunes. Si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet, iTunes obtient le nom des morceaux sur Internet (s’ils sont disponibles) et les affiche dans la fenêtre. Si vous ne disposez pas de connexion à Internet, vous pouvez dans un premier temps importer vos CD puis, ultérieurement, lorsque l’ordinateur est connecté à Internet, choisir Avancé > Obtenir le nom des pistes du CD. iTunes obtiendra alors le nom des pistes des CD importés. Si le nom des pistes du CD n’est pas disponible en ligne, vous pouvez les saisir manuellement. Consultez « Saisie du nom des morceaux et d’autres informations » à la page 14. Une fois les données des morceaux saisies, vous pouvez parcourir les morceaux dans iTunes par titre, artiste, album ou autre critère. 2 Cliquez pour supprimer la coche située en regard des morceaux que vous ne souhaitez pas importer depuis le CD. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer un CD. La zone d’affichage située en haut de la fenêtre iTunes indique le temps nécessaire à l’importation des différents morceaux. Par défaut, iTunes lit les morceaux à mesure qu’ils sont importés. Si vous importez un grand nombre de morceaux, il est possible que vous souhaitiez arrêter la lecture des morceaux afin d’améliorer les performances. 4 Pour éjecter le CD, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C). 5 Répétez ces opérations pour tout autre CD contenant des morceaux que vous souhaitez importer. Saisie du nom des morceaux et d’autres informations Il est possible de saisir manuellement les titres et d’autres informations (y compris des commentaires) pour les morceaux et les autres éléments de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Pour saisir manuellement le titre des morceaux et d’autres informations du CD : 1 Sélectionnez la première piste du CD puis sélectionnez Fichier > Obtenir des informations. 2 Cliquez sur Infos. 3 Saisissez les informations concernant le morceau. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant pour saisir les informations concernant la piste suivante.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 15 Ajout de morceaux stockés sur votre ordinateur à la bibliothèque iTunes Si votre ordinateur contient déjà des fichiers audio numériques, tels que les fichiers MP3, vous pouvez facilement les ajouter à votre bibliothèque iTunes. Pour ajouter des morceaux stockés sur votre ordinateur à la bibliothèque iTunes : m Faites glisser le dossier ou l’unité contenant les fichiers audio vers l’en-tête BIBLIOTHÈQUE de la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (ou choisissez Fichier > Ajouter à la bibliothèque, puis sélectionnez le dossier ou l’unité). Si iTunes prend en charge le format de fichier des morceaux, ceux-ci sont automatiquement ajoutés à la bibliothèque iTunes. Vous pouvez également faire glisser individuellement des fichiers audio dans iTunes. Remarque : avec l’application iTunes pour Windows, vous avez la possibilité de convertir un fichier audio numérique sans protection créé avec Windows Media Player en format de fichier compatible iTunes (AAC ou MP3, par exemple). Cela peut être utile si vous disposez des fichiers de musique encodés au format WMA. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez iTunes puis choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Organisation de votre musique Grâce à iTunes, vous pouvez organiser à votre guise des morceaux et d’autres éléments dans des listes appelées listes de lecture. Vous pouvez par exemple créer des listes de lecture qui accompagnent votre séance d’exercice physique ou qui correspondent à une humeur particulière. Vous pouvez également créer des listes de lecture intelligentes qui se mettront automatiquement à jour selon les règles que vous aurez choisies. Lorsque vous ajoutez à iTunes des morceaux qui correspondent à ces règles, ils seront automatiquement ajoutés à la liste de lecture intelligente. Vous pouvez créer autant de listes de lecture que vous le souhaitez avec n’importe lequel des morceaux de la bibliothèque iTunes. Le fait d’ajouter un morceau à une liste de lecture ou de l’en supprimer ne le supprime pas de la bibliothèque iTunes. Pour créer une liste de lecture dans iTunes : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter (?) ou bien choisissez Fichier > Nouvelle liste de lecture. 2 Tapez le nom de la liste de lecture. 3 Cliquez sur Musique dans la liste BIBLIOTHÈQUE, puis faites glisser un morceau ou un autre élément vers la liste de lecture. Pour sélectionner plusieurs morceaux, lorsque vous cliquez sur chaque morceau, maintenez la touche Maj ou Commande (x) enfoncée s’il s’agit d’un Mac, ou la touche Maj ou Contrôle s’il s’agit d’un PC sous Windows. Pour créer une liste de lecture intelligente : m Sélectionnez Fichier > « Nouvelle liste de lecture intelligente » puis définissez les règles de votre liste de lecture.16 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Chargement de musique sur l’iPod shuffle Une fois votre musique importée et organisée dans iTunes, vous pouvez facilement la charger sur l’iPod shuffle. Il est possible de définir le mode de chargement de la musique d’iTunes vers l’iPod shuffle en branchant ce dernier sur l’ordinateur, en sélectionnant iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source puis en configurant les options situées dans la partie inférieure de la sous-fenêtre Contenu. Des options supplémentaires concernant le chargement de musique et l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle s’affichent dans la sous-fenêtre Réglages. Remplissage automatique de l’iPod shuffle iTunes vous permet de charger de manière automatique une sélection de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle en un seul clic. Vous pouvez décider d’obtenir les morceaux de la totalité de la bibliothèque ou bien d’une seule liste de lecture, mais aussi définir d’autres options pour la fonction de remplissage automatique. Pour charger automatiquement de la musique sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la liste des dispositifs de la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Contenu. 4 Choisissez la liste de lecture que vous souhaitez charger automatiquement sur l’iPod dans le menu local. Pour charger automatiquement les morceaux de la totalité de votre bibliothèque, sélectionnez Musique. 5 Sélectionnez une des options suivantes, au choix : Choisir les éléments aléatoirement : iTunes modifie l’ordre des morceaux au cours de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, iTunes télécharge les morceaux dans l’ordre où ils apparaissent dans la liste de lecture sélectionnée ou dans la bibliothèque. Favoriser les éléments les mieux cotés: iTunes charge automatiquement les morceaux que vous écoutez le plus souvent.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 17 Remplacer tous les éléments lors du remplissage automatique : iTunes remplace les morceaux présents sur l’iPod shuffle par les nouveaux morceaux sélectionnés. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, les morceaux déjà chargés sur l’iPod shuffle y demeurent et iTunes sélectionne de nouveaux morceaux pour remplir l’espace qui y est disponible. 6 Cliquez sur Remplissage auto. Lorsque le chargement de musique d’iTunes sur l’iPod shuffle est en cours, la fenêtre d’état d’iTunes affiche sa progression. Une fois le « remplissage automatique » terminé, le message « L’iPod est à jour » apparaît dans iTunes. Comment limiter la fonction de remplissage automatique aux éléments cochés dans la bibliothèque iTunes Il est possible de configurer iTunes de manière à ce que la fonction de remplissage automatique charge uniquement les éléments qui, dans la bibliothèque iTunes, sont cochés. Les éléments désélectionnés seront ignorés. Pour limiter la fonction de remplissage automatique aux éléments cochés : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Lorsque l’iPod shuffle apparaît dans la fenêtre d’iTunes, sélectionnez-le. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Sélectionnez l’option « Ne mettre à jour que les morceaux cochés ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Chargement manuel de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts Il est possible de charger manuellement des morceaux et des listes de lecture sur l’iPod shuffle. Si vous souhaitez charger des livres audio et des podcasts sur l’iPod shuffle, vous devrez obligatoirement le faire manuellement. Pour charger un morceau ou tout autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez une liste de lecture ou la bibliothèque dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Faites glisser le morceau (ou l’élément) vers l’iPod shuffle, situé dans la sous-fenêtre Source. Vous pouvez également faire glisser des listes de lecture entières afin de les charger sur l’iPod shuffle.18 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Organisation des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle Une fois que les morceaux sont chargés sur l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez les organiser et les placer dans l’ordre que vous le souhaitez, tout comme vous le faites avec les listes de lecture dans iTunes. Pour organiser les morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Contenu. 4 Cliquez sur l’en-tête vide situé au-dessus de la première colonne pour classer les morceaux par numéro. 5 Faites glisser les morceaux afin de les placer dans l’ordre souhaité. Comment faire tenir davantage de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle Si vous avez importé des morceaux dans iTunes dans un format au débit plus élevé, tel que le format AIFF, vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’iTunes convertisse automatiquement les morceaux en fichiers AAC de 128 kbps lors de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Cela n’influe pas sur la qualité ni sur la taille des morceaux dans iTunes. Remarque : les morceaux aux formats non pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, comme Apple Lossless, doivent obligatoirement être convertis pour pouvoir être chargés sur l’iPod shuffle. Pour en savoir plus sur les formats pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Si vous ne parvenez pas à charger un morceau ou un autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle : » à la page 28. Pour convertir des morceaux au débit plus élevé en fichiers AAC : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Sélectionnez « Convertir en AAC 128 kbps les morceaux dont le débit est supérieur ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 19 Suppression de morceaux et d’autres éléments de l’iPod shuffle Vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’iTunes remplace automatiquement les éléments présents sur l’iPod shuffle par ceux qui y sont chargés via la fonction de remplissage automatique. Vous pouvez également supprimer les éléments de l’iPod shuffle manuellement. Pour remplacer automatiquement les éléments de l’iPod shuffle par ceux importés lors du processus de remplissage automatique : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Sélectionnez l’onglet Contenu. 4 Vérifiez que l’option « Remplacer tous les éléments lors du remplissage automatique » est sélectionnée. Pour supprimer un morceau ou un autre élément de l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Sélectionnez un morceau ou autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle puis appuyez sur la touche Supprimer ou Arrière de votre clavier. La suppression manuelle d’un morceau ou d’un autre élément de l’iPod shuffle ne supprime pas cet élément de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Lecture de musique Après avoir chargé de la musique et d’autres données audio sur votre iPod shuffle, vous pouvez les écouter. Pour écouter les morceaux et les autres éléments présents sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Branchez les écouteurs sur l’iPod shuffle et placez-les dans vos oreilles. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Appuyez sur Augmenter le volume (?) ou Baisser le volume (D) pour régler le volume sonore. Évitez d’augmenter le volume à outrance. Consultez la section « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21. Pour obtenir un résumé des commandes de l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 4. Remarque : si vous écoutez un livre audio, placez le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position de répétition (/) afin que les chapitres soient lus dans l’ordre. AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser les écouteurs, lisez les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment éviter d’endommager votre audition.20 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Comment configurer l’iPod shuffle de manière à ce qu’il lise les morceaux dans l’ordre ou dans un ordre aléatoire Il est possible de régler l’iPod shuffle pour qu’il lise les morceaux de manière aléatoire ou dans l’ordre. Pour que l’iPod shuffle lise les morceaux dans un ordre aléatoire : m Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position aléatoire (¡). Pour changer l’ordre des morceaux de façon à les lire dans un autre ordre aléatoire, appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement. Pour que l’iPod shuffle lise les morceaux dans l’ordre : m Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position de répétition (/). Pour revenir au premier morceau, appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement. Comment régler les morceaux pour qu’ils soient lus au même volume Le niveau sonore des morceaux et des autres données audio peut varier en fonction de leur mode d’enregistrement ou d’encodage. Avec iTunes, il est possible de régler le volume des morceaux de manière automatique ; de cette manière, ils sont lus au même niveau sonore. Vous pouvez configurer l’iPod shuffle de sorte qu’il utilise les réglages de volume d’iTunes. Pour régler iTunes de sorte qu’il lise les morceaux au même niveau sonore : 1 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez iTunes > Préférences si vous utilisez un Mac ou sélectionnez Édition > Préférences si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows. 2 Cliquez sur Lecture puis choisissez Égaliseur de volume. Pour régler l’iPod shuffle de manière à ce qu’il utilise les réglages de volume d’iTunes : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Sélectionnez « Activer l’Égaliseur de volume ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Important : si vous n’avez pas activé l’option Égaliseur de volume dans iTunes, la configurer sur l’iPod shuffle n’a aucun effet.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 21 Définition d’une limite de volume Il est possible d’établir une limite de volume sur l’iPod shuffle, mais aussi de définir un mot de passe dans iTunes afin d’empêcher toute autre personne de modifier ce réglage. Si vous avez défini une limite de volume sur l’iPod shuffle, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote trois fois si vous essayez de monter le son au-delà de la limite établie. Pour définir la limite du volume pour l’iPod Shuffle : 1 Réglez le son sur l’iPod shuffle sur le niveau que vous souhaitez établir comme volume maximum. 2 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 5 Sélectionnez « Limiter le volume maximum ». 6 Faites alors glisser le curseur pour définir le niveau sonore maximum. Il faut savoir que l’emplacement initial du curseur représente le volume qui était établi sur l’iPod shuffle au moment de cocher la case « Limiter le volume maximum ». 7 Pour qu’un mot de passe vous soit demandé avant de modifier ce réglage, cliquez sur le verrou et saisissez un mot de passe. Si vous définissez un mot de passe, vous devrez alors le saisir avant de modifier la llimite du volume ou de la supprimer. Remarque : le niveau sonore peut varier selon le type d’écouteurs ou de casque utilisé. Pour supprimer la limite de volume : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Désélectionnez « Limiter le volume maximum ». Au besoin, saisissez le mot de passe. Remarque : si vous avez oublié le mot de passe, vous avez la possibilité de restaurer l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30 pour en savoir plus.22 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Activation et désactivation des boutons de l’iPod shuffle Il est possible de désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle. De cette manière, si vous appuyez malencontreusement dessus, cela n’aura aucune incidence sur le fonctionnement de l’appareil. Pour désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle : m Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant trois secondes. Le voyant d’état devient vert, puis passe au orange et clignote trois fois lorsque la désactivation des boutons est effective. Si vous appuyez sur un bouton lorsque les boutons de l’iPod sont désactivés, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote une fois. Pour réactiver les boutons : m Maintenez à nouveau le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) enfoncé pendant trois secondes. Le voyant d’état devient orange, puis passe au vert et clignote trois fois lorsque la réactivation des boutons est effective.3 23 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle L’iPod shuffle vous permet de transportez votre musique ainsi que vos données. Lisez ce chapitre pour savoir comment utiliser l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe. Utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe pour y stocker des fichiers de données. Remarque : pour charger sur l’iPod shuffle la musique et les diverses données audio que vous souhaitez écouter, vous devez utiliser l’application iTunes. L’iPod shuffle ne pourra pas lire des fichiers audio copiés via le Finder de Macintosh ou l’explorateur Windows. Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Dans la section Options, sélectionnez « Activer l’utilisation comme disque dur ». Remarque : il vous sera peut-être nécessaire de faire défiler les éléments pour arriver aux réglages concernant le disque. 5 En faisant glisser le curseur, définissez la quantité d’espace réservée aux morceaux (par rapport à celle réservée aux données). 6 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe, une icône de disque iPod shuffle apparaît sur le bureau si vous utilisez un Mac, tandis que si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows, la première lettre de disque disponible lui est attribuée dans l’explorateur Windows.24 Chapitre 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle Transfert de fichiers entre ordinateurs Lorsque l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque dur est activée, vous pouvez transférer des fichiers d’un ordinateur à un autre. L’iPod shuffle est formaté en FAT-32, système pris en charge par les ordinateurs Mac et les PC sous Windows. De cette manière, vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle pour transférer des fichiers entre ordinateurs fonctionnant sous systèmes d’exploitation différents. Pour transférer des fichiers entre ordinateurs : 1 Après avoir activé la fonction d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque dur, branchez-le à l’ordinateur qui contient les fichiers que vous souhaitez copier. Important : lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un ordinateur (ou un utilisateur de votre ordinateur) qui n’est pas l’habituel, un message s’affiche et vous demande si vous souhaitez effacer l’iPod shuffle et le synchroniser avec la nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes. Si vous ne voulez pas effacer la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle, cliquez sur Annuler. 2 Faites glisser les fichiers désirés vers votre iPod shuffle via le système de fichiers de l’ordinateur (le Finder sur un Mac et l’explorateur Windows sur un PC). 3 Débranchez ensuite l’iPod shuffle puis branchez-le sur l’autre ordinateur. Cliquez à nouveau sur Annuler si vous ne voulez pas effacer la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle. 4 Faites glisser les fichiers depuis l’iPod shuffle vers une des unités du nouvel ordinateur. Comment empêcher l’ouverture automatique d’iTunes Il est possible d’empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement quand vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. Pour empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Dans la section Options, désélectionnez « Ouvrir iTunes à la connexion de cet iPod ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.Chapitre 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 254 24 4 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle Avec l’iPod shuffle sont fournis des écouteurs et un socle pour iPod shuffle. Obtenez des informations sur vos écouteurs Apple Earphones, sur le socle pour iPod shuffle et sur les autres accessoires disponibles pour l’iPod shuffle. Écouteurs Apple Earphones L’iPod shuffle est livré avec une paire d’écouteurs. Pour utiliser des écouteurs : m Branchez les écouteurs sur le port de sortie casque. Placez ensuite les écouteurs dans vos oreilles comme sur l’illustration. AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser les écouteurs, lisez les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment éviter d’endommager votre audition. Le cordon des écouteurs est réglable.Chapitre 4 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle 25 Le socle pour iPod shuffle L’iPod shuffle est livré avec un socle pour iPod shuffle (de deuxième génération) permettant de connecter l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur ou à d’autres périphériques USB. Consultez « Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 5. L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter L’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter est un accessoire vendu en option qui vous permet de recharger l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous n’êtes pas devant votre ordinateur. Accessoires disponibles Pour acheter des accessoires iPod shuffle, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore. Parmi les accessoires disponibles, citons :  les écouteurs ergonomiques iPod In-Ear Headphones d’Apple ;  le socle pour iPod shuffle (de deuxième génération) ;  l’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter.5 26 5 Astuces et dépannage La plupart des problèmes de l’iPod shuffle peuvent être rapidement résolus si vous suivez les conseils de ce chapitre. Si l’iPod shuffle ne s’allume ou ne répond pas :  Si le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote lorsque vous appuyez sur un bouton, cela signifie que les boutons de l’iPod shuffle sont désactivés. Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant environ trois secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état devienne vert et clignote.  Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur. La batterie de votre iPod shuffle peut avoir besoin d’être rechargée.  Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez cinq secondes et rallumez-le.  Il est possible que le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle ait besoin d’être restauré. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30. Les 5 R : Réinitialiser, Réessayer, Redémarrer, Réinstaller, Restaurer Souvenez-vous de ces conseils élémentaires si un problème survient avec l’iPod shuffle. Essayez de réaliser ces opérations l’une après l’autre jusqu’à ce que le problème soit résolu. Si l’une des suggestions suivantes ne permet pas de résoudre le problème, continuez à lire et consultez les solutions aux problèmes spécifiques.  Réinitialisez l’iPod shuffle en l’éteignant, en attendant cinq secondes puis en l’allumant à nouveau.  Réessayez avec un port USB différent si l’iPod shuffle n’apparaît pas dans iTunes.  Redémarrez votre ordinateur et assurez-vous que les mises à jour de logiciels les plus récentes sont installées.  Réinstallez le logiciel d’iTunes à partir de la dernière version disponible sur le web.  Restaurez l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage 27 Si l’iPod shuffle ne lit pas de musique :  Assurez-vous que le connecteur du casque ou des écouteurs est complètement enfoncée dans la prise casque.  Assurez-vous que le volume est correctement réglé. Il est possible qu’une limite de volume ait été définie. Consultez « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21.  Il se peut que l’iPod shuffle soit en pause. Tentez d’appuyer sur le bouton Lecture/ Pause (’). Si rien ne se produit lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur votre ordinateur :  Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur. L’iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d’être rechargé.  Assurez-vous que vous avez installé la dernière version d’iTunes sur www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start.  Essayez de le brancher sur un autre port USB de votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que l’iPod shuffle est bien placé sur le socle. Vérifiez que le connecteur USB est orienté correctement. Il ne peut être inséré que dans un sens.  L’iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d’être réinitialisé. Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez cinq secondes puis rallumez-le.  Si le voyant d’état ne s’allume pas (ou s’il s’allume faiblement) et que l’iPod shuffle n’apparaît pas dans iTunes ou dans le Finder, il est possible que la batterie soit entiè- rement déchargée. Laissez l’iPod shuffle se recharger pendant plusieurs minutes pour voir si cela lui permet de se réactiver.  Assurez-vous que vous disposez de l’ordinateur et du logiciel requis. Consultez « Si vous souhaitez effectuer une double vérification de la configuration requise : » à la page 29.  Essayez de redémarrer votre ordinateur.  Si aucune de ces suggestions n’aide à résoudre le problème, vous devrez éventuellement restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.  Si la restauration de l’iPod shuffle ne résout pas le problème, il se peut que l’iPod shuffle ait besoin d’être réparé. Vous pouvez obtenir des services en consultant le site web de service et d’assistance de l’iPod shuffle à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle/service. Si le chargement des morceaux est lent : Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur pour réaliser des chargements plus rapides. Une connexion USB 2.0 permet de charger des morceaux et des données beaucoup vite qu’une connexion USB 1.1.28 Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage Si vous ne parvenez pas à charger un morceau ou un autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle : Le morceau peut être encodé dans un format que l’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en charge. Les formats de fichiers audio suivants sont pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle. Ils comprennent les formats des livres audio et des podcasts :  AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P) (jusqu’à 320 kbps)  MP3 (jusqu’à 320 kbps)  MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR)  WAV  AA (texte lu audible.com, formats 2, 3 et 4)  AIFF Un morceau encodé au format Apple Lossless possède la même qualité sonore qu’un CD tout en occupant deux fois moins d’espace qu’un morceau encodé au format AIFF ou WAV. Le même morceau encodé au format AAC ou MP3 utilise encore moins de place. Quand vous importez de la musique depuis un CD à l’aide d’iTunes, elle est convertie par défaut au format AAC. Vous pouvez faire en sorte que l’iPod shuffle convertisse automatiquement les fichiers encodés à des débits plus élevés (comme Apple Lossless) en fichiers AAC de 128 kbps lors de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Comment faire tenir davantage de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle » à la page 18. Si vous utilisez iTunes pour Windows, vous pouvez convertir les fichiers WMA non protégés en fichiers au format AAC ou MP3. Cela peut être utile si vous disposez d’une collection de musique encodée au format WMA. L’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en charge les fichiers audio Apple Lossless, WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 ni le format 1 d’audible.com. Si vous possédez dans iTunes un morceau qui n’est pas pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez le convertir en un format que l’iPod shuffle prend en charge. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’Aide iTunes. Si les chapitres d’un livre audio ne se lisent pas dans l’ordre :  Assurez-vous que le bouton de mode aléatoire de l’iPod shuffle est placé sur la position de répétition (/), ce qui permet une lecture des chapitres dans l’ordre.  Si les chapitres n’ont pas été ajoutés à l’iPod shuffle dans l’ordre, branchez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur puis réorganisez les pistes via iTunes. Consultez « Organisation des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle » à la page 18.Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage 29 Si vous souhaitez effectuer une double vérification de la configuration requise : Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants :  Une des configurations d’ordinateur suivantes :  Un ordinateur Macintosh doté d’un port USB (USB 2.0 recommandé).  Un PC sous Windows doté d’un port ou d’une carte USB (USB 2.0 recommandé).  Un des systèmes d’exploitation suivants : Mac OS X v10.3.9 ou ultérieur, Windows 2000 avec Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur ou Windows XP Édition Familiale ou Professionnel avec Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur.  Un accès à Internet (une connexion à haut débit est recommandée).  iTunes 7.0.2 ou ultérieur (vous pouvez télécharger iTunes depuis l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start). Si votre PC sous Windows n’est pas doté d’un port USB à forte alimentation, vous pouvez acheter une carte USB 2.0 et l’installer. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur le site www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore. Si vous souhaitez utiliser l’iPod shuffle avec un Mac et un PC sous Windows : Chaque fois que vous synchronisez l’iPod shuffle avec une nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes, vous devez effacer la musique déjà présente sur l’iPod shuffle, quel que soit le système d’exploitation. Lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un ordinateur ou un utilisateur de votre ordinateur qui n’est pas l’habituel, un message s’affiche et vous demande si vous souhaitez effacer l’iPod shuffle et le synchroniser avec la nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes. Toutefois, il est possible d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe à la fois avec les ordinateurs Macintosh et les PC sous Windows, ce qui vous permet de transférer des fichiers d’un système d’exploitation à l’autre. Consultez le chapitre 3, « Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle, » à la page 23. Port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation30 Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle Vous pouvez utiliser iTunes pour mettre à jour ou restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle. Il est recommandé de mettre à jour l’iPod shuffle et d’utiliser le logiciel le plus récent. Vous pouvez également restaurer le logiciel et rétablir ainsi l’iPod shuffle à son état d’origine.  Si vous choisissez de mettre à jour, le logiciel sera mis à jour, mais vos réglages et morceaux seront conservés.  Si vous choisissez de restaurer, toutes les données sont effacées de l’iPod shuffle, y compris les morceaux et toutes les autres données. Tous les réglages d’origine de l’iPod shuffle seront rétablis. Pour mettre à jour ou restaurer l’iPod shuffle : 1 Assurez-vous que vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet et que vous avez installé la dernière version d’iTunes disponible sur www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start. 2 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source, puis cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. La section Version indique si l’iPod shuffle est à jour ou nécessite une version plus récente du logiciel. 4 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Pour installer la toute dernière version du logiciel, cliquez sur Mettre à jour.  Pour restaurer l’iPod shuffle et rétablir ses réglages d’origine, cliquez sur Restaurer. Cette opération efface toutes les données de l’iPod shuffle. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer la restauration.6 31 6 Sécurité et manipulation Ce chapitre contient des informations importantes sur la sécurité et la manipulation de l’iPod shuffle. Conservez ce guide des fonctions de l’iPod shuffle à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y reporter facilement. Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité Manipulation de l’iPod shuffle Évitez de tordre, d’écraser, de perforer, d’incinérer, d’ouvrir ou de laisser tomber l’iPod shuffle. Utilisation près de l’eau et dans des endroits humides N’utilisez pas l’iPod shuffle sous la pluie ni à proximité d’un lavabo ou de tout autre endroit humide. Veillez à ne pas renverser d’aliments ou de liquides sur l’iPod shuffle. Si l’iPod shuffle est mouillé, débranchez tous les câbles et éteignez l’iPod shuffle avant de procéder au nettoyage. Laissez-le ensuite sécher entièrement avant de le rallumer. Réparation de l’iPod shuffle N’essayez jamais de réparer l’iPod shuffle vous-même. L’iPod shuffle ne contient aucune pièce démontable par l’utilisateur. Pour des informations sur le service, choisissez Aide iPod dans le menu Aide d’iTunes ou allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod/service. La batterie de l’iPod shuffle ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour plus d’informations sur les batteries, rendez-vous à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/batteries. ± Pour éviter toute blessure, lisez toutes les informations relatives à la sécurité exposées ci-dessous, ainsi que le mode d’emploi, avant d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle. AVERTISSEMENT : ne pas suivre les présentes consignes de sécurité pourrait provoquer un incendie, un choc électrique ou un autre dommage.32 Chapitre 6 Sécurité et manipulation Utilisation de l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter (disponible séparément) Si vous utilisez l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter (vendu séparément sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore) pour recharger l’iPod shuffle, assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement assemblé avant de le brancher sur une prise de courant. Insérez ensuite fermement l’adaptateur dans la prise de courant. Ne branchez ou ne débranchez pas l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter en ayant les mains mouillées. N’utilisez pas d’adaptateur secteur autre qu’un adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter d’Apple pour recharger votre iPod shuffle. Il se peut que l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter chauffe pendant une utilisation normale. Veillez à toujours assurer une ventilation correcte autour de lui et à toujours le manipuler avec précaution. Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter si l’une des conditions suivantes se présente :  Le câble d’alimentation ou la prise est effiloché ou endommagé.  L’adaptateur est exposé à la pluie ou à une humidité excessive.  Le boîtier de l’adaptateur est endommagé.  Vous pensez que l’adaptateur doit être réparé.  Vous voulez nettoyer l’adaptateur. Prévention de la diminution de l’acuité auditive Vous risquez une perte d’audition irréparable si vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs à volume sonore élevé. Réglez le volume à un niveau raisonnable. Vous pouvez vous habituer petit à petit à un volume de son plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal mais entraîner une détérioration de votre audition. Si vos oreilles bourdonnent ou si les sons vous semblent sourds, arrêtez l’écoute et rendez-vous chez votre médecin pour vérifier votre audition. Plus le volume est élevé, plus vous risquez d’abîmer rapidement votre audition. Les spécialistes de l’audition suggèrent de protéger votre audition de la façon suivante :  Évitez au maximum d’écouter de la musique via des écouteurs ou un casque à un volume élevé.  Évitez de monter le son pour filtrer les bruits extérieurs.  Baissez le son si vous n’entendez pas ce que disent les gens à côté de vous. Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de définir un volume maximum sur l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21. Informations Importantes A pleine puissance, l’écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l’oreille de l’utilisateur.Chapitre 6 Sécurité et manipulation 33 Utilisation d’un casque d’écoute en toute sécurité L’utilisation des écouteurs n’est pas recommandée lorsque vous conduisez et constitue par ailleurs une infraction au code de la route dans certains endroits. Soyez prudent et attentif au volant. Cessez d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle si vous vous rendez compte que cela vous distrait ou vous dérange lorsque vous conduisez un véhicule ou lorsque vous réalisez tout autre activité nécessitant toute votre attention. Informations importantes sur la manipulation Transport de l’iPod shuffle Les composants de l’iPod shuffle sont délicats. Ne tordez, n’écrasez ni ne laissez pas tomber l’iPod shuffle. Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports Ne forcez jamais un connecteur à entrer dans un port. Vérifiez que rien ne bloque l’entrée au port. Si le connecteur et le port ne s’assemblent pas facilement, c’est probablement parce qu’ils ne sont pas compatibles. Assurez-vous que le connecteur est compatible avec le port et que vous l’avez positionné correctement par rapport à ce dernier. Conservation de l’iPod shuffle à température normale Utilisez toujours l’iPod shuffle dans des endroits où la température se situe entre 0º et 35º C. Dans des conditions de basses températures, l’autonomie de l’iPod peut diminuer temporairement. Rangez l’iPod shuffle dans un endroit où la température est toujours comprise entre -20º et 45º C. La température dans les voitures en stationnement pouvant dépasser cette fourchette, ne laissez pas l’iPod shuffle dans votre voiture. Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle ou rechargez sa batterie, il est normal que l’iPod shuffle chauffe. L’extérieur de l’iPod shuffle sert en effet de surface de refroidissement et transfère la chaleur de l’intérieur de l’appareil vers l’extérieur, où l’air est moins chaud. Nettoyage de la partie externe de l’iPod shuffle Pour nettoyer l’iPod shuffle, retirez-le du socle et éteignez-le. Utilisez ensuite un chiffon doux, légèrement humide et non pelucheux. Évitez toute pénétration d’humidité dans les orifices de l’appareil. N’utilisez pas de produits pour le nettoyage des vitres, de produits d’entretien ménager, d’aérosols, de solvants, d’alcool, d’ammoniac ni d’abrasifs pour nettoyer l’iPod shuffle. Respect des consignes en matière d’élimination pour l’iPod shuffle Pour obtenir des informations sur la mise au rebut de l’iPod shuffle, y compris d’importantes informations sur le respect des normes en vigueur, consultez la section « Regulatory Compliance Information » à la page 35. AVIS : ne pas suivre les présentes instructions sur la manipulation peut provoquer des dommages à l’iPod shuffle ou à d’autres objets.7 34 7 En savoir plus, service et assistance Vous trouverez plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle dans l’aide à l’écran et sur le web. Le tableau suivant décrit à quel endroit trouver des informations sur les services et les logiciels de l’iPod. Pour en savoir plus sur : procédez ainsi : Les services et l’assistance, les forums de discussion, les guides d’initiation et les téléchargements de logiciels Apple Allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle. L’utilisation d’iTunes Ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Pour obtenir le guide d’initiation d’iTunes en ligne (uniquement disponible dans certains pays), allez sur www.apple.com/fr/ilife/tutorials/itunes. Les toutes dernières informations sur l’iPod shuffle Allez sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodshuffle L’enregistrement de l’iPod shuffle Pour enregistrer l’iPod shuffle, installez iTunes sur votre ordinateur et branchez-y l’iPod shuffle. La recherche du numéro de série de l’iPod shuffle Observez l’encoche située sous la pince de l’ iPod shuffleou bien sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à l’ordinateur) et cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. L’obtention des services assurés dans le cadre de la garantie Suivez d’abord les conseils qui figurent dans le présent fascicule, l’aide à l’écran et les ressources en ligne, puis allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle/service 35 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:  Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.  Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.  Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.  Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple Authorized Reseller. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Product Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A, Cupertino, CA 95014-2084, 408-974-2000. Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. VCCI Class B Statement Korea Class B Statement36 Russia Communauté Européenne Conforme aux directives européennes 2006/95/EEC et 89/336/EEC. Informations sur l’élimination et le recyclage Votre iPod renferme une batterie. Débarrassez-vous de l’iPod en respectant les lois et les directives environnementales locales. Pour en savoir plus sur le programme de recyclage d’Apple, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/environment. Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. China: Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Taiwan: Union Européenne-informations sur l’élimination : Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que vous devez vous débarasser de votre produit sans le mélanger avec les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et la législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est plus utilisable, portez-le dans un centre de traitement des déchets agréé par les autorités locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits gratuitement. Le traitement et le recyclage séparé de votre produit lors de son élimination aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains. Apple et l’environnement Chez Apple, nous sommes conscients de la responsabilité qui nous incombe de réduire les impacts écologiques de nos activités et de nos produits. Pour plus d’informations, allez sur : www.apple.com/environment © 2007 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, FireWire, iPod, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Finder et Shuffle sont des marques d’Apple Inc. Apple Store est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les autres noms de produits et de sociétés peuvent être la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. La mention de produits tierces est réservée à des fins d’information et n’équivaut pas à une approbation ou à une recommandation. La responsabilité d’Apple n’est pas engagée concernant les performances ou l’utilisation de ces produits. Tous les accords ou garanties éventuels sont directement évoqués entre le fournisseur et les éventuels utilisateurs. Apple s’est attaché à fournir aux utilisateurs les informations les plus justes possible dans ce manuel. Apple n’est pas responsable des erreurs d’impression ou d’écriture. F019-0996/2-2007 iPhone 4 Important Product Information GuideThis Important Product Information Guide contains safety and handling, regulatory, software license, and warranty information for iPhone. Look for recycling, disposal, and other environmental information in the iPhone User Guide at:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone ±To avoid injury, read all operating instructions and the following safety information before using iPhone. For detailed operating instructions, read the iPhone User Guide on your iPhone by visiting help.apple.com/iphone or using the iPhone User Guide bookmark in Safari. For downloadable versions of the latest iPhone User Guide and this Important Product Information Guide, visit:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone Important Safety and Handling Information WARNING:??Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire, electric shock, or other injury or damage to iPhone or other property. Carrying and Handling iPhone iPhone contains sensitive components. Do not drop, disassemble, microwave, burn, paint, or insert foreign objects into iPhone. Do not use iPhone if it has been damaged—for example, if iPhone is cracked, punctured, or damaged by water. The front and back covers of iPhone are made of glass. This glass could break if iPhone is dropped on a hard surface, is subjected to a substantial impact, or is crushed, bent, or deformed. If the glass chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Stop using iPhone until the glass is replaced by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Glass cracked due to misuse or abuse is not covered under the warranty. If you are concerned about scratching or abrasion, use a case, sold separately. Keeping the Outside of iPhone Clean Clean iPhone immediately if it comes into contact with any contaminants that may cause stains—for example, ink, dyes, makeup, dirt, food, oils, and lotions. To clean iPhone, unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the On/Off button, and then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone. The front glass surface has an oleophobic coating. To remove fingerprints, simply wipe these surfaces with a soft, lint-free cloth. The ability of this coating to repel oil will diminish over time with normal usage, and rubbing the screen with an abrasive material will further diminish its effect and may scratch the glass. Avoiding Water and Wet Locations Do not expose iPhone to water or rain, or handle iPhone near wet locations—for example, near washbasins or toilets. Take care not to spill any food or liquid on iPhone. In case iPhone gets wet, unplug all cables, turn off iPhone before cleaning, and allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not attempt to dry iPhone with an external heat source, such as a microwave oven or hair dryer. Damage to iPhone caused by contact with liquid is not covered under the warranty.Repairing or Modifying iPhone Never attempt to repair or modify iPhone yourself. iPhone does not contain any user-serviceable parts, except (where applicable) for the SIM card and SIM tray. Disassembling iPhone, including the removal of external screws and back cover, may cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If iPhone has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not use it until you take it to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Service should only be provided by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. If you have questions, contact Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For service information, go to: www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq Battery Replacement Do not attempt to replace the rechargeable battery in iPhone yourself. The battery should be replaced only by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For more information about battery replacement service, go to:?? www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html Charging iPhone To charge iPhone, use only the Apple Dock Connector to USB Cable with the following: (i) an Apple USB Power Adapter, (ii) another Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with iPhone, (iii) a third-party accessory certified to use the Apple “Works with iPhone” or “Made for iPhone” logo, (iv) a high-power USB port on another device that is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standard, or (v) a power adapter compliant with one or more of the following standards EN 301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU L.1000, or another applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standard. An iPhone Micro USB Adapter (available separately in some areas) or other adapter may be needed to connect iPhone to some compatible power adapters. Note:??Only micro USB power adapters in certain regions that comply with applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standards are compatible. Please contact the power adapter manufacturer to find out if your micro USB power adapter complies with these standards. Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories before using with iPhone. Apple is not responsible for the operation of, or any damage caused by, third-party accessories or their compliance with safety and regulatory standards. When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge iPhone, make sure that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into a power outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter firmly into the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power Adapter with wet hands. The Apple USB Power Adapter may become warm during normal use. Always allow adequate ventilation around the Apple USB Power Adapter and use care when handling. Unplug the Apple USB Power Adapter if any of the following conditions exist:  The power cord or plug has become frayed or damaged.  The adapter is exposed to rain, liquid, or excessive moisture.  The adapter case has become damaged.  You suspect the adapter needs service or repair.  You want to clean the adapter. Avoiding Hearing Damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if the receiver, earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpiece are used at high volume. Use only compatible receivers, earbuds, headphones, speakerphones, or earpieces with your device. Turn on the audio and check the volume before inserting anything in your ear. You can adapt over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:  Limit the amount of time you use the receiver, earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpieces at high volume.  Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.  Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you. For information about how to set a maximum volume limit on iPhone, see the iPhone User Guide. Emergency Calls You should not rely on wireless devices for essential communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of iPhone to call emergency services may not work in all locations or all operating conditions. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network availability or environmental interference. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if iPhone is not activated, if iPhone is not compatible with or configured to operate on a particular cellular network, or (when applicable) if iPhone does not have a SIM or if the SIM is PIN-locked. Driving and Riding Safely Use of iPhone while driving a vehicle or riding a bicycle may be distracting. If you find using iPhone disruptive or distracting while driving or riding, pull off the road and park before making or answering a call. Use of iPhone alone or with headphones (even if used only in one ear) while driving or riding is not recommended and is illegal in some areas. Consider using a compatible hands-free device with iPhone. Use of a hands-free device may be required in some areas. Check and obey the laws and regulations regarding the use of mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you drive or ride. Navigating Safely Do not rely on iPhone applications that provide maps, digital compass headings, orientation information, traffic information, directions, or location-based navigation to determine precise locations, proximity, orientation, distance, traffic conditions or direction. These applications should only be used for basic navigation assistance. Maps, directions, and location-based applications depend on data services. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all areas, resulting in maps, digital compass headings, directions, traffic conditions or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. iPhone contains an internal digital compass located in the upper-right corner of iPhone. The accuracy of digital compass headings may be negatively affected by magnetic or other environmental interference, including interference caused by the close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. Never rely solely on the digital compass for determining direction. Compare the information provided on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. Do not use location-based applications while performing activities that require your full attention. Always comply with posted signs and the laws and regulations in the areas where you are using iPhone. For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great force. Do not store iPhone or any of its accessories in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Seizures, Blackouts, and Eyestrain A small percentage of people may be susceptible to blackouts or seizures (even if they have never had one before) when exposed to flashing lights or light patterns such as when playing games or watching video. If you have experienced seizures or blackouts or have a family history of such occurrences, you should consult a physician before playing games (if available) or watching videos on your iPhone. Discontinue use of iPhone and consult a physician if you experience headaches, blackouts, seizures, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching, loss of awareness, involuntary movement, or disorientation. To reduce risk of headaches, blackouts, seizures, and eyestrain, avoid prolonged use, hold iPhone further away from your eyes, use iPhone in a well-lit room, and take frequent breaks. Choking Hazards iPhone and its accessories may contain small parts, which may present a choking hazard to small children. Keep such parts away from small children. Repetitive Motion When you perform repetitive activities such as typing or playing games on iPhone, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, arms, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your body. Take frequent breaks and if you have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off iPhone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not charge iPhone, and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire, resulting in serious injury or even death. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gas stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal powders); and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Using Connectors, Ports, and Buttons Never force a connector into a port or apply excessive pressure to a button, because this may cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If the connector and port don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Check for obstructions and make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. Accessories and Wireless Performance Not all iPod accessories are fully compatible with iPhone. Turning on Airplane Mode on iPhone may eliminate audio interference between iPhone and an accessory. While Airplane mode is on, you cannot make or receive calls or use features that require wireless communication. Under some conditions, certain accessories may affect iPhone wireless performance. Reorienting or relocating iPhone and the connected accessory may improve wireless performance. Keeping iPhone Within Acceptable Temperatures iPhone is designed to be operated in temperatures between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F) and stored in temperatures between -20º and 45º C (-4º to 113º F). Low- or high-temperature conditions might temporarily shorten battery life or cause iPhone to temporarily stop working properly. Leaving iPhone in a parked vehicle or in direct sunlight can cause iPhone to exceed these storage or operating temperature ranges. Avoid dramatic changes in temperature or humidity when using iPhone as condensation may form on or within iPhone. When you’re using iPhone or charging the battery, it is normal for iPhone to get warm. The exterior of iPhone functions as a cooling surface that transfers heat from inside the unit to the cooler air outside. Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy iPhone transmits and receives radio frequency (RF) energy through its antennas. The iPhone cellular antennas are located at the top and bottom edges of iPhone. The Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® antenna is located near the top of iPhone. iPhone is designed and manufactured to comply with the limits for exposure to RF energy set by international regulatory agencies, including the FCC of the United States, IC of Canada, MIC of Japan, and the Counsel of the European Union, among others. “Specific Absorption Rate,” or SAR, refers to the rate at which the body absorbs RF energy. The SAR limits for mobile phones are 1.6 watts per kilogram (W/kg) for the FCC and IC, and 2.0 W/kg for the Council of the European Union. iPhone has been tested, 1 and meets the FCC, IC, and European Union RF exposure guidelines for cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth operation. During SAR testing, iPhone is held in standard operating positions (i.e., at the head and on the body) and its radios are set to transmit at the highest power level. iPhone’s maximum SAR levels on each frequency of operation are provided in a chart at the end of this section. The SAR levels experienced during normal use may be lower than the maximum SAR levels. In normal use, iPhone automatically adjusts radio transmission power to the lowest level necessary to communicate with the wireless network. When carrying iPhone, keep it 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) or more away from your body to ensure exposure levels remain at or below the maximum levels. Avoid cases with metal parts. 1 The device was tested according to measurement standards and procedures specified in FCC OET Bulletin 65, Supplement C (Edition 01-01) and IEEE 1528-2003, and Canada RSS 102, Issue 4, March 2010. iPhone adheres to the European Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the Limitation of Exposure of the General Public to Electromagnetic Fields [1999/519/EC]. Exposure to RF energy is related to time and distance. If you are concerned about RF exposure, decrease your total talk time on iPhone and increase your distance to iPhone by using one of the many hands-free options available, including the built-in speakerphone, the supplied headphones with built-in mic, or other third-party accessories. For more information about RF energy exposure, see the FCC’s Radio Frequency Safety page at:??www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety For information about the scientific research related to RF energy exposure, see the World Health Organization’s EMF Research Database at: www.who.int/peh-emf/research/database Frequency Band 2 Body 3 Head FCC & IC 1g SAR Limit (W/kg) GSM 850 1.15 1.04 1.6 GSM 1900 0.99 1.08 1.6 UMTS II 1900 0.578 1.18 1.6 UMTS V 850 0.981 1.13 1.6 CDMA 800 MHz Band Class 0 1.11 1.15 1.6 CDMA 1900 MHz Band Class 1 0.649 1.18 1.6 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.191 0.372 1.6 Frequency Band 2 Body 3 Head EU 10g SAR Limit (W/kg) EGSM 900 0.989 0.766 2.0 GSM 1800 0.695 0.959 2.0 UMTS I 2100 0.495 0.98 2.0 UMTS VIII 900 0.681 0.988 2.0 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.106 0.267 2.0 Radio Frequency Interference Radio-frequency emissions from electronic equipment can negatively affect the operation of other electronic equipment, causing them to malfunction. Although iPhone is designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with regulations governing radio frequency emission in countries such as the United States, Canada, the European Union, and Japan, the wireless transmitters and electrical 2 Your iPhone may be configured to support one or more of the listed frequency bands, depending on carrier technology and network availability. The frequency band used by iPhone varies depending on wireless service provider, wireless technology, and region. 3 iPhone positioned 10 mm (13/32 inch) away from the body.circuits in iPhone may cause interference in other electronic equipment. Therefore, please take the following precautions: Aircraft Use of iPhone may be prohibited while traveling in aircraft. For more information about using Airplane Mode to turn off the iPhone wireless transmitters, see the iPhone User Guide. Vehicles Radio frequency emissions from iPhone may affect electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. Persons with pacemakers:  Should always keep iPhone more than 15 cm (6 inches) from the pacemaker when the phone is turned on  Should not carry iPhone in a breast pocket  Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn iPhone off immediately. Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) iPhone has been tested and rated under the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-2007 hearing aid compatibility standard. The ANSI standard measures radio frequency interference for acoustic coupling (“M” rating) and inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode (“T” rating). Phones must be rated M3 or greater and T3 or greater to be hearing aid compatible under FCC rules. For more information, see the “Hearing Aid Compatibility” section of the iPhone User Guide. For current iPhone hearing aid compatibility ratings, go to:??www.apple.com/support/hac iPhone may interfere with some hearing aids. If you experience interference, consult the hearing aid manufacturer or your physician for alternatives or remedies. Compatibility With Other Wireless Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the device manufacturer or your physician to determine if it is adequately shielded from radio frequency emissions from iPhone. Health Care Facilities Hospitals and health care facilities may use equipment that is particularly sensitive to external radio frequency emissions. Turn iPhone off when staff or posted signs instruct you to do so.Blasting Areas and Posted Facilities To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn off iPhone when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted “Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions. Certification and Compliance See iPhone for the certification and compliance marks specific to that device. To view, choose Settings > General > About > Regulatory. Australia/ New Zealand Canada IC: 579C-E2430A E.U. Japan Mexico Singapore U.S. FCC ID: BCG-E2430A Important:??Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple could void the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and wireless compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, televisions, and other electronic devices. FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Compliance Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil. European Union Regulatory Conformance The equipment complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC, Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0–300 GHz). This equipment meets the following conformance standards: EN 300 328, EN 301 489-17, EN 301 511, EN 301 908, EN 50385 This wireless device complies with the R&TTE Directive. EU Declaration of Conformity ???????????Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? ?????????? ? ????????, Wi-Fi ? Bluetooth ?????????? ? ? ???????????? ??? ???????????? ?????????? ? ??????? ????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??. Cesky??Spolecnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že toto mobilní zarízení s technologií Wi-Fi a Bluetooth vyhovuje základním požadavkum a dalším príslušným ustanovením smernice 1999/5/ES. Dansk??Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr cellular, Wi-Fi og Bluetooth overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch??Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dasssich Mobiltelefon,Wi-Fi und Bluetooth in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befinden.Eesti??Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see mobiil-, Wi-Fi- ja Bluetooth-seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele. English??Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Español??Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo celular, Wi-Fi y Bluetooth cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ??????????Me t?? pa???sa, ? Apple Inc. d????e? ?t? a?t? ? s?s?e?? ????t??, Wi-Fi ?a? Bluetooth s?µµ??f??eta? p??? t?? ßas???? apa?t?se?? ?a? t?? ???p?? s?et???? d?at??e?? t?? ?d???a? 1999/5/??. Français??Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil cellulaire, Wi-Fi, et Bluetooth est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Islenska??Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki, sem er farsími, þráðlaus og með blátannartækni (e: cellular, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth,) fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Italiano??Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo dispositivo cellulare, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski??Ar šo Apple Inc. deklare, ka cellular, Wi-Fi un Bluetooth ierice atbilst Direktivas 1999/5/EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem. Lietuviu??Šiuo„Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad korinio,„Wi-Fi“ ir„Bluetooth“ ryšio irenginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Magyar??Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a mobil, Wi-Fi és Bluetooth megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak. Malti??Hawnhekk, Apple Inc. tiddikjara li dan l-apparat cellulari, Wi-Fi, u Bluetooth huwa konformi mar-rekwiziti essenzjali u dispozizzjonijiet ohra relevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/5/KE. Nederlands??Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel cellular, Wi-Fi, en Bluetooth in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Norsk??Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette mobiltelefon-, Wi-Fi- og Bluetooth-apparatet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og øvrige relevante krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF. Polski??Niniejszym Apple Inc. oswiadcza, ze ten telefon komórkowy, urzadzenie Wi-Fi oraz Bluetooth sa zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Português??Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo móvel, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Româna??Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declara ca acest aparat celular, Wi-Fi ?i Bluetooth este în conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu celelalte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE. Slovensko??Apple Inc. izjavlja, da so celicne naprave ter naprave Wi-Fi in Bluetooth skladne z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES.Slovensky??Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto mobilné, Wi-Fi & Bluetooth zariadenie splna základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Suomi??Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä matkapuhelin-, Wi-Fija Bluetooth-tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska??Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna mobiltelefoni-, Wi-Fi-, och Bluetooth-enhet står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at: www.apple.com/euro/compliance iPhone can be used in the following countries: European Community Restrictions Français??Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez l’Autorité de Régulation des Communications Electroniques et des Postes (ARCEP) pour connaître les limites d’utilisation des canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr Japan Compliance Statement—VCCI Class B Statement iPhone Terms and Conditions IMPORTANT:??BY USING YOUR iPHONE, iPAD or iPOD TOUCH (“iOS DEVICE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE FOLLOWING APPLE AND THIRD PARTY TERMS: A.??APPLE iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT B.??NOTICES FROM APPLE C.??GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS D.??YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPLE INC. iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Single Use License PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING YOUR iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE ACCOMPANYING THIS LICENSE. BY USING YOUR iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING A SOFTWARE UPDATE, AS APPLICABLE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOAD THE SOFTWARE UPDATE. FOR iOS DEVICE PURCHASERS, IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE, YOU MAY RETURN THE iOS DEVICE WITHIN THE RETURN PERIOD TO THE APPLE STORE OR AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A REFUND, SUBJECT TO APPLE’S RETURN POLICY FOUND AT http://www.apple.com/legal/sales_policies/. 1. General. (a) The software (including Boot ROM code and other embedded software), documentation, interfaces, content, fonts and any data that came with your iOS Device (“Original iOS Software”), as may be updated or replaced by feature enhancements, software updates or system restore software provided by Apple (“iOS Software Updates”), whether in read only memory, on any other media or in any other form (the Original iOS Software and iOS Software Updates are collectively referred to as the “iOS Software”) are licensed, not sold, to you by Apple Inc. (“Apple”) for use only under the terms of this License. Apple and its licensors retain ownership of the iOS Software itself and reserve all rights not expressly granted to you. (b) Apple, at its discretion, may make available future iOS Software Updates for your iOS Device. The iOS Software Updates, if any, may not necessarily include all existing software features or new features that Apple releases for newer or other models of iOS Devices. The terms of this License will govern any iOS Software Updates provided by Apple that replace and/or supplement the Original iOS Software product, unless such iOS Software Update is accompanied by a separate license in which case the terms of that license will govern. 2. Permitted License Uses and Restrictions. (a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted a limited non-exclusive license to use the iOS Software on a single Apple-branded iOS Device. Except as permitted in Section 2(b) below, and unless as provided in a separate agreement between you and Apple, this License does not allow the iOS Software to exist on more than one Apple-branded iOS Device at a time, and you may not distribute or make the iOS Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple devices at the same time. This License does not grant you any rights to use Apple proprietary interfaces and other intellectual property in the design, development, manufacture, licensing or distribution of third party devices and accessories, or third party software applications, for use with iOS Devices. Some of those rights are available under separate licenses from Apple. For more information on developing third party devices and accessories for iOS Devices, please email madeforipod@apple.com. For more information on developing software applications for iOS Devices, please email devprograms@apple.com. (b) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted a limited non-exclusive license to download iOS Software Updates that may be made available by Apple for your model of the iOS Device to update or restore the software on any such iOS Device that you own or control. This License does not allow you to update or restore any iOS Device that you do not control or own, and you may not distribute or make the iOS Software Updates available over a network where they could be used by multiple devices or multiple computers at the same time. If you download an iOS Software Update to your computer, you may make one copy of the iOS Software Updates stored on your computer in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original. (c) You may not and you agree not to, or to enable others to, copy (except as expressly permitted by this License), decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt, modify, or create derivative works of the iOS Software or any services provided by the iOS Software, or any part thereof (except as and only to the extent any foregoing restriction is prohibited by applicable law or to the extent as may be permitted by licensing terms governing use of open-sourced components included with the iOS Software). Any attempt to do so is a violation of the rights of Apple and its licensors of the iOS Software. (d) By storing content on your iOS Device you are making a digital copy. In some jurisdictions, it is unlawful to make digital copies without prior permission from the rights holder. The iOS Software may be used to reproduce materials so long as such use is limited to reproduction of non-copyrighted materials, materials in which you own the copyright, or materials you are authorized or legally permitted to reproduce. (e) You agree to use the iOS Software and the Services (as defined in Section 5 below) in compliance with all applicable laws, including local laws of the country or region in which you reside or in which you download or use the iOS Software and Services. (f) Use of and access to certain features of the iOS Software and certain Services (as defined in Section 5) may require you to apply for a unique user name and password combination, known as an Apple ID. In addition, you acknowledge that many features and Services of the iOS Software transmit data and could impact charges to your data plan, and that you are responsible for any such charges. For more information, please consult the User Guide for your iOS Device. 3. Transfer. You may not rent, lease, lend, sell, redistribute, or sublicense the iOS Software. You may, however, make a one-time permanent transfer of all of your license rights to the iOS Software to another party in connection with the transfer of ownership of your iOS Device, provided that: (a) the transfer must include your iOS Device and all of the iOS Software, including all its component parts, original media, printed materials and this License; (b) you do not retain any copies of the iOS Software, full or partial, including copies stored on a computer or other storage device; and (c) the party receiving the iOS Software reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License. 4. Consent to Use of Data. (a) Diagnostic and Usage Data. If you opt in to diagnostic and usage collection, you agree that Apple and its subsidiaries and agents may collect, maintain, process and use diagnostic, technical, usage and related information, including but not limited to information about your iOS Device, computer, system and application software, and peripherals, that is gathered periodically to facilitate the provision of software updates, product support and other services to you (if any) related to the iOS Software, and to verify compliance with the terms of this License. Apple may use this information, as long as it is collected in a form that does not personally identify you, to provide and improve Apple’s products and services. If you have opted in and have Location Services turned on, the location of your device may also be sent to help Apple analyze wireless or cellular performance issues (e.g. the strength or weakness of a cellular signal in a particular location). To enable Apple’s partners and third party developers to improve their software, hardware and services designed for use with Apple products, Apple may also provide any such partner or third party developer with a subset of diagnostic information that is relevant to that partner’s or developer’s software, hardware and/or services, as long as the diagnostic information is in a form that does not personally identify you. (b) Location Data. Apple and its partners and licensees may provide certain services through your iOS Device that rely upon location information. To provide and improve these services, where available, Apple and its partners and licensees may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use your location data, including the real-time geographic location of your iOS Device, road travel speed information, and location search queries. The location data and queries collected by Apple are collected in a form that does not personally identify you and may be used by Apple and its partners and licensees to provide location-based products and services. By using any location-based services on your iOS Device, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its partners’ and licensees’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing and use of your location data and queries to provide and improve location-based and road traffic-based products and services. You may withdraw this consent at any time by going to the Location Services setting on your iOS Device and either turning off the global Location Services setting or turning off the individual location settings of each location-aware item on your iOS Device. Disabling these location features will only impact the location-based functionality of your iOS Device. It will not affect iOS Device features unrelated to location services. When using third party applications or services on the iOS Device that use or provide location data, you are subject to and should review such third party’s terms and privacy policy on use of location data by such third party applications or services. (c) Siri. If your iOS Device supports Siri, which includes the dictation feature, these features allow you to make requests, give commands and dictate text to your device using your voice. When you use Siri, the things you say will be recorded and sent to Apple to process your requests. Your device will also send Apple other information, such as your first name and nickname; the names, nicknames, and relationship with you (e.g., “my dad”) of your address book contacts; and song names in your collection (collectively, your “User Data”). All of this data is used to help Siri understand you better and recognize what you say. It is not linked to other data that Apple may have from your use of other Apple services. By using Siri, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its subsidiaries’ and agents’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing, and use of this information, including your voice input and User Data, to provide and improve Siri and other Apple products and services. If you have Location Services turned on, the location of your iOS Device at the time you make a request will also be sent to Apple to help Siri improve the accuracy of its response to your location-based requests. You may disable the location-based functionality of Siri by going to the Location Services setting on your iOS Device and turning off the individual location setting for Siri. You can also turn off Siri altogether at any time. To do so, open Settings, tap General, tap Siri, and slide the Siri switch to “off”. You may also restrict the ability to use Siri under the Restrictions Setting. (d) FaceTime. The FaceTime video calling feature of the iOS Software (“FaceTime”) requires Internet access and may not be available in all countries or regions. Your use of FaceTime is subject to your compliance with Section 2(e) above. In order to set up FaceTime, and to initiate and receive FaceTime calls between you and other FaceTime users, certain unique identifiers for your iOS Device and account are needed. These unique identifiers may include your email address(es), the Apple ID information you provide, a hardware identifier for your iOS Device, and your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the iOS Software, you agree that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use these identifiers for the purpose of providing and improving the FaceTime feature. You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will be displayed to the other party on the video call (even if you have a blocked number) or your email address will be shown, depending on what setting you choose. If you are using a FaceTime-capable iPad or iPod touch, your email address will be displayed to the other party on the video call. You may turn off the FaceTime feature by going to the FaceTime setting on your iOS Device or by going to the Restrictions setting and enabling the FaceTime restriction. (e) iMessage. The messaging feature of the iOS Software (“iMessage”) may not be available in all countries or regions. Your use of iMessage is subject to your compliance with Section 2(e) above. In order to set up iMessage, and to initiate and receive iMessages between you and other iOS Device users, certain unique identifiers for your iOS Device and account are needed. These unique identifiers may include your email address(es), the Apple ID information you provide, a hardware identifier for your iOS Device, and your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the iOS Software, you agree that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use these identifiers for the purpose of providing and improving the iMessage service. The iMessage service requires a Wi-Fi or cellular data connection. To facilitate delivery of your iMessages and to enable you to maintain conversations across your devices, Apple may hold your iMessages in encrypted form for a limited period of time. If your message cannot be sent as an iMessage, your message may be sent as an SMS or MMS message, for which carrier messaging rates may apply. You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will be displayed to the other party (even if you have a blocked number) or your email address will be shown, depending on what setting you choose. If you are using an iMessage-capable iPad or iPod touch your email address will be displayed to the other party. You may turn off the iMessage service by going to the Messages setting on your iOS Device. (f) Photo Stream. By using the Photo Stream feature of iCloud, you agree that Apple may store photos taken on your iOS Device or uploaded from your computer for a limited period of time and automatically send the photos to your other Apple iOS Devices or computers that are Photo Stream-enabled. Please note that a limited number of photos may be stored at any one time, and older photos will be automatically deleted from Photo Stream over time. Any photos you want to keep must be saved to your camera roll, another album or your computer. Photo resolution may vary depending on the device to which the photos are downloaded. If you do not wish to use Photo Stream, you can turn Photo Stream off on all of your iOS Devices or computers that are Photo Stream-enabled. All use of the Photo Stream feature is subject to the terms and conditions of this agreement and the iCloud Terms and Conditions located at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/. (g) Interest-Based Advertising. Apple may provide mobile, interest-based advertising to you. If you do not want to receive relevant ads on your iOS Device, you can opt out by going to this link on your iOS Device: http://oo.apple.com. If you opt out, you will continue to receive the same number of mobile ads, but they may be less relevant because they will not be based on your interests. You may still see ads related to the content on a web page or in an application or based on other non-personal information. This opt-out applies only to Apple advertising services and does not affect interest-based advertising from other advertising networks. (h) Privacy Policy. At all times your information will be treated in accordance with Apple’s Privacy Policy, which is incorporated by reference into this License and can be viewed at: www.apple.com/ privacy/. 5. Services and Third Party Materials. (a) The iOS Software enables access to Apple’s iTunes Store, App Store, Game Center, iCloud and other Apple and third party services and web sites (collectively and individually, “Services”). Such Services may not be available in all languages or in all countries. Use of these Services requires Internet access and use of certain Services may require an Apple ID, may require you to accept additional terms and may be subject to additional fees. By using this software in connection with an Apple ID, iTunes Store account, Game Center account, or iCloud account, you agree to the applicable terms of service for that account, such as the latest iTunes Store Terms and Conditions or Game Center Terms and Conditions, which you may access and review at http://www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/, or the iCloud Terms and Conditions which can be found at http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/, respectively. (b) If you sign up for iCloud, certain iCloud features like “Back Up” and “Find My iPhone” may be accessed directly from the iOS Software. You acknowledge and agree that your use of iCloud and these features is subject to the latest terms and conditions of the iCloud service, which you may access and review at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/ (c) You understand that by using any of the Services, you may encounter content that may be deemed offensive, indecent, or objectionable, which content may or may not be identified as having explicit language, and that the results of any search or entering of a particular URL may automatically and unintentionally generate links or references to objectionable material. Nevertheless, you agree to use the Services at your sole risk and that Apple shall have no liability to you for content that may be found to be offensive, indecent, or objectionable. (d) Certain Services may display, include or make available content, data, information, applications or materials from third parties (“Third Party Materials”) or provide links to certain third party web sites. By using the Services, you acknowledge and agree that Apple is not responsible for examining or evaluating the content, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, validity, copyright compliance, legality, decency, quality or any other aspect of such Third Party Materials or web sites. Apple, its officers, affiliates and subsidiaries do not warrant or endorse and do not assume and will not have any liability or responsibility to you or any other person for any third-party Services, Third Party Materials or web sites, or for any other materials, products, or services of third parties. Third Party Materials and links to other web sites are provided solely as a convenience to you. (e) Financial information displayed by any Services is for general informational purposes only and should not be relied upon as investment advice. Before executing any securities transaction based upon information obtained through the Services, you should consult with a financial or securities professional who is legally qualified to give financial or securities advice in your country or region. Location data provided by any Services is for basic navigational purposes only and is not intended to be relied upon in situations where precise location information is needed or where erroneous, inaccurate, time-delayed or incomplete location data may lead to death, personal injury, property or environmental damage. Neither Apple nor any of its content providers guarantees the availability, accuracy, completeness, reliability, or timeliness of stock information, location data or any other data displayed by any Services. (f) You agree that the Services contain proprietary content, information and material that is owned by Apple and/or its licensors, and is protected by applicable intellectual property and other laws, including but not limited to copyright. You agree that you will not use such proprietary content, information or materials other than for permitted use of the Services or in any manner that is inconsistent with the terms of this License or that infringes any intellectual property rights of a third party or Apple. No portion of the Services may be reproduced in any form or by any means. You agree not to modify, rent, lease, loan, sell, distribute, or create derivative works based on the Services, in any manner, and you shall not exploit the Services in any unauthorized way whatsoever, including but not limited to, using the Services to transmit any computer viruses, worms, trojan horses or other malware, or by trespass or burdening network capacity. You further agree not to use the Services in any manner to harass, abuse, stalk, threaten, defame or otherwise infringe or violate the rights of any other party, and that Apple is not in any way responsible for any such use by you, nor for any harassing, threatening, defamatory, offensive, infringing or illegal messages or transmissions that you may receive as a result of using any of the Services. (g) In addition, Services and Third Party Materials that may be accessed from, displayed on or linked to from the iOS Device are not available in all languages or in all countries or regions. Apple makes no representation that such Services and Materials are appropriate or available for use in any particular location. To the extent you choose to use or access such Services and Materials, you do so at your own initiative and are responsible for compliance with any applicable laws, including but not limited to applicable local laws. Apple and its licensors reserve the right to change, suspend, remove, or disable access to any Services at any time without notice. In no event will Apple be liable for the removal of or disabling of access to any such Services. Apple may also impose limits on the use of or access to certain Services, in any case and without notice or liability. 6. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will terminate automatically or otherwise cease to be effective without notice from Apple if you fail to comply with any term(s) of this License. Upon the termination of this License, you shall cease all use of the iOS Software. Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 and 13 of this License shall survive any such termination. 7. Disclaimer of Warranties. 7.1 If you are a customer who is a consumer (someone who uses the iOS Software outside of your trade, business or profession), you may have legal rights in your country of residence which would prohibit the following limitations from applying to you, and where prohibited they will not apply to you. To find out more about rights, you should contact a local consumer advice organization. 7.2 YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, USE OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. 7.3 TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND APPLE AND APPLE’S LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS “APPLE” FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 7 AND 8) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. 7.4 APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN OR SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, THAT ANY SERVICE WILL CONTINUE TO BE MADE AVAILABLE, THAT DEFECTS IN THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE WILL BE COMPATIBLE OR WORK WITH ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES. INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE MAY AFFECT THE USABILITY OF THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES. 7.5 YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE NOT INTENDED OR SUITABLE FOR USE IN SITUATIONS OR ENVIRONMENTS WHERE THE FAILURE OR TIME DELAYS OF, OR ERRORS OR INACCURACIES IN, THE CONTENT, DATA OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES COULD LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS. 7.6 NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY APPLE OR AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 8. Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES OR ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE iOS SOFTWARE, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall Apple’s total liability to you for all damages (other than as may be required by applicable law in cases involving personal injury) exceed the amount of two hundred and fifty dollars (U.S.$250.00). The foregoing limitations will apply even if the above stated remedy fails of its essential purpose. 9. Digital Certificates. The iOS Software contains functionality that allows it to accept digital certificates either issued from Apple or from third parties. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DECIDING WHETHER OR NOT TO RELY ON A CERTIFICATE WHETHER ISSUED BY APPLE OR A THIRD PARTY. YOUR USE OF DIGITAL CERTIFICATES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, SECURITY, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO DIGITAL CERTIFICATES. 10. Export Control. You may not use or otherwise export or re-export the iOS Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction(s) in which the iOS Software was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the iOS Software may not be exported or reexported (a) into any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department’s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Person’s List or Entity List. By using the iOS Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use the iOS Software for any purposes prohibited by United States law, including, without limitation, the development, design, manufacture or production of missiles, nuclear, chemical or biological weapons. 11. Government End Users. The iOS Software and related documentation are “Commercial Items”, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation”, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. 12. Controlling Law and Severability. This License will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, excluding its conflict of law principles. This License shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If you are a consumer based in the United Kingdom, this License will be governed by the laws of the jurisdiction of your residence. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect. 13. Complete Agreement; Governing Language. This License constitutes the entire agreement between you and Apple relating to the iOS Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by Apple. Any translation of this License is done for local requirements and in the event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this License shall govern, to the extent not prohibited by local law in your jurisdiction. 14. Third Party Acknowledgements. Portions of the iOS Software may utilize or include third party software and other copyrighted material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the electronic documentation for the iOS Software, and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. Use of the Google Safe Browsing Service is subject to the Google Terms of Service (http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and to Google’s Privacy Policy (http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html). 15. Use of MPEG-4; H.264/AVC Notice. (a) The iOS Software contains MPEG-4 video encoding and/or decoding functionality. The iOS Software is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG-4 video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. (b) The iOS Software contains AVC encoding and/or decoding functionality, commercial use of H.264/AVC requires additional licensing and the following provision applies: THE AVC FUNCTIONALITY IN THE iOS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED HEREIN ONLY FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR AVC VIDEO THAT WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. INFORMATION REGARDING OTHER USES AND LICENSES MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. 16. Yahoo Search Service Restrictions. The Yahoo Search Service available through Safari is licensed for use only in the following countries and regions: Argentina, Aruba, Australia, Austria, Barbados, Belgium, Bermuda, Brazil, Bulgaria, Canada, Cayman Islands, Chile, China, Colombia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Grenada, Guatemala, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India, Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Jamaica, Japan, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Puerto Rico, Romania, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Korea, Spain, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand, The Bahamas, Trinidad and Tobago, Turkey, UK, Uruguay, US and Venezuela. 17. Microsoft Exchange Notice. The Microsoft Exchange mail setting in the iOS Software is licensed only for over-the-air synchronization of information, such as email, contacts, calendar and tasks, between your iOS and Microsoft Exchange Server or other server software licensed by Microsoft to implement the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync protocol. EA0790 Rev. 8/15/11 NOTICES FROM APPLE If Apple needs to contact you about your product or account, you consent to receive the notices by email. You agree that any such notices that we send you electronically will satisfy any legal communication requirements. GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS Thank you for trying out the Google Maps for mobile software application! This page contains the terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions”) for Google Maps for mobile and the enterprise version of Google Maps for mobile. In order to use this software, including any third party software made available to you in conjunction with this software and/or the related service, (collectively referred to below as “Google Maps for mobile”) you agree to be bound by these Terms and Conditions, either on behalf of yourself or on behalf of your employer or other entity. If you are agreeing to be bound by these Terms and Conditions on behalf of your employer or other entity, you represent and warrant that you have full legal authority to bind your employer or such entity to these Terms and Conditions. If you don’t have the legal authority to bind, please press “No” when asked whether you agree to these Terms and Conditions, and do not proceed with use of this product. Additional Terms??Google Maps for mobile is designed to be used in conjunction with Google’s Maps services and other Google services. Accordingly, you agree and acknowledge that your use of Google Maps for mobile is also subject to (a) the specific terms of service for Google Maps (which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/terms_local. html) including the content notices applicable thereto (which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/legalnotices_local.html), (b) the general Google terms of service (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and (c) Google’s overall privacy policy (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/ privacypolicy.html), as well as specific privacy policies, such as the Google Maps for mobile privacy policy included with this application, such provisions being hereby incorporated into these Terms and Conditions by reference. To the extent that there is any inconsistency or conflict between such additional terms and these Terms and Conditions, the provisions of these Terms and Conditions take precedence. Network Charges??Google does not charge for downloading or using Google Maps for mobile, but depending on your plan and your carrier or provider, your carrier or other provider may charge you for downloading Google Maps for mobile or for use of your mobile phone when you access information or other Google services through Google Maps for mobile. Non-Commercial Use Only??Google Maps for mobile is made available to you for your non-commercial use only. This means that you may use it for your personal use only: you may use it at work or at home, to search for anything you want, subject to the terms set out in these Terms and Conditions. You need to obtain Google’s permission first, which you can do by contacting mobile-support@google.com, if you want to sell Google Maps for mobile or any information, services, or software associated with or derived from it, or if you want to modify, copy, license, or create derivative works from Google Maps for mobile. Unless you have our prior written consent, you agree not to modify, adapt, translate, prepare derivative works from, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise attempt to derive source code from Google Maps for mobile. Furthermore, you may not use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could damage, disable, overburden, or impair Google’s services (e.g., you may not use the Google Maps for mobile in an automated manner), nor may you use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could interfere with any other party’s use and enjoyment of Google’s services. If you have comments on Google Maps for mobile or ideas on how to improve it, please email mobile-support@google.com. Please note that by doing so, you also grant Google and third parties permission to use and incorporate your ideas or comments into Google Maps for mobile (or third party software) without further notice or compensation. Intellectual Property??As between you and Google, you agree and acknowledge that Google owns all rights, title and interest in and to Google Maps for mobile, including without limitation all associated Intellectual Property Rights. “Intellectual Property Rights” means any and all rights existing from time to time under patent law, copyright law, trade secret law, trademark law, unfair competition law, and any and all other proprietary rights, and any and all applications, renewals, extensions and restorations thereof, now or hereafter in force and effect worldwide. You agree to not remove, obscure, or alter Google’s or any third party’s copyright notice, trademarks, or other proprietary rights notices affixed to or contained within or accessed in conjunction with or through the Google Maps for mobile. Disclaimer of Warranties??Google and any third party who makes its software available in conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile disclaim any responsibility for any harm resulting from your use of Google Maps for mobile and/or any third party software accessed in conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile. GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” WITH NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. GOOGLE AND SUCH THIRD PARTIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. GOOGLE AND ANY SUCH THIRD PARTIES DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE SECURITY, RELIABILITY, TIMELINESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE AND SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE THAT YOU DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND THAT YOU WILL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO YOUR COMPUTER OR MOBILE DEVICE SYSTEM OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOAD OR USE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE AND JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. Limitation of Liability??UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL GOOGLE OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHO MAKE THEIR SOFTWARE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE BE LIABLE TO ANY USER ON ACCOUNT OF THAT USER’S USE OR MISUSE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO PREVENT RECOVERY OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, AND PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), OR OTHERWISE, (EVEN IF GOOGLE AND/ OR A THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDER HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES). SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY WHETHER THE DAMAGES ARISE FROM USE OR MISUSE OF AND RELIANCE ON GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR ON PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, FROM INABILITY TO USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, OR FROM THE INTERRUPTION, SUSPENSION, OR TERMINATION OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE (INCLUDING SUCH DAMAGES INCURRED BY THIRD PARTIES). SUCH LIMITATION SHALL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING A FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY AND TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Miscellaneous Provisions??These Terms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions of California or your actual state or country of residence. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion of these Terms and Conditions to be unenforceable, the remainder of these Terms and Conditions will continue in full force and effect. These Terms and Conditions constitute the entire agreement between you and Google with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede and replace all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. Any waiver of any provision of these Terms and Conditions will be effective only if in writing and signed by Google. September 2007 YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS http://www.youtube.com/t/terms Apple One (1) Year Limited Warranty—iPhone For Apple Branded Products Only HOW CONSUMER LAW RELATES TO THIS WARRANTY. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR BY COUNTRY OR PROVINCE). OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE DOES NOT EXCLUDE, LIMIT OR SUSPEND OTHER RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE, INCLUDING THOSE THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE NONCONFORMITY OF A SALES CONTRACT. FOR A FULL UNDERSTANDING OF YOUR RIGHTS YOU SHOULD CONSULT THE LAWS OF YOUR COUNTRY, PROVINCE OR STATE. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS THAT MAY AFFECT CONSUMER LAW. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS WARRANTY AND THE REMEDIES SET FORTH ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, REMEDIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. APPLE DISCLAIMS ALL STATUTORY AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND WARRANTIES AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. IN SO FAR AS SUCH WARRANTIES CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED, APPLE LIMITS THE DURATION AND REMEDIES OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE DURATION OF THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY AND, AT APPLE’S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT SERVICES DESCRIBED BELOW. SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY (OR CONDITION) MAY LAST, SO THE LIMITATION DESCRIBED ABOVE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.WHAT IS COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? Apple warrants the Applebranded hardware product and accessories contained in the original packaging (“Apple Product”) against defects in materials and workmanship when used normally in accordance with Apple’s published guidelines for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of original retail purchase by the end-user purchaser (“Warranty Period”). Apple’s published guidelines include but are not limited to information contained in technical specifications, user manuals and service communications. WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? This warranty does not apply to any non-Apple branded hardware products or any software, even if packaged or sold with Apple hardware. Manufacturers, suppliers, or publishers, other than Apple, may provide their own warranties to you but Apple, in so far as permitted by law, provides their products “AS IS”. Software distributed by Apple with or without the Apple brand (including, but not limited to system software) is not covered by this warranty. Please refer to the licensing agreement accompanying the software for details of your rights with respect to its use. Apple does not warrant that the operation of the Apple Product will be uninterrupted or error-free. Apple is not responsible for damage arising from failure to follow instructions relating to the Apple Product’s use. This warranty does not apply: (a) to consumable parts, such as batteries or protective coatings that are designed to diminish over time, unless failure has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (b) to cosmetic damage, including but not limited to scratches, dents and broken plastic on ports; (c) to damage caused by use with another product; (d) to damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, liquid contact, fire, earthquake or other external cause; (e) to damage caused by operating the Apple Product outside Apple’s published guidelines; (f) to damage caused by service (including upgrades and expansions) performed by anyone who is not a representative of Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider (“AASP”); (g) to an Apple Product that has been modified to alter functionality or capability without the written permission of Apple; (h) to defects caused by normal wear and tear or otherwise due to the normal aging of the Apple Product, or (i) if any serial number has been removed or defaced from the Apple Product. IMPORTANT RESTRICTION. Apple may restrict warranty service to the country where Apple or its Authorized Distributors originally sold the Apple Product. YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES. YOU SHOULD MAKE PERIODIC BACKUP COPIES OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT’S STORAGE MEDIA TO PROTECT THE CONTENTS AND AS A PRECAUTION AGAINST POSSIBLE OPERATIONAL FAILURES. Before receiving warranty service, Apple or its agents may require that you furnish proof of purchase details, respond to questions designed to assist with diagnosing potential issues and follow Apple’s procedures for obtaining warranty service. Before submitting your Apple Product for warranty service you should maintain a separate backup copy of the contents of its storage media, remove all personal information that you want to protect and disable all security passwords.DURING WARRANTY SERVICE THE CONTENTS OF THE STORAGE MEDIA WILL BE DELETED AND REFORMATTED. APPLE AND ITS AGENTS ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF SOFTWARE PROGRAMS, DATA OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE STORAGE MEDIA OR ANY OTHER PART OF THE APPLE PRODUCT SERVICED. Following warranty service your Apple Product or a replacement product will be returned to you as your Apple Product was configured when originally purchased, subject to applicable updates. Apple may install system software updates as part of warranty service that will prevent the Apple Product from reverting to an earlier version of the system software. Third party applications installed on the Apple Product may not be compatible or work with the Apple Product as a result of the system software update. You will be responsible for reinstalling all other software programs, data and information. Recovery and reinstallation of other software programs, data and information are not covered under this warranty. Important: Do not open the Apple Product. Opening the Apple Product may cause damage that is not covered by this warranty. Only Apple or an AASP should perform service on this Apple Product. WHAT WILL APPLE DO IN THE EVENT THE WARRANTY IS BREACHED? If during the Warranty Period you submit a valid claim to Apple or an AASP, Apple will, at its option, (i) repair the Apple Product using new or previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance and reliability, (ii) replace the Apple Product with a product that is at least functionally equivalent to the Apple Product and is formed from new and/or previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance and reliability, or (iii) exchange the Apple Product for a refund of your purchase price. Apple may request that you replace certain user-installable parts or products. A replacement part or product, including a user-installable part that has been installed in accordance with instructions provided by Apple, assumes the remaining warranty of the Apple Product or ninety (90) days from the date of replacement or repair, whichever provides longer coverage for you. When a product or part is replaced or a refund provided, any replacement item becomes your property and the replaced or refunded item becomes Apple’s property. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please access and review the online help resources described below before seeking warranty service. If the Apple Product is still not functioning properly after making use of these resources, please contact an Apple representative or, if applicable, an Apple owned retail store (“Apple Retail”) or AASP, using the information provided below. An Apple representative or AASP will help determine whether your Apple Product requires service and, if it does, will inform you how Apple will provide it. When contacting Apple via telephone, other charges may apply depending on your location. Online information with details on obtaining warranty service is provided below. WARRANTY SERVICE OPTIONS. Apple will provide warranty service through one or more of the following options:(i) Carry-in service. You may return your Apple Product to an Apple Retail or AASP location offering carry-in service. Service will be performed at the location, or Apple Retail or an AASP may send your Apple Product to an Apple Repair Service (“ARS”) location to be serviced. Once you are notified that service is complete, you will promptly retrieve the Apple Product from the Apple Retail or AASP location, or the Apple Product will be sent directly to your location from the ARS location. (ii) Mail-in service. If Apple determines that your Apple Product is eligible for mail-in service, Apple will send you prepaid waybills and if applicable, packaging material, so that you may ship your Apple Product to an ARS or AASP location in accordance with Apple’s instructions. Once service is complete, the ARS or AASP location will return the Apple Product to you. Apple will pay for shipping to and from your location if all instructions are followed. (iii) Do-it-yourself (DIY) parts service. DIY parts service allows you to service your own Apple Product. If DIY parts service is available in the circumstances, the following process will apply. (a) Service where Apple requires return of the replaced product or part. Apple may require a credit card authorization as security for the retail price of the replacement product or part and applicable shipping costs. If you are unable to provide credit card authorization, DIY parts service may not be available to you and Apple will offer alternative arrangements for service. Apple will ship a replacement product or part to you with installation instructions, if applicable, and any requirements for the return of the replaced product or part. If you follow the instructions, Apple will cancel the credit card authorization, so you will not be charged for the product or part and shipping to and from your location. If you fail to return the replaced product or part as instructed or return a replaced product or part that is ineligible for service, Apple will charge your credit card for the authorized amount. (b) Service where Apple does not require return of the replaced product or part. Apple will ship you free of charge a replacement product or part accompanied by instructions on installation, if applicable, and any requirements for the disposal of the replaced product or part. (c) Apple is not responsible for any labor costs you incur relating to DIY parts service. Should you require further assistance, contact Apple at the telephone number listed below. Apple reserves the right to change the method by which Apple may provide warranty service to you, and your Apple Product’s eligibility to receive a particular method of service. Service will be limited to the options available in the country where service is requested. Service options, parts availability and response times may vary according to country. You may be responsible for shipping and handling charges if the Apple Product cannot be serviced in the country it is in. If you seek service in a country that is not the original country of purchase, you will comply with all applicable import and export laws and regulations and be responsible for all custom duties, V.A.T. and other associated taxes and charges. Where international service is available, Apple may repair or replace products and parts with comparable products and parts that comply with local standards.LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONDITION, OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE; LOSS OF REVENUE; LOSS OF ACTUAL OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS ON CONTRACTS); LOSS OF THE USE OF MONEY; LOSS OF ANTICIPATED SAVINGS; LOSS OF BUSINESS; LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY; LOSS OF GOODWILL; LOSS OF REPUTATION; LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO, COMPROMISE OR CORRUPTION OF DATA; OR ANY INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE HOWSOEVER CAUSED INCLUDING THE REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, PROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE APPLE PRODUCT OR ANY FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE CONFIDENTIALITY OF INFORMATION STORED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CLAIMS, OR ANY STATUTORY LIABILITY FOR INTENTIONAL AND GROSS NEGLIGENT ACTS AND/OR OMISSIONS. APPLE DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION THAT IT WILL BE ABLE TO REPAIR ANY APPLE PRODUCT UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR REPLACE THE APPLE PRODUCT WITHOUT RISK TO OR LOSS OF INFORMATION STORED IN THE APPLE PRODUCT. SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. PRIVACY. Apple will maintain and use customer information in accordance with the Apple Customer Privacy Policy available at www. apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy. GENERAL. No Apple reseller, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty. If any term is held to be illegal or unenforceable, the legality or enforceability of the remaining terms shall not be affected or impaired. This warranty is governed by and construed under the laws of the country in which the Apple Product purchase took place. Apple is identified at the end of this document according to the country or region in which the Apple Product purchase took place. Apple or its successor in title is the warrantor under this warranty. ONLINE INFORMATION. More information of the following is available online: International Support Information www.apple.com/support/country Authorized Distributors www.apple.com/iphone/countries Apple Authorized Service Providers support.apple.com/kb/HT1937 Apple Retail Store www.apple.com/retail/storelistApple Support and Service support.apple.com/kb/HE57 Apple Complimentary Support www.apple.com/support/country/index.html?dest=complimentary Warranty Obligor for Region or Country of Purchase Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address Americas Brazil Apple Computer Brasil Ltda Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2 Andar, Sao Paulo, SP Brasil 01454-901 Canada Apple Canada Inc. 7495 Birchmount Rd.; Markham, Ontario, Canada; L3R 5G2 Canada Mexico Apple Operations México S.A. de C.V. Prolongación Paseo de la Reforma #600, Suite 132 Colonia Peña Blanca, Santa Fé Delegación Álvaro Obregón México D. F., CP 01210, México United States and Other Americas Countries Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA Europe, Middle East and Africa All countries Apple Sales International Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill, Cork, Republic of Ireland Asia Pacific Australia; New Zealand; Fiji, Papua New Guinea; Vanuatu Apple Pty. Limited. PO Box A2629, Sydney South, NSW 1235, Australia Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited 2401 Tower One, Times Square, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong India Apple India Private Ltd. 19th Floor, Concorde Tower C, UB City No 24, Vittal Mallya Road, Bangalore 560-001, India Japan Apple Japan Inc. 3-20-2 Nishishinjuku, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo, Japan Korea Apple Korea Ltd. 3201, ASEM Tower; 159, Samsung-dong, Gangnam-Gu; Seoul 135-798, Republic of Korea Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia, Guam, Indonesia, Laos, Singapore, Malaysia, Nepal, Pakistan, Philippines, Sri Lanka, Vietnam Apple South Asia Pte. Ltd. 7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64 Singapore 569086Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address People’s Republic of China Apple Computer Trading (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Room 1815, No. 1 Jilong Road, Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone, Shanghai 200131 China Thailand Apple South Asia (Thailand) Limited 25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam Tower, 989 Rama 1 Road, Pataumwan, Bangkok, 10330 Taiwan Apple Asia LLC 16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road. Sec. 2, Taipei, Taiwan 106 Other Asian Pacific Countries Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA iPhone US Warranty v3.0© 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, Safari, Siri, the Made for iPod logo, and the Works with iPhone logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The Made for iPhone logo and iMessage are trademarks of Apple Inc. iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. 034-5992-A Printed in XXXX iPhone User Guide For iPhone OS 3.1 SoftwareContents 9 Chapter 1: Getting Started 9 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone 9 What You Need 10 Activating iPhone 10 Installing the SIM Card 10 Registering iPhone 11 Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver 11 Syncing 16 Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts 18 Installing Configuration Profiles 19 Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer 20 Chapter 2: Basics 20 iPhone at a Glance 23 Home Screen 26 Buttons 28 Touchscreen 31 Onscreen Keyboard 37 Searching 38 Voice Control 39 Stereo Headset 40 Connecting to the Internet 43 Battery 45 Security Features 46 Cleaning iPhone 46 Restarting and Resetting iPhone 47 Chapter 3: Phone 47 Phone Calls 51 Visual Voicemail 54 Contacts 54 Favorites 54 Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch 255 Bluetooth Devices 56 International Calls 59 Chapter 4: Mail 59 Setting Up Email Accounts 59 Sending Email 60 Checking and Reading Email 64 Searching Email 64 Organizing Email 66 Chapter 5: Safari 66 Viewing Webpages 69 Searching the Web 69 Bookmarks 70 Web Clips 71 Chapter 6: iPod 71 Getting Music, Video, and More 73 Music and Other Audio 81 Videos 84 Setting a Sleep Timer 85 Changing the Browse Buttons 86 Chapter 7: Messages 86 Sending and Receiving Messages 88 Sharing Photos and Videos 88 Sending Voice Memos 89 Editing Conversations 89 Using Contact Information and Links 90 Managing Previews and Alerts 91 Chapter 8: Calendar 91 About Calendar 91 Syncing Calendars 92 Viewing Your Calendar 93 Searching Calendars 93 Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars 94 Adding Calendar Events to iPhone 95 Responding to Meeting Invitations 96 Alerts 97 Chapter 9: Photos 97 About Photos 97 Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer Contents 398 Viewing Photos and Videos 99 Slideshows 100 Sharing Photos and Videos 102 Assigning a Photo to a Contact 102 Wallpaper 103 Chapter 10: Camera 103 About Camera 104 Taking Photos and Recording Videos 105 Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos 105 Trimming Videos 106 Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer 107 Chapter 11: YouTube 107 Finding and Viewing Videos 108 Controlling Video Playback 109 Managing Videos 109 Getting More Information 110 Using YouTube Account Features 111 Changing the Browse Buttons 111 Sending Videos to YouTube 112 Chapter 12: Stocks 112 Viewing Stock Quotes 113 Getting More Information 114 Chapter 13: Maps 114 Finding and Viewing Locations 119 Bookmarking Locations 119 Getting Directions 121 Showing Traffic Conditions 121 Finding and Contacting Businesses 123 Chapter 14: Weather 123 Viewing Weather Summaries 124 Getting More Weather Information 125 Chapter 15: Voice Memos 125 Recording Voice Memos 126 Listening to Voice Memos 127 Managing Voice Memos 128 Trimming Voice Memos 128 Sharing Voice Memos 129 Syncing Voice Memos 4 Contents130 Chapter 16: Notes 130 Writing and Reading Notes 131 Searching Notes 131 Emailing Notes 131 Syncing Notes 132 Chapter 17: Clock 132 World Clocks 133 Alarms 133 Stopwatch 134 Timer 135 Chapter 18: Calculator 135 Using the Calculator 135 Standard Memory Functions 136 Scientific Calculator Keys 138 Chapter 19: Settings 138 Airplane Mode 139 Wi-Fi 140 VPN 140 Notifications 141 Carrier 141 Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch 142 Brightness 142 Wallpaper 142 General 150 Mail, Contacts, Calendars 153 Phone 156 Safari 157 Messages 158 iPod 159 Photos 159 Store 159 Nike + iPod 160 Chapter 20: iTunes Store 160 About the iTunes Store 161 Finding Music, Videos, and More 162 Purchasing Ringtones 162 Purchasing Music or Audiobooks 163 Purchasing or Renting Videos 164 Streaming or Downloading Podcasts Contents 5165 Checking Download Status 165 Syncing Purchased Content 165 Changing the Browse Buttons 166 Viewing Account Information 166 Verifying Purchases 167 Chapter 21: App Store 167 About the App Store 167 Browsing and Searching 169 Info Screen 170 Downloading Applications 171 Deleting Applications 171 Writing Reviews 172 Updating Applications 172 Syncing Purchased Applications 173 Chapter 22: Compass 173 Getting Compass Readings 174 Compass and Maps 176 Chapter 23: Contacts 176 About Contacts 176 Adding Contacts 177 Searching Contacts 178 Managing Contacts on iPhone 180 Chapter 24: Nike + iPod 180 Activating Nike + iPod 181 Additional Nike + iPod Settings 182 Chapter 25: Accessibility 182 Accessibility Features 183 VoiceOver 189 Zoom 190 White on Black 190 Mono Audio 190 Speak Auto-text 191 Triple-click Home 191 Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features 193 Appendix A: Troubleshooting 193 Apple iPhone Support Site 193 General 195 iTunes and Syncing 6 Contents196 Phone and Voicemail 197 Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts 200 Sound, Music, and Video 201 iTunes Stores 201 Removing the SIM Card 202 Backing Up iPhone 204 Updating and Restoring iPhone Software 205 Appendix B: Other Resources 205 Safety, Software, and Service Information 206 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone 206 Disposal and Recycling Information 207 Apple and the Environment 208 Index Contents 7Getting Started 1 · WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and safety information in the iPhone Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone before using iPhone. Viewing the User Guide on iPhone The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at help.apple.com/iphone. View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark. Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages. View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want. What You Need To use iPhone, you need: • A wireless service plan with a carrier that provides iPhone service in your area • A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems: • Mac OS X version 10.4.11 or later; version 10.5.7 or later is required for syncing Notes and for using iPhone as a modem • Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later • Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, or Ultimate edition • Display resolution on your computer set to 1024 x 768 or higher • iTunes 8.2 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download (iTunes 9 or later required for certain features) • QuickTime 7.6.2 or later (for playing videos recorded by iPhone 3GS on your computer) 9• An iTunes Store account (for purchases from the iTunes Store or App Store) • An Internet connection for your computer (broadband recommended) Activating iPhone Before you can use any of iPhone’s features, you must activate iPhone by signing up for a service plan with an iPhone service carrier in your area and registering iPhone with the network. Your iPhone may have been activated at the time of purchase. If it isn’t activated, contact your iPhone retailer or cellular service provider. For more information about iPhone, go to www.apple.com/iphone. Installing the SIM Card If your SIM card was not preinstalled, you must install the SIM card before you can use iPhone. SIM card SIM tray SIM eject tool Install the SIM card: 1 Insert the end of the SIM eject tool into the hole on the SIM tray. Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out. If you don’t have a SIM eject tool, you can use the end of a paper clip. 2 Pull out the SIM tray and place the SIM card in the tray. The angled corner of the SIM ensures that the card fits only the correct way in the tray. 3 With the tray aligned as shown, carefully replace the SIM tray containing the SIM card in iPhone. Registering iPhone Registering iPhone with iTunes enables iTunes to identify your iPhone when it’s connected to your computer and help you manage its contents. You can then sync information with your computer and media from iTunes, and create backups of iPhone’s contents and settings. You can create an iTunes Store account, or specify an existing account, to enable purchases with iPhone. iTunes also records iPhone’s serial number in the event you need it for service or in case of loss. 10 Chapter 1 Getting StartedRegister iPhone: 1 Download and install the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download. 2 Connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 port on your Mac or PC using the cable that came with iPhone. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes to register iPhone and sync iPhone with your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks on your computer, and with music, video, and other content from your iTunes library. In the Set Up Your iPhone screen, select “Automatically sync contacts, calendars and bookmarks” to configure those items to sync automatically when you connect iPhone to your computer. You can also customize your sync settings in iTunes. See the following section. Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver If you’re visually impaired, VoiceOver (available only on iPhone 3GS) can help you set up iPhone without a sighted assistant. VoiceOver describes aloud what appears on the screen, so you can use iPhone without seeing it. When you connect iPhone to your computer, iTunes detects whether you’re using a compatible screen reader on your computer, such as VoiceOver on a Mac or GW Micro Window-Eyes on a PC, and automatically enables VoiceOver on iPhone. A sighted user can also enable VoiceOver on iPhone for you, using Accessibility settings. See “Using VoiceOver” on page 187. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. Syncing With iPhone, you can have easy access to important information on your computer, including your contacts, calendars, and even your browser bookmarks, as well as to music, video, and other content in your iTunes library. About Syncing Syncing copies information and content between iPhone and your computer, keeping it current and up-to-date, whether you make changes on iPhone or on your computer. Chapter 1 Getting Started 11iTunes lets you specify the information and content on your computer that you want to sync with iPhone. By default, iTunes syncs automatically with iPhone whenever you connect iPhone to your computer. You can also set up iPhone to sync your MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange accounts, over the air. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts” on page 16. Syncing with iTunes You can set iTunes to sync any or all of the following: • Contacts—names, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and more • Calendars—appointments and events • Email account settings • Webpage bookmarks • Notes (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC) • Ringtones • Music and audiobooks • Photos and videos (in your computer’s photo application or folder) • iTunes U collections • Podcasts • Movies, TV shows, and music videos • Applications downloaded from the iTunes Store You can adjust sync settings whenever iPhone is connected to your computer. Ringtones, music, audiobooks, podcasts, iTunes U collections, videos, and applications can be synced from your iTunes library. If you don’t already have content in iTunes, the iTunes Store (available in some countries) makes it easy to preview and download content to iTunes. You can also add music to your iTunes library from your CDs. To learn about iTunes and the iTunes Store, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Contacts, calendars, notes, and webpage bookmarks are synced with applications on your computer, as described in the following section. Contacts and calendars are synced both ways between your computer and iPhone. New entries or changes you make on iPhone are synced to your computer, and vice versa. Notes and webpage bookmarks are also synced both ways. Photos and videos (Mac only) can be synced from an application or from a folder. Email account settings are synced only from your computer’s email application to iPhone. This allows you to customize your email accounts on iPhone without affecting email account settings on your computer. 12 Chapter 1 Getting StartedNote: You can also set up email accounts directly on iPhone. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts.” Purchases you make on iPhone in the iTunes Store or the App Store are synced back to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and applications directly from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPhone. You can set iPhone to sync with only a portion of what’s on your computer. For example, you might want to sync only a group of contacts from your address book, or only unwatched video podcasts. Important: You should be logged in to your own computer user account before connecting iPhone. Set up iTunes syncing: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer, and open iTunes (if it doesn’t open automatically). 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Configure the sync settings in each of the settings panes. See the following section for descriptions of the panes. 4 Click Apply in the lower-right corner of the screen. By default, “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected. iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes The following sections provide an overview of each of the iPhone settings panes. For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Summary Pane Select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” to have iTunes sync iPhone automatically whenever you connect it to your computer. Deselect this option if you want to sync only by clicking the Sync button in iTunes. For more information about preventing automatic syncing, see “Preventing Automatic Syncing” on page 15. Chapter 1 Getting Started 13Select “Sync only checked songs and videos” if you want iTunes to skip unchecked items in your iTunes library when syncing. Select “Manually manage music and videos” to turn off automatic syncing in the Music and Video settings panes. See “Manually Managing Content” on page 72. Select “Encrypt iPhone backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a padlock icon, and a password is required to restore the information to iPhone. See “Backing Up iPhone” on page 202. Click Configure Universal Access to turn on Accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS). See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182. Info Pane The Info pane lets you configure the sync settings for your contacts, calendars, email accounts, and web browser. • Contacts Sync contacts with applications such as Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, and Google Contacts on a Mac, or with Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Windows Vista Contacts, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync contacts with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync contacts with only one application at a time.) If you sync with Yahoo! Address Book, you only need to click Configure to enter your new login information when you change your Yahoo! ID or password after you’ve set up syncing. • Calendars Sync calendars from applications such as iCal on a Mac, or from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync calendars with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync calendars with only one application at a time.) • Mail Accounts Sync email account settings from Mail on a Mac, and from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 or Outlook Express on a PC. Account settings are transferred only from your computer to iPhone. Changes you make to an email account on iPhone don’t affect the account on your computer. Note: The password for your Yahoo! email account isn’t saved on your computer, so it can’t be synced and must be entered on iPhone. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap your Yahoo! account, and enter the password. • Web Browser You can sync bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Notes Sync notes in the Notes application on iPhone with notes in Mail on a Mac or with Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you must have Mac OS version 10.5.7 or later installed to sync notes.) • Advanced These options let you replace the information on iPhone with the information on your computer during the next sync. Applications Pane Use the Applications pane to specify which App Store applications to sync on iPhone, or to arrange your Home screen (requires iTunes 9 or later). Any applications downloaded directly to iPhone are automatically backed up to your iTunes library when you sync. If you manually delete an application on iPhone, you can reinstall it from this pane as long as it was previously synced. Ringtones Pane Use the Ringtones pane to select the ringtones you want to sync to iPhone. Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U Panes Use these panes to specify the media you want to sync. You can sync all music, movies, TV shows, podcasts, and iTunes U collections, or select the content you want on iPhone. If you want to watch rented movies on iPhone, transfer them to iPhone using the Movies pane in iTunes. If there’s not enough room on iPhone for all the media you’ve specified, iTunes can create a special playlist and set it to sync with iPhone. Note: The iTunes U pane appears only in iTunes 9 or later. In earlier versions of iTunes, iTunes U content appeared in the Podcasts pane. Photos Pane You can sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 required) with iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture on a Mac; or with Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later on a PC. You can also sync photos and videos in any folder on your computer that contains images. Preventing Automatic Syncing You can prevent iPhone from syncing automatically when you connect iPhone to a computer other than the one you usually sync with. Turn off automatic syncing for iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar, then click the Summary tab. Deselect “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.” You can still sync by clicking the Sync button. Chapter 1 Getting Started 15Prevent automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods: In iTunes choose iTunes > Preferences (on a Mac) or Edit > Preferences (on a PC), click Devices, and select “Disable automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods.” If this checkbox is selected, iPhone won’t sync automatically, even if “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected in the Summary pane. Prevent automatic syncing one time, without changing settings: Open iTunes, connect iPhone to your computer, then press and hold Command-Option (on a Mac) or Shift-Control (on a PC) until you see iPhone appear in the sidebar. Sync manually: In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar, then click Sync in the bottomright corner of the window. Or, if you’ve changed any sync settings, click Apply. Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems. Setting Up Accounts MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange provide not only email, but contact and calendar information that can be synced to iPhone automatically, over the air. MobileMe can also sync your bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. You set up MobileMe, Exchange, and other email accounts directly on iPhone. iPhone uses the Exchange ActiveSync protocol to sync email, calendars, and contacts with the following versions of Microsoft Exchange: • Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 • Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1 For many popular email accounts, iPhone automatically enters most of the settings for you. If you don’t already have an email account, you can get a free account online at www.yahoo.com, www.google.com, or www.aol.com. You can also try MobileMe, free for 60 days. Go to www.me.com. Set up an account on iPhone: 1 From the iPhone Home screen, tap Settings. 2 Tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account. 3 Tap an account type: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email 16 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other 4 Enter your account information and tap Save. Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you need. Exchange accounts: Enter your complete email address, domain (optional), user name, password, and a description. The description can be whatever you like. iPhone supports Microsoft’s Autodiscovery service, which uses your user name and password to determine the address of the Exchange server. If the server’s address can’t be determined, you’re asked to enter it. (Enter the complete address in the Server field.) Once you connect to the Exchange server, you may be prompted to change your passcode to match the policies set on the server. 5 If you’re setting up a MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange account, tap the items you want to use on iPhone—mail, contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only). MobileMe includes the Find My iPhone feature that helps you locate iPhone if it’s been lost or stolen, and remotely lock, set a passcode, or erase the information on iPhone if necessary. See “Security Features” on page 45. If you enable Find My iPhone for your MobileMe account, make sure that Push is turned on for Fetch New Data. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, and if Push is off, tap to turn it on. For Exchange accounts, you can set how many days of email you want to sync to iPhone. If you already have contact or calendar information on iPhone when you enable the account, iPhone asks what you want to do with existing information on iPhone. You can choose to merge the existing data into your MobileMe or Exchange account. If you don’t merge the data, you can choose to keep it in a separate account on iPhone (the account is labeled “On My iPhone”), or delete it. Existing bookmarks can only be merged or deleted. Similarly, when you disable contacts or calendars in an MobileMe or Exchange account, or if you delete an account, iPhone asks if you want to keep information or delete it. You can add contacts using an LDAP account if your company or organization supports it. See “Adding Contacts” on page 176. You can subscribe to CalDAV or iCal (.ics) calendars. See “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93. Chapter 1 Getting Started 17Push Accounts MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and Yahoo! Mail are known as “push” accounts. When new information is available, such as the arrival of an email message, the information is automatically delivered (pushed) to iPhone. (In contrast, “fetch” services require your email software to periodically check with your service provider to see if new messages have arrived, and then request them to be delivered.) MobileMe and Exchange also use push to sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) if you have those items selected in the account settings. Synced information is transferred automatically over your wireless connection; you don’t need to connect iPhone to your computer to sync. If you don’t have a cellular connection, iPhone can receive pushed data over a Wi-Fi connection when iPhone is awake (the screen is on, or iPhone is connected to your computer or a power adapter). Installing Configuration Profiles If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and other items on iPhone by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles provide a way for system administrators to quickly set up your iPhone to work with the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a configuration profile might set up your iPhone to access the Microsoft Exchange servers at work, enabling iPhone to access your Exchange email, calendars, and contacts. Configuration profiles can configure multiple settings on iPhone all at once. For example, a configuration profile can set up your Microsoft Exchange account, VPN account, and certificates for secure access to your company’s network and information. A configuration profile may turn on the Passcode Lock, requiring you to create and enter a passcode for using iPhone. Your system administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email or by putting them on a secure webpage. A system administrator may also install a configuration profile directly on iPhone for you. Install a configuration profile: 1 Using iPhone, open the email message or download the configuration profile from the website provided by your system administrator. 2 When the configuration profile opens, tap Install. 3 Enter passwords and other information as requested. Important: You may be asked to verify that the configuration profile is trusted. If in doubt, consult your system administrator before installing a configuration profile. 18 Chapter 1 Getting StartedSettings provided by a configuration profile cannot be altered. If you want to change these settings, you must first remove the configuration profile or install an updated configuration profile. Remove a profile: In Settings, choose General > Profile, then select the configuration profile and tap Remove. Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information installed by the configuration profile from iPhone. Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer Unless iPhone is syncing with your computer, you can disconnect it from your computer at any time. When iPhone is syncing with your computer, iPhone shows “Sync in progress.” If you disconnect iPhone before it finishes syncing, some data may not get transferred. When iPhone finishes syncing, iTunes shows “iPhone sync is complete.” Cancel a sync: Drag the slider on iPhone. If you get a call during a sync, the sync is canceled automatically and you can unplug iPhone to answer the call. Connect iPhone after the call to finish syncing. Chapter 1 Getting Started 19Basics 2 iPhone at a Glance Headset jack Receiver Ring/Silent switch Camera (on back) SIM card tray Volume buttons Touchscreen Speaker Dock connector Home button Sleep/Wake button Microphone Application icons Status bar Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPhone you have and whether you have rearranged its icons. iPhone Included Accessories Dock Connector to USB Cable Stereo headset USB power adapter SIM eject tool 20Item What you can do with it Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (iPhone 3GS) iPhone Stereo Headset (iPhone 3G) Listen to music, videos, and phone calls. Use the built-in microphone to talk. Press the center button to answer or end a call. When listening to iPod, press the button once to play or pause a song, or press twice quickly to skip to the next track. Use the + and – buttons to adjust the volume (iPhone 3GS only). Press and hold the center button to use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only). Dock Connector to USB Cable Use the cable to connect iPhone to your computer to sync and charge. The cable can be used with the optional dock or plugged directly into iPhone. USB power adapter Connect the power adapter to iPhone using the included cable, then plug it into a standard power outlet to charge iPhone. SIM eject tool Eject the SIM card. Status Icons The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPhone: Status icon What it means Cell signal Shows whether you’re in range of the cellular network and can make and receive calls. The more bars, the stronger the signal. If there’s no signal, the bars are replaced with “No service.” Airplane mode Shows that airplane mode is on—you cannot use the phone, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth® devices. Non-wireless features are available. See “Airplane Mode” on page 138. 3G Shows that your carrier’s 3G network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over 3G. Available on iPhone 3G or later. See “How iPhone Connects to the Internet” on page 40. Chapter 2 Basics 21Status icon What it means EDGE Shows that your carrier’s EDGE network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over EDGE. See “How iPhone Connects to the Internet” on page 40. GPRS Shows that your carrier’s GPRS network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over GPRS. See “How iPhone Connects to the Internet” on page 40. Wi-Fi Shows that iPhone is connected to the Internet over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger the connection. See “Joining a Wi-Fi Network” on page 41. Network activity Shows over-the-air syncing or other network activity. Some third-party applications may also use this icon to indicate an active process. Call Forwarding Shows that Call Forwarding is set up on iPhone. See “Call Forwarding” on page 154. VPN Shows that you’re connected to a network using VPN. See “Network” on page 143. Lock Shows that iPhone is locked. See “Sleep/Wake Button” on page 26. TTY Shows that iPhone is set to work with a TTY machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine” on page 154. Play Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is playing. See “Playing Songs” on page 73. Alarm Shows that an alarm is set. See “Alarms” on page 133. Bluetooth Blue or white icon: Bluetooth is on and a device, such as a headset or car kit, is connected. Gray icon: Bluetooth is on, but no device is connected. No icon: Bluetooth is turned off. See “Bluetooth Devices” on page 55. Battery Shows battery level or charging status. See “Battery” on page 43. 22 Chapter 2 BasicsHome Screen Press the Home button at any time to go to the Home screen, which contains your iPhone applications. Tap any application icon to get started. iPhone Applications The following applications are included with iPhone: Phone Make calls, with quick access to recent callers, favorites, and all your contacts. Dial manually using the numeric keypad. Or just use voice dialing. Visual voicemail presents a list of your voicemail messages. Just tap to listen to any message you want, in any order you want. Mail iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as most industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. View PDFs and other attachments within Mail. Save attached photos and graphics to your Camera Roll album. Safari Browse websites over a cellular data network or over Wi-Fi. Rotate iPhone sideways for widescreen viewing. Double-tap to zoom in or out—Safari automatically fits the webpage column to the iPhone screen for easy reading. Open multiple pages. Sync bookmarks with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on your computer. Add Safari web clips to the Home screen for fast access to favorite websites. Save images from websites to your Photo Library. iPod Listen to your songs, audiobooks, and podcasts. Create on-the-go playlists, or use Genius to create playlists for you. Listen to Genius Mixes of songs from your library. Watch movies and video podcasts in widescreen. Messages Send and receive SMS text messages. Conversations are saved in an iChat-like presentation, so you can see a history of messages you’ve sent and received. Send photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only), contact information, and voice memos to MMS devices (iPhone 3G or later). Calendar View and search your MobileMe, iCal, Microsoft Entourage, Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange calendars. Enter events on iPhone and they get synced back to the calendar on your computer. Subscribe to calendars. Set alerts to remind you of events, appointments, and deadlines. Photos View photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) you’ve taken with iPhone, received in Mail or MMS (iPhone 3GS only) messages, or synced from your computer’s photo application. (Video syncing on Macs only.) View them in portrait or landscape orientation. Zoom in on photos for a closer look. Watch a slideshow. Email photos and videos, send them in MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later), or publish them to MobileMe galleries. Assign images to contacts, and use them as wallpaper. Chapter 2 Basics 23Camera Take photos, and record videos (iPhone 3GS only). View them on iPhone, email them, send them in an MMS message (iPhone 3G or later), or upload them to your computer. Trim and save video clips. Upload videos directly to YouTube. Take a friend’s picture and set iPhone to display it when that person calls you. YouTube Play videos from YouTube’s online collection. Search for any video, or browse featured, most viewed, most recently updated, and top-rated videos. Set up and log in to your YouTube account—then rate videos, sync your favorites, show subscriptions, and more. Upload your own videos taken with iPhone. Stocks Watch your favorite stocks, updated automatically from the Internet. View company news and current trading information, such as opening or average price, trading volume, or market capitalization. Rotate iPhone to see detailed charts in landscape orientation. Drag your finger along the charts to track price points, or use two fingers to see a range between points. Maps See a street map, satellite view, or hybrid view of locations around the world. Zoom in for a closer look, or check out the Google Street View. Find and track your current (approximate) location. See which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only, using its builtin compass). Get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and see current highway traffic conditions. Find businesses in the area and call with a single tap. Weather Get current weather conditions and a six-day forecast. Add your favorite cities for a quick weather report anytime. Voice Memos Record voice memos on iPhone. Play them back on iPhone or sync them with iTunes to listen to voice memos on your computer. Attach voice memos to email or MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later). Notes Jot notes on the go—reminders, grocery lists, brilliant ideas. Send them in email. Sync notes to Mail or Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express. Clock View the time in cities around the world—create clocks for your favorites. Set one or more alarms. Use the stopwatch, or set a countdown timer. 24 Chapter 2 BasicsCalculator Add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Rotate iPhone sideways to use expanded scientific functions. Settings Set up accounts and adjust all iPhone settings in one convenient place. Set your own volume limit for listening comfort. Set your ringtone, wallpaper, screen brightness, and settings for network, phone, mail, web, music, video, photos, and more. Set autolock and a passcode for security. Restrict access to explicit iTunes content and certain applications. Reset iPhone. iTunes Search the iTunes Store for music, ringtones, audiobooks, TV shows, music videos, and movies. Browse, preview, purchase, and download new releases, top items, and more. Rent movies to view on iPhone. Stream and download podcasts. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite store items. App Store Search the App Store for iPhone applications you can purchase or download using your Wi-Fi or cellular data network connection. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite apps. Download and install the application on your Home screen. Compass Use the built-in digital compass (iPhone 3GS only) to determine your heading. Get your current coordinates. Choose between true north and magnetic north. Contacts Get contact information synced from MobileMe, Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange. Search, add, change, or delete contacts, which get synced back to your computer. Nike + iPod Nike + iPod (which appears when you activate it in Settings) turns iPhone into a workout companion. Track your pace, time, and distance from one workout to the next and choose a song to power through your routine. (iPhone 3GS only. Requires select Nike shoes and a Nike + iPod Sensor, sold separately.) Note: Application functionality and availability may vary depending on the country or region where you purchase and use iPhone. Contact your carrier for more information. Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them over multiple Home screens. Rearrange icons: 1 Touch and hold any Home screen icon until the icons begin to wiggle. 2 Arrange the icons by dragging them. 3 Press the Home button to save your arrangement. You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web Clips” on page 70. Chapter 2 Basics 25You can also rearrange the Home screen icons and the order of the screens (in iTunes 9 or later) when iPhone is connected to your computer. Select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, then click the Applications tab. Create additional Home screens: While arranging icons, drag an icon to the right edge of the screen until a new screen appears. You can flick to return to the original screen and drag more icons to the new screen. You can create up to 11 screens. The number of dots above the Dock shows the number of screens you have, and indicates which screen you’re viewing. Switch to another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home button. Reset your Home screen to the default layout: Choose Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Buttons A few simple buttons make it easy to turn iPhone on and off, adjust the volume, and switch between ring and silent modes. Sleep/Wake Button When you’re not using iPhone but you still want to receive calls and text messages, you can lock it. When iPhone is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to music and adjust the volume, and use the center button on your iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to play or pause a song, or answer or end a call. 26 Chapter 2 BasicsBy default, if you don’t touch the screen for a minute, iPhone locks automatically. Sleep/Wake button Lock iPhone Press the Sleep/Wake button. Unlock iPhone Press the Home button or the Sleep/Wake button, then drag the slider. Turn iPhone completely off Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then drag the slider. When iPhone is off, incoming calls go straight to voicemail. Turn iPhone on Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. For information about changing how long before iPhone locks, see “Auto-Lock” on page 145. For information about setting iPhone to require a passcode to unlock it, see “Passcode Lock” on page 145. Volume Buttons When you’re on the phone or listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons on the side of iPhone adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the volume for the ringer, alerts, and other sound effects. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. To adjust the volume, use the buttons on the side of iPhone. Volume up Volume down To set a volume limit for music and videos on iPhone, see “Music” on page 158. Chapter 2 Basics 27Ring/Silent Switch Flip the Ring/Silent switch to change between ring and silent modes. Ring Silent When set to ring mode, iPhone plays all sounds. When set to silent mode, iPhone doesn’t ring or play alerts and other sound effects. Important: Clock alarms, audio-dependent applications such as iPod, and many games still play sounds through the built-in speaker when iPhone is set to silent mode. By default, when you get a call, iPhone vibrates whether it’s set to ring mode, or in silent mode. If iPhone is set to ring mode, you can silence a call by pressing the Sleep/ Wake button or one of the volume buttons once. Press a second time to send the call to voicemail. For information about changing sound and vibrate settings, see “Sounds and the Ring/ Silent Switch” on page 141. Touchscreen The controls on the iPhone touchscreen change dynamically depending on the task you’re performing. Opening Applications Open an application: Tap an icon. 28 Chapter 2 BasicsClose an application and return to the Home screen: Press the Home button below the display. Scrolling Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side to side. Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen. Flick to scroll quickly. You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate anything. To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar. Chapter 2 Basics 29Lists Some lists have an index along the right side, which helps you navigate quickly. Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list. Index Choose an item: Tap an item in the list. Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information so you can call that person. Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner. Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out. 30 Chapter 2 BasicsViewing in Landscape Many iPhone applications let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit the new screen orientation. You may prefer landscape for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for example. Webpages automatically scale to the wider screen in landscape, making the text and images larger. Similarly, the onscreen keyboard is larger in landscape, which may help increase your typing speed and accuracy. The following applications support both portrait and landscape orientation: • Mail • Safari • Messages • Notes • Contacts • Stocks • iPod • Photos • Camera • Calculator Movies viewed in iPod and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views in Maps also appear in landscape. Onscreen Keyboard Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information, text messages, and web addresses. Chapter 2 Basics 31Typing Depending on the application you’re using, the intelligent keyboard may automatically suggest corrections as you type to help prevent mistyped words. Enter text: 1 Tap a text field, such as in a note or new contact, to bring up the keyboard. 2 Tap keys on the keyboard. Start by typing with just your index finger. As you get more proficient, you can type more quickly using two thumbs. As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you release your finger from the key. Type uppercase Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter. Quickly type a period and space Double-tap the space bar. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.) Turn caps lock on Double-tap the Shift key. The Shift key turns blue, and all letters you type are uppercase. Tap the Shift key again to turn caps lock off. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.) Show numbers, punctuation, or symbols Tap the Number key. Tap the Symbol key to see additional punctuation and symbols. Type letters or symbols that aren’t on the keyboard Touch and hold the related letter or symbol, then slide to choose a variation. 32 Chapter 2 BasicsDictionary For many languages, iPhone has dictionaries to help you type. The appropriate dictionary is activated automatically when you select a supported keyboard. For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html. iPhone uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word. Suggested word Accept or reject dictionary suggestions: m To reject the suggested word, finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x” to dismiss the suggestion before typing anything else. Each time you reject a suggestion for the same word, iPhone becomes more likely to accept your word. m To use the suggested word, type a space, punctuation mark, or return character. Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. Auto-Correction is on by default. Note: If you’re entering Chinese or Japanese, tap one of the suggested alternatives. Editing An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point for typing and editing text. You can select text to cut, copy, and paste. Chapter 2 Basics 33Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass, then drag to position the insertion point. Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to select the adjacent word or tap Select All to select all text. When you’re typing, you can also double-tap to select a word. In read-only documents, such as webpages, or email or text messages you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word. Drag the grab points to select more or less text. Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy. Paste text: Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text. Undo the last edit: Shake iPhone and tap Undo. 34 Chapter 2 BasicsInternational Keyboards iPhone provides keyboards that allow you to enter text in many different languages, including languages that read from right to left. For a complete list of supported keyboards, go to www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html. Turn international keyboards on or off: 1 In Settings, choose General > International > Keyboards. 2 Turn on the keyboards you want. Languages with more than one keyboard, such as Japanese and Chinese, indicate the number of keyboards available. Tap to choose a keyboard for that language. Switch keyboards if more than one keyboard is turned on Tap to switch keyboards. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly activated keyboard appears briefly. Type letters, numbers, or symbols that aren’t on the keyboard Touch and hold the related letter, number, or symbol, then slide to choose a variation. On the Hebrew and Thai keyboards, for example, you can choose native numbers by touching and holding the related Arabic number. Enter Japanese Kana Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window. Enter Japanese QWERTY Use the QWERTY keyboard to input code for Japanese syllables. As you type, suggested syllables appear. Tap the syllable to choose it. Enter Emoji picture characters Use the Emoji keyboard. Available only on iPhones purchased and used in Japan. Enter Korean Use the 2-Set Korean keyboard to type Hangul letters. To type double consonants or compound vowels, touch and hold the letter, then slide to choose the double letter. Enter Simplified or Traditional Chinese Pinyin Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Pinyin for Chinese characters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Pinyin to see more character options. Chapter 2 Basics 35Enter Traditional Chinese Zhuyin Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Zhuyin to see more character options. After you type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to show more letters. Enter handwritten Simplified or Traditional Chinese Use the touchpad to enter Chinese characters with your finger. As you write character strokes, iPhone recognizes them and shows matching characters in a list, with the closest match at the top. When you choose a character, its related characters appear in the list as additional choices. You can get some complex characters by entering two or more component characters. For example, enter ? (fish), then ? (bristle), to get ? (partial name of Hong Kong International Airport), which appears in the character list with an arrow next to it. Tap the character to replace the characters you entered. When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can enter Chinese characters with your finger, as shown: Touchpad 36 Chapter 2 BasicsSearching You can search many applications on iPhone, including Mail, Calendar, iPod, Notes, and Contacts. You can search an individual application, or search all the applications at once using Spotlight. Go to Spotlight: From the main page of the Home screen, flick left to right. If you’re on the main Home screen page, you can press the Home button to go to Spotlight. From the Spotlight page, press the Home button to return to the main Home screen page. You can also set iPhone to go to Spotlight when you double-click the Home button. See “Home” on page 147. Search iPhone: On the Spotlight page, enter text in the Search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Icons to the left of the search results let you know which application the results are from. Tap an item in the results list to open it. Application What’s searched Contacts First, last, and company names Mail To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the text of messages isn’t searched) Calendar Event titles, invitees, and locations (notes aren’t searched) iPod Music (names of songs, artists, and albums) and the titles of podcasts, video, and audiobooks Notes Text of notes Spotlight also searches the names of the native and installed applications on iPhone, so if you have a lot of applications you may want to use Spotlight as a way to locate and open applications. Open applications from Spotlight: Enter the application name, then tap to open the application directly from the search results. Use the Search Results settings to choose which applications are searched and the order in which they’re searched. See “Home” on page 147. Chapter 2 Basics 37Voice Control Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control iPod music playback using voice commands. Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Use the following commands to make calls or play songs. Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial,” then say the name of the person. If the person has more than one phone number, you can add “home” or “mobile,” for example. Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number. Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.” Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name. Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.” Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.” Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.” For best results: • Speak into the iPhone microphone as if you were making a phone call. You can also use the microphone in your iPhone or Bluetooth headset. • Speak clearly and naturally. 38 Chapter 2 Basics• Say only iPhone commands and names, and numbers. Pause slightly between commands. • Use full names. By default, Voice Control expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s set for iPhone (the General > International > Language setting). The Voice Control settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages are available in different dialects or accents. Change language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice Control and tap the language or country. Voice Control for the iPod application is always on, but for security you can prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked. Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing. See“Voice Dialing” on page 48 and“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77. Stereo Headset The headset included with iPhone features a microphone and an integrated button that allows you to answer and end calls easily, and control audio and video playback. The headset included with iPhone 3GS (shown here) also has volume buttons. Center button Plug in the headset to listen to music or make a phone call. Callers hear you through the built-in microphone. Press the center button to control music playback and answer or end calls, even when iPhone is locked. (You can also use the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to control these functions.) Pause a song or video Press the center button once. Press again to resume playback. Skip to the next song Press the center button twice quickly. Return to previous song Press the center button three times quickly. Fast-forward Press the center button twice quickly and hold. Chapter 2 Basics 39Rewind Press the center button three-times quickly and hold. Adjust the volume (iPhone 3GS only) Press the + or – button. Answer an incoming call Press the center button once. End the current call Press the center button once. Decline an incoming call Press and hold the center button for about two seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you declined the call. Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and put the current call on hold Press the center button once. Press again to switch back to the first call. Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and end the current call Press and hold the center button for about two seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you ended the first call. Use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) Press and hold the center button. See “Voice Control” on page 38. If you get a call while the headset is plugged in, you can hear the ringtone through both the iPhone speaker and the headset. Connecting to the Internet iPhone connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store. How iPhone Connects to the Internet iPhone connects to the Internet using either a Wi-Fi network or a cellular data network. iPhone does the following, in order, until connected: • Connects over the last Wi-Fi network you used that’s available. • If no previously used Wi-Fi networks are available, iPhone shows a list of Wi-Fi networks in range. Tap a network and, if necessary, enter the password to join. Networks that require a password show next to them. You can prevent iPhone from automatically showing available networks. See “Wi-Fi” on page 139. • If no Wi-Fi networks are available or you choose not to join any, iPhone connects to the Internet over a cellular data network ( , , or ). If no Wi-Fi networks are available and a cellular data network isn’t available, iPhone cannot connect to the Internet. Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you cannot use the Internet over a cellular data network when you’re on a call. You must have a Wi-Fi connection to use Internet applications while also talking on the phone. 40 Chapter 2 BasicsMany Wi-Fi networks can be used free of charge including, in some regions, Wi-Fi hotspots provided by your iPhone carrier. Some Wi-Fi networks require a fee. To join a Wi-Fi network at a hotspot where charges apply, you can usually open Safari to see a webpage that allows you to sign up for service. Joining a Wi-Fi Network The Wi-Fi settings let you turn on Wi-Fi and join Wi-Fi networks. Turn on Wi-Fi: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects networks in range, then select a network (fees may apply to join some Wi-Fi networks). If necessary, enter a password and tap Join (networks that require a password appear with a lock icon). Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically connects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone joins the one last used. When iPhone is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows the connection strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the connection. For information about configuring Wi-Fi settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 139. Cellular Data Network Access 3G, EDGE, and GPRS allow Internet connectivity over the cellular network available through your iPhone carrier’s wireless service. Check the carrier’s network coverage in your area for availability. You can tell iPhone is connected to the Internet via the cellular data network if you see the 3G ( ), EDGE ( ), or GPRS ( ) icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you may not be able to receive calls while iPhone is actively transferring data over a cellular network—downloading a webpage, for example. Incoming calls then go directly to voicemail. Turn 3G on: In Settings, choose General > Network and tap Enable 3G. If you’re outside your carrier’s network, you may be able to access the Internet through another carrier. To enable email, web browsing, and other data services whenever possible, turn Data Roaming on. Turn Data Roaming on: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data Roaming on. Important: Roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, make sure Data Roaming is turned off. Chapter 2 Basics 41Internet Access on an Airplane Airplane mode turns off the iPhone radio transmitters to avoid interfering with aircraft operation. In some regions, where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can turn on Wi-Fi while airplane mode is on, to: • Send and receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts and calendars over the air • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Purchase music and applications For more information, see “Airplane Mode” on page 138. VPN Access VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 143. VPN can also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile, iPhone may turn on VPN automatically whenever it’s needed. Contact your system administrator for more information. Using iPhone as a Modem You can use iPhone 3G or later as a modem to connect, or tether, your computer to the Internet. You can connect iPhone to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB Cable, or via Bluetooth. Note: Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for more information. Tethering works over the cellular data network. You can’t share a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet. If you have a 3G connection, you can make and receive phone calls while tethering. Note: To use iPhone as a modem with a Mac computer, it must be running Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later. Set up a tethering connection: 1 In Settings, choose General > Network > Internet Tethering. 2 Slide the Internet Tethering switch to On. 3 Connect iPhone to your computer: 42 Chapter 2 Basics• USB: Connect your computer to iPhone, using the Dock Connector to USB Cable. In your computer’s Network services settings, choose iPhone. On a Mac, a pop-up window appears the first time you connect, saying “A new network interface has been detected.” Click Network Preferences, configure the network settings for iPhone, then click Apply. On a PC, use the Network Control Panel to configure the iPhone connection. • Bluetooth: On iPhone, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. Then refer to the documentation that came with your computer system software to pair and connect iPhone with your computer. When you’re connected, a blue band appears at the top of the screen. Tethering remains on when you connect with USB, even when you aren’t actively using the Internet connection. Monitor your cellular data network usage: In Settings, choose General > Usage. Battery iPhone has an internal rechargeable battery. Charging the Battery WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPhone, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status. You can also display the percentage of the battery charge (iPhone 3GS only). Charging Charged Charge the battery: Connect iPhone to a power outlet using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable and USB power adapter. Chapter 2 Basics 43Charge the battery and sync iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable. Or connect iPhone to your computer using the included cable and the Dock, available separately. Unless your keyboard has a high-powered USB 2.0 port, you must connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 port on your computer. Important: The iPhone battery may drain instead of charge if iPhone is connected to a computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode. If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPhone, it may take longer to charge. Important: If iPhone is very low on power, it may display one of the following images, indicating that iPhone needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. If iPhone is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes before one of the low-battery images appears. or Maximizing Battery Life iPhone uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the lifespan and battery life of your iPhone, go to www.apple.com/batteries. Replacing the Battery Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may eventually need to be replaced. The iPhone battery isn’t user replaceable; it can only be replaced by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery. 44 Chapter 2 BasicsSecurity Features Security features help protect the information on iPhone from being accessed by others. You can set up a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up iPhone. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. For addition information about using a passcode lock, see “Passcode Lock” on page 145. Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing. The Find My iPhone feature helps you locate iPhone if it’s been lost or misplaced, and display a message on your iPhone to help someone return it to you. It includes Remote Wipe, which lets you erase all your information on iPhone in case you don’t recover it. The Remote Passcode Lock feature lets you remotely lock your iPhone and create a new or replacement 4-digit passcode. Find My iPhone requires a MobileMe account. MobileMe is an online service, available by subscription. Go to www.apple.com/mobileme for more information. To enable this feature, turn on Find My iPhone in your MobileMe account settings. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. Find your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com and go to the Find My iPhone pane. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate your device on a map and display a message on its screen along with an optional sound to help you find it. Remotely wipe information on your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click “Remote Wipe…,” and follow the onscreen instructions. A remote wipe is equivalent to the “Erase all content and settings” feature in Settings. It resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Remotely lock your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click Remote Passcode Lock, and follow the onscreen instructions. Chapter 2 Basics 45Cleaning iPhone To clean iPhone, unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the Sleep/ Wake button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone. If your iPhone has an oleophobic coating on the screen (iPhone 3GS only), simply wipe your iPhone’s screen with a soft, lint-free cloth to remove oil left by your hands and face. For additional information about handling iPhone, see the iPhone Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Restarting and Resetting iPhone If something isn’t working right, try restarting, force quitting an application, or resetting iPhone. Restart iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPhone. To turn iPhone back on, press and hold the Sleep/Wake until the Apple logo appears. If you can’t turn off iPhone or if the problem continues, you may need to reset. A reset should be done only if turning iPhone off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Force quit an application: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application quits. Reset iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix A,“Troubleshooting,” on page 193. 46 Chapter 2 BasicsPhone 3 Phone Calls Making a call on iPhone is as simple as tapping a name and number in your contacts, tapping one of your favorites, or tapping a recent call to return it. Making Calls Buttons at the bottom of the Phone screen give you quick access to your favorites, recent calls, your contacts, and a numeric keypad for dialing manually. WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Number of missed calls Number of unheard voicemail messages Use Contacts to call someone Tap Contacts, choose a contact, then tap a phone number. Call a favorite Tap Favorites, then choose a contact. Return a recent call Tap Recents, then tap a name or number in the list. Dial a number Tap Keypad, enter the number, then tap Call. If you copy a phone number to the clipboard, you can paste it to the keypad and dial it. 47Paste a number to the keypad: Tap the screen above the keyboard, then tap Paste. If the phone number you copied included letters, iPhone automatically converts them to the appropriate digits. Jump to favorites from anywhere: Double-click the Home button. You can change this preference in Settings. See “Home” on page 147. Bring up the last number you dialed: Tap Keypad, then tap Call. Tap Call again to dial the number. Voice Dialing You can use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) to call someone in your contacts or dial a specific number. Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control to make phone calls: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to make calls. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to use Voice Control. Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial” then say the name of the person. If the person has more than one number, specify which one you want to call. Examples:  Call John Appleseed  Call John Appleseed at home  Call John Appleseed, mobile Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number. For best results, speak the full name of the person you’re calling. If you give only the first name, and you have more than one contact with that same name, iPhone asks which of those contacts you want to call. If there’s more than one number for the person you’re calling, specify which number to use. If you don’t specify which number, iPhone asks you which one to use. When voice dialing a number, speak each digit separately—for example, say “four one five, five five five, one two one two.” Note: For the “800” area code in the U.S., you can say “eight hundred.” Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing. 48 Chapter 3 PhoneReceiving Calls When you receive a call, tap Answer. If iPhone is locked, drag the slider. You can also press the center button on your iPhone headset or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to answer a call. Center button Silence a call: Press the Sleep/Wake button or either volume button. You can still answer the call after silencing it, until it goes to voicemail. Decline a call: Do one of the following to send a call directly to voicemail. • Press the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly. Sleep/Wake button • Press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) for about two seconds. Two low beeps confirm that the call was declined. • Tap Decline (if iPhone is awake when a call comes in). Block calls and maintain Wi-Fi access to the Internet: In Settings, turn on Airplane Mode, then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. While On a Call When you’re on a call, the screen shows call options. Chapter 3 Phone 49Mute your line Tap Mute. You can still hear the caller, but the caller can’t hear you. Use the keypad to enter information Tap Keypad. Use the speakerphone or a Bluetooth device Tap Speaker. The Button is labeled Audio Source when a Bluetooth device is available, which lets you select the Bluetooth device, iPhone, or Speaker Phone. See contact information Tap Contacts. Put a call on hold Tap Hold. Neither party can hear the other. Make another call Tap Add Call. Use other applications during a call: Press the Home button, then tap an application icon. End a call: Tap End Call. Or press the center button on your iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Second Calls During a call, you can make or receive another call. If you receive a second call, iPhone beeps and shows the caller’s information and a list of options. Note: Making and receiving a second call may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for more information. Respond to a second call: • To ignore the call and send it to voicemail, tap Ignore. • To hold the first call and answer the new one, tap Hold Call + Answer. • To end the first call and answer the new one, tap End Call + Answer. Make a second call: Tap Add Call. The first call is put on hold. Switch between calls: Tap Swap. The active call is put on hold. Create a conference call: Tap Merge Calls. See “Conference Calls” below. Conference Calls You can talk to more than one person at a time, and merge up to five calls, depending on your carrier. Note: Conference calling may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for more information. Create a conference call: 1 Make a call. 2 Tap Add Call and make another call. The first call is put on hold. 3 Tap Merge Calls. The calls are merged on one line and everyone can hear each other. 50 Chapter 3 Phone4 Repeat steps two and three to add up to five calls. Drop one call Tap Conference and tap next to a call. Then tap End Call. Talk privately with a call Tap Conference, then tap Private next to a call. Tap Merge Calls to resume the conference. Add an incoming call Tap Hold Call + Answer, then tap Merge Calls. If your service includes conference calling, iPhone always has a second line available in addition to the conference call. Emergency Calls If iPhone is locked with a passcode, you may still be able to make an emergency call. Make an emergency call when iPhone is locked: On the Enter Passcode screen, tap Emergency Call, then dial the number using the keypad. Important: Only emergency numbers valid in the region where you’re making the call will work. In some countries, you can’t make emergency calls unless your SIM card is installed and activated, and the SIM PIN has been correctly entered or turned off. In the U.S., location information (if available) is provided to emergency service providers when you dial 911. Important: You should not rely on wireless devices for essential communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of any cellular phone to call emergency services may not work in all locations. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network availability or environmental interference. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if it doesn’t have a SIM, if you locked your SIM, or if you haven’t activated your iPhone. Visual Voicemail On iPhone, visual voicemail lets you see a list of your messages and choose which ones to listen to or delete, without having to listen to instructions or prior messages. Note: Visual voicemail may not be available in all regions, or may be an optional service. Contact your carrier for more information. If visual voicemail isn’t available, tap Voicemail and follow the voice prompts to retrieve your messages. Number of missed calls and unheard voicemail messages appears on the Home screen Phone icon. Chapter 3 Phone 51Setting Up Voicemail The first time you tap Voicemail, iPhone prompts you to create a voicemail password and record your voicemail greeting. Change your greeting: 1 Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Custom. 2 Tap Record when you’re ready to start. 3 When you finish, tap Stop. To review, tap Play. To rerecord, repeat steps 2 and 3. 4 Tap Save. Use your carrier’s default greeting Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Default. Set an alert sound for new voicemail In Settings, choose Sounds and turn New Voicemail on. The alert sounds once for each new voicemail. If the Ring/Silent switch is off, iPhone won’t sound alerts. Change the voicemail password In Settings, choose Phone > Change Voicemail Password. Checking Voicemail When you tap Phone, iPhone shows the number of missed calls and unheard voicemail messages. Number of missed calls Number of unheard voicemail messages 52 Chapter 3 PhoneTap Voicemail to see a list of your messages. Skip to any point in a message: Drag the playhead. Unheard messages Play/Pause Contact info Scrubber bar Speakerphone (Audio, when a Bluetooth device is connected. Tap to choose audio output.) Return the call Listen to a message: Tap the message. (If you’ve already heard the message, tap the message again to replay it.) Use and to pause and resume playback. Once you listen to a message, it’s saved until your carrier automatically erases it. Check voicemail from another phone: Dial your own number or your carrier’s remote access number. Deleting Messages Select a message, then tap Delete. Deleted visual voicemail messages are saved on iPhone until your carrier permanently erases them. Listen to a deleted message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list), then tap the message. Undelete a message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list), then tap the message and tap Undelete. Getting Contact Information Visual voicemail saves the date and time of the call, the length of the message, and any available contact information. See a caller’s contact information: Tap next to a message. You can use the information to email or text the caller, or update contact info. Chapter 3 Phone 53Contacts From a contact’s Info screen, a quick tap lets you make a phone call, create a new email message, find the location of their address, and more. See “Searching Contacts” on page 177. Favorites Favorites gives you quick access to your most-used phone numbers. Add a contact’s number to your favorites list: Tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap “Add to Favorites” and choose the number you want to add. Add a recent caller’s number to your favorites list: Tap Recents and tap next to a caller, then tap “Add to Favorites.” Go to favorites: Double-click the Home button. See “Home” on page 147. Call a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and choose a contact. Delete a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then tap next to a contact or number and tap Remove. Reorder your favorites list Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then drag next to a contact to a new place in the list. Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch iPhone comes with ringtones you can use for incoming calls, Clock alarms, and the Clock timer. You can also create and purchase ringtones from songs in iTunes. Ring/Silent Switch and Vibrate Modes A switch on the side of iPhone makes it easy to turn the ringer on or off. Turn the ringer on or off: Flip the switch on the side of iPhone. Ring Silent Important: Clock alarms still sound even if you set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. Set iPhone to vibrate: In Settings, choose Sounds. Separate controls let you set vibrate for both ring mode and silent mode. 54 Chapter 3 PhoneFor more information, see Chapter 19,“Settings,” on page 138. Setting Ringtones You can set the default ringtone for calls and Clock alarms and timers. You can also assign individual ringtones to contacts so you know who’s calling. Set the default ringtone: In Settings, choose Sounds > Ringtone, then choose a ringtone. Assign a ringtone to a contact: From Phone, tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap Ringtone and choose a ringtone. Purchasing Ringtones You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on your iPhone. See “Purchasing Ringtones” on page 162. Bluetooth Devices You can use iPhone with hands-free Bluetooth headsets and Bluetooth car kits. iPhone also supports Bluetooth stereo headphone devices when using iPod. Pairing a Device with iPhone You must first pair a Bluetooth device with iPhone before you can use it. Pair with iPhone: 1 Follow the instructions that came with the device to make it discoverable or to set it to search for other Bluetooth devices. 2 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 3 Choose the device on iPhone and enter its passkey or PIN number. See the instructions about the passkey or PIN that came with the device. After you pair a Bluetooth device to work with iPhone, you must make a connection to have iPhone use the device for your calls. Connect with iPhone: See the documentation that came with the headset or car kit. When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, outgoing calls are routed through the device. Incoming calls are routed through the device if you answer using the device, and through iPhone if you answer using iPhone. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss and about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Chapter 3 Phone 55Bluetooth Status The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPhone status bar at the top of the screen: • (blue) or (white): Bluetooth is on and a device is connected to iPhone. (The color depends on the current color of the status bar.) • (gray): Bluetooth is on but no device is connected. If you’ve paired a device with iPhone, it may be out of range or turned off. • No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off. Routing Calls Back Through iPhone When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, you listen to calls through iPhone by doing one of the following: • Answer a call by tapping the iPhone screen. • During a call, tap Audio on iPhone. Choose iPhone to hear calls through iPhone or Speaker Phone to use the speakerphone. • Turn off Bluetooth. In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and drag the switch to Off. • Turn off the Bluetooth device, or move out of range. You must be within about 30 feet of a Bluetooth device for it to be connected to iPhone. Unpairing a Device from iPhone If you’ve paired iPhone with a device and want to use another device instead, you must unpair the first device. Unpair a device: 1 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 2 Choose the device and tap Unpair. International Calls iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS are multi-band phones, supporting UMTS/HSDPA (850, 1900, 2100 MHz) and GSM (850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz), ensuring broad international coverage. Making International Calls from Your Home Area For information about making international calls from your home area, including rates and other charges that may apply, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. Using iPhone Abroad You can use iPhone to make calls in many countries around the world. Enable international roaming: Contact your carrier for information about availability and fees. 56 Chapter 3 PhoneSet iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings, tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only. When you make a call using International Assist, “International Assist” appears on the iPhone screen, alternating with the “calling ...” message, until your call is connected. Note: International Assist is not available in all areas. Set the carrier to use: In Settings, tap Carrier, then select the carrier you prefer. This option is available only when you’re traveling outside your carrier’s network. You can make calls only on carriers that have roaming agreements with your iPhone service provider. For more information, see “Carrier” on page 141. Important: Voice and data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, turn Data Roaming off. Turn Data Roaming on or off: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data Roaming on or off. Data Roaming is turned off by default. Turning Data Roaming off helps to avoid data roaming charges when traveling outside your carrier’s network by disabling data transmission over the cellular network. You can still access the Internet if you have a Wi-Fi connection. If Wi-Fi network access isn’t available, however, you cannot: • Send or receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks with MobileMe or Exchange • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Purchase music or applications Other third-party applications that use data roaming may also be disabled. If Data Roaming is turned off, you can still make and receive phone calls, and send and receive text messages. Voice roaming charges may apply. Visual voicemail is delivered if there’s no charge; if your carrier charges for delivery of visual voicemail when roaming, turning Data Roaming off prevents the delivery of visual voicemail. To enable email, web browsing, and other data services, turn Data Roaming on. Chapter 3 Phone 57Important: If Data Roaming is turned on, you may incur charges when roaming outside your carrier’s network for the use of any of the features listed above, as well as for delivery of visual voicemail. Check with your carrier for information about roaming charges. Get voicemail when visual voicemail isn’t available: Dial your own number, or touch and hold “1” on the keypad. You can use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services and then turn Wi-Fi on to get access to the Internet, while preventing voice roaming charges. Use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services: In Settings, tap Airplane Mode to turn it on, then tap Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. See “Airplane Mode” on page 138. Incoming phone calls are sent to voicemail. To make and receive calls again and get your voicemail messages, turn Airplane Mode off. 58 Chapter 3 PhoneMail 4 Mail works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as other industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive embedded photos and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments. Setting Up Email Accounts You can set up email accounts on iPhone in either of the following ways: • Set up an account directly on iPhone. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. • In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync email accounts settings from your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11. Sending Email You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address. Compose and send a message: 1 Tap . 2 Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap to add a name from your contacts. As you type an email address, matching email addresses from your contacts list appear below. Tap an address to add it. To add more names, tap Return or . Note: If you’re composing a message from your Microsoft Exchange account and have access to your enterprise Global Address List (GAL), matching addresses from the contacts on iPhone appear first, followed by matching GAL addresses. 3 Tap Cc/Bcc/From if you want to copy or blind copy the message to others, or change the account you send the message from. If you have more than one email account, you can tap the From field to change the account you’re sending from. 594 Enter a subject, then your message. You can tap Return to move from one field to another. 5 Tap Send. Send a photo or video (iPhone 3GS only) in an email message In Photos, choose a photo or video, tap , then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can also copy and paste photos and videos. The photo or video is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 152). Send a video in an email message (iPhone and iPhone 3G) In Photos, choose a video, then touch and hold the video until the Copy command appears. Tap Copy. Go to Mail and create a new message. Tap to place an insertion point where you want the video, then tap the insertion point to display the edit commands and tap Paste. The video is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 152). Save a draft of a message to complete later Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved in the Drafts mailbox. Reply to a message Tap . Tap Reply to reply only to the sender or tap Reply All to reply to the sender and all recipients. Type your return message, then tap Send. Files or images attached to the initial message aren’t sent back. Forward a message Open a message and tap , then tap Forward. Add one or more email addresses, type your message, then tap Send. When you forward a message, you can include the files or images attached to the original message. Share contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact at the bottom of the Info screen, then tap Email. Checking and Reading Email The Mail icon shows the total number of unread messages in all your inboxes. You may have other unread messages in other mailboxes. Number of unread emails in your inboxes Check for new messages: Choose a mailbox or tap at any time. 60 Chapter 4 MailOn each account screen, you can see the number of unread messages in each mailbox. Number of unread messages Tap to see all your email accounts Tap a mailbox to see its messages. Unread messages have a blue dot next to them. Unread messages When you open a mailbox, Mail loads the number of most recent messages specified in your Mail settings, if the messages haven’t already been loaded automatically. (See “Mail” on page 152.) Load additional messages: Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load More Messages. Read a message: Tap a mailbox, then tap a message. Within a message, tap or to see the next or previous message. Zoom in on part of a message Double-tap an area of the message to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out. Resize any column of text to fit the screen Double-tap the text. Resize a message manually Pinch to zoom in or out. Chapter 4 Mail 61Follow a link Tap the link. Text links are typically underlined and blue. Many images are also links. A link can take you to a webpage, open a map, dial a phone number, or open a new preaddressed email message. Web, phone, and map links open Safari, Phone, or Maps on iPhone. To return to your email, press the Home button and tap Mail. See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address is displayed, and you can choose to open the link in Safari or copy the link address to the clipboard. iPhone displays picture attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPhone can play many audio attachments (such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF). You can download and view files (such as PDF, webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents) attached to messages you receive. Open an attached file: Tap the attachment. It downloads to iPhone and then opens. Tap attachment to download You can view attachments in portrait or landscape orientation. If the format of an attached file isn’t supported by iPhone, you can see the name of the file but you can’t open it. iPhone supports the following document types: .doc Microsoft Word .docx Microsoft Word (XML) .htm webpage .html webpage .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages 62 Chapter 4 Mail.pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat .ppt Microsoft PowerPoint .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML) .rtf Rich Text Format .txt text .vcf contact information .xls Microsoft Excel .xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML) Save an attached photo to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save an attached video to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. See all the recipients of a message Tap Details. Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s contact information. Then tap a phone number, email address, or text message to contact the person. Tap Hide to hide the recipients. Add an email recipient to your contacts list Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.” Mark a message as unread Open the message and tap “Mark as Unread.” A blue dot appears next to the message in the mailbox list until you open it again. Open a meeting invitation: Tap the invitation. You can get contact information for the organizer and other attendees, set an alert, add notes to the event, and add comments that are included in your response emailed to the organizer. You can accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation. See “Responding to Meeting Invitations” on page 95. Turn Push on or off: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then turn Push on or off. See “Fetch New Data” on page 151. Chapter 4 Mail 63Searching Email You can search the To, From, and Subject fields of email messages. Mail searches the downloaded messages in the currently open mailbox. For MobileMe, Exchange, and some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server. Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All (From, To, and Subject) to choose which fields you want to search. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the list and reveal the search field.) Search results for the messages already downloaded to iPhone appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Search messages on the server: Tap “Continue Search on Server” at the end of the search results. Note: Search results of messages on servers may vary depending on the type of account. Some servers may search only whole words. Organizing Email You can delete messages one at a time, or select a group to delete all at once. You can also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another. Delete a message: Open the message and tap . You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left or right over the message title, then tapping Delete. To show the Delete button, swipe left or right over the message. 64 Chapter 4 MailDelete multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to delete, then tap Delete. Move a message to another mailbox or folder: When viewing a message, tap , then choose a mailbox or folder. Move multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to move, then tap Move and select a mailbox or folder. Chapter 4 Mail 65Safari 5 Viewing Webpages Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages on iPhone in the same way as if you were on your computer. You can create bookmarks on iPhone and sync bookmarks with your computer. Add web clips for quick access to your favorite sites directly from the Home screen. You can view webpages in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and the webpage rotates too, automatically adjusting to fit the page. Opening Webpages Open a webpage: Tap the address field (on the left side of the title bar), then type the web address and tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar at the top of the screen to quickly scroll to the address field at the top of the webpage. As you type, web addresses that start with those letters appear. These are bookmarked pages or recent pages you’ve opened. Tap an address to go to that page. Keep typing if you want to enter a web address that’s not in the list. Erase the text in the address field: Tap the address field, then tap . 66Zooming and Scrolling Zoom in or out: Double-tap a column on a webpage to expand the column. Doubletap again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out manually. Scroll around a webpage Drag up, down, or sideways. When scrolling, you can touch and drag anywhere on the page without activating any links. Scroll within a frame on a webpage Use two fingers to scroll within a frame on a webpage. Use one finger to scroll the entire webpage. Scroll quickly to the top of a webpage Tap the status bar at the top of the iPhone screen. Navigating Webpages Links on webpages typically take you to another place on the web. Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link. Links on iPhone can also initiate a phone call, display a location in Maps, or create a preaddressed Mail message. To return to Safari after a link opens another application, press the Home button and tap Safari. See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address pops up next to your finger. You can touch and hold an image to see if it has a link. Stop a webpage from loading Tap . Reload a webpage Tap . Return to the previous or next page Tap or at the bottom of the screen. Return to a recently viewed page Tap and tap History. To clear the history list, tap Clear. Send a webpage address via email Tap and tap “Mail Link to this Page.” Save an image or photo to your Camera Roll album Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image. Chapter 5 Safari 67Opening Multiple Pages You can have up to eight pages open at a time. Some links automatically open a new page instead of replacing the current one. The number inside the pages icon at the bottom of the screen shows how many pages are open. If there’s no number inside, just one page is open. For example: = one page is open = three pages are open Open a new page: Tap and tap New Page. Go to another page: Tap and flick left or right. Tap the page you want to view. Close a page: Tap and tap . You can’t close a page if it’s the only one open. Entering Text and Filling Out Forms Some webpages have text fields and forms to fill out. You can set Safari to remember names and passwords of websites you visit and fill out text fields automatically with information from Contacts. See “Safari” on page 156. Bring up the keyboard Tap inside a text field. Move to another text field Tap another text field, or tap the Next or Previous button. Submit a form Once you finish filling out a form, tap Go or Search. Most pages also have a link you can tap to submit the form. Close the keyboard without submitting the form Tap Done. 68 Chapter 5 SafariEnable AutoFill to help you fill out web forms: In Settings, choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on. When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All. Searching the Web By default, Safari searches using Google. You can search using Yahoo!, instead. Search the web: 1 Tap the search field (on the right side of the title bar). 2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Google. 3 Tap a link in the list of search results to open a webpage. Set Safari to search using Yahoo!: From the Home screen choose Settings > Safari > Search Engine, then choose Yahoo!. Bookmarks You can bookmark webpages you want to return to later. Bookmark a webpage: Open the page and tap . Then tap Add Bookmark. When you save a bookmark you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder. If you use Safari on a Mac, or Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC, you can sync bookmarks with the web browser on your computer. Sync bookmarks with your computer: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Click the Info tab, select “Sync … bookmarks” under Web Browser, then click Apply. See “Syncing” on page 11. Sync bookmarks with MobileMe: In Settings on iPhone, select Bookmarks in your MobileMe account. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. Open a bookmarked webpage: Tap , then choose a bookmark or tap a folder to see the bookmarks inside. Chapter 5 Safari 69Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder: Tap , choose the folder that has the bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Then do one of the following: • To make a new folder, tap New Folder. • To delete a bookmark or folder, tap , then tap Delete. • To reposition a bookmark or folder, drag . • To edit the name or address, or to put it in a different folder, tap the bookmark or folder. When you’re finished, tap Done. Web Clips Add web clips to the Home screen for fast access to your favorite webpages. Web clips appear as icons on the Home screen, and you can arrange your web clips along with the other icons. See “iPhone Applications” on page 23. Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.” When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms and scrolls to the area of the webpage that was displayed when you saved the web clip. The displayed area is also used to create the icon for the web clip on your Home screen, unless the webpage comes with its own custom icon. When you add a web clip, you can edit its name. If the name is too long (more than about 10 characters), it may appear abbreviated on the Home screen. Web clips aren’t bookmarks, and aren’t synced by MobileMe or iTunes. Delete a web clip: 1 Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle. 2 Tap in the corner of the web clip you want to delete. 3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement. 70 Chapter 5 SafariiPod 6 iPhone syncs with iTunes on your computer to get songs, videos, and other content you’ve collected in your iTunes library. For information about adding music and other media to your iTunes library, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Getting Music, Video, and More To get music, video, and other content onto iPhone, you can set up iTunes on your computer to automatically sync content in your library, or you can manually manage the media you put on iPhone. Syncing Content from iTunes You can transfer music, video, and more onto iPhone by syncing content from iTunes. You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs, videos, podcasts, and iTunes U collections. Set iTunes to sync iPod content: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 On the Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U tabs, select the content you want to sync to iPhone. For example, you could set iTunes to sync selected music playlists and the three most recent episodes of your favorite video podcast. 4 Click Apply. To set iTunes to sync iPod content and other info automatically, click the Summary tab and select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.” Important: If you delete an item from iTunes, it will also be deleted from iPhone the next time you sync. 71Only songs and videos encoded in formats that iPhone supports are transferred to iPhone. For information about which formats iPhone supports, see “Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play” on page 200. If there are more songs in your iTunes library than can fit on your iPhone, iTunes offers to create a special playlist to sync with iPhone. iTunes fills the playlist with random selections from your library. You can add or delete songs from the playlist and sync again. If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPhone, you can pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa. For more information about using iTunes to get music and other media onto your computer, see “What You Need” on page 9. Manually Managing Content The manually managing feature lets you choose just the music, video, and podcasts you want to have on iPhone. Set up iPhone for manually managing content: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Click the Summary tab and select “Manually manage music and videos.” 4 Click Apply. Add items to iPhone: Drag a song, video, podcast, or playlist in your iTunes library to iPhone (in the sidebar). Shift-click or Command-click (Mac) or Control-click (Windows) to select multiple items to add at the same time. iTunes syncs the content immediately. If you deselect “Manually manage music and videos,” the content you added manually is removed from iPhone the next time iTunes syncs content. Remove items from iPhone: With iPhone connected to your computer, select the iPhone icon in the iTunes sidebar. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of the icon to show the contents. Select a content area, such as Music or Movies, then select the items you want to delete and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Removing an item from iPhone doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library. Purchasing and Downloading Content from the iTunes Store You can use the iTunes Store on iPhone to purchase and download songs, albums, TV shows, movies, music videos, ringtones, and audiobooks directly to iPhone. You can also stream and download audio and video podcasts, as well as iTunes U content. See “About the iTunes Store” on page 160. 72 Chapter 6 iPodTransferring Purchased Content to Another Computer You can transfer content on iPhone that was purchased using iTunes on one computer to an iTunes library on another authorized computer. The computer must be authorized to play content from your iTunes Store account. To authorize the computer, open iTunes on the computer and choose Store > Authorize Computer. Transfer purchased content: Connect iPhone to the other computer. iTunes asks if you want to transfer purchased content. Converting Videos for iPhone You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPhone, such as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet and then add to iTunes. If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPhone and a message says the video can’t play on iPhone, you can convert the video. Convert a video to work with iPhone: Select the video in your iTunes library and choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to iPhone. Music and Other Audio The high-resolution Multi-Touch display makes listening to songs on iPhone as much a visual experience as a musical one. You can scroll through your playlists, or use Cover Flow to browse through your album art. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Playing Songs Browse your collection: Tap Playlists, Artists, or Songs. Tap More to browse Albums, Audiobooks, Compilations, Composers, Genres, iTunes U, or Podcasts. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. If Genius doesn’t appear, you need to turn on Genius in iTunes 9 or later, and then sync iPhone with iTunes. See “Using Genius on iPhone” on page 79. Play a song: Tap the song. Shake to shuffle: Shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately change songs. Shake anytime to change to another song. You can turn the “Shake to Shuffle” feature on or off in Settings > iPod (it’s on by default). See “Music” on page 158. Chapter 6 iPod 73Controlling Song Playback When you play a song, the Now Playing screen appears. Next/Fast-forward Play/Pause Track List Back Previous/ Volume Rewind Pause a song Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider or use the buttons on the side of iPhone. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only). Restart a song or a chapter in an audiobook or podcast Tap . Skip to the next song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly. Go to the previous song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast Tap twice, or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) three times quickly. Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . The longer you hold the control, the faster the song rewinds or fastforwards. On the iPhone headset, press the center button (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly and hold to fast forward, or three times quickly and hold to rewind. 74 Chapter 6 iPodReturn to the iPod browse lists Tap , or swipe to the right over the album cover. Return to the Now Playing screen Tap Now Playing. Display a song’s lyrics Tap the album cover when playing a song. (Lyrics appear if you’ve added them to the song using the song’s Info window in iTunes.) You can display playback controls at any time when you’re listening to music and using another application—or even when iPhone is locked—by double-clicking the Home button. See “Home” on page 147. If you’re using an application, the playback controls appear on top of the application. After using the controls, you can close them or tap Music to go to the Now Playing screen. If iPhone is locked, the controls appear onscreen, then disappear automatically after you finish using them. Additional Song Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover. The repeat, Genius, and shuffle controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear, if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Repeat Genius Shuffle Scrubber bar Playhead Chapter 6 iPod 75Set iPhone to repeat songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to repeat only the current song. = iPhone is set to repeat all songs in the current album or list. = iPhone is set to repeat the current song over and over. = iPhone isn’t set to repeat songs. Skip to any point in a song Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger. Make a Genius playlist Tap , and the Genius playlist appears. See “Using Genius on iPhone” on page 79. Set iPhone to shuffle songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to play songs in order. = iPhone is set to shuffle songs. = iPhone is set to play songs in order. Shuffle the tracks in any playlist, album, or other list of songs Tap Shuffle at the top of the list. For example, to shuffle all the songs on iPhone, choose Songs > Shuffle. Whether or not iPhone is set to shuffle, if you tap Shuffle at the top of a list of songs, iPhone plays the songs from that list in random order. Podcast and Audiobook Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the cover. The email, 30-second repeat, and playback speed controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the episode or chapter number. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Scrubber bar Playhead Playback speed Email 30-second repeat 76 Chapter 6 iPodSend an email link to this podcast Tap . Skip to any point Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger. Play back the last 30 seconds Tap . Set the playback speed Tap . Tap again to change the speed. = Play at double speed. = Play at half speed. = Play at normal speed. Using Voice Control with iPod You can use Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) to control music playback on iPhone. Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to play songs. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to bring up Voice Control. Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.” Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name. Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.” Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.” Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.” Chapter 6 iPod 77Browsing Album Covers in Cover Flow When you’re browsing music, you can rotate iPhone sideways to see your iTunes content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork. Browse album covers Drag or flick left or right. See the tracks on an album Tap a cover or . Play any track Tap the track. Drag up or down to scroll through the tracks. Return to the cover Tap the title bar. Or tap again. Play or pause the current song Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). 78 Chapter 6 iPodViewing All Tracks on an Album See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: From the Now Playing screen tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the album cover thumbnail to return to the Now Playing screen. Rating bar Back to Now Playing screen Album tracks In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings to create smart playlists in iTunes that dynamically update to include, for example, your highest rated songs. Rate a song: Drag your thumb across the rating bar to give the song zero to five stars. Searching Music You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other content you’ve synced to iPhone. Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list, or other view of your iPod content. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of a list and reveal the search field.) Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. You can also use Spotlight to search for music. See “Searching” on page 37. Using Genius on iPhone Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together. A Genius playlist is a collection of songs that are picked for you to go with a song you choose from your library. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music. Genius Mixes are recreated each time you listen to them, so they’re always new and fresh. You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPhone. You can also create and save Genius playlists directly on iPhone. Chapter 6 iPod 79Genius Mixes are created in iTunes. iTunes creates different mixes depending on the variety of music you have in your iTunes library. For example, you may have Genius Mixes that highlight R&B songs, or Alternative Rock songs. To use Genius on iPhone, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPhone with iTunes. Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but requires an iTunes Store account. Genius Mixes require iTunes 9 or later. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select and sync songs from your library that you haven’t otherwise chosen to sync. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. The number of dots at the bottom of the screen shows the number of mixes you’ve synced from iTunes, and indicates which mix you’re viewing. Flick left or right to access your other mixes. Play a Genius Mix: Tap the mix or tap . Make a Genius playlist on iPhone: 1 Tap Playlists and tap Genius. 2 Tap a song in the list. Genius creates a playlist with additional songs that go great with that song. You can also make a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the song you’re playing. From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover to display additional controls, then tap . Save a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with the title of the song you picked. You can make and save as many Genius playlists as you want. If you save a Genius playlist created on iPhone, it syncs back to iTunes the next time you connect. 80 Chapter 6 iPodRefresh a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Refresh. Refreshing a playlist creates a playlist of different songs that go great with the song you picked. You can refresh any Genius playlist, whether it was created in iTunes and synced to iPhone, or created directly on iPhone. Create a Genius playlist from a new song: In the playlist, tap New, then pick a new song. Delete a saved Genius playlist: In a playlist that you saved directly on iPhone, tap Edit, then tap Delete Playlist. Once a Genius playlist is synced back to iTunes, you won’t be able to delete it directly from iPhone. You can use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the playlist. Making On-The-Go Playlists Make an on-the-go playlist: 1 Tap Playlists and tap On-The-Go. 2 Browse for songs using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. Tap any song or video to add it to the playlist. Tap Add All Songs at the top of any list of songs to add all the songs in the list. 3 When you finish, tap Done. When you make an on-the-go playlist and then sync iPhone to your computer, the playlist is saved on iPhone and in your iTunes library, then deleted from iPhone. The first is saved as “On-The-Go 1,” the second as “On-The-Go 2,” and so on. To put a playlist back on iPhone, select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click the Music tab, and set the playlist to sync. Edit an on-the-go playlist: Tap Playlists, tap On-The-Go, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To move a song higher or lower in the list, drag next to the song. • To delete a song from the playlist, tap next to a song, then tap Delete. Deleting a song from the on-the-go playlist doesn’t delete it from iPhone. • To clear the entire playlist, tap Clear Playlist. • To add more songs, tap . Videos With iPhone, you can view video content such as movies, music videos, and video podcasts. If a video contains chapters, you can skip to the next or previous chapter, or bring up a list and start playing at any chapter that you choose. If a video provides alternate language features, you can choose an audio language or display subtitles. Chapter 6 iPod 81Playing Videos Play a video: Tap Videos and tap the video. Display playback controls: Tap the screen to show the controls. Tap again to hide them. Controlling Video Playback Videos play in widescreen to take full advantage of the display. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Scrubber bar Playhead Play/Pause Next/Fastforward Scale Restart/Rewind Volume Lovers in Japan by Coldplay is available in the iTunes Store Pause a video Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only). Start a video over Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar all the way to the left, or tap if the video doesn’t contain chapters. Skip to the next chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly. Go to the previous chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) three times quickly. Start playing at a specific chapter (if available) Tap , then choose a chapter from the list. 82 Chapter 6 iPodRewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger. Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done. Or press the Home button. Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen Tap to make the video fill the screen. Tap to make it fit the screen. You can also double-tap the video to toggle between fitting and filling the screen. When you scale a video to fill the screen, the sides or top may be cropped from view. When you scale it to fit the screen, you may see black bars on the sides or above and below the video. Select an alternate audio language (if available) Tap , then choose a language from the Audio list. Show or hide subtitles (if available) Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the Subtitles list. Searching Video You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts you’ve synced to iPhone. Search video: Enter text in the search field at the top of the list of videos. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Watching Rented Movies You can rent movies in standard (480p) definition from the iTunes Store and watch them on iPhone. You can download rented movies directly to iPhone, or transfer them from iTunes on your computer to iPhone. You can also transfer rented movies back to iTunes from iPhone. (Rented movies aren’t available in all regions.) The movie must be fully downloaded before you can start watching. You can pause a download and resume it later. Rented movies expire after a certain number of days, and once you start a movie you have a limited amount of time to finish watching it. The time remaining appears near a movie’s title. Movies are automatically deleted when they expire. Check the iTunes Store for the expiration time before renting a movie. Chapter 6 iPod 83Transfer rented movies to iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. Then select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet. View a rented movie: On iPhone, choose iPod > Videos and select a movie. Watching Videos on a TV You can connect iPhone to your TV and watch your videos on the large screen. Use the Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPhone compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to connect iPhone to your TV. (The Apple Universal Dock includes a remote that lets you control playback from a distance.) Apple cables and docks are available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore (not available in all countries). Deleting Videos from iPhone You can delete videos from iPhone to save space. Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete. When you delete a video (other than rented movies) from iPhone, it isn’t deleted from your iTunes library and you can sync the video back to iPhone later. If you don’t want to sync the video back to iPhone, set iTunes to not sync the video. See “What You Need” on page 9. Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPhone, it’s deleted permanently and cannot be transferred back to your computer. Setting a Sleep Timer You can set iPhone to stop playing music or videos after a period of time. Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set, then tap Start to start the timer. When the timer ends, iPhone stops playing music or video, closes any other open application, and then locks itself. 84 Chapter 6 iPodChanging the Browse Buttons You can replace the browse buttons at the bottom of the screen with buttons you use more frequently. For example, if you often listen to podcasts, you can replace the Songs button with Podcasts. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. Tap Done when you finish. Tap More at any time to access the buttons you replaced. Chapter 6 iPod 85Messages 7 Sending and Receiving Messages WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Messages lets you exchange text messages with anyone using an SMS-capable phone. Messages also supports MMS, so you can send photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only), contact information, and voice memos to other MMS-capable devices. You can enter multiple addresses and send a message to several people at the same time. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. SMS or MMS support may not be available in all regions. Additional fees may apply for use of Messages. Contact your carrier for complete information. You can use Messages whenever you’re in range of the cellular network. If you can make a call, you can send a message. Depending on your phone plan, you may be charged for the messages you send or receive. Send a message: Tap , then enter a phone number or name, or tap and choose a contact from your contacts list. Tap the text field above the keyboard, type a message, and tap Send. The Messages icon on the Home screen shows the total number of unread messages you have. Number of unread messages 86Your conversations are saved in the Messages list. Conversations that contain unread messages have a blue dot next to them. Tap a conversation in the list to see that conversation or add to it. Text messages you sent Text messages from the other person iPhone displays the 50 most recent messages in the conversation. To see earlier messages, scroll to the top and tap Load Earlier Messages. Send a message to more than one person: Tap , then add recipients. If you enter a phone number manually (instead of selecting it from Contacts), tap Return before entering another entry. Replies from any of the recipients are sent only to you, not to the other people you texted. Reply or send a message to a person (or group) you’ve texted before: Tap an entry in the Messages list, then type a new message in the conversation and tap Send. Send a message to a favorite or to a recent call: 1 From the Home screen tap Phone, then tap Favorites or Recents. 2 Tap next to a name or number, then tap Text Message. 3 If multiple phone numbers appear, tap the one you want to text. When MMS is available, Messages allows you to include a subject in your text messages. You can turn this feature on or off in Messages settings. It is turned on by default. Include or remove the subject field: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap Show Subject Field to turn it on or off. Note: The subject field and the Show Subject Field setting don’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier. Chapter 7 Messages 87Turn MMS messaging on or off: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap MMS Messaging to turn it on or off. You may want to turn MMS Messaging off, for example, to prevent sending or receiving attachments when fees apply. Note: The MMS Messaging setting doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier. Sharing Photos and Videos You can take a photo or make a video (iPhone 3GS only) from within Messages and include it in your conversation with another MMS-capable device. You can save photos or videos you receive in Messages to your Camera Roll album. If MMS isn’t supported by your carrier, the button doesn’t appear and you can’t send photos or videos. Send a photo or video: Tap and tap “Take Photo or Video” (iPhone 3GS only; on earlier models, tap “Take Photo”) or “Choose Existing” and select an item from a photo album and tap Choose. The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103. Save a photo or video attachment to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo or video in the conversation, tap , then tap Save Image or Save Video. Copy a photo or video: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Copy. You can paste the photo or video to an Mail message or another MMS message. Sending Voice Memos You can send voice memos in a message to another MMS-capable device. Send a voice memo: In Voice Memos, tap , tap the voice memo you want to send, then tap Share and tap MMS. Address the message and tap Send. 88 Chapter 7 MessagesEditing Conversations If you want to keep a conversation but not the entire thread, you can delete the parts you don’t want. You can also delete entire conversations from the Messages list. Edit a conversation: Tap Edit. Tap the circles along the left side to select the parts of the conversation you want to delete, then tap Delete. When you’re finished, tap Done. Clear all text and files, without deleting the conversation: Tap Edit, then tap Clear All. Tap Clear Conversation to confirm. Forward a conversation: Select a conversation, then tap Edit. Tap the circles on the left side of the screen to select the parts of the conversation you want to include, then tap Forward, enter one or more recipients, and tap Send. Delete a conversation: Tap Edit, then tap next to the conversation and tap Delete. You can also swipe left or right over the conversation and tap Delete. To show the Delete button, swipe left or right over the message. Using Contact Information and Links Call or email someone you’ve texted: Tap a message in the Text Messages list and scroll to the top of the conversation. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the screen.) • To call the person, tap Call. • To email the person, tap Contact Info, then tap an email address. Follow a link in a message: Tap the link. A link may open a webpage in Safari, initiate a phone call in Phone, open a preaddressed message in Mail, or display a location in Maps. To return to your text messages, press the Home button and tap Messages. Add someone you’ve texted to your contacts list: Tap a phone number in the Messages list, then tap “Add to Contacts.” Send contact information: In Contacts, tap the person whose information you want to share. Tap Share Contact at the bottom of the screen, then tap MMS. Address the message and tap Send. Save contact information received: Tap the contact bubble in the conversation and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.” Chapter 7 Messages 89Managing Previews and Alerts By default, iPhone displays a preview of new messages when iPhone is locked or you are using another application. You can turn this preview on or off in Settings. You can also enable alerts for text messages. Turn previews on or off: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Show Preview. Repeat previews: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Repeat Alert. If you don’t respond to the first preview of a new message, the preview will be displayed twice more. Set whether an alert sounds when you get a text message or preview: In Settings, choose Sounds, then tap New Text Message. Tap the alert sound you want, or None if you don’t want an audible alert. Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, text alerts won’t sound. 90 Chapter 7 MessagesCalendar 8 About Calendar Calendar lets you view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. You can view your events in a continuous list, by day, or by month, and search events by title, invitee, or location. You can sync iPhone with the calendars on your computer. You can also make, edit, or cancel appointments on iPhone, and have them synced back to your computer. You can subscribe to Google, Yahoo!, or Mac OS X iCal calendars using a CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) account. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations. Syncing Calendars You can sync Calendar in either of the following ways: • In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync with iCal or Microsoft Entourage on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC when you connect iPhone to your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11. • In Settings on iPhone, select Calendar in your MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts to sync your calendar information over the air. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. 91Viewing Your Calendar You can view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. View a different calendar: Tap Calendars, then select a calendar. Tap All Calendars to view combined events from all calendars. You can view your calendar events in a list, by day, or by month. The events for all of your synced calendars appear in the same calendar on iPhone. Switch views: Tap List, Day, or Month. • List view: All your appointments and events appear in a scrollable list. • Day view: Scroll up or down to see the events in a day. Tap or to see the previous or next day’s events. • Month view: Tap a day to see its events. Tap or to see the previous or next month. Add an event Days with dots have scheduled events Go to today Switch views Respond to calendar invitation Events for selected day See the details of an event: Tap the event. Set iPhone to adjust event times for a selected time zone: 1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars.” 2 Under Calendars, tap Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. 3 Tap Time Zone and search for a major city in the time zone you want. When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time. 92 Chapter 8 CalendarSearching Calendars You can search the titles, invitees, and locations of the events in your calendars. Calendar searches the calendar you’re currently viewing, or all calendars if you’re viewing them all. Search events: In list view, enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more results. Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars You can subscribe to calendars that use the CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) formats. Many calendar-based services, including Yahoo!, Google, and the Mac OS X iCal application, support either format. Subscribed calendars are read only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on iPhone, but can’t edit them or create new events. You also can’t accept invitations from CalDAV accounts. Subscribe to a CalDAV or .ics calendar: 1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account. 2 Choose Other, then choose either Add CalDAV Account or Add Subscribed Calendar. 3 Enter your account information, then tap Next to verify the account. 4 Tap Save. Apple provides links to a number of free iCal calendars—for national holidays or sports events, for example—that you may want to subscribe to. The calendars are automatically added to iCal on your desktop when you download them. You can then sync them to iPhone as described in “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93. Go to /www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars. Chapter 8 Calendar 93You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by tapping a link to the calendar you receive in an email or text message on iPhone. Adding Calendar Events to iPhone You can also enter and edit calendar events directly on iPhone. Add an event: Tap and enter event information, then tap Done. You can enter any of the following: • Title • Location • Starting and ending times (or turn on All-day if it’s an all-day event) • Repeat times—none, or every day, week, two weeks, month, or year • Alert time—from five minutes to two days before the event When you set an alert, the option to set a second alert appears. When an alert goes off, iPhone displays a message. You can also set iPhone to play a sound (see “Alerts” on page 96). Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone may not alert you at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147. • Notes To select which calendar to add the event to, tap Calendar. Read-only calendars don’t appear in the list. Edit an event Tap the event, then tap Edit. Delete an event Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap Delete Event. 94 Chapter 8 CalendarResponding to Meeting Invitations If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone with Calendars enabled, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization. When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted line around it. The icon in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the total number of new invitations you have, as does the Calendar icon on the Home screen. Number of meeting invitations Respond to an invitation in Calendar: 1 Tap a meeting invitation in the calendar, or tap to display the Event screen and tap an invitation. • Tap “Invitation from” to get contact information for the meeting organizer. Tap the email address to send a message to the organizer. If the organizer is in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text message. Chapter 8 Calendar 95• Tap Attendees to see the other people invited to the meeting. Tap a name to see an attendee’s contact information. Tap the email address to send a message to the attendee. If the attendee is in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text message. • Tap Alert to set iPhone to sound an alert before the meeting. • Tap Add Comments to add comments in the email response to the meeting organizer. You comments will also appear in your Info screen for the meeting. Notes are made by the meeting organizer. 2 Tap Accept, Maybe, or Decline. When you accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation, a response email that includes any comments you added is sent to the organizer. If you accept or tentatively accept the meeting, you can change your response later. Tap Add Comments if you want to change your comments. Exchange meeting invitations are also sent in an email message, which lets you open the meeting’s Info screen from Mail. Open a meeting invitation in an email message: Tap the invitation. Alerts Set calendar alerts: In Settings, choose Sounds, then turn Calendar Alerts on. If Calendar Alerts is off when an event is about to occur, iPhone displays a message but makes no sound. Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, calendar alerts won’t sound. Sound alerts for invitations: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendar.” Under Calendars, tap New Invitation Alert to turn it on. 96 Chapter 8 CalendarPhotos 9 About Photos iPhone lets you carry photos and videos with you, so you can share them with your family, friends, and associates. You can sync photos and videos (Mac only) from your computer, view photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) taken with the built-in camera, use photos as wallpaper, and assign photos to identify contacts when they call. You can also send photos and videos in email messages, send photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) in MMS messages, and upload photos and videos to MobileMe galleries. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier. Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer iTunes can sync your photos and videos (Mac only) with the following applications: • Mac: iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture • PC: Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12. iPhone supports H.264 and MPEG-4 video formats, with AAC audio. If you are having trouble syncing a video to iPhone, you might be able to use iTunes to create an iPhone version of the video. Create an iPhone version of a video: 1 Copy the video to your iTunes library. 2 In iTunes, select Movies in the Library list and select the video you want to sync. 3 Choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” For additional information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1211. 97Viewing Photos and Videos Photos and videos (Mac only) synced from your computer’s photo application can be viewed in Photos. You can also view the photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) you’ve taken with iPhone’s built-in camera or saved from an email or MMS message (iPhone 3GS only). View photos and videos: 1 In Photos, tap a photo album. 2 Tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen. Show or hide the controls: Tap the full-screen photo or video to show the controls. Tap again to hide the controls. Play a video: Tap in the center of the screen. To replay a video, tap at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. View a photo or video in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. The photo or video reorients automatically and, if it’s in landscape format, expands to fit the screen. 98 Chapter 9 PhotosZoom in on part of a photo: Double-tap where you want to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out. View video in full screen, or fit video to screen: Double tap the screen to scale the video to fill the screen. Double-tap again to fit the video to the screen. Pan around a photo: Drag the photo. See the next or previous photo or video: Flick left or right. Or tap the screen to show the controls, then tap or . Slideshows You can view photo albums as slideshows, complete with background music. View a photo album as a slideshow: Tap an album, then tap . Videos play automatically when they appear during the slideshow. Stop a slideshow: Tap the screen. Set slideshow settings: In Settings, choose Photos and set the following options: • To set the length of time each slide is shown, tap Play Each Slide For and choose a time. • To set transition effects when moving from photo to photo, tap Transition and choose a transition type. • To set whether slideshows repeat, turn Repeat on or off. • To set whether photos and videos are shown in random order, turn Shuffle on or off. Chapter 9 Photos 99Play music during a slideshow: In iPod, play a song, then choose Photos from the Home screen and start a slideshow. Sharing Photos and Videos You can send photos and videos in email and MMS messages, add photos and videos to MobileMe galleries, and publish videos to YouTube. You can also copy and paste photos and videos, save photos and videos from email messages to Photos, and save images from webpages to Photos. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier. MMS video attachments are supported only on iPhone 3GS. Sending a Photo or Video in an Email or MMS Message Send a photo or video: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap Email Photo/ Video or MMS. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103. Copying and Pasting Photos and Videos You can copy a photo or video from Photos and paste it to an email or MMS message. Some third-party applications may also support copying and pasting photos and videos. Copy a photo or video: Hold your finger on the screen until the Copy button appears, then tap Copy. Paste a photo or video: Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the photo or video, then tap the insertion point and tap Paste. Adding a Photo or Video to a MobileMe Gallery If you have a MobileMe account, you can add photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) directly from iPhone to a gallery you’ve created. You can also add photos and videos to someone else’s MobileMe gallery if that person has enabled email contributions. Before you can add photos or videos to a gallery in your MobileMe account, you must: • Set up your MobileMe account on iPhone • Publish a MobileMe gallery, and allow adding photos via email or iPhone For more information about creating a gallery and adding photos and videos to it, see MobileMe Help. 100 Chapter 9 PhotosAdd a photo or video to your gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap “Send to MobileMe.” Enter a title and description, if you like, then select the album to add the photo or video to and tap Publish. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. iPhone tells you when the photo or video has been published, and gives you options to view it on MobileMe or email a link to a friend. Adding a photo or video to someone else’s gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap “Email Photo/Video.” Enter the album’s email address, then click Send. Publishing Videos to YouTube If you have a YouTube account, you can publish videos directly from iPhone to YouTube (iPhone 3GS only). You can’t publish videos longer than than ten minutes. Publish a video to You Tube: 1 While viewing a video, tap , then tap “Send to YouTube.” 2 Sign in to your YouTube account. 3 Enter publishing information such as Title, Description, and Tags. 4 Tap Category to choose a category. 5 Tap Publish. Saving Photos and Videos from Email Messages, MMS Messages, and Webpages Save a photo in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a video in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a photo on a webpage to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the photo, then tap Save Image. Save a photo or video in an MMS message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the image in the conversation, tap , and tap Save Image or Save Video. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. You can download the photos and videos in your Camera Roll album to your computer’s photo application by connecting iPhone to your computer. Chapter 9 Photos 101Assigning a Photo to a Contact You can assign a photo to a contact. When that person calls, iPhone displays the photo. Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Choose Camera from the Home screen and take someone’s picture. Or choose any photo already on iPhone and tap . 2 Tap “Assign to Contact” and choose a contact. 3 Position and size the photo until it looks the way you want. Drag the photo to pan, and pinch to zoom in or out. 4 Tap Set Photo. You can also assign a photo to a contact in Contacts by tapping Edit and then tapping the picture icon. Wallpaper You see a wallpaper background picture as you unlock iPhone or when you’re on a call with someone you don’t have a high-resolution photo for. Set a photo as wallpaper: 1 Choose any photo and tap , then tap Use As Wallpaper. 2 Drag the photo to pan, or pinch the photo to zoom in or out, until it looks the way you want. 3 Tap Set Wallpaper. You can also choose from several wallpaper pictures included with iPhone by choosing Settings > Wallpaper > Wallpaper from the Home screen. 102 Chapter 9 PhotosCamera 10 About Camera With the built-in camera, it’s easy to take photos and record videos with iPhone. The lens is on the back of iPhone, so you can use the screen to see the photo or video you’re taking. “Tap to focus” (iPhone 3GS only) lets you focus on a specific area of your shot and automatically adjust the exposure. You can quickly review—and keep or delete—photos and videos you’ve taken. Note: Video features are available only on iPhone 3GS. Camera photos are tagged with location data, including your current geographical coordinates provided by the built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only), if Location Services is turned on. You can use location data with some applications and photo-sharing websites to track and post where you took your pictures. If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. If you don’t want to include location data with your photos and videos, you can still use Camera without having Location Services turned on. See “Location Services” on page 144. 103Taking Photos and Recording Videos Taking photos and recording videos with iPhone is as easy as point and tap. Photo/Video switch Focus area Thumbnail of last shot Click to take photo Take a photo: Aim iPhone and tap . Make sure the Camera/Video switch is set to . When you take a photo or start a video recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. The sound isn’t played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141. Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera are played even if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent. Record a video: Slide the Camera/Video switch to . Tap to start recording. The record button blinks while Camera is recording. Tap again to stop recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to start and stop recording. If you take a picture or record a video with iPhone rotated sideways, the picture is saved in landscape orientation. A rectangle on the screen shows the area where Camera is focusing the shot. Change the focus area and set exposure: Tap where you want to focus. Camera automatically adjusts the exposure for the selected area of the image. Review a photo or video you’ve just taken: Tap the thumbnail of your last shot, in the lower-left corner of the screen. Delete a photo or video: Tap . If you don’t see , tap the screen to display the controls. 104 Chapter 10 CameraTake a screenshot of the iPhone display: Quickly press and release the Sleep/ Wake and Home buttons at the same time. A flash of the screen lets you know the screenshot was taken. The screenshot is added to the Camera Roll album. Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos The photos and videos you take with Camera are saved in the Camera Roll album on iPhone. You can view the Camera Roll album from either Camera or Photos. View photos and videos in the Camera Roll album: In Camera, tap the thumbnail image in the lower-left corner of the screen. In Photos, tap the Camera Roll album. Tap the left or right button, or flick left or right to flip through the photos and videos. When viewing a photo or video in the Camera Roll album, tap the screen to display the controls. For more information about viewing and sharing photos and videos, see: • “Viewing Photos and Videos” on page 98 • “Sharing Photos and Videos” on page 100 Trimming Videos You can trim the frames from the beginning and end of videos that you record. You can trim the original video or save the trim as a new clip. Chapter 10 Camera 105Trim a video: 1 While viewing a video, tap the screen to display the controls. 2 Drag either end of the frame viewer at the top of the video, then tap Trim. 3 Tap Trim Original or tap Save as New Clip. Important: Trimming the original video permanently deletes the frames you edit from the video. New clips are saved in the Camera Roll album along with the original video. Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer You can upload the photos and videos you take with Camera to photo applications on your computer, such as iPhoto on a Mac. Upload images to your computer: Connect iPhone to your computer. • Mac: Select the photos you want and click the Import or Download button in iPhoto or other supported photo application on your computer. • PC: Follow the instructions that came with your camera or photo application. If you delete the photos and videos from iPhone when you upload them to your computer, they’re removed from the Camera Roll album. You can use the iTunes Photos setup pane to sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 or later required) back to the Photos application on iPhone. See “iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes” on page 13. 106 Chapter 10 CameraYouTube 11 Finding and Viewing Videos YouTube features short videos submitted by people from around the world. To use some features on iPhone, you need to sign in to a YouTube account when prompted. For information about requirements and how to get a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Note: YouTube isn’t available in all languages and locations. Browse videos: Tap Featured, Most Viewed, or Favorites. Or tap More to browse by Most Recent, Top Rated, History, Subscriptions, or Playlists. • Featured: Videos reviewed and featured by YouTube staff. • Most Viewed: Videos most seen by YouTube viewers. Tap All for all-time most viewed videos, or Today or This Week for most-viewed videos of the day or week. • Favorites: Videos you’ve added to Favorites. When you sign in to a YouTube account, account favorites appear and any existing favorites can be synced to your account. • Most Recent: Videos most recently submitted to YouTube. • Top Rated: Videos most highly rated by YouTube viewers. To rate videos, go to www.youtube.com. • History: Videos you’ve viewed most recently. • Subscriptions: Videos from YouTube accounts to which you’ve subscribed. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. • Playlists: Videos you’ve added to playlists. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. Search for a video: 1 Tap Search, then tap the YouTube search field. 2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Search. 107YouTube shows results based on video titles, descriptions, tags, and user names. Listed videos show title, rating, number of views, length, and the account name that posted the video. Play a video: Tap the video. The video begins to download to iPhone and a progress bar appears. When enough of the video has downloaded, it begins to play. You can also tap to start the video. Controlling Video Playback When a video starts playing, the controls disappear so they don’t obscure the video. Show or hide the video controls: Tap the screen. Next/ Fast-forward Play/Pause Email Scale Download progress Volume Playhead Scrubber bar Bookmark Previous/rewind Play or pause a video Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Adjust the volume Drag the volume slider, or use the volume buttons on the side of iPhone. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only). Start a video over Tap . Skip to the next or previous video in a list Tap twice to skip to the previous video. Tap to skip to the next video. Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done, or press the Home button. Toggle between scaling a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen Double-tap the video. You can also tap to make the video fill the screen, or tap to make it fit the screen. Add a video to Favorites using video controls Start playing a video and tap . Email a link to the video using video controls Start playing a video and tap . 108 Chapter 11 YouTubeManaging Videos Tap next to a video to see related videos and more controls for managing videos. Add the video to Favorites Tap “Add to Favorites.” Add the video to a playlist Tap “Add to Playlist,” then select an existing playlist or tap to create a new playlist. Email a link to the video Tap Share Video. Browse and view related videos Tap a video in the list of related videos to view, or tap next to a video for more information. Getting More Information Tap next to the video to show the video’s comments, description, date added, and other information. Chapter 11 YouTube 109Rate the video or add a comment On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. See more videos from this account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos. Subscribe to this YouTube account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos, then tap “Subscribe to ” at the bottom of the video list. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. Using YouTube Account Features If you have a YouTube account, you can access account features such as subscriptions, comments and ratings, and playlists. To create a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Show favorites you’ve added to your account: In Favorites, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account favorites. Any existing favorites you’ve added to iPhone can be merged with your account favorites when you sign in. Delete a favorite: In Favorites, tap Edit, tap next to a video, then tap Delete. Show subscriptions you’ve added to your account: In Subscriptions, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account subscriptions. Tap an account in the list to see all videos for that account. Unsubscribe from a YouTube account: In Subscriptions, tap an account in the list, then tap Unsubscribe. View playlists: In Playlists, tap a playlist to see the list of videos you’ve added. Tap any video in the playlist to begin playing videos from that point in the playlist. Edit a playlist: In Playlists, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To delete the entire playlist, tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete. • To create a new playlist, tap , then enter a name for the playlist. Add a video to a playlist: Tap next to a video, then tap “Add to Playlist” and choose a playlist. Delete a video from a playlist: 1 In Playlists, tap a playlist, then tap Edit. 2 Tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete. 110 Chapter 11 YouTubeChanging the Browse Buttons You can replace the Featured, Most Viewed, Bookmarks, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you watch top rated videos often but don’t watch many featured videos, you could replace the Featured button with Top Rated. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing for videos, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. Sending Videos to YouTube If you have a YouTube account, you can send videos directly from iPhone 3GS to YouTube. See “Publishing Videos to YouTube” on page 101. Chapter 11 YouTube 111Stocks 12 Viewing Stock Quotes Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and indexes. Quotes are updated every time you open Stocks when connected to the Internet. Quotes may be delayed by up to 20 minutes or more depending upon the reporting service. Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader: 1 Tap , then tap . 2 Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search. 3 Select an item from the search results and tap Done. View charts in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. Flick left or right to view the other charts in your stock reader. Show the progress of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. The chart adjusts to show progress over one day, one week, one month, three months, six months, one year, or two years. When you’re viewing a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to display the value for a specific point in time. 112Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time. Delete a stock: Tap and tap next to a stock, then tap Delete. Change the order of the list: Tap . Then drag next to a stock or index to a new place in the list. Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization: Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another view. Or tap and tap %, Price, or Mkt Cap, then tap Done. Getting More Information See the summary, chart, or news page about a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the summary, chart, or recent news page. On the news page, you can scroll up and down to read headlines, or tap a headline to view the article in Safari. See more information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap . Chapter 12 Stocks 113Maps 13 Finding and Viewing Locations WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Maps provides street maps, satellite photos, a hybrid view, and street views of locations in many of the world’s countries. You can get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and traffic information. Find and track your current (approximate) location, and use your current location to get driving directions to or from another place. The built-in digital compass lets you see which way you’re facing. (iPhone 3GS only). Important: Maps, digital compass (iPhone 3GS only), directions, and location-based applications provided by Apple depend on data collected and services provided by third parties. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all geographic areas, resulting in maps, compass headings, directions, or locationbased information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. In order to provide your location, data is collected in a form that doesn’t personally identify you. If you don’t want such data collected, don’t use the feature. Not using this feature won’t impact the non–location-based functionality of your iPhone. Find a location and see a map: 1 Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard. 2 Type an address, intersection, area, landmark, bookmark, contact, or zip code. 3 Tap Search. 114A pin marks the location. Tap the pin to see the name or description of the location. Tap to get information about the location, get directions, add the location to your bookmarks or contacts list, or email a link to Google Maps. Locations can include places of interest added by Google My Maps users (“Usercreated content”), and sponsored links that appear as special icons (for example, ). Zoom in to a part of a map Pinch the map with two fingers. Or double-tap the part you want to zoom in on. Double-tap again to zoom in even closer. Zoom out Pinch the map. Or tap the map with two fingers. Tap with two fingers again to zoom out further. Pan or scroll to another part of the map Drag up, down, left, or right. Find your current location and turn tracking mode on: Tap . Chapter 13 Maps 115Your current (approximate) location is indicated by a blue marker. If your location can’t be determined precisely, a blue circle also appears around the marker. The size of the circle depends on how precisely your location can be determined—the smaller the circle, the greater the precision. As you move around, iPhone updates your location, adjusting the map so that the location indicator remains in the center of the screen. If you tap again or drag the map, iPhone continues to update your location but stops centering it, so the location information may move off the screen. iPhone uses Location Services to determine your location. Location Services uses available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS ( iPhone 3G or later; GPS not available in all locations). This feature isn’t available in all areas. If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. You can’t find and track your current location if Location Services is turned off. See “Location Services” on page 144. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. In Settings, choose General > Location Services. Get information about your current location: Tap the blue marker, then tap . iPhone displays the address of your current location, if available. You can use this information to: • Get directions • Add the location to contacts • Send the address via email or MMS (iPhone 3G or later) • Bookmark the location 116 Chapter 13 MapsShow which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only): Tap again. (The icon changes to .) Maps uses the built-in compass to determine which way you’re facing. The angle shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle, the greater the accuracy. Maps uses true north to determine your heading, even if you have magnetic north set in Compass. If the compass needs calibrating, iPhone asks you to wave the phone in a figure eight. If there’s interference, you may be asked to move from the source of interference. See Chapter 22,“Compass,” on page 173. Use the dropped pin: Tap , then tap Drop Pin. A pin drops down on the map, which you can then drag to any location you choose. Replace the pin: Tap , then tap Replace Pin. iPhone drops the pin in the area you’re currently viewing. Chapter 13 Maps 117See a satellite or hybrid view: Tap , then tap Satellite or Hybrid to see just a satellite view or a combined street map and satellite view. To return to map view, tap Map. See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through the 360° panoramic view. (The inset shows your current view.) Tap an arrow to move down the street. Tap to return to map view To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Street View isn’t available in all areas. 118 Chapter 13 MapsSee the location of someone’s address in your contacts list Tap in the search field, then tap Contacts and choose a contact. To locate an address in this way, the contact must include at least one address. If the contact has more than one address, choose the one you want to locate. You can also find the location of an address by tapping the address directly in Contacts. Add a location to your contacts list Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, tap “Add to Contacts,” then tap “Create New Contact” or “Add to Existing Contact.” Email a link to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap Share Location and tap Email. Send a link via MMS to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap Share Location and tap MMS (iPhone 3G or later). Bookmarking Locations You can bookmark locations that you want to find again later. Bookmark a location: Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap “Add to Bookmarks” at the bottom of the Info screen. See a bookmarked location or recently viewed location: Tap in the search field, then tap Bookmarks or Recents. Getting Directions You can get step-by-step directions for driving, taking public transit, or walking to a destination. Get directions: 1 Tap Directions. 2 Enter starting and ending locations in the Start and End fields. By default, iPhone starts with your current approximate location (if available). Tap in either field to choose a location in Bookmarks (including your current approximate location and the dropped pin, if available), Recents, or Contacts. For example, if a friend’s address is in your contacts list, you can tap Contacts and tap your friend’s name instead of having to type the address. To reverse the directions, tap . Chapter 13 Maps 1193 Tap Route (if you entered locations manually), then select driving ( ), public transit ( ), or walking ( ) directions. The travel options available depend on the route. 4 Do one of the following: • To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap to see the next leg of the trip. Tap to go back. • To view all the directions in a list, tap , then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview screen. If you’re driving or walking, the approximate distance and travel time appear at the top of the screen. If traffic data is available, the driving time is adjusted accordingly. If you’re taking public transit, the overview screen shows each leg of the trip and the mode of transportation, including where you need to walk. The top of the screen shows the time of the bus or train at the first stop, the estimated arrival time, and the total fare. Tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. When you tap Start and step through the route, detailed information about each leg of the trip appears at the top of the screen. You can also get directions by finding a location on the map, tapping the pin that points to it, tapping , then tapping Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Switch start and end points, for reverse directions: Tap . If you don’t see , tap List, then tap Edit. See recently viewed directions: Tap in the search field, then tap Recents. 120 Chapter 13 MapsShowing Traffic Conditions When available, you can show highway traffic conditions on the map. Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap , then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic. Highways are color-coded according to the flow of traffic: Green = more than 50 miles per hour Yellow = 25–50 miles per hour Gray = no data currently available Red = less than 25 miles per hour If you don’t see color-coded highways, you may need to zoom out to a level where you can see major roads, or traffic conditions may not be available for that area. Finding and Contacting Businesses Find businesses in an area: 1 Find a location—for example, a city and state or country, or a street address—or scroll to a location on a map. 2 Type the kind of business in the text field and tap Search. Pins appear for matching locations. For example, if you locate your city and then type “movies” and tap Search, pins mark movie theatres in your city. Tap the pin that marks a business to see its name or description. Find businesses without finding the location first: Type things like: • restaurants san francisco ca • apple inc new york Contact a business or get directions: Tap the pin that marks a business, then tap next to the name. From there, you can do the following: • Tap a phone number to call, an email address to send email to, or a web address to visit. • For directions, tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Chapter 13 Maps 121• To add the business to your contacts list, scroll down and tap “Create New Contact” or “Add to Existing Contact.” • Share the location of the business by email or text message See a list of the businesses found in the search: From the Map screen, tap List. Tap a business to see its location. Or tap next to a business to see its information. Get directions Visit website Tap to show contact info Call 122 Chapter 13 MapsWeather 14 Viewing Weather Summaries Tap Weather from the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day forecast for one or more cities around the world. Six-day forecast Current temperature Current conditions Add and delete cities Number of cities stored Today’s high and low If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city—between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime—between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. Add a city: 1 Tap , then tap . 2 Enter a city name or zip code, then tap Search. 3 Choose a city in the search list. Switch to another city: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. The number of dots below the weather board shows how many cities are stored. Reorder cities: Tap , then drag next to a city to a new place in the list. 123Delete a city: Tap and tap next to a city, then tap Delete. Display temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap , then tap °F or °C. Getting More Weather Information You can see a more detailed weather report, news and websites related to the city, and more. See information about a city at Yahoo.com: Tap . 124 Chapter 14 WeatherVoice Memos 15 Recording Voice Memos Voice Memos lets you use iPhone as a portable recording device using the built-in microphone, iPhone or Bluetooth headset mic, or supported external microphone. Note: External microphones must be designed to work with the iPhone headset jack or Dock Connector, such as Apple-branded earbuds or authorized third-party accessories marked with the Apple “Works with iPhone” logo. You can adjust the recording level by moving the microphone closer to or further away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the level meter should be between –3dB and 0 dB. Record button Audio level meter Go to voice memos 125Record a voice memo: 1 Tap to start recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). 2 Tap to pause or to stop recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Recordings using the built-in microphone are mono, but you can record stereo using an external stereo microphone. When you start a voice recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. The sound isn’t played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141. Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/ Silent switch is set to silent. To use other applications while recording your voice memo, you can lock iPhone or press the Home button. Play back a voice memo you just recorded: Tap . Listening to Voice Memos Scrubber bar Playhead Play a voice memo you’ve previously recorded: 1 Tap . Memos are listed in chronological order, with the most recent memo first. 2 Tap a memo, then tap . Tap to pause, then tap again to resume playback. Skip to any point in a memo: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. 126 Chapter 15 Voice MemosListen through the built-in speaker: Tap Speaker. Managing Voice Memos Delete a voice memo: Tap a memo in the list, then tap Delete. See more information: Tap next to the memo. The Info screen displays information about the length, recording time and date, and provides additional editing and sharing functions. Add a label to a memo: On the Info screen tap , then select a label in the list on the Label screen. To create a custom label, choose Custom at the bottom of the list, then type a name for the label. Chapter 15 Voice Memos 127Trimming Voice Memos You can trim the beginning or ending of a voice memo to eliminate unwanted pauses or noise. Trim a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen, tap next to the memo you want to trim. 2 Tap Trim Memo. 3 Using the time markers as a guide, drag the edges of the audio region to adjust the beginning and end of the voice memo. To preview your edit, tap . 4 Tap Trim Voice Memo. Important: Edits you make to voice memos can’t be undone. Sharing Voice Memos You can share your voice memos as attachments in email or MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later). Share a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen or Info screen, tap Share. 2 Choose Email Voice Memo to open a new message in Mail with the memo attached, or choose MMS to open a new message in Messages. A message appears if the file you’re trying to send is too large. 128 Chapter 15 Voice MemosSyncing Voice Memos iTunes automatically syncs voice memos to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you listen to voice memos on your computer and provides a backup if you delete them from iPhone. Voice memos are synced to the Voice Memos playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos application until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPhone, it isn’t deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo from iTunes, it is deleted from iPhone the next time you sync with iTunes. You can sync the iTunes Voice Memos playlist to the iPod application on iPhone using the Music pane in iTunes. Sync the Voice Memos playlist to iPhone: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Select the Music tab. 4 Select the “Include voice memos” checkbox and click Apply. Chapter 15 Voice Memos 129Notes 16 Writing and Reading Notes Notes are listed in the order of the last modified date, with the most recently modified note at the top. You can see the first few words of each note in the list. Rotate iPhone to view notes in landscape orientation and type using a larger keyboard. Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done. Read a note: Tap the note. Tap or to see the next or previous note. Edit a note: Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard. Delete a note: Tap the note, then tap . 130Searching Notes You can search the text of notes. Search for notes: 1 Drag the note list down or tap the status bar to expose the search window. 2 Enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Emailing Notes Email a note: Tap the note, then tap . To email a note, iPhone must be set up for email. See “Setting Up Email Accounts” on page 59. Syncing Notes You can set up iTunes to automatically sync your notes with email applications such as Mac OS X Mail (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later) or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12. Chapter 16 Notes 131Clock 17 World Clocks You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the world. View clocks: Tap World Clock. If the clock face is white, it’s daytime in that city. If the clock face is black, it’s nighttime. If you have more than four clocks, flick to scroll through them. Add a clock: 1 Tap World Clock. 2 Tap , then type the name of a city. Cities matching what you’ve typed appear below. 3 Tap a city to add a clock for that city. If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone. Delete a clock: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then tap next to a clock and tap Delete. Rearrange clocks: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then drag next to a clock to a new place in the list. 132Alarms You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound only once. Set an alarm: 1 Tap Alarm and tap . 2 Adjust any of the following settings: • To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, tap Repeat and choose the days. • To choose the ringtone that sounds when the alarm goes off, tap Sound. • To set whether the alarm gives you the option to hit snooze, turn Snooze on or off. If Snooze is on and you tap Snooze when the alarm sounds, the alarm stops and then sounds again in ten minutes. • To give the alarm a description, tap Label. iPhone displays the label when the alarm sounds. If at least one alarm is set and turned on, appears in the iPhone status bar at the top of the screen. Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone alerts may not sound at the correct local time. See “Date and Time” on page 147. Turn an alarm on or off: Tap Alarm and turn any alarm on or off. If an alarm is turned off, it won’t sound again unless you turn it back on. If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can turn it on again to reenable it. Change settings for an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm you want to change. Delete an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm and tap Delete. Stopwatch Use the stopwatch to time an event: 1 Tap Stopwatch. 2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch. • To record lap times, tap Lap after each lap. • To pause the stopwatch, tap Stop. Tap Start to resume. • To reset the stopwatch, tap Reset when the stopwatch is pause. If you start the stopwatch and go to another iPhone application, the stopwatch continues running in the background. Chapter 17 Clock 133Timer Set the timer: Tap Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap Start to start the timer. Choose the sound: Tap When Timer Ends. Set a sleep timer: Set the timer, then tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod. When you set a sleep timer, iPhone stops playing music or video when the timer ends. If you start the timer and then switch to another iPhone application, the timer continues running. 134 Chapter 17 ClockCalculator 18 Using the Calculator Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator. When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Rotate iPhone to get an expanded scientific calculator. Standard Memory Functions • C: Tap to clear the displayed number. • MC: Tap to clear the memory. • M+: Tap to add the displayed number to the number in memory. If no number is in memory, tap to store the displayed number in memory. • M-: Tap to subtract the displayed number from the number in memory. • MR: Tap to replace the displayed number with the number in memory. If the button has a white ring around it, there is a number stored in memory. The stored number remains in memory when you switch between the standard and scientific calculators. 135Scientific Calculator Keys Rotate iPhone to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. 2nd Changes the trigonometric buttons (sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, and tanh) to their inverse functions (sin -1 , cos -1 , tan -1 , sinh -1 , cosh -1 , and tanh -1 ). It also changes ln to log2, and e x to 2 x . Tap 2nd again to return the buttons to their original functions. ( Opens a parenthetical expression. Expressions can be nested. ) Closes a parenthetical expression. % Calculates percentages, adds markups, and subtracts discounts. To calculate a percentage, use it with the multiplication (x) key. For example, to calculate 8% of 500, enter 500 x 8 % = which returns 40. To add a markup or subtract a discount, use it with the plus (+) or minus (–) key. For example, to compute the total cost of a $500 item with an 8% sales tax, enter 500 + 8 % = which returns 540. 1/x Returns the reciprocal of a value in decimal format. x 2 Squares a value. x 3 Cubes a value. y x Tap between values to raise the first value to the power of the second value. For example, to compute 3 4 , enter 3 y x 4 = which returns 81. x! Calculates the factorial of a value. v Calculates the square root of a value. x vy Use between values to calculate the x root of y. For example to compute 4 v81, enter 81 x vy 4 = which returns 3. 136 Chapter 18 Calculatorlog Returns the log base 10 of a value. sin Calculates the sine of a value. sin -1 Calculates the arc sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) cos Calculates the cosine of a value. cos -1 Calculates the arc cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) tan Calculates the tangent of a value. tan -1 Calculates the arc tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) ln Calculates the natural log of a value. log2 Calculates the log base 2. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) sinh Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a value. sinh -1 Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) cosh Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a value. cosh -1 Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) tanh Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a value. tanh -1 Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) e x Tap after entering a value to raise the constant “e” (2.718281828459045...) to the power of that value. 2 x Calculates 2 to the power of the displayed value. For example, 10 2 x = 1024. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) Rad Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in radians. Deg Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in degrees. p Enters the value of p (3.141592653589793...). EE An operator that multiplies the currently displayed value by 10 to the power of the next value you enter. Rand Returns a random number between 0 and 1. Chapter 18 Calculator 137Settings 19 Settings allows you to customize iPhone applications, set the date and time, configure your network connection, and enter other preferences for iPhone. Airplane Mode Airplane mode disables the wireless features of iPhone to avoid interfering with aircraft operation and other electrical equipment. Turn on airplane mode: Tap Settings and turn airplane mode on. When airplane mode is on, appears in the status bar at the top of the screen. No phone, radio, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth signals are emitted from iPhone and GPS reception is turned off, disabling many of iPhone’s features. You won’t be able to: • Make or receive phone calls • Get visual voicemail • Send or receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange • Send or receive text messages • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Use the iTunes Store or the App Store If allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can continue to use iPhone to: • Listen to music and watch video 138• Listen to visual voicemail previously received • Check your calendar • Take or view pictures • Hear alarms • Use the stopwatch or timer • Use the calculator • Take notes • Record voice memos • Use Compass • Read text messages and email messages stored on iPhone Where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can turn Wi-Fi back on, enabling you to: • Send and receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Use the iTunes Store or the App Store Wi-Fi Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPhone uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the Internet. If no Wi-Fi networks are available, or you’ve turned Wi-Fi off, then iPhone connects to the Internet via your cellular data network, when available. You can use Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the iTunes Store, and the App Store over a cellular data network connection. Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Choose Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on or off. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects networks in range, then select a network. If necessary, enter a password and tap Join. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically joins it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone joins the one last used. Chapter 19 Settings 139When iPhone is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal. Set iPhone to ask if you want to join a new network: Choose Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to Join Networks” on or off. When you’re trying to access the Internet, by using Safari or Mail for example, and you aren’t in range of a Wi-Fi network you‘ve previously used, this option tells iPhone to look for another network. iPhone displays a list of all available Wi-Fi networks that you can choose from. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) If “Ask to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the Internet when a previously used network or a cellular data network isn’t available. Forget a network, so iPhone doesn’t join it automatically: Choose Wi-Fi and tap next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.” Join a closed Wi-Fi network: To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of scanned networks, choose Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. If the network requires a password, tap Security, tap the type of security the network uses, and enter the password. You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to a closed network. Some Wi-Fi networks may require you to enter or adjust additional settings, such as a client ID or static IP address. Ask the network administrator which settings to use. Adjust settings to connect to a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, then tap next to a network. VPN This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPhone, allowing you to turn VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 143. Notifications This setting appears when you’ve installed an application from the App Store that uses the Apple Push Notification service. Push notifications are used by applications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified or want to conserve battery life. Turn all notifications on or off: Tap Notifications and turn notifications on or off. 140 Chapter 19 SettingsTurn sounds, alerts, or badges on or off for an application: Tap Notifications, then choose an application from the list and choose the types of notification you want to turn on or off. Carrier This setting appears when you’re outside of your carrier’s network and other local carrier data networks are available to use for your phone calls, visual voicemail, and cellular network Internet connections. You can make calls only on carriers that have roaming agreements with your carrier. Additional fees may apply. Roaming charges may be billed to you by the carrier of the selected network, through your carrier. For information about out-of-network coverage and how to enable roaming, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. Select a carrier: Choose Carrier and select the network you want to use. Once you select a network, iPhone uses only that network. If the network is unavailable, “No service” appears on the iPhone screen and you can’t make or receive calls or visual voicemail, or connect to the Internet via cellular data network. Set Network Settings to Automatic to have iPhone select a network for you. Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch Switch between ring and silent mode: Flip the Ring/Silent switch on the side of iPhone. When set to silent, iPhone doesn’t play any ring, alert, or effects sounds. It does, however, play alarms set using Clock. Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera and Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent. Set whether iPhone vibrates when you get a call: Choose Sounds. To set whether iPhone vibrates in silent mode, turn Vibrate under Silent on or off. To set whether iPhone vibrates in ring mode, turn Vibrate under Ring on or off. Adjust the ringer and alerts volume: Choose Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if no song or video is playing and you aren’t on a call, use the volume buttons on the side of iPhone. Set the ringtone: Choose Sounds > Ringtone. Set alert and effects sounds: Choose Sounds and turn items on or off under Ring . When the Ring/Silent switch is set to ring, iPhone plays sounds for alerts and effects that are turned on. You can set iPhone to play a sound whenever you: • Get a call Chapter 19 Settings 141• Get a text message • Get a voicemail message • Get an email message • Send an email message • Have an appointment that you’ve set up to alert you • Lock iPhone • Type using the keyboard Brightness Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you need to recharge iPhone, or use Auto-Brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Choose Brightness and drag the slider. Set whether iPhone adjusts screen brightness automatically: Choose Brightness and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPhone adjusts the screen brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor. Wallpaper You see a wallpaper background picture when you unlock iPhone. You can select one of the images that came with iPhone, or use a photo you’ve synced to iPhone from your computer. Set wallpaper: Choose Wallpaper and choose a picture. General The General settings include date and time, security, network, and other settings that affect more than one application. This is also where you can find information about your iPhone, and reset iPhone to its original state. About Choose General > About to get information about iPhone, including: • Name of your phone network • Number of songs, videos, and photos • Total storage capacity • Space available • Software version • Serial and model numbers • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth addresses 142 Chapter 19 Settings• IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) and ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier, or Smart Card) numbers • Modem firmware version of the cellular transmitter • Legal information • Regulatory information Usage Show battery percentage: Tap Usage and turn Battery Percentage on to display the percentage of battery charge next to the battery icon in the upper-right corner of iPhone (iPhone 3GS only). See your usage statistics: Choose Usage. There, you can see: • Usage—Amount of time iPhone has been awake and in use since the last full charge. iPhone is awake whenever you’re using it—including making or receiving phone calls, using email, sending or receiving text messages, listening to music, browsing the web, or using any other iPhone features. iPhone is also awake while performing background tasks such as automatically checking for and retrieving email messages. • Standby—Amount of time iPhone has been powered on since its last full charge, including the time iPhone has been asleep. • Current period call time and lifetime call time. • Amount of data sent and received over the cellular data network. Reset your usage statistics: Tap Usage and tap Reset Statistics to clear the data and cumulative time statistics. The statistics for the amount of time iPhone has been unlocked and in standby mode aren’t reset. Network Use the Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection, access Wi-Fi settings, or turn Data Roaming on or off. Enable or disable 3G: Tap to turn 3G on or off. Using 3G loads Internet data faster in some cases, but may decrease battery performance. If you’re making a lot of phone calls, you may want to turn 3G off to extend battery performance. Turn Data Roaming on or off: Choose General > Network, then turn Data Roaming on or off. Data Roaming turns on Internet and visual voicemail access over a cellular data network when you’re in an area not covered by your carrier’s network. For example, when you’re traveling, you can turn off Data Roaming to avoid potential roaming charges. By default, Data Roaming is turned off. Chapter 19 Settings 143Turn Internet Tethering on or off: Choose General > Network > Internet Tethering, then turn Internet Tethering on or off. Internet Tethering lets you share iPhone’s Internet connection with a computer connected via USB or Bluetooth (not available in all regions). Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the setup. Additional fees may apply. See “Using iPhone as a Modem” on page 42. Add a new VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN > Add VPN Configuration. VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to access your work email on iPhone. iPhone can connect to VPNs that use the L2TP, PPTP, or Cisco IPSec protocols. VPN works over both Wi-Fi and cellular data network connections. Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPhone. Once you’ve entered VPN settings, a VPN switch appears in the Settings menu that you can use to turn VPN on or off. VPN may also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18. Change a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN and tap the configuration you want to update. Turn VPN on or off: Tap Settings and turn VPN on or off. Delete a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN, tap the blue arrow to the right of the configuration name, and tap Delete VPN at the bottom of the configuration screen. Bluetooth iPhone can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth devices such as headsets, headphones, and car kits for music listening and hands-free talking. See “Bluetooth Devices” on page 55. Turn Bluetooth on or off: Choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on or off. Location Services Location Services allows applications such as Maps Camera, and Compass to gather and use data indicating your location. Location Services doesn’t correlate the data it collects with your personally identifiable information. Your approximate location is determined using available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS (iPhone 3G or later; GPS may not be available in all locations). 144 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can turn Location Services off if you don’t want to use this feature. If you turn Location Services off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on again the next time an application tries to use this feature. Turn Location Services on or off: Choose General > Location Services and turn location services on or off. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. Auto-Lock Locking iPhone turns off the display to save your battery and to prevent unintended operation of iPhone. You can still receive calls and text messages, and you can adjust the volume and use the mic button on the iPhone stereo headset when listening to music or on a call. Set the amount of time before iPhone locks: Choose General > Auto-Lock and choose a time. Passcode Lock By default, iPhone doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. Turn passcode lock off: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Turn Passcode Off, then enter your passcode again. Change the passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Change Passcode. Enter your passcode again, then enter and reenter your new passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Set how long before your passcode is required: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then select how long iPhone can be idle before you need to enter a passcode to unlock it. Turn Voice Dial on or off: Choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial on or off. Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Erase Data to turn it on. After ten failed passcode attempts, your settings are reset to their defaults and all your information and media is erased: • On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data Chapter 19 Settings 145Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone. (On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.) Restrictions You can set restrictions for the use of some applications and for iPod content on iPhone. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists, or turn off YouTube access entirely. Turn on restrictions: 1 Choose General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions. 2 Enter a four-digit passcode. 3 Reenter the passcode. Turn off restrictions: Choose General > Restrictions, then enter the passcode. Tap Disable Restrictions, then reenter the passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore your iPhone software from iTunes. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Set application restrictions: Set the restrictions you want by tapping individual controls on or off. By default, all controls are on (not restricted). Tap an item to turn it off and restrict its use. Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari to browse the web or access web clips. Other third-party applications may allow web browsing even if Safari is disabled. YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot preview, purchase, or download content. The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot install applications on iPhone. Camera is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot take pictures. Location data isn’t provided to applications. Restrict purchases within applications: Turn In-App Purchases off. When enabled, this feature allows you to purchase additional content or features within applications downloaded from the App Store. Set content restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can then set restrictions using that country’s ratings system for the following categories of content: 146 Chapter 19 Settings• Music & Podcasts • Movies • TV Shows • Apps In the United States for example, to allow only movies rated PG or below, tap Movies, then select PG from the list. Note: Not all countries have rating systems. Home Choose General > Home to set preferences for double-clicking the Home button and searching categories on the Spotlight page. You can set iPhone so that double-clicking the Home button goes to the Home screen, Search, Phone Favorites, Camera, or iPod. Set whether double-clicking the Home button shows iPod controls: Turn on iPod Controls to display iPod controls when you’re playing music and double-click the Home button. This feature works even when the display is turned off or iPhone is locked. Set what categories appear in search results: Tap Search Results. All search categories in the list are selected by default. Tap an item to deselect it. Set the order of search result categories: Tap Search Results, then drag next to a search category to a new place in the list. Date and Time These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and in world clocks and calendars. Set whether iPhone shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Choose General > Date & Time and turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (Not available in all countries.) Set whether iPhone updates the date and time automatically: Choose General > Date & Time and turn Set Automatically on or off. If iPhone is set to update the time automatically, it gets the correct time over the cellular network, and updates it for the time zone you’re in. Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone may not be able to automatically set the local time. Set the date and time manually: Choose General > Date & Time and turn Set Automatically off. Tap Time Zone and enter the name of a major city in your time zone. Tap the “Date & Time” return button, then tap “Set Date & Time” and enter the date and time. Chapter 19 Settings 147Keyboard Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. By default, if the default keyboard for the language you select has a dictionary, iPhone automatically suggests corrections or completed words as you type. Turn Auto-Capitalization on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn AutoCapitalization on or off. By default, iPhone automatically capitalizes words after you type sentence-ending punctuation or a return character. Set whether caps lock is enabled: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Enable Caps Lock on or off. If caps lock is enabled and you double-tap the Shift key on the keyboard, all letters you type are uppercase. The Shift key turns blue when caps lock is on. Turn the “.” shortcut on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn “.” Shortcut on or off. The “.” shortcut lets you double-tap the space bar to enter a period followed by a space when you’re typing. It’s on by default. Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > Keyboards > International Keyboards and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35. International Use International settings to set the language for iPhone, turn keyboards for different languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your region. Set the language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Language, choose the language you want to use, then tap Done. Set the Voice Control language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Voice Control, then choose the language you want to use (available only on iPhone 3GS). Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > International > Keyboards, and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35. Set date, time, and telephone number formats: Choose General > International > Region Format, and choose your region. 148 Chapter 19 SettingsThe Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that appear in native iPhone applications. Accessibility To turn on accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS), choose Accessibility and choose the features you want. See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182. Resetting iPhone Reset all settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings. All your preferences and settings are reset. Information, such as your contacts and calendars, and media, such as your songs and videos, aren’t deleted. Erase all content and settings: Connect iPhone to your computer or a power adapter. Choose General > Reset and tap “Erase All Content and Settings.” This resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media: • On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone. (On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.) Reset network settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings. When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to Join Networks” settings are left turned on. To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, choose Settings > General > Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove. Reset the keyboard dictionary: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard Dictionary. You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPhone suggests as you type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary. Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added. Reset the Home screen layout: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Reset the location warnings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Location Warnings. Chapter 19 Settings 149Location warnings are the requests made by applications (such as Camera, Compass, and Maps) to use Location Services with those applications. iPhone stops presenting the warning for an application the second time you tap OK. Tap Reset Location Warnings to resume the warnings. Mail, Contacts, Calendars Use Mail, Contacts, Calendars settings to set up and customize accounts for iPhone: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email • Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other POP and IMAP mail systems • LDAP accounts for Contacts • CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) accounts for Calendars Accounts The Accounts section lets you set up accounts on iPhone. The specific settings that appear depend on the type of account you’re setting up. Your service provider or system administrator should be able to provide the information you need to enter. For more information, see: • “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16 • “Adding Contacts” on page 176 • “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93 Change an account’s settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then make the changes you want. Changes you make to an account’s settings on iPhone are not synced to your computer, so you can configure your accounts to work with iPhone without affecting the account settings on your computer. Stop using an account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then turn Account off. If an account is off, iPhone doesn’t display the account and doesn’t send or check email from or sync other information with that account, until you turn it back on. Adjust advanced settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then do one of the following: 150 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages are stored on iPhone or remotely on your email server (IMAP accounts only), tap Advanced and choose Drafts Mailbox, Sent Mailbox, or Deleted Mailbox. If you store messages on iPhone, you can see them even when iPhone isn’t connected to the Internet. • To set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail on iPhone, tap Advanced and tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week, or one month. • To adjust email server settings, tap Host Name, User Name, or Password under Incoming Mail Server or Outgoing Mail Server. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. • To adjust SSL and password settings, tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. Delete an account from iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account. Deleting an account means you can no longer access the account with your iPhone. All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the account are removed from iPhone. However, deleting an account doesn’t remove the account or its associated information from your computer. Fetch New Data This setting lets you turn Push on or off for MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo! Mail, and any other push accounts you’ve configured on iPhone. Push accounts automatically deliver new information to iPhone when new information appears on the server (some delays may occur). You might want to turn Push off to suspend delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life. When Push is off, and with accounts that don’t support push, data can still be fetched—that is, iPhone can check with the server and see if new information is available. Use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested. For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too frequently. Turn Push on: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then tap to turn Push on. Set the interval to fetch data: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then choose how often you want to fetch data for all accounts. To conserve battery life, fetch less frequently. Setting Push to OFF or setting Fetch to Manually in the Fetch New Data screen overrides individual account settings. Chapter 19 Settings 151Mail The Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all accounts you’ve set up on iPhone. To turn alerts sounds for new or sent mail on or off, use the Sounds settings. Set the number of messages shown on iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Show, then choose a setting. Choose to see the most recent 25, 50, 75, 100, or 200 messages. To download additional messages when you’re in Mail, scroll to the bottom of your inbox and tap Load More Messages. Note: For Microsoft Exchange accounts, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose the Exchange account. Tap “Mail days to sync” and choose the number of days of mail you want to sync with the server. Set how many lines of each message are previewed in the message list: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Preview, then choose a setting. You can choose to see up to five lines of each message. That way, you can scan a list of messages in a mailbox and get an idea of what each message is about. Set a minimum font size for messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Minimum Font Size, then choose Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large, or Giant. Set whether iPhone shows To and Cc labels in message lists: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off. If Show To/Cc Label is on, To or Cc next to each message in a list indicates whether the message was sent directly to you or you received a copy. Set whether iPhone confirms that you want to delete a message: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Ask Before Deleting on or off. If Ask Before Deleting is on, to delete a message you must tap , then confirm by tapping Delete. Set whether iPhone automatically loads remote images: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Load Remote Images on or off. If Load Remote Images is off, you can load images manually when reading a message. Set whether iPhone sends you a copy of every message you send: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Always Bcc Myself on or off. Set the default email account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Default Account, then choose an account. This setting determines which of your accounts a message is sent from when you create a message from another iPhone application, such as sending a photo from Photos or tapping the email address of a business in Maps. To send the message from a different account, tap the From field in the message and choose another account. Add a signature to your messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Signature, then type a signature. 152 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can set iPhone to add a signature—your favorite quote, or your name, title, and phone number, for example—to the bottom of every message you send. Contacts Set how contacts are sorted: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Sort Order and do one of the following: • To sort by first name first, tap First, Last. • To sort by last name first, tap Last, First. Set how contacts are displayed: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Display Order and do one of the following: • To show first name first, tap First, Last. • To show last name first, tap Last, First. Import contacts from a SIM: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Import SIM Contacts. The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which account you want to add the SIM contacts to. Calendar Set alerts to sound when your receive meeting invitation: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” and under Calendar tap “New Invitation Alerts” to turn it on. Set how far back in the past to show your calendar events on iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Sync, then choose a period of time. Turn on Calendar time zone support: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. Select a time zone for calendars by tapping Time Zone and entering the name of a major city. When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time. Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147. Phone Use Phone settings to forward incoming calls, turn call waiting on or off, change your password, and other things. Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for pricing and availability. Chapter 19 Settings 153Calling from Abroad Set iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings, tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only. For more information, see “Using iPhone Abroad” on page 56. Call Forwarding You can set iPhone to forward incoming calls to another number. For example, you may be on vacation and want all calls to go somewhere else. If you’re going to an area with no cellular coverage, you may want to forward calls to a place where you can be reached. Set iPhone to forward your calls: 1 Choose Phone > Call Forwarding and turn Call Forwarding on. 2 Tap Forwarding To and enter the phone number you want calls forwarded to. When Call Forwarding is on, an icon appears in the status bar the top of the screen. You must be in range of the cellular network when you set iPhone to forward calls, or calls won’t be forwarded. Call Waiting Activate or deactivate call waiting: Choose Phone > Call Waiting, then turn Call Waiting on or off. If you turn call waiting off and someone calls you when you’re already on the phone, the call goes to voicemail. Show My Caller ID Show or hide your caller ID: Choose Phone > Show My Caller ID, then turn Show My Caller ID on or off. If Show My Caller ID is off, people you call can’t see your name or phone number on their phone. Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine In some regions, Teletype (TTY) machines are used by deaf or hearing-impaired people to communicate by typing and reading text. You can use iPhone with a TTY machine if you have the iPhone TTY Adapter cable, available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/store (not available in all countries). Connect iPhone to a TTY machine: Choose Phone, then turn TTY on. Then connect iPhone to your TTY machine using the iPhone TTY Adapter. For information about using a TTY machine, see the documentation that came with the machine. 154 Chapter 19 SettingsFor more information about other accessibility features of iPhone, go to Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182. Changing Your Voicemail Password A voicemail password helps prevent others from access your voicemail. You need to enter the password only when you’re calling in to get your messages from another phone. You won’t need to enter the password when using voicemail on iPhone. Change your voicemail password: Choose Phone > Change Voicemail Password. Locking Your SIM Card You can lock your SIM card, so it can’t be used without a Personal Identification Number (PIN). You must enter the PIN each time you turn iPhone off and turn it back on again. Some carriers require a SIM PIN in order to use iPhone. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if the SIM is locked. Turn the SIM PIN on or off: 1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN, then turn SIM PIN on or off. 2 Enter your PIN to confirm. Use the PIN assigned by your carrier, or your carrier’s default PIN. Change the PIN for your SIM card: 1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN. 2 Turn SIM PIN on, then tap Change PIN. 3 Enter your current PIN, then enter your new PIN. 4 Enter your new PIN again to confirm, then tap Done. Accessing Your Carrier’s Services Depending on your carrier, you may be able to access some of your carrier’s services directly from iPhone. For example, you may be able to check your bill balance, call directory assistance, and view how many minutes you have left. Access your carrier’s services: Choose Phone. Then scroll down and tap the button for your carrier’s services. When you request information such as your bill balance, your carrier may provide the information in a text message. Contact your carrier to find out if there are any charges for these services. Chapter 19 Settings 155Safari Safari settings let you select your Internet search engine, set security options, and for developers, turn on debugging. General You can use Google or Yahoo! to perform Internet searches. Select a search engine: Choose Safari > Search Engine and select the search engine you want to use. You can set Safari to automatically fill out web forms using contact information, names and passwords you previously entered, or both. Enable AutoFill: Choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on. When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All. Security By default, Safari is set to show features of the web, such as some movies, animation, and web applications. You may wish to change security settings to help protect iPhone from possible security risks on the Internet. Change security settings: Choose Safari, then do one of the following: • To set whether you’re warned when visiting potentially fraudulent websites, turn Fraud Warning on or off. Fraud warning protects you from potentially fraudulent Internet sites. When you visit a suspicious site, Safari warns you about its suspect nature and doesn’t load the page. • To enable or disable JavaScript, turn JavaScript on or off. JavaScript lets web programmers control elements of the page—for example, a page that uses JavaScript might display the current date and time or cause a linked page to appear in a new pop-up page. • To enable or disable plug-ins, turn Plug-ins on or off. Plug-ins allow Safari to play some types of audio and video files and to display Microsoft Word files and Microsoft Excel documents. • To block or allow pop-ups, turn Block Pop-ups on or off. Blocking pop-ups stops only pop-ups that appear when you close a page or open a page by typing its address. It doesn’t block pop-ups that open when you tap a link. 156 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether Safari accepts cookies, tap Accept Cookies and choose Never, “From visited,” or Always. A cookie is a piece of information that a website puts on iPhone so the website can remember you when you visit again. That way, webpages can be customized for you based on information you may have provided. Some pages won’t work correctly unless iPhone is set to accept cookies. • To clear the history of webpages you’ve visited, tap Clear History. • To clear all cookies from Safari, tap Clear Cookies. • To clear the browser cache, tap Clear Cache. The browser cache stores the content of pages so the pages open faster the next time you visit them. If a page you open doesn’t show new content, clearing the cache may help. Developer The debug console can help you resolve webpage errors. If it’s turned on, the console appears automatically when a webpage error occurs. Turn the debug console on or off: Choose Safari > Developer, and turn Debug Console on or off. Messages Use Messages settings to adjust settings for SMS and MMS messages. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. The MMS Messaging and Show Subject Field settings doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier. Choose whether or not to see a preview of messages on the Home screen: Choose Messages and turn Show Preview on or off. Choose whether or not to repeat message alerts: Choose Messages and turn Repeat Alert on or off. If you ignore a message alert, you’ll be alerted two more times. Turn MMS messaging on or off: Choose Messages and turn MMS Messaging on or off. If MMS messaging is turned off, you won’t be able to receive MMS file attachments such as images or audio. Show a subject line for messages you send or receive: Choose Messages and turn Show Subject Field on. Chapter 19 Settings 157iPod Use iPod Settings to adjust settings for music and video playback on your iPod. Music The Music settings apply to songs, podcasts, and audiobooks. Turn Shake to Shuffle on or off: Choose iPod, then turn Shake to Shuffle on or off. When Shake to Shuffle is on, you can shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately change the currently playing song. Set iTunes to play songs at the same sound level: In iTunes, choose iTunes > Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or Edit > Preferences if you’re using a PC, then click Playback and select Sound Check. Set iPhone to use the iTunes volume settings (Sound Check): Choose iPod and turn Sound Check on. Use the equalizer to customize the sound on iPhone: Choose iPod > EQ and choose a setting. Set a volume limit for music and videos: Choose iPod > Volume Limit and drag the slider to adjust the maximum volume. Tap Lock Volume Limit to assign a code to prevent the setting from being changed. Setting a volume limit only limits the volume of music (including podcasts and audiobooks) and videos (including rented movies), and only when headphones, earphones, or speakers are connected to the headset jack on iPhone. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Video Video settings apply to video content, including rented movies. You can set where to resume playing videos that you previously started, turn closed captioning on or off, and set up iPhone to play videos on your TV. Set where to resume playing: Choose iPod > Start Playing, then select whether you want videos that you previously started watching to resume playing from the beginning or where you left off. Turn closed captioning on or off: Choose iPod and turn Closed Captioning on or off. 158 Chapter 19 SettingsTV Out Use these settings to set up how iPhone plays videos on your TV. For more information about using iPhone to play videos on your TV, see “Watching Videos on a TV” on page 84. Turn widescreen on or off: Choose iPod and turn Widescreen on or off. Set TV signal to NTSC or PAL: Choose iPod > TV Signal and select NTSC or PAL. NTSC and PAL are TV broadcast standards. NTSC displays 480i and PAL displays 576i. Your TV might use either of these, depending on where you bought it. If you’re not sure which to use, check the documentation that came with your TV. Photos Use Photos settings to specify how slideshows display your photos. Set the length of time each slide is shown: Choose Photos > Play Each Slide For and select the length of time. Set a transition effect: Choose Photos > Transition and select a transition effect. Set whether to repeat slideshows: Choose Photos and turn Repeat on or off. Set photos to appear randomly or in order: Choose Photos and turn Shuffle on or off. Store Use Store settings to change or create an iTunes Store account. By default, the iTunes account you’re signed in to when you sync iPhone with your computer appears in Store settings. You can change accounts on iPhone to purchase music or applications from another account. If you don’t have an iTunes account, you can create one in Store settings. Sign in to an account: Choose Store and tap Sign in, then enter your user name and password. View your iTunes Store account information: Choose Store and tap View Account, then type your password and follow the onscreen instructions. Sign in to a different account: Choose Store and tap Sign out, then tap Sign in and enter your username and password. Create a new account: Choose Store and tap Create New Account, then follow the onscreen instructions. Nike + iPod Use Nike + iPod settings to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application (iPhone 3GS only). See Chapter 24,“Nike + iPod,” on page 180. Chapter 19 Settings 159iTunes Store 20 About the iTunes Store You can search for, browse, preview, purchase, and download music, ringtones, audiobooks, TV shows, movies, and music videos from the iTunes Store directly to iPhone. You can listen to audio or watch video podcasts from the iTunes Store, either by streaming them from the Internet or by downloading them directly to iPhone. Note: The iTunes Store is not available in all regions, and iTunes Store content may vary across regions. To access the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 40. To purchase songs or write reviews, you need an iTunes Store account. By default, iPhone gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 159. You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts. 160Finding Music, Videos, and More Browse content: Tap Music, Videos, Ringtones, or Podcasts. Or tap More to browse by Audiobooks, iTunes U, or Downloads. Choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as Featured, Top Tens, or Genres. Search for content: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Search results are grouped by category, such as Movies, Albums, or Podcasts. Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. You can read reviews, write your own review, or email a link about the item to a friend. Depending on the item, you can also buy, download, or rent it. Note: If you join a Starbucks Wi-Fi network in a select Starbucks location (available in the U.S. only), the Starbucks icon appears at the bottom of the screen. You can preview and purchase the currently playing and other songs from featured Starbucks Collections. Chapter 20 iTunes Store 161Purchasing Ringtones You can preview and purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store and download them to iPhone. Note: Ringtones may not be available in all countries. Browse for ringtones: Tap Ringtones or use Search to find a specific song in the iTunes Store. Preview a ringtone: Tap the item to preview. Double-tap the item for more information. Purchase and download ringtones: 1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. When you purchase a ringtone, you can set it as your default ringtone, or assign it to a contact. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. You can change your default ringtone or assign individual ringtones to contacts in Settings > Sounds. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141. Ringtones you purchase on iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. You can sync purchased ringtones to more than one iPhone, if they’re all synced to the same account you used to purchase the ringtones. You can’t edit ringtones you purchase from the iTunes Store. You can create custom ringtones in Garage Band. For information, see Garage Band Help. Purchasing Music or Audiobooks When you find a song, album, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPhone. You can preview an item before you purchase it to make sure it’s what you want. Preview a song or audiobook: Tap the item. Purchase and download a song, album, or audiobook: 1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. 162 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreYour purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. An alert appears if you’ve previously purchased one or more songs from an album. Tap Buy if you want to purchase the entire album including the songs you’ve already purchased, or tap Cancel if you want to purchase any remaining songs individually. Some albums include bonus content, which is downloaded to your iTunes library on your computer. Not all bonus content is downloaded directly to iPhone. Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. See “Checking Download Status” on page 165. Purchased songs are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one when you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions. Purchasing or Renting Videos When you find a movie, TV show, or music video you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPhone. You can purchase movies and TV shows in standard (480p) or high definition (720p) format. When you purchase a high-definition video on iPhone, a standard definition version compatible with iPod and iPhone immediately downloads for viewing. The high definition version appears in iTunes on your computer in the Downloads queue. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account on your computer to view and download items from the Downloads queue. Rented movies are available in standard definition only (not available in all regions). See “Watching Rented Movies” on page 83. Preview a video: Tap Preview. Purchase or rent a video: 1 Tap Buy or Rent. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Chapter 20 iTunes Store 163Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. Rented movies won’t begin playing until the download completes. See “Checking Download Status” on page 165. Purchased videos are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one the next time you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions. Streaming or Downloading Podcasts You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts to iPhone. Podcasts you download to iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. Tap Podcasts to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. To see a list of episodes, tap a podcast. Video podcasts are indicated by the icon. Stream a podcast: Tap the podcast title. Download a podcast: Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts appear in the Podcasts list in iPod. Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded: In iPod, tap Podcasts at the bottom of the screen (you may need to tap More first), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts also appear in your list of videos. Get more episodes of the podcast you’ve downloaded: In the Podcasts list in iPod, tap the podcast, then tap Get More Episodes. Delete a podcast: In the Podcasts list in iPod, swipe left or right over the podcast, then tap Delete. 164 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreChecking Download Status You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled downloads, including purchases you’ve pre-ordered. See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads. To pause a download, tap . If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account). See the status of pre-ordered items: Tap Downloads. Pre-ordered items appear in a list until the date the item is released. Tap the item for release date information. Once the item is available for download, a download icon appears next to the download. Download a pre-ordered item: Tap the item, then tap . Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the Downloads screen to begin the download. Syncing Purchased Content iTunes automatically syncs everything you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete purchased content from iPhone. Purchased content is synced to the “Purchased on ” playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. iTunes also copies your purchases to the Purchased playlist that iTunes uses for purchases you make on your computer, if that playlist exists and is set to sync with iPhone. Downloaded podcasts are synced to the Podcast list in your iTunes library. Changing the Browse Buttons You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with Audiobooks. Chapter 20 iTunes Store 165Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. Viewing Account Information To view your iTunes Store account information on iPhone, tap your account (at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Account. You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store” on page 159. Verifying Purchases You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, applications, and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted. Verify your purchases: 1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet. 2 In iTunes, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads. 3 Enter your iTunes Store account ID and password, then click Check. Purchases not yet on your computer are downloaded. The Purchased playlist displays your purchases. However, because you can add or remove items in this list, it might not be accurate. To see all of your purchases, sign in to your account, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History. 166 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreApp Store 21 About the App Store You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download applications from the App Store directly to iPhone. Applications you download and install from the App Store on iPhone are backed up to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPhone with your computer. You can also install applications you’ve purchased or downloaded through iTunes on your computer when you sync with iPhone. Note: The App Store is not available in all regions. To use the App Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 40. You also need an iTunes Store account (not available in some countries) to download applications. By default, iPhone gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 159. Browsing and Searching Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended applications, or browse Top 25 to see the most popular applications. If you’re looking for a specific application, use Search. 167Browse applications: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Choose a category, or choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as New, What’s Hot, Genius, Top Paid, or Top Free. Browse using Genius: Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions. Genius is a free service, but it requires an iTunes Store account. Search for applications: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. 168 Chapter 21 App StoreInfo Screen Tap any application in a list to see more information, such as the application’s price, screenshots, ratings, and other information. If you’ve already installed the application, “Installed” appears instead of the price on the Info screen. Email a link to the application’s Info page in iTunes: Tap “Tell a Friend” near the bottom of the Info screen. View screenshots: Swipe left or right over a screenshot to view additional screenshot pages. Double-tap to zoom in. Get ratings and read reviews: Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen. Report a problem: Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the Info screen. Select a problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report. Chapter 21 App Store 169Downloading Applications When you find an application you want in the App Store, you can purchase and download it to iPhone. If the application is free, you can download it without charge after providing your iTunes account information. Once you download an application, it’s immediately installed on iPhone. Purchase and download an application: 1 Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Downloads for purchase are charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional downloads made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Some applications allow you to make purchases within the application. You can restrict in-app purchases in Settings. See “Restrictions” on page 146. Some applications use push notifications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. See “Notifications” on page 140. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most App Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then follow the onscreen instructions. See the status of downloading applications: After you begin downloading an application, its icon appears on the Home screen and shows a progress indicator. If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account). 170 Chapter 21 App StoreDeleting Applications You can delete applications you’ve installed from the App Store. If you delete an application, data associated with the application will no longer be available to iPhone, unless you reinstall the application and restore its data from a backup. You can reinstall an application and restore its data as long as you backed up iPhone with iTunes on your computer. (If you try to delete an application that hasn’t been backed up to your computer, an alert appears.) To retrieve the application data, you must restore iPhone from a backup containing the data. See “Restoring from a Backup” on page 203. Delete an App Store application: 1 Touch and hold any application icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle. 2 Tap in the corner of the application you want to delete. 3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement. When you delete an application, its data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” in iPhone settings. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Writing Reviews You can write and submit your own application reviews directly on iPhone. Write a review: 1 Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen. 2 On the Reviews screen, tap “Write a Review.” 3 Select the number of stars (1–5) for your rating of the application, and enter your nickname, a title for the review, and optional review comments. If you’ve written reviews before, the nickname field is already filled in. Otherwise, you’re asked to create a reviewer nickname. 4 Tap Send. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account and have purchased or downloaded the item in order to submit reviews. Chapter 21 App Store 171Updating Applications Whenever you access the App Store, it checks for updates to applications you’ve installed. The App Store also automatically checks for updates every week. The App Store icon shows the total number of application updates available. If an update is available and you access the App Store, the Updates screen appears immediately. Application updates are downloaded and automatically installed when you choose to update them. Application upgrades are new releases that can be purchased or downloaded through the App Store on iPhone or the iTunes Store on your computer. Update an application: 1 At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates. 2 Tap an application to see more information about the update. 3 Tap Update. Update all applications: At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates, then tap Update All. If you try to update an application purchased from a different iTunes Store account, you’re prompted for that account’s ID and password in order to download the update. Syncing Purchased Applications iTunes automatically syncs applications you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete applications from iPhone. Downloaded applications are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes. Applications are synced to the Applications list in your iTunes library. iTunes creates the list if it doesn’t exist. 172 Chapter 21 App StoreCompass 22 Getting Compass Readings The built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only) shows which direction you’re facing, along with the geographical coordinates of your current location. You can choose magnetic north, or have Compass adjust the declination to show true north. Important: The accuracy of digital compass headings may be negatively affected by magnetic or other environmental interference, including interference caused by the close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. The digital compass should only be used for basic navigation assistance and should not be solely relied on to determine precise locations, proximity, distance, or direction. The compass needs to be calibrated the first time you use it, and may need to be calibrated occasionally after that. iPhone alerts you whenever calibration is needed. Calibrate iPhone: Wave iPhone in a figure eight. You may be asked to move away from a source of interference. 173See which way you’re facing: Hold iPhone level to the ground. The compass needle rotates to point north. Your current direction appears at the top of the screen. The coordinates of your current location are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Switch between true north and magnetic north: Tap and tap the setting you want. Compass and Maps The icon at the bottom of the Compass screen lets you find your current location in Maps. Maps also takes advantage of the built-in compass to show which way you’re facing. See your current location in Maps: Tap . Maps opens and indicates your current location with a blue marker. 174 Chapter 22 CompassShow which way you’re facing: In Maps, tap again. (The icon changes to .) The angle shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle, the greater the accuracy. See “Finding and Viewing Locations” on page 114. Chapter 22 Compass 175Contacts 23 About Contacts Contact makes it easy to call, email, and text your friends and associates with iPhone. You can add contacts directly on iPhone, or sync contacts from applications on your computer, or with your MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Google, or Yahoo! accounts. You can open Contacts directly from the Home screen, or from within the Phone application. Adding Contacts You can add contacts to iPhone in the following ways: • In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your computer (see “Syncing” on page 11) • Set up MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts on iPhone, with Contacts enabled (see “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16) • Install a profile that sets up an Exchange account, with Contacts enabled (see “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18) • Set up an LDAP account on iPhone • Enter contacts directly on iPhone • Import contacts from a SIM The number of contacts you can add is limited only by the amount of memory on iPhone. 176Set up an LDAP account: 1 In Settings, tap “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account. 2 Tap Other, then tap Add LDAP Account. 3 Enter your LDAP account information and tap Next to verify the account. 4 Tap Save. When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your company or organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts. Since LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPhone, you must have an Internet connection to view them. Check with your system administrator for specific account settings and other requirements (such as VPN). Import contacts from another phone’s SIM: In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Import SIM Contacts. The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which account you want to add the SIM contacts to. Important: iPhone doesn’t store contacts on its SIM. Searching Contacts You can search first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPhone. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone, you may also be able to search your enterprise Global Address List (GAL) for contacts in your organization. If you have an LDAP account set up on iPhone, you can search contacts on your organization’s LDAP server. When you enter search information, contacts with matching information appear immediately as you start to type. Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts and enter a first, last, or company name. (To scroll quickly to the top of the list, tap the status bar.) Search a GAL: Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit GAL contacts or save them to iPhone. Search an LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit LDAP contacts or save them to iPhone. Chapter 23 Contacts 177Managing Contacts on iPhone Add a contact on iPhone: Tap Contacts and tap . Delete a contact In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll down and tap Delete Contact. Add a contact from the keypad Tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap . Tap Create New Contact and enter the caller’s information, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact. Edit contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, then tap Edit. To add an item, tap . To delete an item, tap . Enter a pause in a number Tap , then tap Pause. One or more pauses may be required by a phone system before dialing an extension, for example. Pauses appear as commas when the number is saved. Add a recent caller’s phone number to your contacts Tap Recents and tap next to the number. Then tap Create New Contact, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact. Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Tap Contacts and choose a contact. 2 Tap Edit and tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo. 3 Tap Take Photo to use the camera. Or tap Choose Existing Photo and choose a photo. 4 Drag and scale the photo as desired. 5 Tap Set Photo. 178 Chapter 23 ContactsUse a contact’s info screen: Tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap an item. Visit the website Call Send an email Send a text message Add a phone number to your favorites list See a map and get directions Note: The Contacts screen shown here includes the buttons across the bottom that are available when you view Contacts from within the Phone application. These buttons don’t appear if you open Contacts directly from the Home screen. A star next to a phone number means the number is in your favorites list. See your own phone number: Tap Contacts and scroll to the top of the list. (Not available in all regions.) Chapter 23 Contacts 179Nike + iPod 24 Activating Nike + iPod When activated in Settings, the Nike + iPod application appears on the Home screen (iPhone 3GS only). With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod application provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and calories burned during a running or walking workout. When iPhone is connected to iTunes on your computer, you can send your workout information to Nikeplus.com, where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges. See the Nike + iPod documentation for information about activating and using Nike + iPod. Turn Nike + iPod on or off: In Settings, choose Nike + iPod and turn Nike + iPod on or off. When Nike + iPod is turned on, its icon appears on the Home screen. 180Additional Nike + iPod Settings In Settings, choose Nike + iPod to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application. Choose a PowerSong: Choose PowerSong and select a song from your music library. Turn spoken feedback on or off: Choose Spoken Feedback and select a male or female voice to accompany your workout, or Off to turn off spoken feedback. Set a distance preference: Choose Distance, then select Miles or Kilometers to measure your workout distance. Set your weight: Choose Weight, then flick to enter your weight. Set the screen orientation: Choose Lock Screen, then select a screen orientation preference. Set up the Nike + iPod Sensor: Choose Sensor, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your sensor (sold separately). You can use a Nike+ compatible remote (sold separately) to control Nike + iPod wirelessly. Before using a remote for the first time, you must set it up on iPhone. Set up the Nike + iPod remote: Choose Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your remote (third-party product sold separately). Chapter 24 Nike + iPod 181Accessibility 25 Accessibility Features In addition to the many features that make iPhone easy to use for everyone, accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS) are designed to make it easier for users with visual, auditory, or other physical disabilities to use iPhone. These accessibility features include: • VoiceOver • Zoom • White on Black • Mono Audio • Speak Auto-text With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with all iPhone applications, including third-party applications you download from the App Store. VoiceOver works with all applications that come preinstalled on iPhone. In addition, third-party developers can use the iPhone Accessibility API to make their applications accessible for VoiceOver users. For more information about the accessibility features of iPhone, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in the Accessibility settings on iPhone. You can also turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes when iPhone is connected to your computer. Turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 In the Summary pane, click Configure Universal Access in the Options section. 1824 Select the accessibility features that you want to use and click OK. VoiceOver VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so that you can use iPhone without seeing it. VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which may be influenced by the Region Locale setting. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as it’s selected. When an element is selected, it’s enclosed by a black rectangle (for the benefit of those who can see the screen) and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. The enclosing rectangle is referred to as the VoiceOver cursor. If text is selected, VoiceOver reads the text. If a control (such as a button or switch) is selected and Speak Hints is turned on, VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for example, “double-tap to open.” When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner). VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait, and when the screen is locked or unlocked. Setting Up VoiceOver Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPhone. Once VoiceOver is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPhone—even to turn VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation. Turn VoiceOver on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and tap the VoiceOver On/Off switch. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click Home” on page 191. Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Chapter 25 Accessibility 183Turn spoken hints on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and tap the Speak Hints On/Off switch. Spoken hints are turned on by default. Set the VoiceOver speaking rate: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and adjust the Speaking Rate slider. You can choose what kind of feedback you get when you type. You can set VoiceOver to speak characters, words, both, or nothing. If you choose to hear both characters and words, VoiceOver speaks each character as you type it, then speaks the whole word when you finish it by entering a space or punctuation. Choose typing feedback: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Typing Feedback, then choose Characters, Words, Characters and Words, or Nothing. Change the language spoken by VoiceOver: In Settings, choose General > International > Language, then select a language and tap OK. Some languages may be influenced by the Region Local setting. In Settings, choose General > International > Region Format and select the format. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. Practice gestures: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures, then tap Practice VoiceOver Gestures. Practice the gestures described in “VoiceOver Gestures,” below. When you’re finished practicing, tap Done. VoiceOver Gestures When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects. These and some additional gestures allow you to move around the screen and to control the individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include using two and three fingers to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and threefinger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between your fingers. You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures resume. You can use many different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each hand. You can also use your thumbs. Try different techniques to discover which works best for you. If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tap and flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers. You can practice VoiceOver gestures in Settings: choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures and tap the Practice VoiceOver Gestures button. Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures: 184 Chapter 25 AccessibilityNavigate and Read • Tap: Speak item. • Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item. • Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Rotor Control” on page 185. • Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item. • Two-finger flick up: Read all from top of screen. • Two-finger flick down: Read all from current position. • Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time. • Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home screen, Stocks, or Safari). • Three-finger tap: Speak the scroll status (which page or rows are visible). Select and Activate • Double-tap: Activate selected item. • Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”): Activate item. • Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture. The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPhone to interpret the subsequent gesture as standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger, drag your finger to slide a switch. • Two-finger double tap: Answer or end a call. Play or pause in iPod, YouTube, Voice Memos, or Photos. Take a picture (Camera). Start or pause recording in Camera or Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch. • Three-finger double tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver. • Three-finger triple tap: Turn the display on or off. Do single-finger flicking gestures quickly, to distinguish them from dragging gestures. Rotor Control The rotor control is an invisible dial that you can use to change the results of up and down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on. Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPhone screen to “turn” the dial to choose between options. Chapter 25 Accessibility 185The effect of the rotor depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re browsing a webpage, use the rotor to choose whether you hear text word-by-word or character-by-character, hear just the headers, hear just the links (all of them, visited links, or links not yet visited), hear form elements, or hear descriptions of images. In other words, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text, or to jump from one element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links. Rotor options depend on the context of what you’re doing. Reading text • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word Browsing a webpage • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word • Select and hear headers • Select and hear links • Select and hear form controls • Select and hear visited links • Select and hear links not visited • Select and hear images • Select and hear static text • Zoom in or out Entering text • Move insertion point and hear text character-by-character • Move insertion point and text word-by-word • Text editing functions • Auto-text Using a control (such as the spinner for setting the time in Clock) • Select and hear value character-by-character • Select and hear value word-by-word • Adjust the value of the control object 186 Chapter 25 AccessibilityUsing VoiceOver Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies each element as you touch it. You can also move systematically from one element to the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the previous element. “Tap” a selected item when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap anywhere on the screen. Speak the text of an element, character by character or word by word: With the element selected, flick up or down with one finger. Flick down to read the next character, or flick up to read the previous character. Twist the rotor control to read word by word. Adjust a slider: With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it. Scroll a list or area of the screen: Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down to page down through the list, or flick up to page up through the list. When paging through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing rows 5 through 10”). You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Doubletap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger. Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index cannot be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down. Unlock iPhone: Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen. Rearrange the Home screen: On the Home screen select the icon you want to move. Double-tap and hold, then drag the icon. VoiceOver speaks the row and column position as your drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move it to another page of the Home screen. When you’re finished rearranging the icons, press the Home button. Chapter 25 Accessibility 187Mute VoiceOver Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again with three fingers to turn speaking back on. To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the Ring/Silent switch to Silent. Stop speaking an item Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking automatically resumes when you select another item. Turn off the display while you use VoiceOver Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with three fingers to turn on the display again. Speak entire screen from the top Flick up with two fingers. Speak from current item to bottom of screen Flick down with two fingers. Status information about iPhone can be heard by touching the top of the screen. This can include the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more. Entering and Editing Text When you select a text field with VoiceOver, you can use the onscreen keyboard to enter text. You can use the editing features of iPhone to cut, copy, or paste in the text field. Note: Safari doesn’t support copying webpage content. The editing features work only in editable text fields. Enter text: 1 Use VoiceOver to select an editable text field, then double tap to display the insertion point and bring up the onscreen keyboard. If the field already contains text, the insertion point is placed at the beginning or at the end of the text. Double-tap again to place the insertion point at the opposite end. VoiceOver tells you the position of the insertion point. The insertion point and onscreen keyboard may appear automatically when you select a text field. VoiceOver announces when you’re in editing mode. 2 To type, select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to enter the character. Or drag you finger around the keyboard to select a key, and, while holding the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the character. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when it’s entered. To enter an accented character, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound that indicates the alternate characters have appeared, then drag left or right to select and hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection. 188 Chapter 25 AccessibilityMove the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and speaks the character that the insertion point moved across. Use the rotor to choose whether you want to move the insertion point by character or by word. Select text: Use the rotor to choose edit. Flick up or down to choose between the Select and Select All functions, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the entire text is selected. Pinch to increase or decrease the selection. Cut, Copy, or Paste: Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap. Undo: Shake iPhone, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then double-tap. Using Maps With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about locations. Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom in or out. Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another. Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the information page. Editing Videos and Voice Memos You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Camera videos and Voice Memo recordings. Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap. Trim a video: While viewing a video, double-tap the screen to display the video controls. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Then flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim and double-tap. Zoom Many iPhone applications let you zoom in and out specific elements. For example, you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari. Zoom is a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any application you’re using to help you see what’s on the display. Chapter 25 Accessibility 189Turn Zoom on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Zoom and tap the Zoom On/Off switch. Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is magnified by 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tapand-drag gesture, described below), iPhone automatically returns to that magnification when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers. Increase magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger. Move around the screen: When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen. White on Black Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPhone display, which may make it easier to read the screen. The screen looks like a photographic negative when White on Black is turned on. Invert the screen’s colors: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the “White on Black” switch. Mono Audio Mono Audio combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal played on both sides. This enables users with hearing impairment in one ear to hear the entire sound signal with the other ear. Turn Mono Audio on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Mono Audio switch. Speak Auto-text Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPhone makes when you’re typing. Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Speak Auto-text switch. Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom. 190 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTriple-click Home Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the options to: • Turn VoiceOver on or off • Turn Zoom on or off • Turn White on Black on or off Triple-click Home is turned off by default. Set the Triple-click Home function: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home and choose the function you want. Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features Many features available on all models of iPhone help make iPhone accessible to all users, including those with visual or auditory impairments. Closed Captioning You can turn on closed captioning for videos in iPod settings. See “Video” on page 158. Voice Control Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control iPod music playback by using voice commands. See “Voice Dialing” on page 48, and “Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77. Large Phone Keypad Make phone calls simply by tapping entries in your contacts and favorites lists. When you need to dial a number, iPhone’s large numeric keypad makes it easy. See “Phone Calls” on page 47. Widescreen Keyboards Several applications let you rotate iPhone when you’re typing so that you can use a larger keyboard: • Mail • Safari • Messages • Notes • Contacts Chapter 25 Accessibility 191Visual Voicemail The play and pause controls in visual voicemail let you control the playback of messages. Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar to repeat a portion of the message that’s hard to understand. See “Checking Voicemail” on page 52. Assignable Ringtones You can assign distinctive ringtones to individuals in your contacts list for audible caller ID. You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on iPhone. See “Purchasing Ringtones” on page 162. Instant Messaging (IM) Chat The App Store features many Internet Messaging (IM) applications such as AIM, BeejiveIM, ICQ, and Yahoo! Messenger that are optimized for iPhone. Minimum Font Size for Mail Messages To increase readability, set a minimum font size for Mail message text to Large, Extra Large, or Giant. See “Mail” on page 152. TTY Support (Available in Some Areas) Use iPhone in TTY mode with the iPhone TTY Adapter (available separately) to use a Teletype (TTY) machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine” on page 154. Universal Access in Mac OS X Take advantage of the Universal Access features in Mac OS X when you use iTunes to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPhone. In the Finder, choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.” For more information about iPhone and Mac OS X accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. 192 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTroubleshooting A Appendix Apple iPhone Support Site Comprehensive support information is available online at www.apple.com/support/iphone. General Low-Battery Image Appears iPhone is low on power and needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43. or iPhone Doesn’t Respond • iPhone may be low on power. Connect iPhone to your computer or to its power adapter to charge. See “Charging the Battery” on page 43. • Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application you were using quits. • If that doesn’t work, turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/ Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • If that doesn’t work, reset iPhone. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. 193iPhone Still Doesn’t Respond After Reset • Reset iPhone settings. From the Home screen choose Settings > General > Reset > Reset All Settings. All your preferences are reset, but your data and media aren’t deleted. • If that doesn’t work, erase all content on iPhone. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. • If that doesn’t work, restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. “This accessory is not made to work with iPhone” Appears Make sure the dock connector is free of debris. If you connect iPhone to an accessory not specifically made for it, iPhone may ask if you want to turn on airplane mode. This is to eliminate radio interference from cellular signals coming from iPhone. You may be able to use iPhone with the accessory whether or not you turn on airplane mode. However, the accessory may not charge iPhone. If you turn on airplane mode, you won’t be able to make calls, send or receive text messages, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth devices with iPhone until you disconnect iPhone from the accessory or turn off airplane mode. “This accessory is not supported by iPhone” Appears The accessory you attached may not work with iPhone. Make sure the dock connector is free of debris. Connect-to-iTunes Screen Appears iPhone needs to be activated. Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes if it doesn’t open automatically. iPhone Is Too Warm If the interior temperature of iPhone 3G or later exceeds normal operating temperatures, you may experience the following as it attempts to regulate its temperature: • iPhone stops charging • the display dims • the cellular signal is weak • a temperature warning screen appears Important: You cannot use iPhone while the temperature warning screen is displayed except to make an emergency call. If none of the above measures succeeds in lowering the internal temperature, iPhone automatically goes into a deep sleep mode until it cools. You cannot make an emergency call when iPhone is in this mode. Move iPhone to a cooler location and wait a few minutes before trying to use iPhone again. 194 Appendix A TroubleshootingiTunes and Syncing iPhone Doesn’t Appear in iTunes • The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer. • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. Syncing Doesn’t Work • The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer. • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. Contacts, Calendars, or Bookmarks Don’t Sync • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. Appendix A Troubleshooting 195Yahoo! or Google Contacts Doesn’t Sync iTunes may not be able to connect with Yahoo! or Google. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, and that you’ve entered the correct ID and password in iTunes. Connect iPhone to your computer, click the Info tab in iTunes, click Configure in the Contacts section, then enter your current ID and password. Yahoo! Address Book Still Has Contacts Deleted From iPhone Yahoo! Address Book doesn’t allow contacts containing a Messenger ID to be deleted through syncing. To delete a contact containing a Messenger ID, log in to your Yahoo! account online and delete the contact using Yahoo! Address Book. Phone and Voicemail Can’t Make or Receive Calls • Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try going outdoors or moving closer to a window. • Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s website to see network coverage areas. • Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then turn airplane mode off again. • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • There may be a problem with your wireless service. Call your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. • Restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Visual Voicemail Isn’t Available Visual Voicemail is delivered over the cellular data network. Because Data Roaming is turned off by default, you may not have access to the Internet when traveling abroad unless you turn Data Roaming on. In Settings choose General > Network, then tap Data Roaming. Important: Data roaming charges may apply when Data Roaming is on. 196 Appendix A TroubleshootingVisual Voicemail may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for more information. You Can’t Remember Your Voicemail Password If iPhone prompts you for your password when you tap Voicemail and you don’t remember your password, tap for instructions on resetting it. Voicemail Service Is Called When You Tap Voicemail If the voice instructions prompt you, enter your voicemail password. Otherwise, wait until you hear any voice instruction, then end the call. After a time, Voicemail should become available again. This may occur if you removed the SIM card from iPhone and replace it with another SIM card. Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts Websites, Text, or Email Aren’t Available • Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try going outdoors or moving closer to a window. • Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s website to see network coverage areas. • If the cellular network isn’t available, connect to a Wi-Fi network if possible. • Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then turn airplane mode off again. • Make sure to include an area code for every phone number in your contacts list that you use to send or receive text messages. • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • There may be a problem with your wireless service. Call your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. Appendix A Troubleshooting 197• If you’re traveling abroad, you may not have Internet access because Data Roaming is turned off (the default). Turn Data Roaming on or connect to a Wi-Fi network. To turn Data Roaming on, in Settings choose General > Network and tap Data Roaming. Data roaming charges may apply. Important: Data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, turn Data Roaming off. • Restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Can’t Send Email If iPhone is unable to send email, try the following: • In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and select the account you’re trying to use. Tap Account Info, then tap SMTP under Outgoing Mail Server. Under Other SMTP Server, tap the SMTP server for your carrier, then tap to turn the server on. The Under Other SMTP settings also allow you to set up additional SMTP servers. Contact your carrier or Internet service provider for configuration information. • Set up your email account directly on iPhone instead of syncing it from iTunes. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPhone is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account. • Turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • Turn off Wi-Fi so iPhone is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data network. In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t send email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account. Can’t Receive Email If iPhone is unable to receive email, try the following: • If you’re using one or more computers to check the same email account, that may be creating a lock-out issue. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS2621. 198 Appendix A Troubleshooting• Set up your email account directly on iPhone instead of syncing it from iTunes. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPhone is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account. • Turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • Turn off Wi-Fi so iPhone is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data network. In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t receive email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account. Email Attachment Won’t Open The file type may not be supported. iPhone supports the following email attachment file formats: .doc Microsoft Word .docx Microsoft Word (XML) .htm webpage .html webpage .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages .pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat .ppt Microsoft PowerPoint .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML) .rtf Rich Text Format .txt text .vcf contact information .xls Microsoft Excel .xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML) Appendix A Troubleshooting 199GAL Contacts Don’t Appear Check your Microsoft Exchange settings to make sure you’re on the right server. In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose an account to display its settings. If you’re trying to search for GAL contacts in Contacts, tap Groups and tap Directories at the bottom of the list. Sound, Music, and Video No Sound • Unplug and reconnect the headset. Make sure the connector is pushed in all the way. • Make sure the volume isn’t turned down all the way. • Music on iPhone might be paused. Try pressing the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to resume playback. Or from the Home screen, tap iPod, tap Now Playing, then tap . • Check to see if a volume limit is set. From the Home screen choose Settings > iPod > Volume Limit. For more information, see “Music” on page 158. • Make sure you’re using the latest version of iTunes (go to www.apple.com/itunes). • If you’re using the optional dock’s line out port, make sure your external speakers or stereo are turned on and working properly. Pressing Mic Button Doesn’t Resume Music Playback iPhone goes to sleep after music has been paused for five minutes. Press the Home or Sleep/Wake button to wake up iPhone. Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play The song may have been encoded in a format that iPhone doesn’t support. The following audio file formats are supported by iPhone. These include formats for audiobooks and podcasting: • AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P, up to 320 Kbps) • Apple Lossless (a high-quality compressed format) • MP3 (up to 320 Kbps) • MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) • WAV • AA (audible.com spoken word, formats 2, 3, and 4) • AAX (audible.com spoken word, AudibleEnhanced format) • AIFF 200 Appendix A TroubleshootingThe following video file formats are supported by iPhone: • H.264 (Baseline Profile Level 3.0) • MPEG-4 (Simple Profile) A song encoded using Apple Lossless format has full CD-quality sound, but takes up only about half as much space as a song encoded using AIFF or WAV format. The same song encoded in AAC or MP3 format takes up even less space. When you import music from a CD using iTunes, it’s converted to AAC format by default. Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert nonprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3 format. This can be useful if you have a library of music encoded in WMA format. iPhone doesn’t support WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 audio files, or audible.com format 1. If you have a song or video in your iTunes library that isn’t supported by iPhone, you may be able to convert it to a format iPhone supports. See iTunes Help for more information. iTunes Stores iTunes Store Isn’t Available To use the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 40. The iTunes Store isn’t available in all countries. Can’t Purchase Content To purchase content from the iTunes Store or App Store, you must have an iTunes Store account. Open iTunes on your computer and choose Store > Create Account. You can also set up an account on iPhone. See “Viewing Account Information” on page 166. Note: The iTunes Store is available only in some countries. Removing the SIM Card If you need to send your iPhone in for service, or if you want to loan your iPhone to someone and you still want to be able to make calls, you may be able to use the SIM card inside iPhone with another phone. Appendix A Troubleshooting 201Remove the SIM card: Insert the end of the SIM eject tool (or a small paper clip) into the hole on the SIM tray. Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out. SIM eject SIM tray tool SIM card Backing Up iPhone iTunes creates backups of settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information on iPhone. You can use a backup to restore these items to your iPhone after a software restore or to transfer the information to another iPhone. Backing up iPhone or restoring from a backup is not the same as syncing content and other items (such as music, podcasts, ringtones, photos, videos, and applications that you download via iTunes) with your iTunes library. Backups include settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information that resides on iPhone. You can restore these items from a backup using iTunes, but you may also have to sync your iTunes library content again. Applications downloaded from the App Store are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes. Creating Backups Backups can be created in the following ways: • Once iPhone has been configured to sync with a particular computer, iTunes automatically makes a backup of iPhone on that computer when you sync. iTunes won’t automatically back up an iPhone that isn’t configured to sync with that computer. If you’ve configured iPhone to automatically sync with iTunes on a specific computer, iTunes will back up iPhone every time you connect it to that computer. Automatic syncing is turned on by default. iTunes only makes one backup each time you connect, even if you sync multiple times before disconnecting. • If you choose to update the software on iPhone, iTunes will back up iPhone automatically, even if it isn’t configured to sync with iTunes on that computer. • If you choose to restore the software on iPhone, iTunes asks if you want to back up iPhone before restoring. If you use a Bluetooth headset or car kit with iPhone and you restore settings, you must pair the Bluetooth device with iPhone again to use it. 202 Appendix A TroubleshootingFor more information about backups, including the settings and information stored in a backup, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1766. Restoring from a Backup You can restore the settings, application data, and other information from a backup, or use this feature to transfer these items to another iPhone. Restore iPhone from a backup: 1 Connect iPhone to the computer you normally sync with. 2 In iTunes, Control-click iPhone in the sidebar and choose “Restore from Backup” from the menu that appears. 3 Choose the backup that you want to restore from the pop-up menu, then click Restore. If your backup is encrypted, you’ll need to enter your password. After restoring from a backup, previous data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Important: Restoring iPhone from a backup restores all data in the backup, including data for other applications. If you choose an old backup, restoring from it could replace the data for applications with data that is not current. Removing a Backup You can remove a backup of iPhone from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer. Remove a backup: 1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences. • Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences. • Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences. 2 Click Devices (iPhone does not need to be connected). 3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup. 4 Confirm you wish to remove the selected backup by clicking Delete Backup. 5 Click OK to close the iTunes Preferences Window. Appendix A Troubleshooting 203Updating and Restoring iPhone Software You can use iTunes to update or reinstall iPhone software, restore default settings, and delete all data on iPhone. • If you update, the iPhone software is updated. Your downloaded applications, settings, and data aren’t affected. Note: In some cases, an update may also include restoring iPhone. • If you restore, the latest version of iPhone software is reinstalled, settings are restored to their defaults, and data stored on iPhone is deleted, including downloaded applications, songs, videos, contacts, photos, calendar information, and any other data. If you’ve backed up iPhone with iTunes on your computer, you can restore data from the backup at the end of the restore process. Deleted data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Update or restore iPhone: 1 Make sure you have an Internet connection and have installed the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. 2 Connect iPhone to your computer. 3 Select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar and click the Summary tab. 4 Click “Check for Update.” iTunes tells you if there’s a newer version of the iPhone software available. 5 Click Update to install the latest version of the software. Or click Restore to restore. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the restore process. For more information about updating and restoring iPhone software, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1414. 204 Appendix A TroubleshootingOther Resources B Appendix Safety, Software, and Service Information The following table describes where to get more iPhone-related safety, software, and service information. To learn about Do this Using iPhone safely See the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone for the latest safety and regulatory information. iPhone service and support, tips, forums, and Apple software downloads Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone. Service and support from your carrier Contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. The latest information about iPhone Go to www.apple.com/iphone. Using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (available in some areas only), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes. MobileMe Go to www.me.com. Using iPhoto on Mac OS X Open iPhoto and choose Help > iPhoto Help. Using Address Book on Mac OS X Open Address Book and choose Help > Address Book Help. Using iCal on Mac OS X Open iCal and choose Help > iCal Help. 205To learn about Do this Microsoft Outlook, Windows Address Book, Adobe Photoshop Album, and Adobe Photoshop Elements See the documentation that came with those applications. Finding your iPhone serial number or International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number You can find your iPhone serial and IMEI numbers on the iPhone packaging. Or, on iPhone, choose Settings > General > About from the Home screen. In iTunes on your computer, hold down the Control key and choose Help > About iTunes (Windows) or iTunes > About iTunes (Mac), then release the Control key. (Press the Space bar to pause the scrolling.) Obtaining warranty service First follow the advice in this guide and online resources. Then go to www.apple.com/support or see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Battery replacement service Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/ battery. Using iPhone in an enterprise environment Go to www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise. Viewing the User Guide on iPhone The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at help.apple.com/iphone. View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark. Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages. View guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want. Disposal and Recycling Information Apple Used Mobile Phone Recycling Program (available in some areas): For free recycling of your old mobile phone, a prepaid shipping label, and instructions, see: www.apple.com/environment/recycling 206 Appendix B Other ResourcesiPhone Disposal and Recycling: You must dispose of iPhone properly according to local laws and regulations. Because iPhone contains electronic components and a battery, iPhone must be disposed of separately from household waste. When iPhone reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about disposal and recycling options, or simply drop it off at your local Apple retail store or return it to Apple. The battery will be removed and recycled in an environmentally friendly manner. For more information, see: www.apple.com/environment/recycling European Union—Electronics and Battery Disposal Information: This symbol means that according to local laws and regulations your product and its battery should be recycled separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities for the recycling of electronic equipment. The improper disposal of waste electronic equipment from the consumer may be subject to fines. The separate collection and recycling of your product and its battery at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For collection and recycling schemes for iPhone, go to: www.apple.com/environment/recycling/nationalservices/europe.html Battery Replacement for iPhone: The rechargeable battery in iPhone should be replaced only by an authorized service provider. For battery replacement services go to: www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Türkiye: EEE yönetmelig?ine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Es¸yalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur. Apple and the Environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to: www.apple.com/environment Appendix B Other Resources 207Index 3G 21, 41 12-hour time 147 24-hour time 147 A accessibility features 182 Mono Audio 190 setting up iPhone using VoiceOver 11 settings 149 Speak Auto-text 190 Triple-click Home 191 VoiceOver 183 White on Black 190 Zoom 189 accounts 16, 150 “push” 18, 151 activating iPhone 10 adjusting brightness 142 Adobe Photoshop 97 Adobe Photoshop Elements 15 airplane mode settings 138 status icon 21 turning on 138 alarms deleting 133 setting 133 status icon 22 turning on or off 133 album covers 78 album tracks 79 alert voicemail 52 alerts adjusting volume 27, 141 calendar 96 turning on or off 141 alternate audio language 83 answering calls 39 anti-phishing. See Safari fraud warning App Store about 167 browsing 167 deleting applications 171 Genius 168 store account 159, 167 syncing 12 syncing purchased content 172 updating applications 172 verifying purchases 166 applications 23 deleting 171 attachments email 62 audio alternate language 83 mono 190 audio file formats, supported 201 audiobooks syncing 12 Auto-Brightness 142 AutoFill 69, 156 auto-lock, setting time for 145 AV cables 84 B backing up iPhone 14 backups creating 202 removing 203 restoring from 203 battery charging 43 low on power 44, 193 maximizing life 44 replacing 44, 206 status icon 22 Bluetooth finding address 143 headset 26, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 74, 77, 78, 82, 104, 108, 126, 200, 202 routing calls back through iPhone 56 status icon 22 turning on or off 144 unpairing device 56 Index 208bookmarking map locations 119 webpages 69 YouTube videos 108, 109 bookmarks, syncing 12, 14, 69 brightness adjusting 142 setting to adjust automatically 142 browser cache, clearing 157 browsing album covers 78 App Store 167 iTunes Music Store 161 YouTube videos 107 businesses, finding 121 buttons, changing 85 C cable, Dock Connector to USB 11, 21 cache, clearing browser 157 Calculator 135 scientific 136 Calendar about 91 searching 93 views 92 See also events calendars, syncing 12, 14, 91 call forwarding 154 call options 49 call waiting, turning on or off 154 caller ID, hiding or showing 154 calls no service 196 See also phone Camera deleting pictures 104 exposure 104 focus 104 seeing photos and videos you’ve taken 104, 105 taking pictures 104 upload pictures to your computer 106 caps lock, enabling 148 carrier services 155 Cc 152 cell signal, status icon 21 cellular network 41 charging battery 43 cleaning iPhone 46 Clock 132 clocks, adding 132 closed captioning, turning on or off 158 Compass current coordinates 174 heading 174 True and Magnetic North 174 component AV cable 84 composite AV cable 84 computer requirements 9 conference calls 50 configuration profiles 18 connecting to Internet 40 contacts adding and editing 178 adding from Maps 119 adding from text messages 89 assigning photo to 102 favorite 54 GAL (Global Address List) 59, 177, 200 LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 177 seeing location of 119 send info by email 60 setting how displayed 153 setting how sorted 153 syncing 12, 13, 14, 176 using to call someone 47 Yahoo! Address Book 14 controls, using 28 converting videos 73 converting unprotected WMA files 201 cookies 157 copying images 100 photos and videos in MMS messages 88 text 33 Cover Flow 78 current approximate location 119, 174 cutting and pasting text 33 D data, erasing 17, 45, 145, 149 date and time, setting 147 date format 148 debug console 157 declining calls 49 deleting alarms 133 all content and settings 45, 149 applications from the App Store 171 clocks 132 contacts 178 contacts from Favorites 54 email account 151 email messages 64 notes 130 pictures 104 playlists 81 removing 203 songs from a playlist 81 videos 84 Index 209YouTube playlists 110 YouTube videos from a playlist 110 developer settings 157 Dialing a phone number 47 directions, getting 119 disconnecting iPhone from computer 19 display freezes 194 Dock Connector 125 Dock Connector to USB cable 11, 21 downloading applications 170 podcasts 164 E EDGE 40 editing text 33 text conversations 89 videos 106 effects sounds, turning on or off 141 email accounts syncing 12 emergency calls 51 ending calls 39 enterprise, using iPhone 206 equalizer 158 erasing data 17, 45, 145, 149 events, calendar 94 Exchange. See Microsoft Exchange exposure 104 F favorites calling a contact from 47, 54 managing 54 sending text messages 87 Fetch New Data 151 file formats, supported 62, 199, 200, 201 Find My iPhone 17, 45 focus 104 force quit an application 46 formats date, time, and telephone number 148 forwarding messages 60 G GAL (Global Address List) 59, 177, 200 Genius Mixes 73, 80 Genius playlists 76, 79 Genius, App Store 168 gestures, VoiceOver 184 getting help 205 getting started 9 Google search engine 156 Google Contacts 14, 196 searching the web 69 GPRS 40 GPS 116 grab points 34 H hands-free phone calls 50, 144 headset about 21, 39 center button 21, 26, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 74, 77, 78, 82, 104, 108, 126, 200 using with Voice Memos 125 headset button. See mic button help, getting 205 hold, putting calls on 50 Home screen 23, 29 adding web clips 70 customizing 25 hybrid view 118 I iCal 14, 205 ICCID number 143 icons applications 23 status 21 See also buttons images copying 100 pasting 100 IMAP accounts 59 searching email 64 IMEI number 143 installing applications from the App Store 170 configuration profiles 18 international keyboards 35, 148 Internet, connecting to 40 iPhoto 15, 205 iPod changing browse buttons 85 converting videos for iPhone 73 deleting videos 84 Genius Mixes 80 Genius playlists 79 headset controls 39 on-the-go playlists 81, 110 playing songs using Voice Control 77 repeating or shuffling songs 76 searching 79, 83 settings 158 Shake to Shuffle 73, 158 sleep timer 84 210 IndexiTunes Store about 160 account 10, 159, 160, 163, 167 browsing 161 checking download status 165 purchasing ringtones 162 purchasing songs and albums 162 streaming or downloading podcasts 164 syncing purchased content 165 verifying purchases 166 iTunes U syncing 12, 15, 71 iTunes getting help 205 iPhone doesn’t appear in 195 settings panes 13 K keyboards Emoji 35 international 35, 148 typing on 32 keypad, numbers 50 L LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 177 links in email 62 on webpages 67 location. See Maps Location Services 144 location warnings 150 locking iPhone 22, 26, 27 lyrics, displaying 75 M Mac system requirements 9 magnetic north 173 Mail account setup 59, 150 attachments 62, 199 Cc 152 checking for new messages 60, 64 deleting email account 151 deleting messages 64 forwarding messages 60 links 62 load additional messages 61 marking messages as unread 63 organizing email 65 password settings 151 problems opening an attachment 199 reading messages 61 replying to messages 60 resizing text column 61 saving drafts 60 searching 64 seeing recipients 63 sending email to someone you’ve texted 89 sending messages 59 sending photos and videos 60 sending webpage addresses 67 sending YouTube video links 108, 109 settings 150, 151 share contact information 60 signatures 152 storing email on iPhone or server 151 syncing email account settings 12 Yahoo! email account 18 zooming in a message 61 Maps adding location to a contact 119 bookmarking location 119 current approximate location 116, 119 dropped pin 117 finding businesses 121 finding location 114 getting directions 119 GPS 116 hybrid view 118 satellite view 118 seeing location of a contact 119 share location 119 traffic conditions 121 zooming 115 Messages contacting someone you’ve texted 89 editing conversations 89 following links in messages 89 previews 90 replying to messages 87 saving a photo or video clip 88 saving conversations 87 sending a photo or video clip 88 sending messages 86 setting alert sounds 90 settings 157 show earlier messages 87 mic button 39 microphone about 39 built-in 125 muting 50 microphone, external 125 Microsoft Excel 156 Microsoft Exchange 16, 23, 25, 59, 176 push accounts 18 searching email 64 setting up account 16 syncing 16, 57, 91 Microsoft Internet Explorer 14, 69 Index 211Microsoft Outlook 14, 15 Microsoft Word 156 missed calls number of 52 returning 47 MMS 23, 24, 86, 88, 89, 97, 98, 100, 101, 116, 119, 128, 157 See also Messages MobileMe 16, 23, 25, 176 getting help 205 push accounts 18 searching email 64 security features 17, 45 sending photos to a gallery 100 setting up account 16 syncing 57, 69, 91 model number 142 modem firmware version 143 Mono Audio 190 movies rented 15, 83 syncing 12 music lyrics 75 managing manually 14 previewing 162 purchasing 162 searching 79 syncing 12, 15, 71 See also iPod music videos syncing 12 muting a call 50 N navigating. See panning, scrolling Network activity status icon 22 networks 139 Nike + iPod settings 159, 181 north, true and magnetic 173 Notes 130 searching 131 syncing 12 NTSC 159 O on-the-go playlists 81 orientation, changing 66 Outlook Express. See Windows Address Book Outlook. See Microsoft Outlook overview, iPhone applications 23 P pairing with Bluetooth headset 55 PAL 159 panning maps 115 webpages 67 parental controls. See Restrictions passcode 145 password changing 155 voicemail 197 pasting images 100 photos and videos in MMS messages 88 text 33 pausing songs and videos 39 PC system requirements 9 phone network name 142 Phone adding and editing contacts 178 answering calls 39, 40, 49 call waiting 154 calling internationally 56 calling someone you’ve texted 89 carrier services 155 changing voicemail password 155 conference calls 50 declining calls 40, 49 emergency calls 51 ending calls 39, 40, 50 forwarding calls 154 hands-free 50 hiding or showing caller ID 154 locking SIM card 155 making calls 47 missed calls 52 muting calls 50 putting calls on hold 50 ring mode 54 routing calls back through iPhone 56 second calls 50 setting up voicemail 52 settings 153 silencing calls 49 silent mode 54 switching between calls 40, 50 turning on vibrate 54 unpairing Bluetooth device 56 using favorites 54 using speakerphone 50 using TTY machine 154 voice dialing 48 voicemail 51, 52 voicemail alerts 52 photo albums 99 212 Indexphotos saving MMS attachments 88 sending in MMS messages 88 Photos assigning photos to contacts 102 emailing photos 100 playing music during slideshow 100 sending in email messages 60 settings 99, 159 syncing 12, 15, 97 using photos as wallpaper 102 viewing slideshows 99 zooming photos 99 See also Camera pictures taking 104 See also Camera, Photos PIN number 155 playlists, making 81 plug-ins 156 podcasts downloading 164 streaming 164 syncing 12, 15, 71 pop-ups 156 power adapter 21 power, low 44 previewing music 162 ringtones 162 videos 163 previewings text messages 90 problems. See troubleshooting purchased content syncing 165, 172 purchasing applications 167 iTunes content 72 music 160, 162 ringtones 162 videos 163 push accounts 18, 151 R reading email 61 Recents, using to call someone 47 rechargeable batteries 44 removing backups 203 SIM card 201 rented movies 83 renting movies 15 videos 163 repeating 76 replacing battery 44, 206 replying to messages 60 requirements for using iPhone 9 reset iPhone 46 resizing webpage columns 67 restarting 46 restoring iPhone software 204 restoring settings and information 203 restrictions, setting 146 ring mode 28, 54, 141 ringer adjusting volume 27, 141 turning on or off 141 Ring/Silent switch 28, 54 ringtones previewing 162 purchasing 162 setting 55, 141 syncing 12 rotor control 185 routing calls back through iPhone 56 S Safari AutoFill 69, 156 bookmarking webpages 69 clearing cache 157 cookies 157 Debug Console 157 developer settings 157 fraud warning 156 Home screen web clips 70 navigating 67 opening webpages 66, 68 plug-ins 156 pop-ups 156 reloading webpages 67 resizing columns to fit screen 67 saving images to your Photo Library 67 searching the web 69 security 156 sending webpage addresses in email 67 settings 156 stopping webpages from loading 67 syncing bookmarks 12, 14 typing in text fields 68 zooming webpages 67 satellite view 118 screen 142 setting to adjust automatically 142 using 28 screen reader 11 scrolling about 29 maps 115 webpages 67 Index 213search engine 156 searching App Store 167 calendars 93 global 37 iTunes Music Store 161 Mail messages 64 music 79 notes 131 videos 83 searching the web 69 searching YouTube videos 107 security erase data after ten failed passcode attempts 145 features 45 Find My iPhone 17, 45 setting passcode for iPhone 145 web 156 selecting text 34 sending email 59 photos and video clips 88 photos from Photos 100 text messages 86 voice memos 88 serial number, finding 142, 206 service and support information 205 settings accessibility 149 accounts 150 airplane mode 138 alarms 133 alerts 90, 96 auto-capitalization 148 auto-correction 33, 148 auto-lock 145 Bluetooth 144 brightness 142 Calendar 92, 96 date and time 92, 147 developer 157 email server 151 Fetch New Data 151 international 148 iPod 158 language 148 location services 144 Mail, Contacts, Calendars 150 Mail 150 messages 157 Nike + iPod 159, 181 notifications 140 passcode lock 145 Phone 153 Photos 99, 159 resetting 149 restrictions 146 Safari 69, 156 screen brightness 142 security 156 Shake to Shuffle 158 slideshow 99 sound 90, 96 Store 159 temperature 124 TV out 159 usage statistics 143 vibrate 54 video 158 VoiceOver 182 VPN 144 wallpaper 102, 142 Wi-Fi 139 Shake to Shuffle 73, 158 sharing photos and videos in email messages 60 photos and videos in MMS messages 88 shuffling songs 76 signatures, email 152 silencing calls 49 silent mode 28, 54, 141 SIM card, locking 155 sleep. See locking iPhone sleep timer 84 slideshows 99, 100 settings 159 SMS 86 See also Messages software getting help 205 updating and restoring 204 version 142 sound adjusting ringer and alerts volume 141 adjusting volume 27 no sound 200 setting limit 158 Sound Check 158 sound effects 27 sounds adjusting volume 40 calendar alert 96 setting ringtone 141 turning on or off 141 Speak Auto-text 190 speakerphone 50 SSL 151 star next to a phone number 179 Starbucks, browsing and purchasing music 161 status icons 21 stock information, Yahoo! 113 Stocks, adding and deleting quotes 112 214 Indexstopwatch, using 133 storage capacity 142 Store, settings 159 streaming podcasts 164 subtitles 83 surfing the web 66 switching between calls 50 syncing calendars 91 getting calls during 19 Google Contacts 14, 196 iTunes library contents 12 Microsoft Exchange 16, 57, 91 MobileMe 16, 57, 91 photos 97 preventing 15 purchased songs 165 “Sync in progress” message 19 webpage bookmarks 69 Yahoo! Address Book 196 syncing voice memos 129 system requirements 9 T taking pictures 104 telephone. See Phone telephone number format 148 text cutting or copying 33 pasting 33 typing 32 text messaging. See Messages Text typing in webpages 68 time format 148 time zone support 92, 93, 147, 153 time, setting 147 timer setting 134 sleep 134 touchscreen, using 28 traffic conditions, checking 121 transfer settings and information 202 transferring purchased content 73, 165 transferring purchased content 172 transferring settings and information 203 transition effects, setting 159 trimming videos 106 Triple-click Home setting 191 troubleshooting backing up 202 can’t browse websites 197 can’t make a call 196 can’t open an attachment 199 can’t purchase music or applications 201 can’t text 197 display freezes 193 email not available 197 GAL contacts don’t appear 200 iPhone calls voicemail service 197 iPhone doesn’t appear in iTunes 195 iPhone doesn’t respond 193 iPhone doesn’t turn on 193 no sound 200 problems playing songs or other content 200 removing the SIM card 201 restarting 46 software update and restore 204 true north 173 TTY machine, using 154 turning iPhone on or off 26 TV shows syncing 15 TV shows, syncing 12 TV signal settings 159 typing keyboard 32 in webpage text fields 68 U undoing edits 34 unlocking iPhone 27 unpairing Bluetooth device 56 unread messages, marking 63 unsupported audio file formats 201 updating iPhone software 204 usage statistics battery percentage 143 resetting 143 seeing 143 USB cable 11, 21 port 11 power adapter 21 V vibrate, setting 54, 141 video settings 158 videos alternate audio language 83 converting for iPhone 73 deleting 84 editing 106 previewing 163 purchasing 163 saving MMS attachments 88 searching 83 sending in MMS messages 88 subtitles 83 syncing 12, 15, 71 trimming 106 Index 215watching on a TV 84 See also iPod, Music, YouTube virtual private network. See VPN Voice Control making phone calls 38, 48 playing songs 38, 77 using with headset 40 Voice Memos attaching to MMS messages 128 emailing 128 recording 125 syncing 129 trimming 128 voicemail about 51 alerts 52 changing password 155 checking and managing 52 forgotten password 197 greeting 52 setting up 52 VoiceOver about 183 entering and editing text 188 gestures 184 rotor control 185 setting up iPhone using 11 volume adjusting 27, 40 adjusting for ringer and alerts 141 setting limit 158 VPN accessing networks using 42 configuring 144 set up by configuration profile 18 turning on or off 144 W waking iPhone 27 wallpaper choosing 142 settings 102 using photo as 102 warranty service 206 watching videos on a TV 84 weather information, Yahoo! 124 Weather adding cities 123 deleting cities 124 temperature settings 124 viewing 123 web. See Safari web clips, adding to Home screen 70 webpages bookmarking 69 syncing 12, 14 White on Black 190 Wi-Fi addresses 143 forgetting a network 140 joining networks 41, 139 settings 139 status icon 22 turning on or off 139 Windows Address Book 14 Windows XP 9 WMA files, converting 201 “Works with iPhone” logo 125 World Clock 132 Y Yahoo! Address Book 14, 196 search engine 156 search using 69 searching using 69 stock information 113 weather information 124 YouTube bookmarking videos 108, 109 browsing videos 107 emailing links 108, 109 playing videos 108 searching for videos 107 Z Zoom (Accessibility feature) 189 zooming email messages 61 maps 115 photos 99 webpages 67 216 IndexK Apple Inc. © 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, Cover Flow, iCal, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Numbers, Pages, Safari, and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Finder, iPhone, Multi-Touch, and Shuffle are trademarks of Apple Inc. iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store and MobileMe are service marks of Apple Inc. The Nike + iPod Sport Kit is covered by one or more of U.S. patent numbers 6,018,705, 6,052,654, 6,493,652, 6,298,314, 6,611,789, 6,876,947, and 6,882,955, either alone or when used in combination with a Nike + iPod enabled iPod media player or iPhone 3GS. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/or other countries. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. 019-1650/2009-09 ð Macintosh User’s Guide the Includes setup, troubleshooting, and important health-related information for the Macintosh LC 630 DOS Compatible K Apple Computer, Inc. © 1995 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Apple Computer, Inc. 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014-2084 (408) 996-1010 Apple, the Apple logo, AppleShare, AppleTalk, ImageWriter, LaserWriter, Macintosh, MacTCP, ProDOS, QuickTime, and StyleWriter are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple Desktop Bus, AppleScript, Balloon Help, Disk First Aid, Finder, Macintosh PC Exchange, PlainTalk, PowerTalk, and QuickDraw GX are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing, Inc. Helvetica and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries. Hewlett-Packard, LaserJet, and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. MacLink Plus is a trademark of Data Viz., Inc. Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and SoftWindows is a trademark used under license. NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. QMS is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc. QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc. Sound Blaster is a trademark of Creative Technology, Ltd. SuperPaint is a trademark of Aldus Corporation, a subsidiary of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc. Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.iii Communications regulation information vii Preface Your DOS-compatible Macintosh computer ix 1 Getting Started 1 Plugging in the computer 1 Installing an expansion card 3 Connecting a monitor 3 Connecting the mouse and keyboard 6 Connecting other equipment 7 Turning the computer on 8 Problems turning your computer on? 10 What’s next? 11 Learning the basics 12 Reviewing the basics 13 Turning the computer off 14 Where to find answers 15 Contents2 Getting Help 17 Getting answers to your questions 18 Identifying objects on the screen 26 Learning useful shortcuts 27 3 Connecting Additional Equipment 29 Where to connect additional equipment 30 Connecting an Apple PlainTalk Microphone 31 Connecting external stereo speakers 32 Connecting a game controller 33 Expanding memory 34 Installing internal drives 34 4 Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment 35 Installing Macintosh application programs 36 Working with several programs at a time 37 Backing up your files 38 5 Operating in the PC Environment 39 Switching between the Macintosh and PC environments 40 Setting up the PC environment 42 Working in the PC environment 44 Running network software 53 Using multimedia, MIDI, and game application programs 54 Using Macintosh peripherals in the PC environment 55 Using PC peripherals 59 iv Contents6 Configuring the PC Environment 61 Choosing settings 62 Configuring the PC serial ports 63 Setting the monitor 64 Setting the time and date 64 Setting shared memory 65 Choosing shared folders or volumes 67 Turning on PC sounds 69 Configuring drives C and D 70 Managing PC files from the Mac OS 71 Changing the size of the drive container 72 Understanding the status line 76 7 Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 77 When you have questions 77 When you run into trouble 77 Solutions to common problems 80 Initializing a hard disk 93 Repairing a damaged disk 97 Installing or reinstalling Mac OS system software 102 8 Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 113 When you have questions 113 Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software 119 Contents vAppendix A Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 129 Health-related information about computer use 129 Safety instructions 134 Handling your computer equipment 135 Cleaning your equipment 139 Locking and unlocking the mouse 141 Appendix B Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 143 Opening the computer 145 Installing a communication card 148 Installing a SIMM for the PC environment 149 Closing the computer 154 Appendix C Special Keys on Your Keyboard 157 Appendix D Installing Macintosh Easy Open 159 Choosing an application to open a document 159 Using the Macintosh Easy Open control panel 161 Appendix E Installing Network Management Software 163 Installing NetWare client software 163 Installing Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software 167 Installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software 169 Installing Windows for Workgroups 173 Installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software 173 Installing Mosaic 177 Index 179 vi ContentsCommunications regulation information FCC statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and television interference The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet helpful: Interference Handbook (stock number 004-000-00493-1). This booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission, is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. Communications regulation information viiDOC statement DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications. Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des Communications. VCCI statement CD-ROM drive WARNING Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your equipment’s manual may result in hazardous exposure. WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses, with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an Apple-authorized service provider. If you have an internal Apple CD-ROM drive in your computer, your computer is a Class 1 laser product. The Class 1 label, located on the computer, indicates that the drive meets minimum safety requirements. A service warning label is on the CD-ROM drive inside the computer. viii Communications regulation informationYour Macintosh includes hardware and software that let you use DOS and Windows application programs directly on your Macintosh computer. It contains a high-performance microprocessor that’s fully compatible with the latest DOS and Windows software. You can m simultaneously run Macintosh operating system (Mac OS) and PC application programs m switch between the Mac OS and PC environment at any time without quitting the applications you’re using m view the current environment on a single monitor m use the same hard disk for both Mac OS and PC software m share files and folders (directories) between the Mac OS and the PC environment m cut, copy, and paste data between Mac OS and DOS or Windows documents m use your Macintosh keyboard and mouse with PC software m use your Macintosh modem, monitor, and printer with PC software, or connect PC-compatible equipment m use a joystick or other game controller with PC application programs ix Your DOS-Compatible Macintosh Computerm share the random-access memory (RAM) in your Macintosh with the PC environment, or use a memory module (SIMM) for the exclusive use of the PC environment m use the built-in Macintosh serial ports with PC software m access PC CD-ROM discs using an Apple CD-ROM drive m play Sound Blaster-compatible sounds m communicate with network servers and other computers running PC software To begin, follow the instructions in Chapters 1 and 2 to set up your computer and get started using it. Read Chapters 3 and 4 when you are ready to connect additional equipment to your computer and install Mac OS application programs. Read Chapters 5 and 6 to start using DOS and Windows application programs on your Macintosh computer. Turn to Chapters 7 and 8 if you have questions or problems using your Macintosh. x Your DOS-Compatible Macintosh ComputerMonitor cable (sometimes built into the monitor) Monitor power cord (sometimes built into the monitor) Computer power cord Keyboard Monitor Macintosh DOS-compatible computer Mouse Keyboard cable (sometimes built into the keyboard as shown here)The illustration on the facing page shows all the equipment you need to set up your computer and begin using it. Place your equipment on a sturdy, flat surface near a grounded wall outlet. Before following the setup instructions in this chapter, you may want to read “Arranging Your Office” in Appendix A (in the section on health-related information) for tips on adjusting your work furniture so that you’re comfortable when using the computer. Plugging in the computer Before you plug your Macintosh into a wall socket, carefully read all the setup instructions in this chapter. Then, before you connect anything to your Macintosh, follow the instructions in this section to plug it in. The plug grounds the computer and protects it from electrical damage while you are setting up. 1 1 Getting Started Follow the instructions in this chapter to set up your computer and learn the basics.When you are ready to begin, follow these steps: 1 Plug the socket end of the computer’s power cord into the recessed power cord socket (marked with the symbol ²) on the back of the computer. 2 Plug the other end of the power cord into a three-hole grounded outlet or power strip. Choose a power outlet to which you have easy access. IMPORTANT Be sure that at least one end of the power cord is within easy reach so that you can unplug the computer when you need to. If the computer starts up: If you hear a tone, the computer has started up and you need to turn it off before proceeding. Press the power button (also called the standby power button) located on the back of the computer to turn the computer off. Power cord plug Power cord socket Standby power button WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded.Your Macintosh is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug! 2 Chapter 1Installing an expansion card If you purchased any expansion cards for your Macintosh or extra memory for use in the PC environment, install the cards or memory now. (For instructions, see Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment,” as well as the documentation that came with the cards or memory module.) If you don’t have an expansion card or memory to install, go on to the next section, “Connecting a Monitor.” Connecting a monitor You can connect many types of monitors to your Macintosh. To connect a monitor from a manufacturer other than Apple, refer to the instructions that came with the monitor. Connecting the monitor power cord Monitors have two cords to connect—a power cord and a monitor cable. To connect the monitor power cord, follow these steps: 1 Place the monitor where you will be using it. You can place a monitor with a 15-inch or smaller screen on top of your computer. Don’t place larger monitors on the computer. Keep these considerations in mind: m Allow a few inches for air circulation around the sides of the computer and monitor. m Make sure that the top of the screen is slightly below eye level when you’re sitting at the keyboard. m Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections on the screen from overhead lights and windows. m Consult “Arranging Your Office” in the section “Health-Related Information About Computer Use” in Appendix A for suggestions on locating your computer equipment. Getting Started 32 Connect the monitor power cord to the monitor. On some monitors, the cord is already attached. 3 Plug in the monitor power cord. Be sure to plug the power cord into a three-hole grounded outlet or power strip. Monitor power cord Monitor power socket 4 Chapter 1Connecting the monitor cable After you plug in the monitor power cord, you connect the monitor cable to the computer’s monitor port. To connect the monitor cable, follow these steps: 1 Attach the monitor cable to the monitor. On some monitors, the cable is already attached (as shown below). 2 Attach the monitor cable to the monitor port on the back panel of the computer. The monitor port is on the upper-right corner of the back panel. It is marked with the ª icon (symbol). Be sure you plug the cable into the correct port. Monitor cable ª Monitor port Getting Started 5Connecting the mouse and keyboard You have a choice of several keyboards for your Macintosh. The way you connect the mouse and keyboard depends on whether the keyboard has a separate cable or a built-in cable. Connecting a keyboard with a separate cable 1 Plug the mouse cable into the port on either side of the keyboard. Most right-handed people prefer to use the mouse with their right hand; most left-handed people prefer to use their left hand. Plug the mouse into the port on the side you prefer. The plug and the port are marked with the × icon (symbol). Align the symbols before you insert the plug. (The positions of the port and icon on your keyboard may be different from those pictured here.) By the way: A port marked with the × icon is called an Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port. 2 Plug the keyboard cable (both ends are the same) into the other port on the keyboard. If you plugged the mouse cable in on the right, for example, plug the keyboard cable in on the left. 3 Plug the keyboard cable into the port marked with the × icon on the back of the computer. Some monitors have a port to which you can connect the keyboard or mouse. See the information that came with your monitor. ADB icon 6 Chapter 1Connecting a keyboard with a built-in cable 1 Plug the mouse cable into the recessed port on the back of the keyboard. The plug and the port are marked with the × icon (symbol). The positions of the port and icon on your keyboard may be different from those pictured. By the way: A port marked with the × icon is called an Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port. 2 Plug the keyboard cable into the port marked with the × icon on the back of the computer. Some monitors have a port to which you can connect the keyboard or mouse. See the information that came with your monitor. Connecting other equipment If you are new to the Macintosh, it’s a good idea to get some experience using your computer before you connect other equipment, such as a printer or scanner. To learn basic Macintosh skills, continue with the instructions in this chapter. When you’re ready to connect other equipment to your Macintosh, see the instructions in Chapter 3. This cable plugs into the Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port on the back of the computer. The ADB port on the computer is marked with the × icon. Plug the mouse into the recessed port on the keyboard. The flat part of the plug should be pointing down, as shown here. Getting Started 7Turning the computer on Follow these steps to turn the computer on: 1 Turn on the monitor. See the information that came with your monitor for the location of the power button. 2 Turn on your computer by pressing the Power key. The Power key is at the top of the keyboard. You can recognize this key by the triangle outline on it (P). You hear a tone from the computer as it starts up. 8 Chapter 13 Check to see what’s on your screen. m If you see the Macintosh desktop, as in the illustration below, your system software has already been installed, and your computer is ready to use. Skip now to the section “What’s Next?” later in this chapter. m If you see a blinking question mark, you need to install system software on your computer’s hard disk. (System software is the set of programs your computer uses to start itself up.) See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” in Chapter 7 for information on how to install system software. m If you see anything else on your screen, or nothing at all, see the next section, “Problems Turning Your Computer On?” Getting Started 9 Macintosh desktop Hard disk iconProblems turning your computer on? If you don’t see anything on the screen, check these items to see if you can identify the problem: m Is the computer plugged into a power source? If it is plugged into a power strip, is the power strip turned on? m Is the computer turned on? The power-on light on the front panel should be on. If it isn’t on, press the standby power button on the computer’s back panel (marked with the symbol ¨). m Are the keyboard and mouse cables connected correctly? (Don’t disconnect the keyboard or mouse cable while the computer is on. You could damage your equipment.) m Is the monitor power cord plugged in? m Is the monitor turned on? (Check the power-on light on the front of the monitor.) m Is the monitor cable attached firmly to both the monitor and computer? m Is the brightness control on the monitor adjusted correctly? (On Apple monitors, the brightness control is marked with the symbol Û.) 10 Chapter 1What’s next? Congratulations! You’ve finished setting up your computer. Now continue with one of the following steps: m If you are new to the Macintosh, turn to the next section, “Learning the Basics.” m If you are an experienced Macintosh user, turn to Chapter 2, “Getting Help,” to learn about Macintosh Guide, your main source of information when you’re working with the Mac OS (the Macintosh environment). m If you want to connect other equipment, such as a printer, to your computer, see Chapter 3, “Connecting Additional Equipment.” m If you want to start using DOS or Windows application programs on your Macintosh, turn to Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment.” Before you begin working with your computer, be sure to read the important health and safety information in Appendix A. IMPORTANT If you need to turn off your computer at any point, please see “Turning the Computer Off” later in this chapter. It is very important to use the correct procedure for shutting down your Macintosh before turning it off. Getting Started 11Learning the basics If you are new to the Macintosh, you should begin by looking at the easy-touse program called the Macintosh Tutorial. The tutorial teaches you the basic skills you’ll need to use your computer in the Macintosh environment. To start the tutorial, follow these steps: 1 Slide the mouse along your mouse pad or desk. Hold the mouse as shown, with the cable pointing away from you. Don’t press the mouse button (under your index finger). Notice that the arrow (8) on the screen moves in the same direction that you move the mouse. If the arrow doesn’t move, make sure that the cables connecting the mouse and keyboard are secure and that your mouse is positioned as shown in the illustration. 2 Move the tip of the arrow (8) to the question mark (h) in the upper-right portion of the screen. If you run out of room on your mouse pad or desk while moving the mouse, pick up the mouse and place it where there’s more room. (The arrow on the screen moves only when the mouse is in contact with the mouse pad or desk.) 3 With the tip of the arrow on the question mark, press and hold down the mouse button. A list of choices (called a menu) appears. This is the Guide (h) menu, which is the place to go when you have a question about how to use your computer in the Macintosh environment (Mac OS). (The Guide [h] menu is not available when you’re in the PC environment.) Mouse button 12 Chapter 14 While holding down the mouse button, move the arrow until the words “Macintosh Tutorial” are highlighted, then release the mouse button. A window appears welcoming you to the tutorial. You can set this book aside for now and follow the instructions on the screen. When you have completed the tutorial, return to this book. Reviewing the basics The following illustration summarizes many of the basic skills and terms you learned from the tutorial. Getting Started 13 To throw away an item you no longer want, drag it to the Trash and choose Empty Trash from the Special menu. This icon represents your computer’s internal hard disk. To change the size or shape of a window, drag the size box. To bring hidden portions of a window’s contents into view, click the scroll arrows. The strip across the top of the screen is called the menu bar. The symbols and words in it represent menus of commands. Icons are small pictures that represent disks, folders, programs, and documents. To open an icon, click the icon twice quickly. Windows are boxes that display text, graphics, or icons. To bring a partially covered window to the front, click anywhere in the window. To close a window, click the close box. You can have several application programs open at once. To see which program is active or to switch from one program to another, use this menu (called the Application menu). To find an answer to a question about the Macintosh environment, look in the Guide (h) menu. To move a window, drag it by the title bar.Turning the computer off To turn the computer off, you choose Shut Down from the Special menu. Detailed instructions follow. 1 Move the tip of the arrow to the word “Special” at the top center of the screen. If the word “Special” does not appear at the top of the screen, you’re working in the wrong program. Pull down the Application menu (to the right of the Guide [h] menu) and choose Finder. Then try step 1 again. 2 With the tip of the arrow on the word “Special,” press and hold down the mouse button. 3 While holding down the mouse button, move the arrow down the list of choices until the words “Shut Down” are highlighted, then release the mouse button. You can also shut down your computer from the keyboard. 1 Press the Power key (marked with a triangle) on the keyboard. You will see a message asking whether you want to shut down or continue working. 2 Click Shut Down. To turn the computer on, simply press the Power key again. WARNING Do not turn the computer off by pressing the standby power button on the back panel. If you do so, you may lose any work you haven’t previously saved to a disk. You also risk losing any open documents. 14 Chapter 1Where to find answers When you have questions about using your Macintosh, there are several places you can look for answers. In this book Use this book to help you set up your computer and learn about it, or to find solutions to problems. In the Guide menu The Guide menu (marked with the h icon) is your main source of information about the Macintosh environment. To learn how to get different kinds of help from the Guide menu, see Chapter 2 in this book. In other manuals For answers to questions about other equipment or about application programs you have purchased, see the manuals that came with the equipment or programs. Manuals for DOS and Windows are included with your computer. From Apple’s customer support hotline If you can’t find an answer in any of the materials provided, call the customer support hotline. (The phone number for the hotline is in the service and support information that came with your computer.) User’s Guide Macintosh Getting Started 15The Guide menu is your main source of information when you’re working with your computer in the Macintosh environment. The menu is identified by a question mark (h) in the upper-right corner of the screen. (If you need instructions on using DOS or Windows, see the appropriate manual.) 17 2 Getting Help Use the instructions in this chapter to learn about the help available to you in the Guide menu.Getting answers to your questions When you have a question while working in the Macintosh environment, you can get the answer by choosing Macintosh Guide from the Guide menu. 1 Pull down the Application menu (in the upper-right corner of the screen) and choose Finder to make it the active application program. A checkmark in the menu indicates that the Finder is the active program. 2 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Macintosh Guide. The Macintosh Guide window appears. Whenever you use Macintosh Guide, its window remains in front of other windows. If the window gets in your way, you can move it by dragging its title bar (the gray bar across the top of the window). 18 Chapter 23 Notice the three buttons at the top of the window: Topics, Index, and Look For. Macintosh Guide gives you three ways of finding information: m Topics lets you choose from a list of general subjects; it is like the table of contents in a book. m Index lets you choose from an alphabetical list of more specific subjects; it is like the index in a book. m Look For lets you search for information related to a specific word or phrase that you type. In the following sections you will practice using each method. If you have problems while using Macintosh Guide, see “Tips for Using Macintosh Guide” later in this chapter. Getting answers with the Topics button 1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Topics button. A list of general topics appears on the left side of the Macintosh Guide window. (Depending on the hardware and software you have, the list of topics may look different.) Getting Help 192 Click “Setting Options” in the list of topics. When you click any topic area, a list of related questions appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window. 3 Click the question “How do I set the time and date?” and then click OK. Or double-click the question. A small window appears with instructions for you to follow. 4 Read and follow the instructions in this window. Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the lower-right corner to see the next step. 5 When you have completed all the steps, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Guide window. Now continue with the next section. 20 Chapter 2 Click here to see the next step (if there is one). To get instructions, click a question… …and then click OK. If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click here.Getting answers with the Index button 1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Index button. An alphabetical list of subjects appears on the left side of the window. 2 Scroll through the alphabetical list until the phrase “background pattern” is visible. You can scroll through the list either by dragging the slider to the letter B or by using the scroll bar at the right of the list. 3 Click the phrase “background pattern” in the alphabetical list. When you click any index entry, a list of related questions appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window. Getting Help 21 Scroll bar Slider To get instructions, click a question… …and then click OK.4 Click the question “How do I change the background pattern?” and then click OK. Or double-click the question. A small window appears with instructions for you to follow. 5 Read and follow the instructions in the window. Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the lower-right corner to see the next step. 6 When you have completed all the steps, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Guide window. Now continue with the next section. 22 Chapter 2 Click here to see the next step (if there is one). If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click here.Getting answers with the Look For button 1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Look For button. A small box appears on the left side of the window, where you can type text. 2 Click the arrow button to activate the text box. 3 Type “sound” in the text box and then click Search. When you click Search, a list of questions related to the word or phrase you typed appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window. Getting Help 23 To activate the text box, click here. Type a word or phrase in the text box… …and then click here. To get instructions, click a question… …and then click OK.4 Click the question “How do I change the beep sound?” and then click OK. Or doubleclick the question. A small window appears with instructions for you to follow. 5 Read and follow the instructions in the window. Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the lower-right corner to display the next step. 6 When you have completed all the steps, click the close box in the upper-left corner to close Macintosh Guide. 24 Chapter 2 If you want to close Macintosh Guide, click here. Click here to see the next step (if there is one).Tips for using Macintosh Guide Here are a few tips for using Macintosh Guide effectively: m Macintosh Guide is available only in the Macintosh environment, and only when you are in the Finder—the desktop area where you can see the icons of disks, folders, and files. (Other programs may also have help available in the Guide menu, however.) If you don’t see Macintosh Guide in the Guide menu, pull down the Application menu (to the right of the Guide menu) and choose Finder. m Follow the steps when you’re instructed to; don’t skip ahead or read ahead. That way the computer can check to make sure you’ve done a step correctly. m Unlike most windows, the Macintosh Guide window stays in front of other windows on the screen so that your instructions are never covered. If you need to move the Guide window out of the way, drag it by the title bar at the top of the window. You can also move the window out of the way by clicking the zoom box. Click the box once to shrink the window; click it a second time to expand the window to its original size. m If you need more information about an instruction or a term, click the button labeled “Huh?” to get further explanation. (The “Huh?” button is dimmed when no additional information is available.) m If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner of the Guide window. m When you’re finished using Macintosh Guide, click the close box in the upper-left corner of the window. Getting Help 25 Zoom box Close box Title bar Topics button “Huh?” button Right arrowIdentifying objects on the screen Sometimes you’ll see an unfamiliar item on the screen and ask yourself, “What’s that?” You can get an answer by using a Macintosh feature known as Balloon Help. Balloon Help explains the function of icons, menus, commands, and other items in the Macintosh environment using balloons like those you see in comic strips. Follow these steps to use Balloon Help: 1 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Show Balloons. 2 Point to any object on the screen that you want to identify. A balloon appears next to the object. In the following illustration, for example, pointing to the Trash displays a balloon that explains how to use the Trash to throw items away. Although balloons appear next to items when you point to them, the way you work does not change; you can still select icons, choose commands, and so on. 3 When you’re finished using Balloon Help, choose Hide Balloons from the Guide menu. 26 Chapter 2Learning useful shortcuts You can perform many tasks in the Finder more quickly if you use keyboard or mouse shortcuts. For example, instead of clicking an icon and choosing Open from the File menu, you can simply double-click the icon to open it. Follow these steps to learn keyboard and mouse shortcuts: 1 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Shortcuts. The main Macintosh Shortcuts window appears. Getting Help 272 Click one of the category buttons. Another window appears, describing shortcuts for that category. 3 Read about the shortcuts available for the category you selected. Click the right arrow in the lower-right corner of the window to display the next window (if there is one). 4 When you finish reading about the shortcuts for your category, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Shortcuts window. Or click the close box in the upper-left corner to close the window. 28 Chapter 2 If you want to close the window, click here. Click here to see the next window (if there is one). Click here to return to the main Macintosh Shortcuts window for more categories.The illustration below shows a basic Macintosh system. You can expand your computer system by connecting additional hardware (such as a printer, modem, or external audio speakers). Mouse Monitor Computer Keyboard Hard disk drive (internal) Floppy disk drive CD-ROM drive (optional) Volume buttons Use these buttons to change the volume of the computer’s sound. CD-ROM drive Open/Close button Power-on light Headphone jack Remote control sensor - f 29 3 Connecting Additional Equipment Read this chapter for information on expanding your computer system with additional hardware.Where to connect additional equipment The illustration on this page shows where equipment should be connected to your computer. For instructions on connecting additional equipment such as a printer or scanner, see the manual that came with the equipment. - W Modem port [ Printer port Connects your Macintosh to a printer or LocalTalk network. V ADB port Connects your Macintosh to input equipment, such as a keyboard or a trackball. Å g SCSI port Connects your Macintosh to SCSI equipment, such as hard disk drives and scanners. Connects an external modem to your Macintosh. Sound output port Connects your Macintosh to headphones, externally powered (amplified) speakers, or other audio output equipment. Sound input port Connects your Macintosh to a professional-quality microphone or other audio input equipment. F Security lock port Standby power button ² Power socket ª Monitor port Connects your monitor to your Macintosh. Communication card access cover Covers port for optional communication card. Joystick port Connects your Macintosh to a joystick or other game controller. (For the PC environment only.) Video input card (optional) Connects your Macintosh to a video camera, VCR, or other video equipment. TV tuner card (optional) Connects your Macintosh to an external TV antenna or cable TV service. ¨ 30 Chapter 3Connecting an Apple PlainTalk Microphone Your computer has a sound input port, which you can use to connect an Apple PlainTalk Microphone. Use PlainTalk only: You should connect only the Apple PlainTalk Microphone. Other models of microphone will not work with your Macintosh. To connect the microphone, do this: m Plug the microphone’s connector into the sound input port (marked with the icon X) on the back of the computer. Sound input port Sound output port Connecting Additional Equipment 31Connecting external stereo speakers You can take advantage of your computer’s stereo sound output by attaching externally powered (amplified) speakers. (Only externally powered speakers will work with your Macintosh.) 1 Assemble the speakers and the cable you need. You need a cable with stereo miniplugs at each end to connect one or both speakers to the computer. (Some speakers require a dual-plug adapter. Others, like those shown here, accept a single stereo miniplug and are joined by standard speaker wires.) The following illustration shows the equipment configuration and the connections for a computer sound system. 2 Turn off the Macintosh. 3 Plug a stereo miniplug into the sound output port on the Macintosh. 4 Plug a stereo miniplug into the Audio In port on one of the speakers. If the speakers take a dual-plug cable, connect both plugs to the speakers’ Audio In ports. Stereo miniplug Audio In port - Sound output port Externally powered speakers 32 Chapter 35 Connect the speakers together with speaker wires, if necessary. 6 Turn on the computer. You hear the computer’s sound through the external speakers. Note: To control the volume of your external speakers, use the volume button on the front of the computer. If you are playing an audio compact disc (CD), you may also need to adjust the volume control in the program you’re using to play CDs. For more information on sound and playing audio CDs, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For information on hearing sounds in the PC environment, see “Turning On PC Sounds” in Chapter 6. Connecting a game controller Connect a game controller, such as a joystick, as shown. m Attach the joystick’s connector to the joystick port on the lower-right corner of the computer’s back panel. Tighten the thumbscrews securely. Joystick port Connecting Additional Equipment 33Expanding memory The random-access memory (RAM) in your computer can be expanded. Installing additional RAM adds more memory chips to your computer and expands its capabilities. The Technical Information booklet that came with your computer describes how much additional memory can be installed in your Macintosh. You can also add up to 32 megabytes (MB) of RAM for use exclusively in the PC environment. See Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment,” for further information. Memory for your computer is provided in packages called Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs). The SIMMs must be the correct type for your computer. It is very important that the SIMMs be correctly installed in your Macintosh. Incorrect installation can result in errors, unpredictable results, and damage to your equipment and data. Installing internal drives Your Macintosh can hold up to three internal storage devices, including a floppy disk drive, a CD-ROM (compact disc read-only memory) drive, and a hard disk drive (several capacities are available). These drives may already be installed. If you want to add or replace an internal drive, see your Appleauthorized dealer. WARNING To avoid damage to your computer, Apple recommends that only an Apple-certified technician install additional RAM. Consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for service. If you attempt to install additional RAM yourself, any damage you may cause to your equipment will not be covered by the limited warranty on your computer. See an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider for information about this or any other warranty question. 34 Chapter 3Your computer has several Macintosh application programs already installed, as well as some Macintosh programs that must installed before you can use them. You will need to run an application program’s Installer program before the application program will work. You’ll find these programs on your hard disk. You may want to experiment with AppleScript, one of the programs on your hard disk. With AppleScript you can automate tasks in the Finder and other scriptable programs (programs that support AppleScript). Instructions for using AppleScript are included in the AppleScript folder. If your computer has enough memory, you can install QuickDraw GX and PowerTalk. QuickDraw GX gives your computer more powerful printing and font capabilities. PowerTalk provides an open collaboration environment with a universal mailbox and other electronic mail services. To install each of these programs, open the folder of the item you want to install and double-click the Installer icon. Another program, Video Monitor, is for use with computers that have audiovisual (AV) capabilities. For information on using Video Monitor, see the “Video” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. If you want to install DOS application programs, see Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment,” and refer to your DOS manual. 35 4 Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment Read this chapter for information on installing and using application programs in the Mac OS.Installing Macintosh application programs You’ll probably want to buy and install additional application programs. See the manuals you receive with your programs for instructions on installing and using them. In most cases, you’ll install a Macintosh application program on your internal hard disk from floppy disks that contain the program. The following illustration shows how to insert a floppy disk in your computer’s floppy disk drive. To use your programs most effectively, follow these guidelines: m Put only one copy of each program on your hard disk. Having more than one copy can cause errors. m Whenever you copy a program disk to your hard disk, be careful not to copy a System Folder. Always check to see what you’ve copied, and drag any extra System Folders to the Trash. m If a program malfunctions consistently, try installing a fresh copy. If that doesn’t help, find out from the software manufacturer whether your version of the program is compatible with the system software you’re using. For instructions on how to eject floppy disks, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Insert the floppy disk, metal end first, into the floppy disk drive of your computer. 36 Chapter 4Working with several programs at a time You can open as many application programs and desk accessories as your computer’s memory allows. All open programs in the Mac OS are listed in the Application menu at the right end of the menu bar. The name of the active program (the one you’re using right now) has a checkmark next to it, and its icon appears in the menu bar. You can have programs open in both the Macintosh and PC environments at the same time, but only your Macintosh programs appear in the Application menu. Finding out which programs are open If you have several programs and windows open, you can find out which program is active and which other programs are open by pulling down the Application menu. Switching programs You can switch to another open program or desk accessory by choosing its name from the Application menu. If a program’s icon is dimmed in the menu, that means its windows are hidden. Choosing the program from the Application menu displays its windows. You can also switch to another program by clicking in a window that belongs to an open program, or by double-clicking a program icon (or the icon of a document that was created with the program). Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment 37 The Finder icon Commands to hide or display open windows Open programs A checkmark indicates the active program.For instructions on switching from the Macintosh environment to the PC environment, see the section “Switching Between the Macintosh and PC Environments” in Chapter 5. Hiding and showing windows on the desktop You can hide all windows except those of the active program by choosing Hide Others from the Application menu. The other programs remain open even though their windows are hidden. When you switch to another program, its windows become visible again. If you want to see all the open windows, choose Show All from the Application menu. Backing up your files Making backup copies of important files is good protection against possible damage to the originals. m You can back up files stored on your hard disk by copying them to floppy disks. m You can back up an entire floppy disk by copying it to another floppy disk, or to a hard disk. m You can use a commercial backup program to copy new and changed files from a hard disk to another hard disk, to a tape drive, or to a series of floppy disks. m If your computer is on a network, you can back up files by copying them to a shared disk on the network. To back up files in the Macintosh environment, copy the files to a disk manually or use a Macintosh backup program. Do not use PC backup programs in the Mac OS. 38 Chapter 4Your DOS-compatible Macintosh comes with standard versions of DOS and Windows already installed. Also installed is software you can use to work in both the Macintosh and PC environments and share data between the two environments. This software is described in this chapter and the next. This chapter covers how to m switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment m set up and operate in the PC environment m use floppy disks and disk drives m cut, copy, and paste data between Mac OS and DOS or Windows documents m run network software m use multimedia, MIDI, and game applications m use both Macintosh and PC peripheral devices in the PC environment 39 5 Operating in the PC Environment Follow the instructions in this chapter to start working in the PC environment on your Macintosh.Switching between the Macintosh and PC environments You switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment using the PC Setup control panel. Follow these steps: 1 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu. 2 Double-click the PC Setup icon to open the control panel 3 Click Switch to PC to switch to the PC environment. 4 To switch back to the Mac OS, press x-Return. 40 Chapter 5Switching with a keyboard command You can set a keyboard command, or hot key, to switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment. To set the hot key, you must be in the Macintosh environment (if you are in the PC environment, press x-Return). m To choose a hot key, open the PC Setup control panel and press the Tab key to select the Hot Key text field; then type the keys you want to use. The x key is automatically included. You can use any alphanumeric or special key. You can also include other modifier keys (Option, Control, and/or Shift). x-Return always switches from the PC to the Mac OS, regardless of the control panel setting. You can also switch to the PC by clicking Switch to PC in the control panel. Ejecting disks in the PC environment Here are a few commands you will find useful while you work in the PC environment. m To eject a disk from the Macintosh disk drive while you’re in the PC environment, press x-E. m To eject a CD-ROM disc in the PC environment, press x-Y. For more details, see the section “Working in the PC Environment,” later in this chapter. Turning the PC on and off You use the buttons near the bottom of the control panel to switch environments, to restart the PC, or to shut the PC off. m Switch to PC immediately switches to the PC environment. m Start/Restart PC starts the PC if it’s off, or restarts it if it’s running (but doesn’t switch to the PC environment). m Shut down PC turns off the PC. IMPORTANT Clicking Off at the top of the PC Setup control panel prevents you from switching to the PC environment. When you restart the computer, the PC environment is turned off and any RAM you requested for it is available to the Mac OS. Operating in the PC Environment 41Starting the PC automatically To have the PC start automatically when you turn on your Macintosh: m Click the checkbox next to Auto-start PC. To make the PC environment appear when you turn on your Macintosh: 1 Click the checkbox next to Switch at Startup. 2 In the Control Panels folder, double-click the General Controls icon to open it. 3 Turn off the Shutdown Warning option in the General Controls panel. If Shutdown Warning is turned on when you switch from the Mac OS to the PC environment, you will not be able to switch back again for a few minutes. Fading the screen To have the screen fade briefly before switching environments, click the checkbox next to Fade Screens. Setting up the PC environment In order to take advantage of certain utilities, you may need to modify your DOS CONFIG.SYS file. For information about how to edit DOS files, see your DOS manual. For information about the kinds of changes you might need to make, read the information below. Note: Your DOS system software also includes alternate versions of the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that allow you to select from a variety of memory management options each time you start DOS. For information on how to install these alternate files, see “Replacing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT Files” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. 42 Chapter 5Memory management utilities If you use a memory management utility such as EMM386 or QEMM, you need to configure it to be compatible with your DOS-compatibility hardware and software. IMPORTANT Apple does not recommend using automated memory configuration utilities with your DOS-compatible Macintosh because they can require more memory than management utilities you configure manually. Additionally, some memory configuration utilities may not be able to determine the exact nature of the DOS-compatibility hardware, and therefore may not be compatible. If you want to use EMM386 (included as part of DOS) and don’t require expanded memory, set CONFIG.SYS to the following: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS RAM=D000-EFFF If you require expanded memory, set CONFIG.SYS to the following: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 If you want to use QEMM, use the frame option (ST:F): DEVICE=C:\QEMM\QEMM386.SYS RAM ST:F ARAM=B080-B7FF ARAM=C900-DFFF R:1 If you want to use the Stealth mapping option (ST:M), set CONFIG.SYS to DEVICE=C:\QEMM\QEMM386.SYS RAM ST:M X=C800-CFFF X=FC00- FCFF X=FE00-FFFF ARAM=B080-B7FF ARAM=C900-DFFF R:2 Configure other memory management utilities such that D000 through EFFF is the only area in the BIOS that can be mapped to upper memory. To prevent the ROM BIOS from becoming corrupted when the DOS-compatibility card is configured for 2 MB of memory, set the switch in the CONFIG.SYS file to turn memory testing off. DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF For more information on making the best use of memory, read the sections on memory management in your DOS manual, or refer to the documentation for your memory manager if you are using something other than EMM386. Operating in the PC Environment 43Working in the PC environment When you switch to DOS or Windows, you’re operating in a real PC world. The floppy disk drive, mouse, and keyboard all act as they would with a standard PC. There are, however, some mapping issues you need to be aware of. Floppy disk drives and floppy disks m The Macintosh floppy disk drive is drive A. To eject a disk from this disk drive while you’re in the PC environment, press x-E. m If you insert a Mac OS-format floppy disk while you’re in the PC environment, it is ejected. You can access an unlocked floppy disk only in the environment that was in the foreground when the floppy disk was inserted. When you insert a locked PC disk, both environments have access to it. Blank disks are formatted as DOS disks in the PC environment. In the Mac OS, you can format disks for DOS or the Mac OS (among other choices). Some blank disks are preformatted by the manufacturer. If you insert a new, blank disk in the PC environment and it is ejected, it may have been preformatted as a Macintosh disk. To use the disk in the PC environment, you must first return to the Mac OS and reformat (reinitialize) the disk as a DOS disk. The Mac OS Disk Copy application program cannot read a DOS-formatted floppy disk unless the disk is unlocked. Floppy disks formatted in the PC environment in DOS 720K format are not readable by some DOS computers. Instead, format the disk in the Macintosh environment, choosing “DOS 720K” as the format. See “How do I prepare a disk for use?” in the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Restarting the PC from a floppy disk To restart (reboot) the PC environment from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the floppy drive. Press x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period. When the floppy disk is ejected, immediately reinsert it into the disk drive. 44 Chapter 5CD-ROM discs and drives You can use DOS and Windows CD-ROM discs in Apple CD-ROM drives. To eject a CD-ROM disc in the PC environment, press x-Y. If the CD-ROM disc cannot be ejected (because a file is in use or the CD-ROM disc is being shared), the Macintosh beeps. You can listen to audio CDs in either the PC environment or Mac OS, but you cannot control them from both environments at the same time. For example, if you began listening to an audio CD while working in the PC environment and then switched to the Mac OS, you would have to return to the PC environment in order to adjust the CD’s volume. Playing an audio CD in Windows while running low-level media tools, such as PC Tools or Microsoft Anti-Virus, may cause your system to crash. It is best to reduce computer activity to a minimum while using such tools. You cannot use more than one CD-ROM drive at a time in the PC environment. The PC sets up a drive letter (E) for a CD-ROM drive even if no drive is connected. If no CD-ROM drive is connected to your system, you can use this drive letter and free some memory by editing the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. In the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, add REM to the beginning of the line LH C:\DOS\MSCDEX /D:CDDRVR /L:E In the CONFIG.SYS file, add REM to the beginning of the line DEVICE=C:\Apple\CDROM.SYS /D:CDDRVR Prefacing these commands with REM makes DOS ignore them. Operating in the PC Environment 45Pointing device The standard Macintosh pointing device has one button; most PC devices have two. The button on the Macintosh pointing device behaves like the left button on a PC device. m To simulate the right button, press the = key on the keypad. m To press the left and right buttons at the same time, press the mouse button and the = key simultaneously. If you have Windows installed, you can use its Mouse control panel to switch the button assignment. Note: DOS does not come with a mouse driver. A mouse driver for Windows is installed on your system along with Windows, however. Keyboard The DOS-compatible Macintosh supports all Apple keyboards. The Option key on an Apple keyboard can be used as the Alt key in the PC environment. The Apple Extended Keyboard and the Apple Design Keyboard can be used normally. With the Apple Keyboard II, use the following equivalents for keys on a PC keyboard. These equivalents also apply to the Apple Adjustable Keyboard if the function key keyboard isn’t plugged in. 46 Chapter 5PC key Equivalent on Macintosh keyboard F1 through F9 x-1 through 9 F10 x-0 F11 x-(minus) F12 x-(equals) F13 x-[ F14 x-] F15 x-\ Home x-[keypad] 7 PageUp x-[keypad] 9 End x-[keypad] 1 PageDown x-[keypad] 3 Insert x-[keypad] 0 Del x-[keypad] (period) Using the Apple Adjustable keyboard: If you are using the Apple Adjustable keyboard, you cannot use key combinations made up of keys from the main keyboard and function keys (for example, Shift-F1). This means you cannot restart the PC using the x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period key combination. Click Restart PC in the PC Setup control panel instead. MacShare MacShare is a PC application program that lets the PC view Mac OS folders and volumes as drive letters. You can have as many shared drives as there are drive letters. m To specify the number of drive letters, modify your CONFIG.SYS file to include a LASTDRIVE statement. LASTDRIVE=x where x is a letter between E and Z. (The PC reserves drives A through D for its floppy and hard disk drives.) Operating in the PC Environment 47For example, if you use M as your LASTDRIVE value, you could have up to nine extra drives using drives labeled E through M. A CD-ROM drive, if installed, uses E. Each additional drive letter uses 100 bytes of PC memory. Clipboard You can exchange clipboard information between the PC environment and the Mac OS. The type of information you can exchange depends on whether you’re running DOS or Windows. Windows Clipboard You can exchange text, PICT, RTF, and bitmap files between the Mac OS and Windows using the Copy and Paste commands from the Edit menu. You can also purchase additional third-party software to provide translations for other data types. DOS “Clipboard” If you’re running DOS, you can capture text or a PICT file from a region of the screen that you define using the DOSCLIP TSR (Terminate-and-StayResident program). The memory-resident program is loaded automatically each time you switch to DOS. You activate DOSCLIP by pressing a keyboard combination, or keystroke, (preset to Shift-Control-C) and then selecting a region to copy. Keystroke starts process: On the PC side, enter the keystroke first; then, holding down the mouse button, select a region to copy. (This process works only if a DOS mouse driver is installed.) Releasing the mouse button sends the selection to the Clipboard. In the Mac OS, you select the area first and then issue the keystroke. 48 Chapter 5To capture text or a PICT file from a region on the screen if you don’t have a DOS mouse driver installed, follow these instructions: 1 Activate DOSCLIP. The DOSCLIP activation keystroke is preset to Shift-Control-C. A cursor appears in the center of the screen. 2 Use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor to the upper-left corner of the region you want to copy. 3 Holding down the Shift key, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the lower-right corner of the region. 4 Release the Shift key. The selected area is copied to the Clipboard. m You can paste text into DOS from the Mac OS. The preset keystroke is Shift-Control-V. Changing the predefined keystrokes in DOS You change the preset keystrokes for copying and pasting by editing the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. m To change the keystroke for the Copy command, use the form C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/Cnm… m To change the keystroke for the Paste command, use the form C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/Pnm… In both cases, n is a number representing a key scan code from the following table, and m… is one or more of the characters A, C, and S (for Alt, Control, and Left- or Right-shift). For example, the preset code for Copy is /C46CA—/C[opy using the key] 46 [which is C, plus the] C[ontrol key plus the] A[lt key]. To change the keystroke to F3, you’d type the following: C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/C61 Note: To get on-screen help about other DOSCLIP options, type DOSCLIP /? at the DOS prompt. Operating in the PC Environment 49Key Scan code Key Scan code 0 11 ' " 40 1 2 , < 51 2 3 - _ 12 3 4 . > 52 4 5 / ? 53 5 6 ; : 39 6 7 = + 13 7 8 [ { 26 8 9 \ | 43 9 10 ] } 27 ` ~ 41 + (keypad) 78 tab 15 - (keypad) 74 alt 56 arrow (down) 80 bksp 14 arrow (left) 75 caps 58 arrow (right) 77 center 76 arrow (up) 72 ctrl 29 del 83 pgdn 81 end 79 pgup 73 enter 28 prtsc 55 esc 1 scroll 70 home 71 shift (left side) 42 ins 82 shift (right side) 54 num 69 space 57 continues . 50 Chapter 5Key Scan code Key Scan code F1 59 F7 65 F2 60 F8 66 F3 61 F9 67 F4 62 F10 68 F5 63 F11 87 F6 64 F12 88 A 30 N 49 B 48 O 24 C 46 P 25 D 32 Q 16 E 18 R 19 F 33 S 31 G 34 T 20 H 35 U 22 I 23 V 47 J 36 W 17 K 37 X 45 L 38 Y 21 M 50 Z 44 Operating in the PC Environment 51Tips for using the Clipboard When the PC environment is running, you have three separate clipboards to work with—the Mac OS Clipboard, the Windows Clipboard, and DOSCLIP. Translation between the clipboards takes place each time you switch between the PC and Macintosh environments. When using these clipboards there are a few things to keep in mind. m If you copy an item to the Macintosh Clipboard, switch to Windows, and then copy an item to the Windows Clipboard, the original Macintosh Clipboard contents will be deleted. To prevent this, remove the PC Clipboard extension from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder in the Mac OS). m In order to translate the contents of the Macintosh Clipboard to the Windows Clipboard, Windows must be already running when you switch environments. If you switch to DOS and then launch Windows, the Macintosh Clipboard will be translated into DOSCLIP, and the Windows Clipboard will be blank. m In order to translate the contents of the Macintosh Clipboard to DOSCLIP, Windows must not be running when you switch environments. If Windows is running when you switch to the PC, the Macintosh Clipboard will be translated into the Windows Clipboard, and DOSCLIP will be blank. m DOSCLIP contents cannot be pasted into Windows, or vice versa. m Graphics can be copied from a DOS application program to DOSCLIP, but graphics cannot be pasted into a DOS program from DOSCLIP. m After copying a graphic from DOS using DOSCLIP, you may experience difficulty in pasting the graphic into a Macintosh application program. If this happens, try increasing the Macintosh program’s memory. (See the question “How do I change a program’s memory size?“ in the “Working with Programs” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide [h] menu.) m Sounds cannot be copied between the Macintosh and the PC. m Plain text is automatically translated from one environment to another, but in order to retain font and style information, additional Macintosh Easy Open translators must be used (for example, MacLink Plus from DataViz). 52 Chapter 5m When using DOSCLIP from within certain application programs, it may not be possible to select the text using the mouse. In these cases, either use the keyboard to select your text, or check that the standard DOS mouse driver is not loaded. m When the PC environment is active, all Macintosh programs are put in the background to allow the PC Clipboard to run in the foreground. If you do not want your Macintosh programs to run in the background while you are in the PC environment, you must disable the Clipboard translation by removing the PC Clipboard Extension from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder in the Mac OS). Running network software The DOS-Compatibility Software on your computer supports any networking protocols, operating systems, or application programs that are compatible with Novell’s Open Data-Link Interface specification (ODI). m To set up the software, install your networking client software in the PC environment. Networking client software such as Netware is not included with the DOScompatible Macintosh. Compatible and incompatible protocols You can run NetWare in the PC environment at the same time that you’re running AppleTalk in the Mac OS. To use IPX or TCP networking protocols, you must have an Ethernet card installed in your computer’s communication slot. (The Ethernet card is not a standard feature.) You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. Operating in the PC Environment 53If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. Network performance is improved by adding memory to the DOScompatibility card installed in your computer, as described in Appendix B. For more information, see Appendix E, “Installing Network Management Software.” Using multimedia, MIDI, and game application programs These types of programs, whether they are run in the PC or Macintosh environment, see a marked performance improvement when there is a memory SIMM on the DOS-compatibility card for the exclusive use of the PC environment. See the Technical Specifications booklet to determine whether your computer has a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatibility card. You can also install a SIMM with greater memory capacity, as described in Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment.” QuickTime application performance is especially improved with a SIMM. Some DOS-based MPEG players require a VGA monitor to output video. All VGA modes can be displayed on Macintosh monitors supported by the DOScompatible Macintosh. If the monitor specified to display the PC is a VGA monitor, select VGA in the Display box in the PC Setup control panel. You cannot select VGA for a shared monitor configuration from the PC Setup control panel if your monitor is not capable of displaying VGA. Multiscan monitors can display VGA. 54 Chapter 5Using Macintosh peripherals in the PC environment You use the serial ports of your Macintosh just like the serial ports of any PC-compatible computer. The maximum data transfer rate supported by the DOS-compatible hardware when a COM port is mapped to a Macintosh serial port is 19,200 bits per second (bps). If you’re capturing serial output to a Mac OS text file, there is no limit. Using printers For DOS or Windows printing, use the LPT1.DOS or LPT1 serial port. In general, you must use printers that are Macintosh-compatible and use their corresponding printer extension for the Macintosh. However, in a PC Novell NetWare environment you can print to a PC-compatible printer attached to a Novell network. See Appendix E, “Installing Network Management Software.” DOS uses the printer selected in the Macintosh Chooser as the default LPT1 device. If you have a serial printer directly connected to a COM port, however, DOS uses that printer instead. The DOS-compatible software can process output for Epson and PostScript printers, and for all printers that use Hewlett-Packard’s page control language (PCL). QuickDraw printers such as the StyleWriter or ImageWriter work only with Epson emulation. (If a printer is not a PostScript or PCL printer, it’s considered to be a QuickDraw printer.) For non-PostScript PCL printers, use the appropriate PCL driver in the PC environment. For non-PostScript, non-PCL printers, configure your DOS application program to use the Epson LQ-2500 driver. If this driver isn’t available, try another Epson LQ or LX series driver. Be sure to turn on the PCL option if it’s available for your printer. Operating in the PC Environment 55The Epson emulator works by first translating the DOS text to a similar Macintosh font, then interpreting that text into a series of QuickDraw commands. Some characters in the original DOS character set may not have exact translations to a Macintosh font. The use of a PostScript font is recommended in these cases, because the PostScript standard requires no translation. About color: Color printing is not supported under Epson emulation. When printing from the PC to a color or grayscale QuickDraw printer, be sure to select the Black & White option in the Print dialog box. If you have a PCL printer, printing is limited to text-only or graphics-only when printing over an AppleTalk network. To print text only, select your printer’s driver in the Windows Control Panel. To print graphics only, choose the LaserJet III driver from the Windows Control Panel. If you need to print mixed graphics and text, many Windows programs bit-map their text so that it becomes a graphic. Additionally, PCL printing of text and graphics together is possible when printing over a Novell network, where a PC print server is connected to the PCL printer and handles the print job. Select your printer’s own driver in the Windows Control Panel. For PostScript printers, use the Apple LaserWriter II NT driver (or another PostScript driver if the Apple LaserWriter II NT driver is not available) or the Windows PostScript driver. IMPORTANT Be sure to make settings in the Mac OS PC Print Spooler that match the drivers you use in the PC environment, or your printer will not work correctly. See “Setting Preferences in the PC Print Spooler” for details. Turning off Background Printing in the Macintosh Chooser may increase the performance of some printers. Configuring a printer for Windows: For better performance when you configure a printer for Windows, select LPT1.DOS instead of LPT as the port. 56 Chapter 5IMPORTANT If you try to print a file using a PostScript printer driver for a non-PostScript printer, and the preferences are set to Epson, your file will not be printed. Instead, the file will be moved to a folder called “Spooler Rejected” in the Mac OS. To print the file, choose the proper printer driver in the PC environment and try again. Note: Data sent to the LPT1 port is automatically routed to the printer selected in the Chooser in the Mac OS. There is no actual parallel port on the DOS-compatible Macintosh. AppleShare Print Server The AppleShare Print Server should not be installed in a DOS-compatible Macintosh because the server’s software conflicts with the PC Print Spooler. You can, however, connect your DOS-compatible Macintosh to a network that uses an AppleShare Print Server. Setting preferences in the PC Print Spooler You can set preferences in the PC Print Spooler to control a variety of print functions. To choose your Print Spooler settings, follow these steps: 1 In the Macintosh environment, open the Extensions folder inside the System Folder. 2 Find the PC Print Spooler icon and open it. Operating in the PC Environment 573 Choose Preferences from the File menu. A dialog box appears. 4 Choose your settings as appropriate. The selection you make for “Interpret non-PostScript as” must match the type of printer you have specified in the PC environment. If the settings are mismatched, your printer may produce gibberish. In addition, the PCL option works only if the printer is set up to accept PCL commands. The selection you make for “When emulating an Epson printer” determines how much of a page is available for printing. If you use the option that allows gaps between pages, configure your application programs to print to a 60-line page, rather than a 66-line page, or your margins will be off and your pages will not print correctly. 5 Click OK. 66 lines maximum for Epson: Page sizes greater than 66 lines (standard letter size paper) are not supported by the Epson driver. Legal and other larger sizes will be cut off after either 60 or 66 lines, depending on the setting you’ve chosen. If you find that your printing is clipped at either the top or bottom of the page, click the No Gaps option. 58 Chapter 5Using PC peripherals Because of the RS-422 implementation of the Macintosh, the following RS-232 signals are not available to the PC: m Carrier Detect (CD) m Data Set Ready (DSR) m Request to Send (RTS) m Ring Indicator (RI) Applications or serial devices requiring these signals won’t work. While the DOS-compatible Macintosh does not support Carrier Detect (CD), you can set most communications application programs to respond to the CARRIER string sent back by most modems. For more information about accessing serial ports from DOS, see the documentation that came with your DOS software. IMPORTANT The following chart lists the various signals present on the Macintosh Mini DIN-8 connector, and on what pins these signals are present on PC-style DB-9 and DB-25 connectors. This information may be of use if you are planning to have a custom cable built. Refer to the manual for the serial device that you plan to attach to the Macintosh for the recommended serial connection, and use the chart below to find out what the proper Macintosh wiring should be. Macintosh signal Macintosh Mini DIN-8 DB-9 DB-25 RS-232 name HSK0 1 4 20 DTR HSK1 2 8 5, 8 CTS, DCD TXD- 3 3 2 TXD GND 4 5 7 GND RXDA- 5 2 3 RXD TXDA+ 6 N/C N/C GP1 7 N/C N/C RXD+ 8 5 7 GND Operating in the PC Environment 59This chapter covers how to configure the PC environment and change PC options using the PC Setup control panel. Your Macintosh comes with the PC environment already configured and ready to use. Read this chapter only if you want to change the way the PC environment is set up, or if you have reinstalled the DOS-compatibility software and need to reconfigure it. You can control how your Macintosh and your DOS-compatible hardware and software work together with the PC Setup control panel. You use the control panel to accomplish the following tasks: m choose folders or volumes to be shared between the Mac OS and the PC environment m turn the PC card on and off m configure PC serial ports m set display options m set the shared memory size m turn PC sounds on and off and use Sound Blaster sound capabilities m configure PC drives You also use the control panel to switch environments immediately and to start, restart, or shut down the PC. 61 6 Configuring the PC Environment Use the instructions in this chapter if you need to change settings for the PC environment.Choosing settings To choose settings, follow these steps: 1 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu. 2 Double-click the PC Setup control panel to open it. 3 When you have specified the settings you want, close the control panel. All settings except RAM take effect as soon as you make them. If you change the RAM setting, you must restart the Macintosh before the change takes effect. Online help available: To get brief on-screen explanations of items in the control panel, choose Show Balloons from the Guide (h) menu. To get detailed step-by-step help, see the “DOS Compatibility Software” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. 62 Chapter 6Configuring the PC serial ports Your DOS-compatible Macintosh supports two serial ports, COM1 and COM2. You can map these ports to an unused Macintosh printer port or modem port, to a text file for later processing, or to a setting of None. m To assign a Macintosh serial port to a COM port, make a selection in the COM port’s pop-up menu. When you map a port to a text file, a dialog box appears that you use to specify a name and location for the file. Macintosh serial ports already in use appear dimmed in the menu. (The printer port may be in use by AppleTalk, which may be used for a network or LaserWriter connection; the modem port may be in use by communications or fax software.) Changes to these selections take place immediately. Assigned ports may not be available to the Mac OS: Mac OS programs may no longer be able to access ports that you’ve assigned to DOS. Allocate these ports only when they’re needed, and deallocate them when they’re no longer required by your DOS programs. (You won’t have to restart the computer to have the changes take effect.) The maximum baud rate supported by the DOS-compatible Macintosh when a COM port is mapped to a Macintosh serial port is 19,200. However, when the MODE command is issued in DOS and the serial port is set at 19,200 baud, the incorrect message “Function not supported on this computer” is displayed. This occurs because DOS is looking for specific hardware (a PC UART) that is not emulated by the DOS-compatible Macintosh. The Macintosh actually does support 19,200 baud, and can be set by a number of communication application programs. Configuring the PC Environment 63Setting the monitor The monitor connected to your Macintosh DOS-compatible system displays the environment (Mac OS or PC) you’re working in. Even though you see only one environment at a time, the other environment can still be active in the background. To set the monitor for the PC environment: m Choose a monitor type in the Display pop-up menu. See the Technical Information booklet that came with your computer for a list of supported Macintosh monitors and for VGA and SVGA monitor specifications. If the DOS-compatibility software recognizes the monitor connected to your computer as a non-multiscan display, it makes the appropriate selection for you; other menu options are dimmed. 16" monitor requires driver: If you have a 16" monitor, the PC doesn’t use the entire screen unless you install a display driver for the program that you’re using. (DOS can’t use a video driver, so there will always be a large black border around the DOS screen.) See “Reinstalling Video Drivers” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8 for instructions. Setting the time and date The PC environment uses the same date and time settings as the Mac OS. If you change the time and date on the PC, it will not affect the time and date on the Mac OS. When you restart the PC, it synchronizes its time and date with the settings you’ve chosen in the Mac OS. (The PC may lag up to 10 seconds behind the Mac OS.) 64 Chapter 6Setting shared memory You can install a 72-pin SIMM (memory module) on the DOS-compatible card in your computer to give the card up to 32 MB of RAM for its exclusive use. When no SIMM is installed, the card uses a portion of the RAM installed in your Macintosh. If your computer came with a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatible card, you cannot share memory between the Mac OS and the PC environment. The PC uses the memory installed on the DOS-compatible card exclusively. The shared memory options in the PC Setup control panel will be dimmed (unavailable). See the Technical Specifications booklet to determine whether your computer contains a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatible card. m Choose the amount of memory you want for your PC in the RAM pop-up menu. In the RAM pop-up menu, a small square (M) shows the RAM that the PC is currently using and a bullet (•) indicates how much RAM you assigned. When the Macintosh starts up, it claims RAM for its own use before it sets aside RAM for the PC. If the PC has less RAM than you installed, turn off the Mac OS RAM disk (if you’re using one) in the Memory control panel. You may also need to lower the disk cache size in the Memory control panel to 128K or less. Memory changes take place when you restart the Macintosh. IMPORTANT Memory that you set aside for the PC environment is not available to the Mac OS. To make this memory available, you must turn off the PC (click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel) and restart the Macintosh. Configuring the PC Environment 65Changing the amount of conventional memory Many DOS and Windows programs require conventional memory to run. At the same time, many device drivers and TSRs may be loaded into conventional memory. If you find that you do not have enough conventional memory to run some of your DOS or Windows programs, take the following steps. To increase Upper Memory Block (UMB) space to 122K instead of 64K, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 To load DOS into the UMB (high memory) also add the following to your CONFIG.SYS file: DOS=HIGH, UMB Insert the LOADHIGH (LH) command before all TSRs and device drivers in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. For example: LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X This will load these into UMB (high memory). If you run out of UMB space, you may see an error message like this during the boot process: Run time error R6009 -not enough space for environment. In this case, remove LH from TSRs and device drivers one or two at a time, and try again until the error message does not appear. If a DOSCLIP copy command is executed from within Harvard Graphics 3.0, then the PC crashes when Harvard Graphics is quit. To prevent this, use the steps outlined above, making sure that SMARTDRV is one of the drivers preceded with LH. IMPORTANT To prevent the System BIOS from becoming corrupted when the PC is configured for 2 MB of memory, set the switch in the CONFIG.SYS file to turn memory testing off: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF 66 Chapter 6Choosing shared folders or volumes You can set up a Mac OS folder, Macintosh hard disk, shared disk, or CD-ROM disc on a network to act as a PC drive. Sharing a folder on your Macintosh hard disk is a convenient way to transfer files between the Mac OS and the PC environment, especially if you are dealing with many files, or large files. You can share entire disks, or volumes. This is especially useful for network volumes, CD-ROM drives, or other volumes that otherwise would not be readily available to the PC environment. DOS treats all shared volumes as network volumes. Some DOS commands, such as FORMAT, CHKDSK, UNDELETE, and SUBST will not work on shared volumes. m Choose an available drive letter from the Sharing pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel. A dialog box appears, letting you select a folder or disk (volume) for the drive. Shared folders and volumes revert to their usual unshared status when you shut down your Macintosh. To have a folder or volume automatically assigned to a drive letter at startup, click the checkbox next to Attach at Startup. The name of an automatically attached folder or volume appears underlined in the Sharing pop-up menu. To turn off an assignment, choose the underlined item in the menu. IMPORTANT For the sharing functions to work properly, DOS must be running, MacShare should be loaded as part of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, and a LASTDRIVE=x statement should appear in the CONFIG.SYS file, where x is the highest drive letter available for sharing. AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS have x preset to M. See “MacShare” in the section “Working in the PC Environment” in Chapter 5 for more information. See the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu, for more information on transferring files between the PC environment and the Mac OS using floppy disks and other media. IMPORTANT Use caution when handling the drive file. Erasing one of these is equivalent to reformatting the hard drive it is emulating. The drive file is locked when it is installed on your computer. If you must unlock it, be very careful not to erase it. Configuring the PC Environment 67Using shared folders Because two operating systems have access to each shared folder, there may be a noticeable slowdown in performance when using these folders for highspeed PC applications such as multimedia programs, or during large file transfers between them. For optimum performance, place PC application programs and their files in the C or D drive rather than in a shared folder. The performance of Macintosh programs is unaffected by placing them in shared folders. Since the PC doesn’t understand the concept of resource forks the same way the Macintosh does, information in a Macintosh file’s “resource fork” is lost when it is copied by the PC. For example, if a Macintosh file is copied between two shared folders using the COPY command in DOS, that file’s original icon will be lost, and the file itself may be unusable in the Mac OS. Many document files do not have resource forks and can be copied between shared folders with no problems. The applications that created the files contain the resource information for these files. However, QuickTime files cannot be successfully copied between shared folders. In some Microsoft application programs, there is a misrepresentation of the shared drive icons. When you open a file from a shared folder in Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word, the shared drive icon may appear as a floppy disk or CD. This does not affect the file’s content, and the file is still usable. Do not attempt to use shared folders from a DOS shell run from Windows. Strange text characters in a document When using shared folders to exchange documents between the Mac OS and the PC, in some cases a Macintosh application program may not be able to interpret the file format of a PC document. When this happens, the document’s formatting is displayed incorrectly and you may see strange characters in the document. m Try using a different application program. m Translate the document into a different file format using one of the file format translation utilities available for the Macintosh (such as MacLink Plus Easy Open Translators from DataViz). m Transfer the text using DOSCLIP. m Use the Export feature found in many programs. m Use a PC-Macintosh translation utility. 68 Chapter 6Turning on PC sounds To have Sound Blaster and other PC sounds played through the Macintosh speaker or through headphones, you need to make settings in both the PC Setup control panel and in the Sound control panel. Choosing a setting in the Sound pop-up menu The Sound pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel gives you three choices: m To hear PC sounds in both the PC environment and the Mac OS, choose Enabled. m To hear PC sounds only when you’re in the PC environment, choose Auto Enabled. m To shut off PC sounds entirely, choose Disabled. Sound control panel takes precedence: The setting in the PC Setup control panel’s Sound pop-up menu has no effect on sounds generated in the Mac OS. If the volume is set to 0 in the Sound control panel, however, you won’t hear any PC sounds no matter what the setting is in the PC Setup control panel’s Sound menu. For sounds generated by the Sound Blaster card and for sounds from the PC, the Sound control panel must be set with the Internal CD playthrough option turned on. For instructions, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. The PC Sound control in the PC Setup control panel does not affect sounds produced by the Sound Blaster card. Only PC-generated sounds such as the system beep are affected by this control. To turn off both PC and Sound Blaster-generated sounds, use the master volume control of the Mixer Control application from the Audio program group, or turn off the Internal CD playthrough in the Sound control panel in the Mac OS. (For instructions, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.) The Sound Blaster hardware installed in your DOS-compatible Macintosh is not able to record sounds. The DOS-compatible Macintosh does not fully support Sound Blaster 8-bit, Sound Blaster 2.0, or Sound Blaster Pro drivers. If problems occur, use the Sound Blaster 16 driver that comes with your computer. Configuring the PC Environment 69Configuring drives C and D You use the C: and D: pop-up menus to create or select PC drives. Drive C is required; drive D is optional. You can use a PC-formatted SCSI hard drive attached to your Macintosh, or you can create a drive container—a virtual PC drive—on any Macintosh hard drive. You can even use a drive container created by SoftPC or SoftWindows. To use a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup (boot) drive, format the drive to be bootable by using the FORMAT C: /S command. m To create a drive container for drive C or D, choose New Drive File from the C: or D: pop-up menu. Set a location for the drive container, and give it a name and a size. Then click Initialize Drive File. When using a PC-formatted SCSI device as the PC’s C or D drive, ensure that the driver for that device is not loaded by PC Exchange. This would cause PC Exchange to mount the drive instead of the PC environment. Open the PC Exchange control panel and click the Options button. Make sure the SCSI driver for the device you want to use is not checked. Then click OK. This ensures that the PC will be able to load the C drive. Single versus multiple partitions: When you initialize a container this way, it contains a single partition. To initialize a container with multiple partitions, prepare it in DOS using the FDISK command instead of initializing it through the PC Setup control panel. Then format it using the FORMAT command. Use the /S parameter in the FORMAT command to make the container bootable (for example, type FORMAT C: /S at the DOS prompt). See the DOS manual for further instructions on using these commands. m To change the drive container for drive C or D, choose Other Drive File from the C: or D: pop-up menu, then locate the new drive container in the dialog box that appears. The change takes effect the next time you restart the PC. To have the change take place immediately, click the Restart button at the bottom of the control panel. 70 Chapter 6m To use a PC drive or partition, choose Drive Partition from the C: or D: pop-up menu. A dialog box appears with a list of available partitions. If you use a PC drive or partition and you have a utility that mounts these devices on the Macintosh, unmount the drive or partition before starting the PC by dragging its icon to the Trash. If you intend to mount your PC drive file, partition, or disk on the Macintosh using Macintosh PC Exchange, do not use a PC compression program. Drives that are compressed cannot be mounted. Managing PC files from the Mac OS You can gain access to files in a drive container even if you’re in the Mac OS. Follow these steps: 1 Double-click the drive container in the Finder. The drive container appears as a disk icon on the Mac OS desktop. 2 Double-click the container’s disk icon. The icon opens and you have access to the files inside it. You can now manipulate these files as you would any Mac OS files. Drive container may be read-only: If the PC is running, you won’t be able to add anything to the drive container from the Mac OS. To do so, shut down the PC from the PC Setup control panel and then do steps 1 and 2 above. WARNING If you don’t unmount the drive or partition, you may lose data because both the Macintosh and the PC may write to the device at the same time. Configuring the PC Environment 71Changing the size of the drive container You may find, after installing software in a drive container, that the container is too small or too large for your needs. You cannot change the size of an existing drive container, but you can create a new one in the appropriate size and move the software to it. You can also create an additional drive container to supplement the existing one. Two active containers maximum: For the following procedure to work, drive D must be available for assignment to a new drive container. If both drives C and D have been assigned, you must first set drive D to None and drive C to the container you need to replace. (The contents of the container mapped to drive D are unaffected.) Calculating the proper size To determine the proper size for the new container, follow these steps: 1 Make sure you’re in the Mac OS, then open the PC Setup control panel. You see a small apple at the upper-left corner of the screen when you’re in the Mac OS. 2 Check the name of the container associated with drive C. The name of the container appears above the C: pop-up menu. 3 Locate the container in the Finder. 72 Chapter 64 Open the container’s Get Info window and note the container’s size. To open the container’s Get Info window, select the container’s icon and choose Get Info from the File menu. 5 Close the Get Info window by clicking its close box. 6 Switch to the PC environment. 7 At the DOS C: prompt, type DIR. Note how much space is available. 8 Subtract the amount of available space on the drive from the container size. The number you get is the current size you need for storage. 9 Add 10 percent to the result of the calculation in step 8. It’s a good idea to have extra space available, because some applications may need to write temporary work files to the drive, or you may need to add software to the drive at a later time. The 10 percent figure, however, is arbitrary; use a number that suits your needs. If the current container is too large, the result of this calculation is the size that the new container should be. Skip to step 12. 10 Determine the amount of storage needed by the additional software you want to install. To do so, add together the individual storage space required for each program you want to install. This information is probably available in the documentation that came with your software. 11 Add the sums from steps 9 and 10. The resulting sum is the size that the new container should be. 12 Press x-Return to switch back to the Mac OS. Configuring the PC Environment 73Creating the new container Now that you know what size the container should be, you’re ready to create it. 1 Follow the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” earlier in this chapter to create a new container for drive D. You may need to remove some files from your hard disk to free enough space for the new container. 2 Click Restart PC at the bottom of the PC Setup control panel. 3 Click Switch to PC. You now have two drives available—drive C, your original container, and drive D, the container you just created. Moving the files You can transfer your files from the old container to the new one in either the Mac OS or the PC environment. m To move files in the Mac OS, drag all the files from the existing drive container to the new one. To move the files in the PC environment, follow these steps: 1 At the DOS prompt, type FORMAT D: /S and press Return. This command makes the new drive container bootable. Answer Y when DOS asks if you’re sure. 2 When the DOS prompt returns, type the following command: XCOPY C:\*.* D:\*.* /E /V This command copies all the files and directories from your drive C container to your drive D container. 3 Press x-Return to switch back to the Mac OS when copying is complete. 74 Chapter 64 In the PC Setup control panel, choose None from the D: pop-up menu. Doing so deallocates drive D. 5 Choose Other Drive File from the C: pop-up menu and select the container you just created. Your new container is now associated with drive C. 6 Click Restart PC at the bottom of the PC Setup control panel. 7 Click Switch to PC. 8 At the DOS prompt, type DIR. You should see a list of all the files you copied. You may want to run some of your programs to verify that everything has been copied correctly. m To throw away the original drive container, first switch to the Mac OS. Then drag the original container to the Trash and choose Empty Trash from the Special menu. Doing so frees up the space on your hard disk that the container held in reserve. Configuring The PC Environment 75Understanding the status line The status line at the bottom of the control panel gives you messages about the status of the PC hardware and software. Messages can include any of the following: m DOS-compatibility card not present Your computer’s system software did not recognize the DOS-compatible card installed in your computer. Reinstall the PC software according to the directions in Chapter 8. If reinstalling the software doesn’t help, contact an Apple-authorized service provider for assistance, or call Apple’s customer support hotline. (The phone number for the hotline is in the service and support information that came with your computer.) m PC Setup software not loaded An error occurred during the start-up process and the DOS environment won’t run. m PC is running You’ve clicked Start PC and the card is active. m PC is shut down The card is installed but not running. To start the card, click Start PC, or select Auto-Start PC and restart the computer. m PC is turned off The Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel is selected. m Not enough memory Your computer must have at least 8 megabytes (MB) of RAM installed, and the PC requires at least 2 MB of free RAM if you don’t have a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatible card for the exclusive use of the PC. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel, and restart your Macintosh. 76 Chapter 577 Consult this chapter if you experience problems using the Mac OS. When you have questions If you want to know how to do a particular task in the Mac OS, refer to Macintosh Guide in the Guide (h) menu. For instructions on using Macintosh Guide, see Chapter 2 of this manual. If you have problems working in the PC environment on your Macintosh, see Chapter 8, “Troubleshooting in the PC Environment.” If you have questions about using DOS, see your DOS manual. When you run into trouble While you’re using your computer, you may occasionally see a bomb icon or an error message, or you may have a problem such as the pointer (8) “freezing” on the screen. If you have trouble with your computer, take a few minutes to read the information in this chapter. If your problem is related to a particular procedure, you should also look for information on that procedure in Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For additional troubleshooting information and a list of common questions relating to the Mac OS, see the “Troubleshooting” topic of Macintosh Guide. If you are unable to access Macintosh Guide (for example, if your screen is “frozen”), refer to this chapter to see if you can resolve the problem. 7 Troubleshooting in the Macintosh EnvironmentTake your time When you see an error message, you don’t have to take action immediately. The message stays on the screen until you click the OK button or turn off the Macintosh. To help diagnose and correct the problem, gather as much information on the situation as you can before starting over. m Make a note of exactly what you were doing when the problem occurred. Write down the message on the screen and its ID number (if any). Also list the programs you were using and the names of any items you know have been added to the System Folder since the system software was installed. This information will help a service person diagnose the problem. (It is helpful to keep a printed copy of the items in your System Folder. For instructions on printing the contents of a folder, see the “Printing & Fonts” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide [h] menu.) m Check the screen for any clues. Is a menu selected? What programs and document icons are open? Note anything else that seems relevant. m If you were typing text and were not able to save it before the problem occurred, you can write down the parts of the text still visible on the screen so that some of your work will be easy to replace. m Ask other Macintosh users about the problem you’re having; they may have a solution for it. If you need repair service, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Appleauthorized service provider or Apple for assistance. 78 Chapter 7Start over Often you can eliminate a problem simply by clearing the computer’s memory and starting over. If you can, save any open documents before restarting the Macintosh. If your system is frozen and does not respond to anything you do, or if you have a “bomb” message on the screen, saving may not be possible. You can try pressing x-Option-Esc to quit the program in use when the problem occurred; if this works, you can then save the documents open in other programs before restarting. To restart your Macintosh, try the following steps: 1 If you can, choose Restart from the Special menu or from the dialog box that’s on the screen. Dialog boxes contain messages from the computer. If something goes wrong, a message may appear on the screen, asking you to restart the computer. 2 If you can’t choose Restart, hold down the x and Control keys while you press the Power key (marked with a triangle). This key combination restarts the computer. (Use this key combination only when you can’t choose Restart from the Special menu.) 3 If nothing happens, turn off your computer with the standby power button, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. 4 If the standby power button doesn’t turn off the computer, unplug your Macintosh. If you suspect that the problem is with other equipment, such as a printer or an external hard disk that’s attached to your computer, turn that equipment off for 10 seconds or longer, then turn it on again and restart the Macintosh. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 79Rebuild your desktop regularly A process known as “rebuilding the desktop” helps your Macintosh keep track of data on your startup disks. Although you usually use the hard disk in your computer as a startup disk, you can also start up from any other disk that has system software installed. It’s a good idea to rebuild the desktop of your startup disks once a month or so. To rebuild the desktop of a startup disk, follow these steps: 1 Hold down the Option and x keys while you start up your computer. Do not release the keys until you see a message asking whether you want to rebuild the desktop. 2 Click OK. Solutions to common problems The computer is turned on but the screen is dark. One of the following is probably the cause: m You have a screen saver program that darkens the screen when the computer has not been used for a certain period. Press a key or move the mouse to turn off the screen saver. m The monitor’s brightness control (Û) is not adjusted properly. Check the monitor’s brightness control and turn it up if necessary. m The Macintosh or the monitor is not getting power. Make sure the monitor is plugged in and turned on, and that the monitor cable is firmly connected to both the computer and the monitor. Make sure the computer’s power cord is firmly connected to the computer and plugged into a grounded electrical outlet, and that the outlet has power. If you have more than one monitor and only one is dark, check that it is set up correctly in the Monitors control panel. For information on using more than one monitor, see the “Monitors” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. 80 Chapter 7m The monitor is plugged into the wrong port on the computer. Make sure the monitor is plugged into the monitor port (marked with the ª icon) on the upper-right corner of the computer’s back panel. If the monitor is plugged into another port, it will not work. If you are displaying video from your computer on a television screen, it is normal for your computer monitor to be dark. The computer won’t start up. m The game controller is plugged into the wrong port. Make sure the game controller is plugged into the joystick port on the lower-right corner of the computer’s back panel. If the game controller is plugged into another port, the computer will not start up. The computer’s clock keeps time inaccurately. Your computer has a clock that runs continuously. When the computer is turned off, a battery keeps the clock running. If your clock begins to keep time inaccurately, have your Apple-authorized service provider replace the battery. When you start up, a disk icon with a blinking question mark appears in the middle of the screen. This icon indicates that your Macintosh cannot find the system software it needs to start up. One of the following is probably the cause: m Your computer may be having a problem recognizing external equipment that uses the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI). Turn off all external SCSI equipment and disconnect the first SCSI device in the chain from your computer’s SCSI port. Then restart the computer. If the computer starts up after you disconnect your SCSI equipment, refer to the manuals that came with the equipment for information on the proper way to connect SCSI equipment and assign SCSI ID numbers. If you have a printer connected to your computer’s SCSI port, make sure your printer is not supposed to be connected to the printer port instead. Check the manuals that came with your printer for information on how to connect it properly. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 81m System software is not installed on the startup hard disk, the system software is damaged, or the hard disk is not working properly. Start up your computer using the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) Then follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage. If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter to reinstall system software on your startup hard disk. When you try to start up from a floppy disk, a disk icon with an X appears in the middle of the screen and the floppy disk is ejected. This icon indicates that the floppy disk you tried to start up from is not a startup disk. Wait a few seconds. The computer should start up from its internal hard disk. Make sure you insert floppy disks only after the computer has begun starting up. 82 Chapter 7A “sad Macintosh” icon appears and the computer won’t start up. This icon indicates that your Macintosh cannot start up because of a problem with the system software or the computer hardware. Eject any floppy disks by turning off the computer and then holding down the mouse button while you turn the computer on again. Try starting up with the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) If the “sad Macintosh” icon appears again, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for information on contacting an Appleauthorized service provider or Apple for assistance. The Macintosh “hangs” or freezes during startup. If the Mac OS is sharing 16MB or more of memory with the PC environment and Disklight of Norton Utilities 3.1.1 is installed, the computer will freeze during startup. This does not occur with 8MB or less shared memory. Restart the Macintosh using one of the techniques described in “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble,” earlier in this chapter. Open the PC Setup control panel and change the shared memory setting to 8 MB or less. The hard disk icon does not appear on the desktop. If you don’t see a hard disk icon on the desktop, try the following: m If the hard disk is internal, shut down your computer, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. m If the hard disk is external, make sure that it is turned on and that its cable is connected firmly; then restart the Macintosh. m Check the ID numbers of all SCSI equipment connected to your computer. See the manuals that came with your SCSI equipment for information on setting SCSI ID numbers. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 83m If the hard disk is your startup disk, start your computer using the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) Then follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage. If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter to reinstall system software on your startup hard disk. Icons do not appear correctly on your screen. You need to rebuild the desktop—a process that helps your Macintosh keep track of files and folders on your hard disks. For instructions, see “Rebuild Your Desktop Regularly” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter. If icons do not appear correctly after you rebuild the desktop, restart your computer while pressing the Shift key to temporarily turn off system extensions. When you see the “Welcome to Macintosh—extensions off” message, release the Shift key and press the Option and x keys until you see a message asking if you want to rebuild the desktop. Your Macintosh can’t read a floppy disk. If you see a message that a floppy disk is unreadable, try one of the following: m If the disk has never been used, you may simply need to initialize it. For instructions, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in in the Guide (h) menu. m The disk may be damaged. See “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter for information on testing and repairing disks. m The disk may be a DOS disk that the Macintosh environment cannot use. Try switching to the PC environment and inserting the disk again. 84 Chapter 7If you are trying to use a DOS disk in the Macintosh environment, consider the following: m The disk may have been formatted incorrectly on a DOS computer (or in the PC environment on your Macintosh). On DOS computers it’s possible to format a standard double-sided disk in a high-density (1440K) format, and vice versa. Disks formatted in this way cannot be read by a Macintosh computer. When formatting disks in the DOS environment for use in both the Mac OS and DOS, always format standard double-sided disks in the 720K format. Always format high-density disks in the 1440K format. If a disk has been formatted incorrectly, switch to the PC environment and copy the disk’s contents onto another disk that has been properly formatted. The pointer (8) freezes on the screen. Your system has a software problem. m Press x-Option-Esc to quit the application program in use when the problem occurred. If this works, you can save the documents open in other programs before restarting. m Restart your Macintosh. (For instructions, see “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter.) Most software problems are temporary, and restarting usually corrects the problem. m Check the startup disk and program you were using when the problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. m Sometimes incompatible system extensions or control panels can cause system software problems. Restart while holding down the Shift key; this temporarily turns off all system extensions. If your computer works normally after you do this, remove all extensions from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder) and put them back into the Extensions folder one at a time. Restart after you add each extension. This procedure should identify any incompatible extensions. You can also use the Extensions Manager control panel to turn off individual extensions. For information on using this control panel to manage system extensions, see the “Setting Options” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 85m If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. A dialog box with a bomb appears. Your system has a software problem. m Write down what you were doing when the message appeared, the text of the message, and the message number, if there is one. m Restart your Macintosh. (See “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter for instructions.) Most software problems are temporary, and restarting usually corrects the problem. m Check the startup disk and application program you were using when the dialog box appeared. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. Reinstalling the system software may correct the problem. m Sometimes incompatible system extensions or control panels can cause system software problems. Restart while holding down the Shift key; this temporarily turns off all system extensions. If your computer works normally after you do this, remove all extensions from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder) and put them back into the Extensions folder one at a time. Restart after you add each extension. This procedure should identify any incompatible extensions. You can also use the Extensions Manager control panel to turn off individual extensions. For information on using this control panel to manage system extensions, see the “Setting Options” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. m If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. 86 Chapter 7The pointer (8) doesn’t move when you move the mouse. One of the following situations is probably the cause: m Your system has a software problem. Press x-Option-Esc to quit the application program in use when the problem occurred. If this works, you can save the documents open in other programs before restarting. Restart your Macintosh. See “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter for instructions. Check the startup disk and program you were using when the problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. Try starting up the computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) If your computer starts up normally, there may be an extension conflict. If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. m The mouse is not connected properly. Turn the computer off using the standby power button, check that the mouse and keyboard cables are connected properly, and then restart the computer. m Signals from the mouse are not reaching the computer, either because the mouse needs cleaning or because there is something wrong with the mouse. Clean the mouse according to the instructions in Appendix A of this book. If you have another mouse or pointing device, try connecting and using it. (Turn off the computer before connecting it.) If the new device works, there is probably something wrong with the mouse you replaced. If none of these procedures solves the problem, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 87Typing on the keyboard produces nothing on the screen. One of the following is probably the cause: m Your system has a software problem. Restart your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter. Check the startup disk and application program you were using when the problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. m You haven’t selected any text or set the insertion point (i). Make sure the program you want to type in is the active program. Then place the pointer (8) in the active window and click to set an insertion point (i) or drag to select text (if you want to replace the text with your typing). m The keyboard is not connected properly. Turn off the computer using the standby power button, then check that the keyboard cable is connected properly at both ends. If you have a keyboard with an ADB port (marked with the × icon) on each end, turn off the Macintosh using the standby power button and plug the keyboard cable into the other ADB port on the keyboard. (You may have to unplug the mouse to do this.) Then restart the computer. m The keyboard is damaged. If you have access to another keyboard, try using it instead. (Turn the computer off before connecting it.) If the new keyboard works, there is probably something wrong with the one you replaced. If none of these procedures solves the problem, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. 88 Chapter 7You can’t start an application program or it quits unexpectedly. Or, when you try to open a program, you see a message that not enough memory is available. One of the following is probably the cause: m The Macintosh ran out of memory. Quit the programs that you have open and then open the program you want to use, or restart your Macintosh. Use the Memory control panel to turn on virtual memory. For more information on virtual memory, see the “Memory” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. m The program needs more memory. Use the program’s Info window to give it more memory. For more information on increasing a program’s memory, see the “Memory” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. m The program requires special hardware, such as a floating-point unit (FPU), and your computer doesn’t have the hardware installed. Check the documentation that came with the program to find out if the program requires a Macintosh with special hardware, such as an FPU. Then check the Technical Information booklet that came with your Macintosh to find out if your computer is equipped with such special hardware, or if the hardware can be installed. Consult your Apple-authorized service provider for information on installing special hardware in your computer. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 89You see a message that an application program can’t be found. The following dialog box appears if you try to open a document that was created with software that is not on your hard disk. Normally, you see this message if you try to open a document that came from another Macintosh with software that is different from yours. m The Macintosh Easy Open control panel is not installed. This is a control panel that you can use to open documents when you don’t have the program that created them. Reinstall the control panel from the system software disks or CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with your computer. (See the section “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter for instructions.) See Appendix D for instructions on using Macintosh Easy Open. m Some documents can be opened by more than one application program. Try starting a program that you think might be able to open the document, and then choose Open from the program’s File menu to try to open the document. m Purchase and install the correct software to use the document, or find out if the creator of the document can convert it to a form that one of your programs can use. m Don’t try to open the files in the System Folder. Most of the files in the System Folder are used by your computer for internal purposes and are not intended to be opened. m Rebuild the desktop by holding down the Option and x keys while starting up your computer. Keep holding down the keys until you see a message asking whether you want to rebuild the desktop. Click OK. 90 Chapter 7m If the document is from a DOS computer and you want to open it in the Macintosh environment, use the PC Exchange control panel to specify which Macintosh program will open the document. For information about working with DOS documents in the Mac OS, see the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. You experience problems using a DOS document. If you can’t open a DOS document using a Macintosh program, try the following: m Open the document from within the program by choosing Open in the program’s File menu. m Use the PC Exchange control panel to change the document’s type to one that can be opened by the program. If a DOS document is displayed incorrectly, or you see strange codes or characters in the document, try one of the following: m Your application program may have special procedures for opening and saving documents with different file formats. See the information that came with your program. m Try opening the document in another program. Note: Some characters that can be displayed on the Macintosh are not accurately displayed on DOS computers. For more information about working with DOS documents in the Mac OS, see the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 91The Mac OS is running out of memory even though I’m not running any PC programs. When sharing memory with the PC environment, the Macintosh allocates a portion of its memory to the PC. Because of this, the Mac OS may not be able to load all your system extensions, including the PC Setup control panel. If this problem occurs, try the following: m Add memory to the DOS-compatibility card, as described in Appendix B. m Decrease the shared memory setting. m Remove PowerTalk and QuickDraw GX from the Extensions folder inside the System Folder. m Remove any other system extensions you don’t need. m Change the name of the PC Setup control panel to !PC Setup so that it loads first. Shared memory assigned to the PC isn’t available to the Mac OS until you turn off the PC. If the previous suggestions don’t solve your problem, click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel and restart the Macintosh. 92 Chapter 7Initializing a hard disk Before you can use a new disk, the disk must be prepared so that the computer knows where to store information on the disk. This preparation is called initializing (or formatting) the disk. When do you need to initialize a hard disk? The hard disk inside your computer was initialized at the factory, so you shouldn’t need to initialize it. You need to initialize a hard disk only if m you purchase a hard disk that has not been initialized at the factory m your hard disk is damaged If a hard disk needs to be initialized, the disk’s icon does not appear on the desktop when you start up the computer using another disk. Starting up from a CD-ROM disc To initialize, test, or repair a hard disk, or to install system software on a hard disk, you need to start up your computer from another disk. If your computer has a CD-ROM drive, you can start up your computer using the CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with the computer. To start up the computer using the CD-ROM disc, follow these steps: 1 Turn your computer on. 2 Press the Open/Close button on your CD-ROM drive, and quickly insert the CD-ROM disc containing system software into the drive. 3 Immediately press and hold down the C key on your keyboard. Continue to hold down the key until you see the “Welcome to Macintosh” message. WARNING Initializing a disk erases any information that may be on it. Before you initialize a damaged disk, try to repair it as described in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 93If a blinking question mark appears, or if the computer starts up from your hard disk: You did not insert the CD-ROM disc quickly enough for the computer to recognize it as a startup disk. Follow these steps: 1 Shut down your computer. The CD-ROM disc will remain in the CD-ROM drive. 2 Turn the computer on. 3 Immediately press and hold down the C key on the keyboard. Continue to hold down the key until you see the “Welcome to Macintosh” message. Starting up from a floppy disk To initialize, test, or repair a hard disk, or to install system software on a hard disk, you need to start up your computer from another disk. If you don’t have a built-in CD-ROM drive, you can start up the computer using either the Disk Tools or Install Disk 1 floppy disk that came with your computer. To start up your computer using a floppy disk, follow these steps: 1 Shut down your computer. 2 Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive. If you want to initialize, test, or repair your hard disk, use the Disk Tools disk to start up your computer. If you want to install Mac OS system software, use the Install Disk 1 disk. 3 Turn the computer on. 94 Chapter 7Reinitializing your computer’s internal hard disk You initialize the internal hard disk using a program called Internal HD Format, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer came with a CD-ROM drive and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find Internal HD Format on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” earlier in this section. 2 Double-click the Internal HD Format icon to open it. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Internal HD Format. 3 Type a name for your disk in the name box. 4 If you want to make sure that none of the hard disk’s original information is recognizable after reinitialization, choose Zero Data in the Options menu. If you choose Zero Data, initialization may take a few minutes. (If you don’t choose Zero Data, initialization will take less than 30 seconds.) 5 Click Initialize. A message informs you that initializing the disk erases all information on it. 6 Click OK. During initialization, a status bar shows you the progress of the initialization. 7 When the initialization is complete, click Done. If a message reports that initialization failed, try again. If initialization fails a second time, take the disk to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 95Initializing an external SCSI hard disk You initialize an Apple external SCSI hard disk using a program called Apple HD SC Setup, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer came with a CD-ROM drive and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find Apple HD SC Setup on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” earlier in this section. 2 Open the Apple HD SC Setup icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup. 3 Click Drive until the disk you want to initialize appears. You cannot initialize the disk that you used to start up your computer or the disk that contains the Apple HD SC Setup program. 4 Click Initialize. 96 Chapter 7 SCSI ID number of the currently selected hard disk Name of the currently selected hard disk5 Click Init to initialize the hard disk. 6 If a message appears asking you to name the disk, type a name and then click OK. 7 Click Quit when you see a message reporting that initialization was successful. If a message reports that initialization failed, try again. If initialization fails a second time, take the disk to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair. Repairing a damaged disk Disks can become damaged by repeated use and handling. When do you need to repair a disk? If you see a message reporting that a disk is damaged or unreadable, you may need to repair the disk. Try these suggestions first If you can’t start up from a hard disk or you don’t see the hard disk icon on the desktop, try the following: m If the hard disk is internal, shut down your Macintosh, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. m If the hard disk is external, make sure that it is turned on and that its cable is connected firmly; then restart the Macintosh. m If the hard disk is your startup disk, start up with a different startup disk. If the hard disk’s icon appears on your desktop, reinstall system software on the hard disk (see “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter). Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 97 Click here to initialize the disk. m Check the ID numbers of all SCSI equipment connected to your computer. Each device must have a unique ID number (the computer itself has the ID number 7). Also check that the chain of devices is terminated properly. For information on setting SCSI ID numbers and terminating a SCSI chain, see the manuals that came with your SCSI equipment. m Test the disk following the instructions that come next. Checking for damage on your internal hard disk You can check for damage on your internal hard disk with the Internal HD Format program, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find the Internal HD Format program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. You can use Internal HD Format at any time to check for damaged blocks (segments of the hard disk that cannot reliably be used to store information). 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Open the Internal HD Format icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Internal HD Format. 3 Choose Scan All Blocks in the Functions menu. If the program finds damaged blocks, it marks them so the computer will not store information in them. This process does not harm any information on the hard disk. 98 Chapter 7Testing an external SCSI hard disk You can test an external Apple SCSI hard disk with the Apple HD SC Setup program, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive, and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find the Apple HD SC Setup program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Open the Apple HD SC Setup icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup. 3 Click Drive until the disk you want appears. 4 Click Test. 5 When a message tells you that testing is complete, click Quit. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 99 SCSI ID number of the currently selected hard disk Name of the currently selected hard diskIf the test reveals a problem, you may be able to correct it by using Disk First Aid or another disk repair program (see the instructions in the next section), or you may need to reinitialize the disk (see “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter). Consult an Apple-authorized service provider for assistance, if necessary. How to repair a hard disk or floppy disk You can repair some types of disk damage by using the Disk First Aid program, which is included either on the Disk Tools floppy disk or on the CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with your computer. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Open the Disk First Aid icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid. 3 Click the icon of the disk you want to test. Disk icons appear in a box at the top of the Disk First Aid window. 100 Chapter 74 Click Repair to begin testing and repairing the disk. You can’t repair the startup disk or the disk that contains the Disk First Aid program, but you can test these disks by clicking Verify. If the program reveals a problem with either of these disks, start up the computer from another disk so that you can repair the damaged disk. If you want to test and repair another disk, click its icon and then click Repair. 5 When testing and repair are finished, choose Quit from the File menu. If Disk First Aid cannot correct the problem m Try repairing the disk again. Sometimes repeating the process corrects the problem. m Use another disk repair or recovery program. Some disk repair programs let you recover information from a damaged disk. m Consult a computer repair specialist for help. m Once you have recovered all the information you can, erase (reinitialize) the disk. If initialization doesn’t work, discard the damaged disk (if it’s a floppy disk), or take it to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair (if it’s a hard disk). Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 101Installing or reinstalling Mac OS system software System software is the set of programs and other files that the Mac OS uses to start itself up, keep track of your files, and run the application programs you use. System software is kept in the folder called the System Folder. When you turn on your computer, it looks for a startup disk, which is a disk that contains the system software. The startup disk is usually the hard disk that’s inside your computer, although another hard disk or a floppy disk can also be a startup disk. The accessory kit that came with your Macintosh provides system software on either a set of floppy disks or a CD-ROM disc. You can use the floppy disks or the CD-ROM disc to install the system software on your Macintosh if you need to do so. When should you install system software? Your Macintosh came with all the necessary system software installed on its internal hard disk, so you don’t need to install system software on that disk unless you encounter software problems. If you have a new hard disk or a newly initialized hard disk that doesn’t contain system software, or if you want to upgrade to a more recent version of system software on a hard disk, follow the instructions in “Installing System Software” later in this chapter. If you want to install DOS on a drive container or another volume that you’re using as a PC drive, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. When should you reinstall system software? If you have a problem with your system software, you may see this icon in the middle of the screen: If this icon appears, follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” earlier in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage. 102 Chapter 7If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in the next section, “Installing System Software,” to reinstall system software on your startup hard disk. Installing system software Follow the steps in this section to do what is commonly called a “normal” installation of system software. If you’re installing system software on a hard disk for the first time, make sure that your hard disk has been initialized, a process that prepares the disk to store information. If you see the hard disk’s icon on the desktop when you start up the computer, the disk has been initialized. If no disk icon appears when you start up, see “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter for instructions. To do a normal installation, follow these steps: 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Find and open the Disk First Aid icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid. After Disk First Aid starts, follow the instructions on the screen. Disk First Aid checks your hard disk for any problems. 3 When Disk First Aid has finished checking your hard disk, choose Quit from the File menu. 4 Shut down your computer. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 1035 Start up your computer from the Install Disk 1 disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program. 6 Click OK. The Easy Install dialog box appears. 7 Make sure that the hard disk named in the box is the one on which you want to install system software. If it isn’t, click Switch Disk until the correct disk name appears. 8 Click Install. 9 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. If you’re installing system software from floppy disks, you see messages asking you to insert different disks. 104 Chapter 7 Parts of system software to be installed Disk on which system software will be installed Click here to install the software you need. Click here to install on a different disk.10 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart. If a message reports that installation was not successful, try installing again. (Follow the instructions on the screen.) If, after reinstalling system software by doing a normal installation, you still experience problems with your computer, follow the steps in the next section for doing a “clean” installation of system software. IMPORTANT Certain system extensions or application programs that were originally on your hard disk may not be installed with the Installer program. If you notice that a certain extension or program was not installed, you may need to install it separately. You can find these additional extensions and programs on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. If you don’t have a CD-ROM drive, see the service and support information that came with your computer for information on how to contact Apple directly for assistance. Doing a clean installation of system software The steps in this section outline what is commonly called a “clean” installation of system software. Do a clean installation if you can’t determine what is damaged in your System Folder (especially if you think any special software, such as control panels, system extensions, or custom utilities, may be causing the problems you’re experiencing). You should also do a clean installation if you’re still having problems with your computer after you’ve reinstalled system software by doing a normal installation. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 105Testing your hard disk To prepare your hard disk for a clean installation, follow these steps: 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Find and open the Disk First Aid icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid. After Disk First Aid starts, follow the instructions on the screen. Disk First Aid checks your hard disk for any problems. 3 When Disk First Aid has finished checking your hard disk, choose Quit from the File menu. Preparing an external SCSI hard disk for reinstallation of system software If you’re reinstalling system software on an Apple external SCSI hard disk, follow these additional steps. If you’re reinstalling system software on your internal hard disk, skip to the next section, “Installing New System Software.” 1 Find and open the Apple HD SC Setup icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup. 2 Click Drive until the disk on which you want to reinstall system software appears. 3 Click Update and follow the instructions on the screen. 106 Chapter 74 When you see a message that the update (preparation for reinstalling system software) was successful, click Quit. The external SCSI hard disk is now prepared for reinstalling system software, and you can proceed with the installation. Installing new system software 1 Insert the Install Disk 1 disk into the floppy disk drive, or insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software into the CD-ROM drive. The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program. 2 Click Continue. The Easy Install dialog box appears. 3 Make sure that the hard disk named in the Destination Disk box is the one on which you want to install system software. If it isn’t, click Switch Disk until the correct disk name appears. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 107 Parts of system software to be installed Disk on which system software will be installed Click here to install the software you need. Click here to install on a different disk.4 Hold down Shift–x–K to start the clean installation. The following dialog box appears. 5 Click the Install New System Folder button and click OK. The Easy Install dialog box appears. The Install button has changed to Clean Install, and the contents of your old System Folder have been moved to a new folder named Previous System Folder. 6 Click Clean Install. 7 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. It takes a few minutes to complete the installation. 8 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, you may need to click Restart. You need to click Restart only if you installed software onto the startup disk. If a message reports that installation was not successful, try repeating the clean installation procedure. 108 Chapter 7 Click here to install the software you need.Replacing special software 1 Copy any special software items from the Previous System Folder back to your System Folder one item at a time, restarting the computer after copying each item. Special software consists of items such as control panels, system extensions, or custom utilities that you may have added to your System Folder. IMPORTANT Be very careful not to replace (copy over) any of the files in the System Folder with files from the Previous System Folder. 2 Check after each restart to make sure your computer is not having any software problems. If any of your special software items causes software problems, contact the software manufacturer for assistance or an upgrade. Doing a custom installation For most Macintosh users, the Easy Install procedure described in the previous sections is appropriate, because it automatically installs all the items you need. However, if you’d like to select a combination of system software files for your specific needs, you can customize your system software installation. You use custom installation to install or update one or more specific files, or to save space on your hard disk by installing only the files you want. To install customized system software, follow these steps: 1 Insert the Install Disk 1 disk into the floppy disk drive, or insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software into the CD-ROM drive. The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 1092 Click OK. The Easy Install dialog box appears. 3 Choose Custom Install from the pop-up menu. The Custom Install dialog box appears, listing all available system software components. 4 Scroll through the list of components, clicking the checkbox next to each component you want to install. 110 Chapter 7To get additional information about a component, click the box with the letter i in it to the right of the component. 5 Click Install. 6 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 7 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Quit. If a message reports that installation was not successful, try installing again. (Follow the instructions on the screen.) 8 Restart your Macintosh. The system software is installed and your computer is ready to use. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 111When you have questions Read this chapter when you have questions about using the PC environment on your Macintosh. If you have questions about using DOS or DOS application programs, see your DOS manual or the manuals that came with your programs. WARNING If you have a problem with your DOS-compatibility hardware or software and nothing presented in this manual solves it, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. If you attempt to repair the DOS-compatibility hardware yourself, any damage you may cause to the DOS-compatibility hardware will not be covered by the limited warranty on your DOScompatible Macintosh. Contact an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider for additional information about this or any other warranty question. 113 8 Troubleshooting in the PC Environment Consult this chapter if you have problems using the PC environment on your Macintosh.When I try to switch to DOS, my screen is blank or has no synchronization. If the monitor has never worked in DOS, it is most likely not able to synchronize properly to the DOS video signal. Refer to the information in the Technical Information booklet on monitor specifications and video modes, and check with your monitor vendor to see if your monitor conforms to these specifications. If your monitor was working previously, verify that its type is selected in the Display pop-up menu of the PC Setup control panel. If its type doesn’t show, use the Display pop-up menu to select the correct type. Restart the computer and, immediately after the chime sounds, hold down the x-Option-P-R keys. When you hear another chime, release the keys. Then open the PC Setup control panel again. You’ll get a message that PC Setup is not properly installed. This is normal. Verify the settings, and restart the computer again. The Macintosh “hangs” or freezes during startup. If the Mac OS is sharing 16 MB or more of memory with the PC environment, and Disklight of Norton Utilities 3.1.1 is installed, the computer will freeze during startup. This does not occur with 8 MB or less shared memory. Restart the Macintosh using one of the techniques described in “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” in Chapter 7. Open the PC Setup control panel and change the shared memory setting to 8 MB or less. The DOS-compatibility software doesn’t seem to be installed. Open the Control Panels folder and look for the PC Setup control panel. If you find it, the DOS-compatibility software is installed. If not, or if you find it but it doesn’t work, there may be a problem with the software. Reinstall the software according to the instructions in “Reinstalling the DOS-compatibility Software,” later in this chapter. If you do find the PC Setup control panel, open it. If drive C is mapped to a drive container, a drive container has been created. If drive C is not mapped to a drive container, follow the instructions in “Creating a Drive Container” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” later in this chapter. 114 Chapter 8When I switch to the PC environment, I see this message: “Non-system disk or disk error. Replace and strike any key when ready.” The DOS-compatibility hardware can’t find DOS. Switch to the Mac OS by pressing x-Return, open the PC Setup control panel, and make sure drive C is mapped to a drive container. If not, follow the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” in Chapter 6. If drive C is mapped to a drive container, it may not be the drive container that holds DOS. If other drive containers have been created, double-click each one in the Mac OS and look for DOS folders and files. If you locate a container with DOS in it, map it to drive C. If no drive container exists, the PC software may not be installed. First, create a drive container by following the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” in Chapter 6. Then follow the instructions under “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” later in this chapter. I’m running applications in both environments and they seem sluggish. You may be sharing Macintosh RAM with the PC. Performance may improve if you give the PC environment its own memory by installing a SIMM (memory module) on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer. For instructions, see Appendix B. Additionally, significant drive access in one environment (including file sharing) can cause a slowdown in the other. There is a delay when switching between environments. When switching would interfere with a Mac OS system task, there is a slight delay until the task is completed. There also may be a delay while clipboard information is transferred between the two environments. (If there’s a large amount of information on the clipboard, you may actually see the translator window.) If Shutdown Warning is turned on in the General Controls panel in the Mac OS, you cannot switch back to the Mac OS immediately after switching to the PC. Wait a few minutes and try switching again. To fix the problem, open the General Controls panel in the Mac OS and turn off the Shutdown Warning option. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 115I switched to the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to switch back to the Mac OS. Press x-Return at any time to switch to the Mac OS. Inserting a PC-format disk in the Mac OS brings up an initialization message. Macintosh PC Exchange may not be installed. Look in the Control Panels folder for a control panel called Macintosh PC Exchange. If you don’t find it, reinstall Macintosh PC Exchange from the floppy disks or CD-ROM disc that contains system software. I’m in the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to eject a floppy disk. Press x-E. I’m in the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to eject a CD-ROM disc. Press x-Y. The PC drive file I initialized has only one partition. Macintosh PC Exchange configures drives to have a single partition. The DOS program FDISK can configure a drive with up to four partitions. See your DOS manual for more information. The PC won’t start up, and there’s a message saying there is not enough free memory. Your computer must have at least 8 MB of RAM installed. If you don’t have a SIMM installed for the exclusive use of the PC environment (see the Technical Information booklet), the PC requires at least 2 MB of free RAM if you are using DOS, and 4 MB if you are using Windows. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel. Additionally, set the disk cache size in the Memory control panel to 128K or less. 116 Chapter 8The PC Setup icon has a red slash through it at startup. If PC Setup doesn’t have enough memory to allocate to the PC at startup time, it will turn itself off. Check the Memory control panel for disk cache and RAM disk sizes; the disk cache should be set no higher than 128K, and the RAM disk should be off (or have a small amount of memory allocated to it). Restart the Macintosh if you change either of these settings. If these steps don’t correct the problem, throw away the PC Setup Prefs file in the Preferences folder within the System Folder and restart the Macintosh. Then use the PC Setup control panel to recreate your settings. When I switch to the Mac OS from the PC environment, the following message appears: “PC Clipboard requires additional system services in order to function. Please ensure that the DOS-compatibility card is successfully installed.” Macintosh Easy Open software is either not installed or has been turned off. Turn on the Macintosh Easy Open control panel, or reinstall it from the DOS Compatibility Installer (for the Mac OS) disk. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive and you don’t have the floppy disk, use the DOS Compatibility Installer program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. I set the DOS-compatibility card to use 4 MB (or more) of RAM, but I get an error message from my PC application program saying that there’s not enough memory to run it. If you are sharing memory between the Macintosh and PC, the Mac OS may be using some of the RAM you requested for the PC. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel; then restart the Macintosh. A PC program displays a message that it needs 540K to run, but I have 4MB of memory allocated to the PC environment. The program is referring to conventional memory. Most of the balance of the 4 MB of memory you assigned to the PC is used by the EMM386 memory management software. Configure your application program to use more extended memory and less conventional memory. You may also need to disable some device drivers or other software in your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files to free up more conventional RAM. See the section on managing memory in your DOS manual for more information. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 117The Mac OS is running out of memory even though I’m not running any PC programs. When sharing memory with the PC environment, the Macintosh allocates a portion of its memory to the PC. Because of this, the Mac OS may not be able to load all your system extensions, including the PC Setup control panel. If this problem occurs, try the following: m Add memory to the DOS-compatibility card, as described in Appendix B. m Decrease the shared memory setting. m Remove PowerTalk and QuickDraw GX from the Extensions folder inside the System Folder. m Remove any other system extensions you don’t need. m Change the name of the PC Setup control panel to !PC Setup so that it loads first. Shared memory assigned to the PC isn’t available to the Mac OS until you turn off the PC. If the previous suggestions don’t solve your problem, click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel and restart the Macintosh. My monitor flashes oddly when I switch environments. This is a natural effect when a single monitor is used by two different environments. Turn on the Fade Screens option in the PC Setup control panel. The PC environment is frozen, and pressing Control-Alt-Delete doesn’t reset the system. Press the x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period keys. The system will reset with a cold start. When I print a document in the PC environment, the top and bottom get clipped. In the Mac OS, open PC Print Spooler in the Extensions folder, choose Preferences from the File menu, and click “Gaps between pages (60-lines).” In the PC environment, configure your applications to print to a 60 line page, rather than a 66-line page, or your margins will be off and your pages will not print correctly. 118 Chapter 8When I start up certain software in the PC environment, my Apple monitor shows a jumbled image and the display rolls. Some application programs that write directly to the hardware (especially games) may cause the Apple 13", 14", and 16" monitors to lose video synchronization at program startup. Call the software company to see if the software has a switch to force it to make BIOS calls (or if an upgrade is available with this feature). DOS begins to start up but then the screen freezes. My cursor blinks, but I cannot type anything. Press x-Control-Alt-[keyboard] period to restart the PC. When you see the message “Starting MS-DOS,” press and hold the F5 key. This will bypass your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file so that the HIMEM.SYS driver looks like the following: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF Restart the PC; it should now start up normally. Reinstalling the DOS-compatibility software Your Macintosh DOS-compatible computer comes with the DOS-compatibility hardware and software already installed. You should reinstall the software only if you are having severe software problems. Follow the instructions in this section. There are several steps to reinstalling your DOS-compatibility software: m install the Mac OS software m create a storage area (called a drive container) for DOS software m set aside RAM for the PC environment, if necessary m install the Microsoft MS-DOS operating system (and Microsoft Windows if you wish) m install the additional DOS software that came with your DOS-compatible computer m install your own PC software For information on setting up the software after you install it, including additional changes you may need to make to the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files, see Chapter 5. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 119Reinstalling Mac OS software You’ll install several extensions and control panels in your System Folder. 1 Start up your Macintosh while holding down the Shift key. This starts the Macintosh with extensions turned off. 2 Insert the floppy disk named DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for Mac OS Environment) into the floppy disk drive. If your computer has a built in CD-ROM drive, and you don’t have this floppy disk, insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 3 Find the DOS Compatibility Installer icon and double-click it to open it. 4 Click Install in the dialog box that appears. The software is automatically installed onto your hard disk. 5 When the installation is complete, click Quit and restart your Macintosh. The following Mac OS software is now installed in your System Folder: Name Location Macintosh Easy Open Control Panels folder PC Exchange Control Panels folder PC Setup Control Panels folder PC Setup Guide Additions Extensions folder PC Clipboard Extensions folder PC Clipboard Translators Extensions folder PC Print Spooler Extensions folder PC Network Extension Extensions folder 120 Chapter 8Creating a drive container A drive container is a file on a Macintosh hard disk that acts as a hard drive for the PC. You create a drive container using the PC Setup control panel. 1 Open the PC Setup control panel. 2 Choose New Drive File from the C: pop-up menu. A dialog box appears. 3 Choose a location for the drive container. The drive container can be on any hard disk attached to the Macintosh. At least 40 MB of free space is recommended. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 121It’s best to locate the container at the root level of your hard disk (not in any folders or sub-folders) so that you can locate it easily. 4 Type a name for the drive container. You can type up to 31 characters. Pick a descriptive name such as PC Drive or PC Container so that you can easily identify it. When you finish, press the Tab key to move to the Size field. 5 Type a size (in MB) for the drive container. At least 40 MB is recommended. The exact amount of space you need depends on what application programs you intend to install for DOS and Windows. Check the documentation that came with the programs to see how much space you’ll need, then allow some extra room for growth. (The software included with your DOS-compatible computer requires about 25 MB.) 6 Check Initialize Drive File to automatically initialize the drive container with a single partition. If you want more than one partition, you can leave the box unchecked and use the FDISK and FORMAT programs after you’ve installed DOS. (See your DOS manual for instructions and information about the FDISK and FORMAT commands and their options.) 7 Click Create. Assigning RAM to the PC The PC needs memory to operate. You can provide memory with a memory module (SIMM) installed on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer, or by assigning it RAM from your Macintosh. If a memory module is installed on the DOS-compatibility card, the RAM pop-up menu options will be dimmed (unavailable). The amount of memory available to the PC will depend of the amount of RAM on the installed SIMM. See the Technical Specifications booklet to find out whether your DOS-compatibility card includes a SIMM and what RAM capacity the SIMM has. If a SIMM is installed, skip to “Reinstalling PC Software,” next. 122 Chapter 8Memory installed on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer is for the exclusive use of the PC environment, and provides a marked increase in performance of PC applications. If no memory module is installed, you need to assign RAM to the PC. 1 Choose a memory size from the RAM pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel. If you’re installing DOS only, choose a minimum of 2 MB. If you intend to install Windows, choose a minimum of 4 MB. Note: Windows performance will increase if you allocate more memory to the PC. However, RAM assigned to the PC is not available in the Mac OS until you turn off the card in the PC Setup control panel and restart the computer. 2 Restart the Macintosh. IMPORTANT If the RAM size is set to 2 MB, modify the CONFIG.SYS file in DOS as follows: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF Reinstalling PC software You begin by installing the Microsoft MS-DOS operating system included with your computer. You can also install Microsoft Windows if you wish. 1 Open the PC Setup control panel and click Switch to PC. The Macintosh desktop disappears, and you see a message about a missing operating system or about a disk error. Ignore the message. 2 Insert the CD-ROM disc containing DOS and Windows software into the computer’s CD-ROM drive. If you are using floppy disks, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS Setup floppy disk and press Return. The DOS disks and manual are in the same shrink-wrapped package. 3 If you are using the CD-ROM disc, find and open Microsoft MS-DOS Setup. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 1234 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. If you are using floppy disks, press x-E to eject a disk when necessary. Note: The MS-DOS installation disks do not include a DOS mouse driver. A mouse driver for Windows is automatically installed, however, if you install Microsoft Windows. Mouse drivers for DOS are widely available from thirdparty sources. 5 When DOS installation is complete, you may want to install Windows. If you are using the CD-ROM disc, find and open the file called Windows Series Installation Instruction Diskette 1 of 6, type A:setup, and press Return. If you are using floppy disks, insert the disk labeled Windows Series Installation Instruction Diskette 1 of 6, type A:setup, and press Return. The Windows disks and manual are in the same shrink-wrapped package. You can skip this and the next step if you don’t want to install Windows. 6 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. If you are using floppy disks, press x-E to eject a disk when necessary. The following PC software is now installed: DOS (directory) WINDOWS (directory) COMMAND.COM AUTOEXEC.BAT CONFIG.SYS 124 Chapter 8Installing additional PC software Your DOS-compatible computer comes with additional software utilities that you may want to install. The following table describes the function of each program. For more information on using these programs, see Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment.” Program name Function DOSCLIP Lets you copy and paste between DOS and Mac OS. WINCLIP Lets you copy and paste between Windows and Mac OS. MACSHARE Lets you share Mac OS volumes and folders with the PC environment. CDROM Lets you access your Macintosh CD-ROM drive from the PC environment. MACODI Provides support for accessing networks in the PC environment. To install the additional software, follow these steps: 1 With the PC environment on the screen, insert the disk named DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for PC Environment) into the disk drive. 2 Choose one of the options below to install software for either DOS alone or both DOS and Windows. m To install software for DOS alone, type A:INSTALL at the DOS prompt and press Return. m To install software for both DOS and Windows, start Windows, select the Run command from the File menu, type A:SETUP for the program name, and click OK. 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 125Replacing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files Your DOS-compatible PC software includes alternate versions of the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that let you select from a variety of DOS memory-management options. Each time you start DOS, you will see a menu that asks if you want to optimize memory for just DOS, for a DOS program that requires maximum conventional memory, for a DOS program that requires maximum expanded memory, or if you want to start Windows immediately. To install the alternate CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, follow these instructions: 1 Switch to the PC environment. 2 At the DOS prompt, type the following: C: REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAK REN AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEXEC.BAK COPY ALT_CFGS\CONFIG.APL CONFIG.SYS COPY ALT_CFGS\AUTOEXEC.APL AUTOEXEC.BAT 3 To restart the PC with the alternate files installed, type Control-Alt-[keypad] period. If your keyboard has a Delete key, you can press Control-Alt-Delete instead. The PC restarts and the new menu appears. Modifying the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files You may want to modify the CONFIG.SYS file by hand to meet specific needs. Use the DOS Edit command (or any other DOS or Windows editor) and make the changes listed below. IMPORTANT Make backup copies of your original files before you change them. That way you still have your originals in case problems develop. Be sure to save the file when you are finished. To prevent the ROM BIOS from becoming corrupted when the PC is configured for 2 MB of memory, be sure to add the underlined text to the indicated line: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS/ TESTMEM:OFF 126 Chapter 8If you do not intend to use software that requires expanded memory (EMS), make the following change: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS RAM=D000-EFFF If you intend to use software that does use expanded memory, or you’re unsure what you may need in the future, make the following change: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 Depending on how you have reconfigured the file, your CONFIG.SYS file should look something like this: DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 DOS=HIGH,UMB FILES=30 LASTDRIVE=M Additionally, your AUTOEXEC.BAT file should contain the following: LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X @ECHO OFF PROMPT $p$g PATH C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOS SET TEMP=C:\DOS (The reference to Windows in the PATH line applies only if you chose to install Windows.) See your DOS manual to learn how to edit and save your DOS files. IMPORTANT Some memory configuration utilities, such as MEMMAKER, may not be able to determine the exact nature of the hardware of the DOScompatible computer and, therefore, may not be compatible. Additionally, using third-party compression software such as DriveSpace on a drive container prevents you from accessing the container or the files within it from the Mac OS. For these reasons, Apple does not recommend using these programs with your DOS-compatible computer. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 127Bypassing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files at startup To bypass the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files during the startup process, press and hold the F5 key (x-5 on non-extended keyboards) after the memory testing is complete. Reinstalling Sound Blaster software To install Sound Blaster software, follow these steps: 1 Insert the Sound Blaster Software Installation disk in the floppy disk drive while the PC is in the foreground. 2 From DOS, type A:INSTALL and press Return. 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 4 Restart DOS to use the new software. To do so, press Control-Alt-[keypad] period. See the enclosed manual, Using PC Sounds with the DOS-Compatibility Card, for information about using the Sound Blaster utilities. Reinstalling video drivers If you intend to run Windows with 256 colors at a resolution of 640 by 480 pixels, or if you intend to use an Apple 16" or VGA display with 16 colors at a resolution of 800 by 600 pixels, follow these steps: 1 Insert the Display Drivers Disk 1 disk in the floppy disk drive while the PC is in the foreground. 2 From DOS, type A: and press Return to set the current drive to A. 3 Type SETUP and press Return to run the setup program. Follow the instructions on the screen to install the video drivers. Select Windows 3.1 as the application. Note: If you are using an Apple 16" monitor, DOS is displayed at a resolution of 640 by 480 pixels centered on your monitor and surrounded by a large black border. 128 Chapter 8For your own safety and that of your equipment, follow all the instructions in this chapter. Keep these instructions available for reference by you and others. Health-related information about computer use Muscle soreness, eye fatigue, and other discomforts and injuries sometimes associated with using computers can occur from performing any number of activities. In fact, misuse of the same muscles during multiple activities can create a problem that might not otherwise exist. For example, if you engage in nonwork activities that involve repetitive stress on the wrist—such as bicycling—and also use your computer’s keyboard improperly, you may increase your likelihood of developing wrist problems. Some individuals are at greater risk of developing these problems because of their health, physiology, lifestyle, and general exposure to stress. Work organization and conditions, such as workstation setup and lighting, also play a part in your overall health and comfort. Preventing health problems is a multifaceted task that requires careful attention to the way you use your body every hour of every day. The most common health effects associated with using a computer are musculoskeletal discomfort and eye fatigue. We’ll discuss each area of concern below. 129 Appendix A Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips Read this appendix for important health and safety instructions, as well as tips on keeping your computer in good working order.Musculoskeletal discomfort As with any activity that involves sitting for long periods of time, using a computer can make your muscles sore and stiff. To minimize these effects, set up your work environment carefully, using the guidelines that follow, and take frequent breaks to rest tired muscles. To make working with your computer more comfortable, allow enough space in your work area so that you can change position frequently and maintain a relaxed posture. Another type of musculoskeletal concern is repetitive stress injuries (RSIs), also known as cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs). These problems can occur when a certain muscle or tendon is repeatedly overused and forced into an unnatural position. The exact causes of RSIs are not totally understood, but in addition to awkward posture, such factors as the amount of repetition, the force used in the activity, the individual’s physiology, workplace stress level, and lifestyle may affect the likelihood of experiencing an RSI. RSIs did not suddenly arise when computers were invented; tennis elbow and writer’s cramp, for example, are two RSIs that have been with us for a long time. Although less common than other RSIs, one serious RSI discussed more often today is a wrist problem called carpal tunnel syndrome, which may be aggravated by improper use of computer keyboards. This nerve disorder results from excessive pressure on the median nerve as it passes through the wrist to the hand. This section offers advice on setting up your work area to enhance your comfort while you use your computer. Since the effects of repetitive movements associated with using a computer can be compounded by those of other work and leisure activities to produce or aggravate physical problems, proper use of your computer system must be considered as just one element of a healthy lifestyle. No one, of course, can guarantee that you won’t have problems even when you follow the most expert advice on using computer equipment. You should always check with a qualified health specialist if muscle, joint, or eye problems occur. 130 Appendix AEye fatigue Eye fatigue can occur whenever the eyes are focused on a nearby object for a long time. This problem occurs because the eye muscles must work harder to view an object that’s closer than about 20 feet (6 meters). Improper lighting can hasten the development of eye fatigue. Although eye fatigue is annoying, there’s no evidence that it leads to permanent damage. Whenever you’re engaged in an activity that involves close-up work—such as reading a magazine, doing craft work, or using a computer—be sure to have sufficient glare-free lighting and give your eyes frequent rest breaks by looking up and focusing on distant objects. Remember to have your eyes examined regularly. To prevent discomfort and eye fatigue: m Arrange your workspace so that the furniture is properly adjusted for you and doesn’t contribute to an awkward working posture. m Take frequent short breaks to give your muscles and eyes a chance to rest. Arranging your office Here are some guidelines for adjusting the furniture in your office to accommodate your physical size and shape. m An adjustable chair that provides firm, comfortable support is best. Adjust the height of the chair so your thighs are horizontal and your feet flat on the floor. The back of the chair should support your lower back (lumbar region). Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the backrest to fit your body properly. m When you use the computer keyboard, your shoulders should be relaxed. Your upper arm and forearm should form an approximate right angle, with your wrist and hand in roughly a straight line. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 131You may have to raise your chair so your forearms and hands are at the proper angle to the keyboard. If this makes it impossible to rest your feet flat on the floor, you can use a footrest with adjustable height and tilt to make up for any gap between the floor and your feet. Or you may lower the desktop to eliminate the need for a footrest. Another option is to use a desk with a keyboard tray that’s lower than the regular work surface. m Position the mouse at the same height as your keyboard. Allow adequate space to use the mouse comfortably. m Arrange the monitor so the top of the screen is slightly below your eye level when you’re sitting at the keyboard. The best distance from your eyes to the screen is up to you, although most people seem to prefer 18 to 28 inches (45 to 70 cm). m Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections on the screen from overhead lights and windows. You may want to use a tiltable monitor stand. The stand lets you set the monitor at the best angle for viewing, helping to reduce or eliminate glare from lighting sources you can’t move. Thighs horizontal Shoulders relaxed Screen positioned to avoid reflected glare Forearms and hands in a straight line Forearms level or tilted up slightly Lower back supported Feet flat on the floor Top of the screen at or slightly below eye level (You may need to adjust the height of your monitor by placing something under it or by raising your work surface.) Clearance under work surface 45–70 cm (18–28 in.) 132 Appendix AAvoiding fatigue m Change your seated position, stand up, or stretch whenever you start to feel tired. Frequent short breaks are helpful in reducing fatigue. m Use a light touch when typing or using a mouse and keep your hands and fingers relaxed. m Some computer users may develop discomfort in their hands, wrists, or arms after intensive work without breaks. If you begin to develop chronic pain or discomfort in your hands, wrists, or arms, consult a qualified health specialist. m Allow adequate work space so that you can use your keyboard and mouse comfortably. Place papers or other items so you can view them easily while using your computer. A document stand may make reading papers more comfortable. m Eye muscles must work harder to focus on nearby objects. Occasionally focus your eyes on a distant object, and blink often while you work. m Clean your screen regularly. Keeping the screen clean helps reduce unwanted reflections. What about electromagnetic emissions? There has been recent public discussion of the possible health effects of prolonged exposure to extremely low frequency (ELF) and very low frequency (VLF) electromagnetic fields. Such fields are associated with electromagnetic sources such as television sets, electrical wiring, and some household appliances—as well as computer monitors. Apple has reviewed scientific reports and sought the counsel of government regulatory agencies and respected health organizations. Based on the prevailing evidence and opinions, Apple believes that the electric and magnetic fields produced by computer monitors do not pose a health risk. In response to those customers who wish to reduce their exposure to electromagnetic fields, Apple has lowered the emission levels of our products. We are also actively encouraging further scientific research so we can continue to promote the health and safety of our customers and employees. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 133Safety instructions For your own safety and that of your equipment, always take the following precautions. Turn off the computer completely and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cord) if any of the following conditions exists: m the power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged m you spill something into the case m your Macintosh is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture m your Macintosh has been dropped or the case has been otherwise damaged m you suspect that your Macintosh needs service or repair m you want to clean the case (use only the recommended procedure described later in this chapter) Be sure that you always do the following: m Keep your Macintosh away from sources of liquids, such as wash basins, bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on. m Protect your Macintosh from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on. m Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug your Macintosh into a wall socket. m Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others. m Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system. WARNING Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation of this product, or similar products, must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not permit them to handle any cables. 134 Appendix AHandling your computer equipment Follow these guidelines for handling your computer and its components: m When setting up your computer, place components on a sturdy, flat surface, and carefully follow all setup instructions. m When connecting or disconnecting a cable, always hold the cable by its connector (the plug, not the cord). m Turn off your computer and all its components before connecting or disconnecting any cables to add or remove any component. Failure to do so could seriously damage your equipment. m Never force a connector into a port. If the connector and port do not join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. m Take care not to spill any food or liquid on the computer, keyboard, mouse, or other components. If you do, turn your computer off immediately and unplug it before cleaning up the spill. Depending on what you spilled and how much of it got into your equipment, you may have to bring your equipment to an Apple-authorized service provider. m Protect the computer and its components from direct sunlight and rain or other moisture. m Keep all ventilation openings clear and unobstructed. Without proper air circulation, components can overheat, causing damage or unreliable operation. WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded. Your Macintosh is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug! Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 135Handling the monitor Follow these procedures for handling a monitor: m Turn down the screen brightness control if you leave the computer turned on for extended periods. If the brightness is not turned down, the image on the screen could “burn in” and damage the screen. You can also use a “screen saver” program, which dims or varies the image on the screen when the computer has been idle for a specified period of time. These programs are available from independent suppliers and user groups. m Make sure that the ventilation openings on the computer and the monitor are clear and unobstructed. m Some large monitors cannot safely be placed on top of the computer. Check the instructions that came with the monitor for setup information. m If there is interference on the monitor’s screen or on a television or radio near your computer, move the affected equipment farther away. Handling the keyboard Take care not to spill any liquid on the keyboard. If you do, turn off your computer immediately. m If you spill liquid that is thin and clear, unplug the keyboard, turn it upside down to let the liquid drain out, and let it dry for 24 hours at room temperature. If, after you take these steps, the keyboard doesn’t work, take it to an Apple-authorized service provider for repair. m If you spill liquid that is greasy, sweet, or sticky, unplug the keyboard and take it to an Apple-authorized service provider for repair. 136 Appendix AHandling floppy disks Ejecting a disk For instructions on ejecting a floppy disk, a CD-ROM disc, or a removable media disk from the Mac OS, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For instructions on ejecting disks in the PC environment, see “Ejecting Disks in the PC Environment” in the section “Switching Between the Macintosh and PC Environments” in Chapter 5. 125° F (52° C) 50° F (10° C) Keep disks dry. Do not use a pencil or an eraser on a disk or disk label. Store disks at temperatures between 50° F and 125° F. Do not touch the exposed part of the disk behind the metal shutter. Keep disks away from magnets. Avoid exposing disks to extremely hot temperatures. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 137If you can’t eject a floppy disk If you can’t eject a floppy disk in the usual way, try the following in order: m Hold down the x and Shift keys and press the number 1 key on your keyboard to eject a disk in the internal disk drive. m Turn off the computer. If the disk isn’t ejected, then hold down the button on your mouse or other pointing device while you turn the computer on again. m Locate the small hole near the disk drive’s opening, and carefully insert the end of a large straightened paper clip into it. Push gently until the disk is ejected. Do not use excessive force. If nothing works, take the computer or disk drive to your Apple-authorized service provider to have the disk removed. Power supply The power supply in your computer is a high-voltage component and should not be opened for any reason, even when the computer is off. If the power supply needs service, contact your Apple-authorized dealer or service provider. 138 Appendix ACleaning your equipment Follow these general rules when cleaning the outside of your computer and its components: m Use a damp, soft, lint-free cloth to clean the computer’s exterior. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. m Don’t use aerosol sprays, solvents, or abrasives. Cleaning the computer case To clean the case, do the following: 1 Turn off the computer completely and then disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) 2 Wipe the surfaces lightly with a clean, soft cloth dampened with water. Cleaning the monitor To clean the screen, put household glass cleaner on a soft cloth and wipe the screen. Don’t spray the cleaner directly on the screen, because the liquid might drip into the monitor or computer. Cleaning the mouse The mouse contains a small ball that must roll smoothly for the mouse to work properly. You can keep this ball free of dirt and grease by using the mouse on a clean, lint-free surface and cleaning it occasionally. You need a few cotton swabs and a clean, soft, lint-free cloth. 1 Turn off your computer. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 1392 Turn the mouse upside down and turn the plastic ring on the bottom counterclockwise to disengage it. If you have an older mouse, you may need to press the plastic ring (rather than turn it) to disengage it. If the mouse is locked, see the next section, “Locking and Unlocking the Mouse,” for instructions on how to unlock it. 3 Turn the mouse right-side up with one hand and catch the ring and the ball with your other hand. 4 Clean the three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab moistened with water. Rotate the rollers to clean all around them. 5 Wipe the mouse ball with a clean, soft, dry, and lint-free cloth. 6 If necessary, wash the mouse ball with warm soapy water (use a mild soap such as a dishwashing liquid) and then dry the mouse ball thoroughly. 7 Gently blow into the mouse case to remove any dust that has collected there. 140 Appendix A8 Put the ball and the ring back in place. Your mouse should roll smoothly across your mouse pad or desk. If it doesn’t, repeat these instructions carefully. Locking and unlocking the mouse If you have a newer mouse, you can lock it so the ball can’t be removed. A locking mouse has a small hole on the plastic ring. To lock the mouse, follow these steps: 1 Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the plastic ring. 2 Press down on the paper clip while you turn the ring clockwise. Turn the ring a very short distance, until it stops. When the recessed area on the ring is not lined up with the recessed area surrounding the ring, the mouse is locked. The mouse ring is locked when the recessed area on the ring does not line up with the recessed area surrounding the ring. Recessed area on ring Recessed area surrounding ring Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole. (The hole may be located here on your mouse.) Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 141To unlock the mouse, follow these steps: 1 Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the plastic ring. 2 Press down on the paper clip while you turn the ring counterclockwise. Turn the ring a very short distance. When the recessed area on the ring is lined up with the recessed area surrounding the ring, the mouse is unlocked. The mouse ring is unlocked when the recessed area on the ring lines up with the recessed area surrounding the ring. Recessed area on ring Recessed area surrounding ring Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole. (The hole may be located here on your mouse.) 142 Appendix AExpansion cards are printed circuit boards that can be installed in your computer to give it special capabilities, such as enhanced video capabilities, networking and communications, and additional processing power. You can install an expansion card by following the instructions that came with the card, or by following the instructions in this appendix. However, be sure to read this appendix for instructions that may be specific to your computer. If your computer comes with a Single Inline Memory Module (SIMM) installed on the DOS-compatibility card, you can remove it or replace it with a SIMM that has a higher memory capacity. 143 Appendix B Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment Read this appendix for instructions on installing an expansion card in your computer or memory for the PC environment. If your computer does not already have a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatibility card, you can add a SIMM that provides up to 32 MB (megabytes) of RAM for the exclusive use of your PC. The SIMM that your card uses is the same type of SIMM that your computer uses. Follow the instructions in this appendix to install a SIMM. Cards fit into slots on the computer’s logic board—the board that holds the components that make your computer work. There are three types of slots on your computer’s logic board, each labeled on the board: m a communication slot for an internal modem or an Ethernet card m a video-in slot for a card that brings signals into the computer from a videocassette recorder (VCR), laserdisc player, video camera, or similar equipment WARNING To avoid damage to your computer, Apple recommends that only an Apple-certified technician install additional RAM. Consult the service and support information that came with your Apple product for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for service. If you attempt to install additional RAM yourself, any damage you may cause to your equipment will not be covered by the limited warranty on your computer. See an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider for additional information about this or any other warranty question. 144 Appendix Bm an LC-compatible 68030 processor-direct slot (PDS). The DOS-compatibility card is already installed in this slot; you cannot add another card to it. Note: The process you use to install a TV tuner card is different from the one described in this appendix. See the documentation that came with that card for instructions. Installing an expansion card or SIMM involves three steps: m opening the computer m inserting the card or SIMM into a particular slot m closing the computer WARNING To avoid damaging your computer and expansion card, do not attempt to install any expansion card without first checking the documentation for that card. If the documentation specifies that an Apple-certified technician must install the card (usually because the installation requires special training or tools), consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. If you attempt to install the card yourself, any damage you may cause to the computer or card will not be covered by the limited warranty on your computer. If the card is not an Apple-labeled product, check with an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider to see if you can install it yourself. Video-in slot Communication slot Vertical plate LC-compatible PDS slot (with DOS-compatibility card installed) Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 145Opening the computer 1 Shut down your computer by choosing Shut Down from the Special menu. You can also press the Power key on the keyboard. 2 Unplug all the cables except the power cord from your computer. Leaving the power cord plugged in helps protect the computer from damage caused by electrostatic discharge. IMPORTANT To avoid generating static electricity that may damage components, do not walk around the room until you have completed the installation of the expansion card or SIMM and closed the computer. Additionally, move the logic board as little as possible while it is outside the computer case. 3 Place your thumbs on the two tabs at the top of the back panel, and press down. 4 Pulling gently, swing the panel down, and slip it out. Remove the back panel. 146 Appendix B5 If there are security screws on the vertical plate on the back of the computer, remove them with a Phillips screwdriver. 6 Unplug the power cord from your computer. 7 Swing the handle out from its storage position. Then grasp the handle and gently but firmly pull it toward you. The vertical plate and the logic board to which it’s attached slide all the way out of the computer. What you do next depends on the type of equipment you want to install. If there are security screws, remove both screws from the vertical plate. Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 147Installing a communication card 1 If your communication card has ports for connecting equipment, remove the plastic access cover from the vertical plate. 2 Remove the communication card from its static-proof bag. Hold the card by its edges to avoid touching any connectors on the card. 3 Locate the slot on the logic board labeled COMMUNICATION SLOT. Communication slot Push the two plastic tabs apart and pull off the metal retainer so the access cover can come off. Vertical plate Metal retainer 148 Appendix B4 Align the card over the communication slot. 5 Press down on the card until the connector is solidly in place. Don’t force the card. If you meet resistance, pull the card out and try again. To see if the card is properly connected, lift it gently. If it resists and stays in place, it’s connected. Installing or replacing a SIMM for the PC environment Your computer may have come with a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatibility card inside your computer. The SIMM provides memory for the exclusive use of the PC environment. (See the Technical Information booklet to find out whether your computer has such a SIMM installed.) To replace the SIMM with a SIMM of greater capacity, or to install a SIMM if you don’t already have one installed, follow the instructions in this section. Note: The SIMMs used by the DOS-compatibility card are the same 72-pin SIMMs used to expand memory in your Macintosh. They are interchangeable. Communication slot Vertical plate Communication port access hole Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 149Removing a SIMM If your computer has a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatibility card, follow these steps to remove it. 1 Push the metal clips at either end of the SIMM away from the SIMM. Use your fingernails. 2 Rotate the SIMM until it is at a slight angle. Rotate the SIMM away from its vertical position to disengage it from the SIMM slot. To release the SIMM, move the metal clip on each side away from the SIMM. SIMM slot Vertical plate 150 Appendix B3 Gently pull the SIMM from its slot. Hold the SIMM only by its edges. Don’t touch the connectors along the bottom edge. Handle the SIMM by the sides only, so that you don’t touch the connectors along the bottom edge. Pull the SIMM from the SIMM slot. (It comes out at a slight angle.) Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 151Installing a SIMM 1 Remove the SIMM from its static-proof bag. Handle the SIMM by its edges. Avoid touching the connectors. 2 Insert the SIMM into the SIMM slot on the DOS-compatibility card assembly, as shown in the illustration. (Your SIMM may have components on one side or on both sides, as shown.) The SIMM fits into the slot only one way. Make sure the notch on the SIMM is on this side. Insert the SIMM into the SIMM slot. (Insert the SIMM at a slight angle.) Connectors SIMM slot Vertical plate 152 Appendix B3 Rotate the SIMM gently to the back until you feel it snap into place. The plastic pin on the SIMM slot should engage the hole in the SIMM. Be sure that the metal clips snap into place. Rotate the SIMM back until it snaps into place. Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 153Closing the computer 1 Slip the base of the logic board into the guide rails inside the computer case and swing the handle back into its storage position. 2 Press the reset button on the logic board, and then slide the logic board back into the computer. 1 Press the reset button located on the main logic board (the bottom-most layer) with a ball-point pen or similar object. 2 Gently but firmly push the vertical plate back into the computer until the logic board is solidly in place. Make sure the logic board slides into the guides that are on both sides of the computer’s interior. Swing the handle up, into its storage position. 154 Appendix B3 If you removed security screws earlier, reinsert them now. 4 Slip the three hooks at the base of the back panel into the grooves in the computer case. 5 Swing the back panel up and snap it into place. Snap the plastic back panel into place. Slip the three hooks on the back panel into the grooves in the computer case. Insert security screws here. Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 1556 Plug the cables back into the computer. 7 Reconnect the power cord. Your computer is now ready to turn on and use. WARNING Never turn on your computer unless all of its internal and external parts are in place. Operating the computer when it is open or missing parts can be dangerous, and can damage your computer. 156 Appendix B157 Your computer keyboard contains certain special keys that typewriter keyboards don’t have. Many of these keys allow you to give commands to the computer without using the mouse. For example, in many application programs, pressing the x (Command) key at the same time as the Q key is often an alternative method of quitting a program. The following table describes what you can do with the special keys on your keyboard. The number of special keys on your keyboard may vary from this list; it depends on the model of keyboard you have. For information on how keys on Apple keyboards correspond to the keys on a PC keyboard, see “Keyboard” in the section “Working in the PC Environment” in Chapter 5. Special keys on Apple keyboards Arrow keys Use to move the insertion point, as an alternative to using the pointer. In some programs, the arrow keys have other functions. Caps Lock key Use to capitalize a series of letters (numbers and symbols aren’t affected). Clear key Use to delete the current selection (or use the Delete key). In some programs, Clear has other functions. x (Command) key Use in combination with other keys as an alternative to choosing a menu command. continued . num lock clear caps lock Read this appendix to learn how to use the special keys on your keyboard. Appendix C Special Keys on Your KeyboardSpecial keys on Apple keyboards (continued) Control key In combination with other keys, this key provides shortcuts or modifies other actions. Delete key Use to delete selected material, or the character to the left of the insertion point. Enter key In a dialog box, pressing Enter is the same as clicking the outlined button. In some programs, pressing this key confirms information you have provided. Escape key The function of this key depends on the program you’re using. Function keys Some programs allow you to use the 12 function keys to give commands. You can assign commands or action sequences to function keys with special utility programs. Option key Use in combination with other keys to produce special characters or modify actions. Numeric keys Use to produce numbers and mathematical symbols; some programs use these keys as function keys to initiate actions. Power key On some models, press to turn on the computer. Also press to shut down the computer on certain models. Return key Use to move the insertion point to the beginning of the next line. In a dialog box, pressing Return is the same as clicking the outlined button. Shift key Use to produce capital letters (or the upper character on the key). Other special keys The function of these keys depends on the operating system and program you’re using. Tab key Use to move the insertion point to the next stopping place (such as a tab stop or field in a dialog box or program). tab help home end ins del page up page down shift return num lock clear = / * 7 4 0 8 5 2 9 6 3 enter 1 . option alt F1 esc enter delete control 158 Appendix CYou use Macintosh Easy Open software to open a document when you don’t have the application that created it. When you choose Open from an application’s File menu with Macintosh Easy Open installed, you may see more documents than you did before. You’ll also see additional information when you use a list view of the files in a folder (including DOS, Windows, and ProDOS documents). Choosing an application to open a document Without Macintosh Easy Open, you see this message when you try to open a document created by an application missing from your computer. 159 Appendix D Using Macintosh Easy Open Follow the instructions in this chapter if you have problems opening some documents.With Macintosh Easy Open installed, you see a list of programs that can open the document. m Double-click any application in the dialog box to open the document. If you don’t like the results you see when the document opens, quit the application and try again using a different choice from the list. If Macintosh Easy Open can’t find any application to open your document, you see this dialog box: Note: Macintosh Easy Open lists only the programs that will produce the best results. To see applications that may produce less than optimum results, deselect “Show only recommended choices.” 160 Appendix DUsing the Macintosh Easy Open control panel You use the Macintosh Easy Open control panel to set preferences when you’ve installed additional translators available from your software retailer. Such translators give you more choices for opening documents. On/Off If you turn off Macintosh Easy Open, it won’t try to find applications to open your documents. You’ll still see extra information in list views. Always Show Choices When you use additional translators purchased from your software retailer, you can set preferences that determine which application opens a document. If you turn on Always Show Choices, Macintosh Easy Open presents the full list of applications and translators to open your documents, even if you have indicated a preference. Include Choices from Servers Turn off this option if you want Macintosh Easy Open to search for programs only on hard disks directly connected to your Macintosh, ignoring programs on shared disks. (Using applications over the network is slower than using them on a hard disk.) Delete Preferences Click this button to erase the record of choices you’ve made for specific translator preferences (useful only if you’ve previously installed translators purchased from your software retailer). You may want to erase your preferences when you install new translation software in order to have Macintosh Easy Open prompt you for new choices. Using Macintosh Easy Open 161In this chapter The DOS-compatibility card inside your computer supports network drivers that conform to Novell's Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). This appendix contains instructions for installing such network management software. It covers m installing NetWare client software m installing Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software m installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software m installing Windows for Workgroups m installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software m installing Mosaic Installing NetWare client software The instructions below will guide you through installation of client software for Novell NetWare versions 3.12, 4.01, and 4.02. PersonalNetWare is not supported at this time. You must have Windows installed before installing the NetWare client software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. 163 Appendix E Installing Network Management SoftwareBefore you start, be sure you have the appropriate floppy disks for the version of NetWare you wish to install. In addition, you need to know the Ethernet frame type in use on your network segment. You must choose the appropriate frame type in Step 11 below. If you are not certain which one to select, ask your network administrator before you begin the installation. 1 Insert the Novell NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS_1 disk into the disk drive. 2 At the DOS prompt, type the following: A: INSTALL 3 The NetWare Client Install screen appears. Follow the instructions, pressing Return for each selection. 4 Define the directory for NetWare. The default is C:\NWCLIENT. Press Return once to confirm the entry and press it again to execute this step. 5 Edit the CONFIG.SYS file. Change your LASTDRIVE statement so that it reads LASTDRIVE=Z. 6 Add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT Press Y-Return. 7 Decide whether you wish to load the Windows support in the directory where you have loaded Windows. Press Y or N. If yes, press Return once to confirm the Windows subdirectory entry and again to execute this step. 8 Select the driver for the network board. Press Return. 9 A message asks you to insert another disk. Follow the instructions on the screen. 10 In the dialog box, select Power Macintosh 6100 Ethernet Adapter and press Return. 164 Appendix E11 In the dialog box for selecting a frame type, press Return. 12 Use the arrow keys to choose the appropriate frame type for the Novell server you will be using. 13 Press Return. Then press Esc to continue. 14 Press Return to copy the MACODI.COM driver to the NetWare subdirectory. 15 Following the instructions on the screen, insert the NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS_1 disk again. 16 If you wish to add files and a NetWare group to the Windows directory, insert the NetWare Client for MS Windows WSWIN_1 disk and follow the instructions on the screen. When installation is complete, a dialog box appears asking you to reboot (restart) the computer. 17 Eject the disk by pressing x-E. 18 Press Control-Alt-Delete. You now have additional network drives and mappings available. Your first network drive letter is Novell’s default of F, unless this drive is already in use on your machine, or if your network is set up to use a different starting drive. 19 To log into the network, type: F: LOGIN PASSWORD: Installing Network Management Software 165Conserving memory During NetWare client installation you add the line CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT to the beginning of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. This command then loads four programs into DOS memory—LSL.COM, MACODI.COM, IPXODI.COM, and VLM.EXE (in this order). To conserve memory in the lower DOS region, you may wish to edit the STARTNET.BAT file (installed with your NetWare software) to load those four programs with the LOADHIGH (LH) command. See your DOS documentation for details on manually optimizing DOS memory. (Be aware that the Microsoft utility MEMMAKER does not work with the DOS-compatible Macintosh.) Mapping drive letters When you map a network resource as a drive letter, the Macintosh PC Setup control panel recognizes that those drive letters are unavailable for use as shared folders. However, when the network no longer uses the drive letter, PC Setup will still show them as unavailable for sharing folders until you restart the PC. In addition, if a drive letter is being shared before you start up the PC and Novell needs to use that drive letter, then the Novell network drive will take precedence over that shared drive letter. For further information, see your Novell installation and administration manuals, or contact your network adminstrator. 166 Appendix EInstalling Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing the LAN Workplace for DOS software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. In addition, you need to know the following information before you start: m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you’re installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can provide you with an address. If you have either a BOOTP or an RARP server to dynamically assign IP addresses, you don’t need to know the IP address before beginning the installation. Installing Network Management Software 167m If you are on a network with a subnet mask, you need the IP address for that mask, for example: 255.0.0.0 for client Class A IP addresses (those between 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254] 255.255.0.0 for client Class B IP addresses (those between 128.0.0.1 and 191.255.255.254] 255.255.255.0 for client Class C IP addresses (those between 192.0.0.1 and 223.255.255.254] m If you will connect to a TCP/IP host through a router, you need to know the IP address for that router. m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu). m The IP address of your domain name server. Once you have this information, you can proceed with the installation by following Novell’s instructions and answering the on-screen prompts. 168 Appendix EInstalling NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing the Chameleon TCP/IP software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. In addition, you need to know the following information before you start: m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you’re installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can provide you with an address. m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu). m The IP address of your domain name server (for example, 111.222.0.0). m The IP address of your Internet gateway, if any. Once you have this information, you can proceed. Installing Network Management Software 169To install Chameleon from Windows: 1 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu. 2 Type A:\SETUP. Follow the on-screen instructions and prompts. Near the end of the installation, you will be asked to respond to a series of dialog boxes. Respond as follows: ADD INTERFACE Click OK. INTERNET ADDRESS Enter the address provided by your network administrator or service provider. SUBNET MASK Click OK. The software will supply the correct mask. HOST NAME Select a name for your client machine. DOMAIN NAME Enter the name for your domain name server. 3 Choose Domain Servers from the Services menu. 4 Enter the IP address of the domain name server. 5 Choose Gateway from the Services menu. 6 Enter the IP address of the Internet gateway, if any. 7 Save the settings by pressing Alt-F-S. If you will be using a dial-up TCP/IP connection, skip to the next section, “Restarting Windows.” If not, proceed with step 8. 8 Go to the C:\NWCLIENT directory 9 Copy NET.CFG to NET.OLD. (Save a copy of the existing NET.CFG file.) 170 Appendix E10 Modify the NET.CFG file. A sample modified file is shown below. Note the addition of the Protocol statements in the Link Driver section and the addition of the Protocol TCP/IP section. The frame types and IP addresses used in your environment may be different from this example. Link Driver MACODI Protocol IPX E0 ETHERNET_802.2 Frame ETHERNET_802.2 Frame Ethernet_II ; Frame Ethernet_802.3 ; Frame Ethernet_SNAP Protocol RARP 8035 ethernet_ii Protocol ARP 806 ethernet_ii Protocol IP 800 ethernet_ii PORT 300 INT 10 ; node address 12d43 NetWare DOS Requester FIRST NETWORK DRIVE = F Protocol TCPIP ip_router 17.131.1.0 ip_netmask 255.0.0.0 ip_address 17.131.0.14 PATH LANG_CFG C:\NET\LANG PATH SCRIPT C:\NET\SCRIPT PATH PROFILE C:\NET\PROFILE PATH LWP_CFG C:\NET\HSTACC PATH TCP_CFG C:\NET\TCP Link Support Buffers 4 1500 MemPool 4096 Installing Network Management Software 171Restarting Windows 1 Restart the PC. 2 Start Windows. You see the Chameleon group window. Testing the installation If you will be using a direct connection to a domain name server, you can test the installation by using the Ping application program. 1 Double-click the Custom icon in the Chameleon group to open it. 2 Double-click the Ping icon. 3 Click Start. 4 Enter the name for a domain name server. You should get a response back within a few seconds. Using a dial-up service If you will be using a dial-up service such as Portal, you may need to edit the configuration file to reflect any differences between the default setup and your setup. Click the Custom icon in Windows, open the appropriate .CFG file, and edit the file. You can test the installation by using Ping. For example, with Portal: 1 Connect using Alt-C. 2 Ping the name news.ip.portal.com. You should get a response back within a few seconds. 172 Appendix EInstalling Windows for Workgroups To support networking with your DOS-compatibility hardware, you need to install software that supports ODI (Open Data-Link Interface) drivers. Follow these steps: 1 Install Windows for Workgroups 3.1.1, electing to not install the networking software. 2 Follow the instructions in “Installing NetWare Client Software,” earlier in this appendix. 3 Follow the instructions in “Installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP Software,” earlier in this appendix. Installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP Software IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. Installing Network Management Software 173If your PC is using a VGA driver, and your Air Series software is version 3.0, you need to make the following change. (These instructions assume that you have Windows installed in the C:\WINDOWS directory. If Windows is elsewhere, type the actual Windows location.) 1 Make sure the Air Series Setup disk is not read-only. 2 Place the disk in drive A. 3 Type the following at the DOS prompt: A: COPY SETUP.BMP SETUP.OLD COPY C:\WINDOWS\RIVETS.BMP A:SETUP.BMP In addition, you will need to know the following information before you start: m Your Internet e-mail address. m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you're installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can provide you with an address. m If you are on a network with a subnet mask, the IP address for that mask, for example: 255.0.0.0 for client Class A IP addresses (those between 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254), 255.255.0.0 for client Class B IP addresses (those between 128.0.0.1 and 191.255.255.254), and 255.255.255.0 for client Class C IP addresses (those between 192.0.0.1 and 223.255.255.254). m If you will connect through a gateway, the IP address for that device. m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu). Once you have this information, you can proceed. 174 Appendix ETo install Air Series from Windows: 1 In the Program Manager, open the File menu and choose Run. 2 Type A:\SETUP. Follow the instructions you see on the screen. 3 When the installation asks you to select the Ethernet card manufacturer and type, choose anything. Note the name of the adapter you select (for example, 3Com is 3C5x9). The Apple driver is not on the list, so you will need to edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file after completing the installation. 4 When the installation asks if you want to update the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, select YES. 5 Once the installation is complete, exit Windows. 6 Edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows. (You can use any convenient text editor, such as EDIT in the DOS directory.) m Comment out the line CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT m Change the line C:\AIR\BIN\ to C:\AIR\BIN\MACODI m If you are are on a NetWare local area network and using the Novell VLM redirector, add the line C:\NWCLIENT\VLM after the line C:\AIR\BIN\TCPIP m If you are using NETx, add the line C:\NWCLIENT\VLM before the line C:\AIR\BIN\TCPIP Installing Network Management Software 1757 Restart the PC. 8 Log into the network and start Windows. You should now see the Air Series group window. Testing the installation To test the installation: 1 Double-click the Air Telnet icon to open it. An Open Telnet Session dialog box appears. 2 Double-click the name of your domain name server. You see a VT100 window with a login prompt. 176 Appendix EInstalling Mosaic IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing the Mosaic software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. In addition, you must have already installed m A TCP/IP software package. m Win32s, which allows Windows to run 32-bit applications. Win32s is freeware and can be found on a number of on-line services. To install Mosaic: 1 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu. 2 Type C:\WIN32\DISK1\SETUP. 3 Answer all the dialog boxes to complete the installation. 4 After Win32s is installed, a Group window labeled Win32 Applications appears. 5 Press Alt-F-New to create an icon for Mosaic. 6 In the New Program Object dialog box, select Program Item. Installing Network Management Software 1777 Fill in the Program Item Properties dialog box as follows: Description: Mosaic Command Line: C:\MOSAIC\MOSAIC.EXE Working Directory: C:\MOSAIC 8 Click OK. A Mosaic icon appears in the Win32 Applications Group window. 9 Copy the C:\MOSAIC\MOSAIC.INI directory to the C:\WINDOWS\ directory. You are now ready to use Mosaic. 178 Appendix EA active program, identifying 13, 37 ADB. See Apple Desktop Bus Alt key (PC), simulating 46 Apple Adjustable keyboard, equivalent Macintosh and PC keys 46–47 Apple-authorized service provider, contacting can’t eject a floppy disk 138 damaged disks 100, 101 DOS-compatibility hardware/software problems 113 installing additional RAM (SIMMs) or internal drives 34, 144, 145 installing system extensions or programs 105 liquid or other spills on computer equipment 135, 136 radio or television interference vii repair service 78, 83, 87 replacing the clock battery 81 servicing the CD-ROM drive viii servicing the power supply 138 Apple Desktop Bus (ADB), port on computer 6, 7, 30 on keyboard 6, 7, 88 Apple HD SC Setup program 96, 99, 106–107 Apple Keyboard II, equivalent Macintosh and PC keys 46–47 Apple LaserWriter II NT printer driver 56 Apple PlainTalk Microphone, connecting 31 AppleScript program 35 AppleShare Print Server, conflict with PC Print Spooler 57 AppleTalk 53, 56 Application menu 13, 37–38 application programs installing (Mac OS) 36, 105 Macintosh Easy Open and 159–161 MacShare (PC environment) 47–48, 67, 125 memory management and 89, 117 Mixer Control 69 performance issues using shared folders 68 PowerTalk 35, 92, 118 QuickDraw GX 35, 92, 118 Sound Blaster 69 switching (Mac OS) 37–38 troubleshooting 89–91, 115, 117–119 working with several at a time (Mac OS) 37–38 179 Indexarrow keys 157 arrow pointer. See pointer audio compact discs, playing 33 Audio In port on external speakers 32 AUTOEXEC.BAT file (DOS) bypassing at startup 119, 128 changing preset keystrokes for DOSCLIP 49–51 freeing up RAM 117 installing NetWare client software 164, 166 installing Spry Air Series TCP/IP software 175 loading files into high memory (UMB) 66 loading MacShare program 67 modification guidelines 126–127 replacing with an alternate version 126 using CD-ROM drive letter if no CD-ROM drive is connected 45 using expanded memory 117, 127 Auto-start PC checkbox, PC Setup control panel 42 B background printing (PC environment) 56 backing up files (Mac OS) 38 Balloon Help 26 basic Macintosh system, illustration 29 battery in computer’s clock, replacing 81 baud rate, for a COM port mapped to a serial port 63 BIOS. See ROM BIOS; System BIOS blinking question mark on screen 9, 81–82, 94, 102 “bomb” message on screen 77, 79 brightness control on monitor 10, 80, 136 C C: or D: pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 70–71, 72–73, 75 cables keyboard 6, 7 monitor 5 mouse 6, 7 safe handling of 135 Caps Lock key 157 carpal tunnel syndrome 130 CD-ROM discs ejecting while in PC environment 41, 45, 116 playing an audio CD in Windows while running low-level media tools 45 starting the computer from 93–94 using DOS or Windows CD-ROM discs 45 CDROM DOS utility 125 CD-ROM drive illustration 29 installing 34 PC drive letter for 45 chair, adjusting for computer use 131, 132 cleaning computer equipment 139–141 clean installation of system software 105–109 Clear key 157 Clipboard, exchanging information between PC environment and Mac OS 48–53, 115 clock keeps time inaccurately 81 setting time and date 64 close box 13 closing the computer 154–156 color printing (PC environment) 56 COM1/COM2 serial ports 63 x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period keys, to restart the computer (PC environment) 44, 47, 118, 119 180 Indexx-Control-Power key, to restart the computer (Mac OS) 79 x-E, to eject a disk in PC environment 41, 44 x key 157 x-Option-Esc, to quit an application program (Mac OS) 79, 85, 87 x-Option, restarting the computer to rebuild the desktop 80, 84, 90 x-Return, to switch back to Mac OS 40, 41, 116 x-Y, to eject a CD-ROM disc in PC environment 41, 45 communication card access cover 30, 148 installing 143–149, 154–156 communication slot on logic board 144, 145, 148, 149 COM port, mapped to Macintosh serial port 55, 63 compression programs, PC Exchange and 71 computer equipment arranging and adjusting for optimal use 130, 131–132 cleaning 139–141 closing the computer 154–156 components of a basic Macintosh system 29 guidelines for handling 135–138 opening the computer 146–147 safety precautions 134, 156 CONFIG.SYS file (DOS) bypassing at startup 119, 128 changing if RAM size is set to 2MB 123, 126 freeing up RAM 117 increasing high memory (UMB) 66 installing NetWare client software 164 modification guidelines 126–127 replacing with an alternate version 126 sharing Mac OS folders and volumes as PC drives 47–48, 67 turning memory testing off 66 using CD-ROM drive letter if no CD-ROM drive is connected 45 using expanded memory 43, 117, 127 using memory-management utilities 43 configuring the PC environment 61–76. See also PC environment connecting additional equipment 29–33 Apple PlainTalk Microphone 31 external stereo speakers 32–33 game controller or joystick 33 keyboard and mouse 6–7 monitor 3–5 containers. See drive containers Control-Alt-[keypad] period, to restart DOS 118, 119, 126, 128 Control key 158 control panels Extensions Manager 85, 86 Macintosh Easy Open 90, 117, 161 MacIPX 53 MacTCP 54 Memory 65, 89, 116, 117 Mouse (Windows) 46 PC Exchange 70, 91, 116 PC Setup 40–42, 61–76, 92, 114–115, 118, 121–123 Sound 69 Control Panels folder 53, 54, 116 conventional memory 66, 117. See also memory cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs) 130 customer service. See Apple-authorized service provider; customer support hotline customer support hotline 15 custom installation of system software (Mac OS) 109–111 Custom Install dialog box 110 Index 181D damaged disks, repairing 82, 84, 97–101 dampness, protecting the computer from 134, 135 data transfer rate for COM port mapped to Macintosh serial port 55, 63 date and time, setting (PC environment) 64 DB-9/DB-25 connectors (PC environment), signals present on 59 Delete key 158 desk accessories, working with several at a time 37 desktop, rebuilding 80, 84 dialog boxes Custom Install 110 dialog box with a bomb appears on screen 86 Easy Install 104, 107, 108 Disk First Aid program 100–101, 103, 106 disks. See CD-ROM discs; floppy disks; hard disks Disk Tools disk (or CD-ROM disc containing system software) initializing hard disks 94–96 installing system software 103 starting up from, for problem diagnosis 82–84, 87 testing/repairing hard disks 98–100 Display Drivers Disk 1 disk 128 Display pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 64 documents. See files DOS “Clipboard” (DOSCLIP) 48–53, 125 DOS commands that do not work on shared volumes 67 DOS-compatibility card. See also PC environment installing a SIMM 143–147, 149–156 LC-compatible PDS slot 145 network management software support 53–54, 163–178 SIMM installed for exclusive use of PC environment 65, 76, 116, 122, 149 system software doesn’t recognize 76 DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for Mac OS Environment) 117, 120 DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for PC Environment) 125 DOS-compatibility software. See also AUTOEXEC.BAT file; CONFIG.SYS file; PC environment; PC Setup control panel; Windows networking protocol support 53–54, 163–178 reinstalling 119–128 troubleshooting 114, 115 DOS disks using in Mac OS 85 using in PC environment 44 drive containers accessing PC files in 71 choosing a location for 121–122 choosing or changing size of 72–74, 121–122 creating 70–71, 74, 121–122 naming 122 partitioning 70–71, 116, 122 throwing away 75 transferring files from an old to a new container 74–75 troubleshooting 114–115 DriveSpace DOS utility, compatibility issues with 127 182 IndexE Easy Install dialog box 104, 107, 108 ejecting disks can’t eject a disk 138 while in Mac OS 137 while in PC environment 41, 44, 45, 116, 137 electromagnetic emissions, health effects of exposure to 133 EMM386 memory management DOS utility 43, 117 Empty Trash command (Special menu) 13, 75 Enter key 158 Epson emulation, PC environment print output and 55–56, 57 error messages 77–79. See also messages Escape key 158 expansion card installing 3, 143–147, 149–156 Extensions folder PC Clipboard extension 52, 53 PC Print Spooler 57, 118 removing/replacing system extensions 85, 86 Extensions Manager control panel 85, 86 eye fatigue associated with computer use 129, 131, 133 F fading the screen before switching environments 42 fatigue from computer use, avoiding 131, 133 FDISK DOS utility 116 files accessing PC files in a drive container 71 backing up (Mac OS) 38 opening with Macintosh Easy Open 159–161 transferring between Mac OS and PC environment 67–68 transferring from an old to a new container 75 troubleshooting 68, 90–91 Finder, making active 18 floating-point unit (FPU) 89 floppy disk drive illustration 29 installing 34 floppy disks backing up files on (Mac OS) 38 Disk First Aid program and 100–101 DOS 720K format, problems with 44 ejecting 41, 44, 116, 137–138 formatting for use in both Mac OS and DOS 85 guidelines for handling 137 inserting 36 locked/unlocked (PC environment) 44 repairing 84, 100–101 restarting the PC environment from 44 starting the computer from 82, 94 unreadable 84–85 using a DOS disk in Mac OS 85, 116 using a Mac OS disk in PC environment 44 folders AppleScript 35 Control Panels 53, 54, 116 Extensions 52, 53, 57, 85, 86, 118 performance issues with shared folders 68 Previous System Folder 109 sharing with PC environment 47–48, 67–68, 125 Spooler Rejected 57 System Folder 36, 102, 109 Function keys 158 furniture for computer use, arranging 130, 131–132 Index 183G game applications, SIMMs and 54 game controller, connecting 33, 81 graphics DOSCLIP and 52 printing in PC environment 56 grounding plug 2, 135 Guide menu. See also Macintosh Guide defined 13, 15, 17 Macintosh Guide command 18 running the Macintosh Tutorial from 12–13 Shortcuts command 27–28 Show/Hide Balloons commands 26, 62 H hard disks backing up files on 38 checking for damage 98, 103, 106 Disk First Aid program and 100–101, 103, 106 icon 9, 13, 83 initializing/reinitializing 93–97 installing 34 repairing a damaged disk 82, 84, 97–101 testing an external SCSI hard disk 99–100 using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup drive 70 headphone jack, illustration 29 health-related information about computer use 129–133 help. See Apple-authorized service provider; Balloon Help; customer support hotline; Macintosh Guide Hewlett-Packard page control language (PCL) 55, 58 Hide Balloons command (Guide menu) 26 Hide Others command (Application menu) 38 hiding/showing windows on the desktop 38 high memory (UMB), increasing (PC environment) 66 HIMEM.SYS driver (DOS) 119 hot key, to switch between Mac OS and PC environment 41 hotline. See customer support hotline “Huh?” button in Macintosh Guide window 25 I icons ADB 6, 7 Apple HD SC Setup 96, 99, 106 blinking question mark 9, 81, 102 defined 13 Disk First Aid 100, 103, 106 disk with an “X” 82 hard disk 9, 13, 83 “sad Macintosh” 83 Trash 13 Index button in Macintosh Guide window 19, 21–22 initializing an external SCSI hard disk 96–97 an internal hard disk 93–95 Install Disk 1 disk 94, 104, 107, 109 Installer program 104–105, 107–111 installing. See also reinstalling application programs (Mac OS) 36 communication cards 143–149, 154–156 internal drives 34 network management software 163–178 PC software utilities 125 Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs) 143–147, 149–156 system software 102–111 Windows for Workgroups 173 184 Indexinterference with radio and television reception vii, 136 internal drives, installing 34 Internal HD Format program 95, 98 IPX networking protocol, compatibility issues 53–54, 167, 169, 173, 177 J joystick, connecting 33 joystick port 30, 33, 81 K keyboard. See also keys connecting 6–7 correct posture for using 131–132 damaged or connection problems with 88 guidelines for handling 136 support for various Apple keyboards (in PC environment) 46–47 keyboard cable 6, 7 keyboard shortcuts 27–28 keyboard tray 132 keys. See also keyboard equivalent Macintosh and PC keys 46–47 special keys on Apple keyboards 157–158 key scan code table for DOSCLIP keystrokes 49–51 L LaserJet III printer driver (PC environment) 56 LC-compatible PDS slot on logic board 145 liquid spills on computer equipment 134, 135, 136 locking the mouse 141 logic board 144–145, 147, 154 Look For button in Macintosh Guide window 19, 23–24 LPT1.DOS/LPT1 port for printing in PC environment 55, 56 M Macintosh Easy Open program control panel 90, 117, 161 translators 52, 161 using 159–161 Macintosh environment (Mac OS) backing up files 38 Clipboard tips 52–53 initializing a hard disk 93–97 installing and working with application programs 36–38 installing system software 102–111, 119–123 Mac OS software installed in System Folder 120 network protocol compatibility with PC environment 53–54 PC Print Spooler settings 56, 57–58, 118 problems and solutions 77–92 repairing a damaged disk 97–101 switching to and from 40–42, 117, 118 Macintosh Guide. See also Guide menu closing 24, 25 “Huh?” button 25 moving or shrinking the window 25 opening the Macintosh Guide window 18 returning to the Macintosh Guide window 20, 22, 25 tips for using 25 using the Index button 19, 21–22 using the Look For button 19, 23–24 using the Topics button 19–20 Index 185Macintosh peripherals, using in PC environment 55–58 Macintosh Shortcuts window 27–28 Macintosh system, illustration 29 Macintosh Tutorial 12–13 MacIPX, Control Panels folder 53 MACODI DOS utility 125 Mac OS. See Macintosh environment MacShare program 47–48, 67, 125 MacTCP, compatibility issues with DOS TCP/IP software 54, 167, 169, 173, 177 MEMMAKER DOS utility, compatibility issues with 127, 166 memory. See also Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs) assigning to PC environment 65, 122–123 changing the RAM setting, PC control panel 62 conserving when using NetWare client software 166 conventional memory increasing for DOS or Windows programs 66 versus extended memory 117 expanding 34, 143–147, 149–156 not enough memory 76, 89, 92, 116–118 shared memory pre-installed SIMMs and 65, 76, 116, 122–123 setting 65, 122–123 troubleshooting 92, 114 virtual memory 89 Memory control panel 65, 89, 116, 117 memory-management DOS utilities 43, 117 menu bar 13 messages, on PC Setup control panel status line 76. See also error messages microphone, connecting 31 Microsoft MS-DOS Setup disk (or CD-ROM disc containing DOS/Windows software) 123 MIDI application programs, SIMMs and 54 Mini DIN-8 connector (Mac OS), signals present on 59 Mixer Control program 69 MODE command (DOS) 63 modem port 30 moisture, protecting the computer from 134, 135 monitor. See also screen brightness control 10, 80, 136 cleaning the screen 133, 139 connecting 3–5 guidelines for handling 136 positioning for optimal use 3, 132 setting for PC environment 64 synchronization to DOS video signal 114, 119 troubleshooting 80–81, 114, 118, 119 turning on 8 monitor cable, connecting 5 monitor port 5, 30 monitor power cord, connecting 3, 4 Mosaic network software, installing 177–178 mouse. See also pointing device cleaning 139–141 connecting 6–7 connection problems 87 how to use 12 locking/unlocking 141–142 mouse button 12 mouse cable 6, 7 Mouse control panel (Windows) 46 mouse drivers, DOS and Windows 46, 124 mouse shortcuts 27–28 MPEG players (DOS-based), video output requirements 54 MS-DOS and Windows, reinstalling 123–124 multimedia application programs, SIMMs and 54 musculoskeletal discomfort associated with computer use 129, 130 186 IndexN NetManage Chameleon TCP/IP software, installing 169–172 NetWare client software, installing 163–166 network management software and protocols 53–54, 163–178 networks, backing up files on (Mac OS) 38 Novell LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software, installing 167–168 Novell NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS 1 disk 164, 165 Novell NetWare Client for MS Windows WSWIN 1 disk 165 Novell network, PCL printing of text and graphics (PC environment) 56 Novell Open Data-Link Interface (ODI) DOS compatibility with 53, 163 Windows for Workgroups and 173 numeric keys 158 O ODI. See Novell Open Data-Link Interface online help. See Balloon Help; Macintosh Guide opening the computer 146–147 Option key 46, 158 P page size, setting 58, 118 partitions for drive containers 70–71, 116, 122 PC Clipboard Extension (Mac OS) 52, 53 PC environment. See also AUTOEXEC.BAT file; CONFIG.SYS file; PC Setup control panel; Windows answers to common problems 113–119 configuring drives C and D 70–71 configuring the PC serial ports 63 conventional memory 66, 117 creating and using PC drive containers 70–75, 114–115, 121–122 DOSCLIP 48–53, 125 DOS commands that do not work on shared volumes 67 ejecting disks 41, 44, 45, 116, 137–138 exchanging Clipboard information with Mac OS 48–53, 125 expanding memory 34, 143–147, 149–156 installing PC utilities 125 memory-management utilities 43, 117 network management software and protocols 53–54, 163–178 not enough memory 76, 116–118 PC Print Spooler settings and 56, 57–58, 118 PC software installed during installation 124 playing sounds 69 reinstalling DOS-compatibility software 119–128 RS-232 signal support 59 setting the monitor for 64 setting the time and date 64 setting up 42–43 shared memory 65, 122–123 SIMMs and 65, 76, 116, 122–123 starting automatically 42 switching back and forth from Mac OS 40–42, 117, 118 using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup drive 70 using CD-ROM discs 45 using floppy disks 44 using Macintosh-compatible printers and peripherals 55–57 using Mac OS folders and volumes as PC drives 47–48, 67–68, 125 using PC peripherals 59 Index 187PC Exchange control panel 70, 91, 116 PCL (Hewlett-Packard page control language) 55, 58 PC peripherals, using 59 PC Print Spooler, setting preferences in 56, 57–58, 118 PC Setup control panel changing RAM setting 62 choosing settings 61–62 configuring the PC serial ports 63 creating and using drive containers 70–71, 72–74, 114–115, 121–122 mapping drive letters when using NetWare client software 166 memory management, troubleshooting 117, 118 setting shared memory 65, 92, 123 setting the monitor for PC environment 64 sharing folders or volumes 67 status line messages 76 switching between Mac OS and PC environment 40–42 turning on PC sounds 69 plugging in the computer 1–2 the monitor 4 pointer doesn’t move when you move the mouse 87 “freezes” on the screen 85–86 learning how to move 12 pointing device. See also mouse simulating a PC pointing device 46 ports ADB 6, 7, 30, 88 Audio In, on external speakers 32 COM 55, 63 illustration 30 joining connectors to, safety instructions 135 joystick 30, 33, 81 LPT1.DOS/LPT1 55, 56 monitor 5, 30 sound input/output 30, 31, 32 PostScript-compatible print output (PC environment) 55, 56, 57 PostScript printer drivers (PC environment) 56, 57 power button. See standby power button power cord computer 2 monitor 3–4 Power key 8, 14, 158 power-on light 10, 29 power socket 30 power supply, servicing 138 PowerTalk program 35, 92, 118 precautions. See safety instructions Previous System Folder 109 printer port 30 printing page size and 58, 118 using Macintosh-compatible printers in PC environment 55–58 programs. See application programs Q QEMM memory management DOS utility 43 QuickDraw GX program 35, 92, 118 QuickDraw printers, Epson emulation and 55–56 R radio reception, interference with vii, 136 RAM. See memory; Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs) RAM disk 65, 116, 117. See also memory 188 IndexRAM pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 65, 122, 123 rebuilding the desktop 80, 84 reinitializing the internal hard disk 95 reinstalling. See also installing DOS-compatibility software 119–128 MS-DOS and Windows 123–124 Sound Blaster software 128 system software 102–111 video drivers 128 remote control sensor, illustration 29 repairing disks 82, 84, 97–101 repetitive stress injuries (RSIs) 130 resource forks 68 Restart command (Special menu) 79 restarting the computer Mac OS 79 PC environment 44, 47, 119 Return key 158 ROM BIOS, DOS memory management and 43, 126 RS-232 signal support in PC environment 59 S safety instructions for CD-ROM drive viii general precautions 134 turning on the computer 156 screen. See also monitor appears dark 10, 80–81 cleaning 133, 139 fading before switching environments 42 minimizing glare and reflections 132, 133 screen saver programs 80, 136 scroll arrows, defined 13 SCSI equipment, computer doesn’t recognize 81 SCSI external hard disk initializing 96–97 preparing for reinstallation of system software 106–107 testing 99–100 using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup drive 70 SCSI ID numbers 96, 98, 99 security lock port 30 serial ports 55, 56, 63 shared drives, using Mac OS folders or volumes as PC drives 47–48, 67–68 shared folders/volumes MacShare and 47–48, 67, 125 strange text characters in shared documents 68 using 67–68 shared memory. See also memory pre-installed SIMMs and 65, 76, 116, 122–123 setting 65, 122–123 troubleshooting 92, 114 shared volumes, DOS commands that do not work on 67 Sharing pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 67 Shift key 158 Shortcuts command, Guide menu 27–28 Show All command (Application menu) 38 Show Balloons command (Guide menu) 26, 62 showing/hiding windows on the desktop 38 Shut Down command (Special menu) 14 Shut Down PC button, PC Setup control panel 41 SIMMs. See Single Inline Memory Modules SIMM slot 150–153 Index 189Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs). See also memory installed for exclusive use of the PC environment 65, 76, 116, 122, 149 installing 34, 143–147, 149–156 performance improvements and 54, 122–123 sharing memory and 65, 122 size box, defined 13 Sound Blaster (PC environment) playing sounds 69 reinstalling software 128 Sound Blaster Software Installation disk 128 Sound control panel 69 sound input/output ports 30, 31, 32 Sound pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 69 sounds, turning on (PC environment) 69 speakers, connecting 32–33 Special menu Empty Trash command 13, 75 Restart command 79 Shut Down command 14 spills on computer equipment, safety instructions 134, 135, 136 Spooler Rejected folder 57 Spry Air Series TCP/IP software, installing 173–176 standby power button 2, 14, 30, 79 starting the computer. See also turning on the computer from a CD-ROM disc 93–94 from a floppy disk 82, 94 troubleshooting 80–84, 114, 119 Start/Restart PC button, PC Setup control panel 41 startup disk 84, 87, 102 static electricity, avoiding generating 146 status line on PC Setup control panel 76 stereo miniplug 32 stereo speakers, connecting 32–33 switching application programs (Mac OS) 37–38 switching environments 40–42, 114, 115–116, 118 Switch to PC button, PC Setup control panel 41 System BIOS, preventing corruption of 66 system extensions installing 105 Mac OS is unable to load 118 removing/replacing 85, 86 turning off 84, 85, 86 System Folder 36, 102, 109 system software (Mac OS) blinking question mark and 9, 81–82, 102 installing or reinstalling 102–111 T Tab key 158 TCP networking protocol, compatibility issues 53–54, 167, 169, 173, 177 television reception, interference with vii, 136 temperature ranges, for storing floppy disks 137 time and date, setting in PC environment 64 title bar, defined 13 Topics button in Macintosh Guide window 19–20 transferring files from an old to a new drive container 74–75 between Mac OS and PC environment 67–68 translating documents into different file formats 68 190 IndexTrash emptying 13, 75 icon 13 troubleshooting in Mac OS. See also troubleshooting in PC environment answers to common problems 80–92 application program problems 36, 89–91 blinking question mark on screen 9, 81–82, 94, 102 “bomb” message on screen 77, 79 clock keeps time inaccurately 81 computer doesn’t recognize SCSI equipment 81 computer “hangs” or freezes during startup 83 dialog box with a bomb appears on screen 86 ejecting a floppy disk 138 error messages 77–79 icons do not appear correctly on screen 84 initializing/reinitializing a hard disk 93–97 installing/reinstalling system software 102–111 keyboard problems 88 messages on PC Setup control panel status line 76 monitor problems 10, 80–81 mouse connection problems 87 not enough memory 89, 92 opening files 90–91 performance issues with shared folders 68 pointer doesn’t move 85–86, 87 rebuilding the desktop 80, 84 repairing a damaged disk 97–101 restarting the computer 79 “sad Macintosh” icon appears 83 screen is dark 10, 80–81 starting the computer 10, 80–84 strange text characters when using shared folders 68 system software installation problems 82 turning the computer on 10 typing produces nothing on screen 88 unreadable floppy disks 84–85 using a DOS document in Mac OS 91 troubleshooting in PC environment. See also troubleshooting in Mac OS answers to common problems 114–119 application program problems 115, 117–119 bypassing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT at startup 119 computer “hangs” or freezes during startup 114, 119 Disklight of Norton Utilities, shared memory issues 114 DOS-compatibility software problems 114, 115 ejecting a floppy disk or CD-ROM disc 116, 138 Macintosh Easy Open software not installed or turned off 117 memory-management issues 114, 116–118 monitor synchronization problems 114 not enough memory 116–117, 117–118 PC crashes when Harvard Graphics is quit 66 PC environment is frozen 114, 118 PC Setup memory issues 117 performance issues with shared folders 68 printing, top and bottom of page get clipped 118 running out of UMB (high memory) space 66 Index 191shared memory problems 114 Sound Blaster support 69 strange text characters when using shared folders 68 switching environments 114, 115–116, 117, 118 using a PC-format disk in Mac OS 116 turning off the computer 14, 134, 135 PC environment 41 sounds 69 system extensions 84, 85, 86 turning on. See also starting the computer the computer 8, 10, 156 PC environment 41, 42 sounds 69 tutorial, starting the Macintosh Tutorial 12–13 TV tuner card, installing 145 TV tuner card port 30 typing produces nothing on screen, troubleshooting 88 U UMB (high memory), increasing (PC environment) 66 unlocking the mouse 142 V ventilation for computer equipment 135, 136 vertical plate 145, 147–150, 152, 154 VGA modes displayed on Macintosh monitors 54 video drivers 64, 128 video input card port 30 video-in slot on logic board 144, 145 Video Monitor program 35 video signal (DOS), monitor specifications and 114, 119 virtual memory 89. See also memory volume buttons on computer 29, 33 volumes (Mac OS), sharing with PC environment 47–48, 67–68 W, X, Y, Z warranty on computer, limitations of 34, 113, 144, 145 WINCLIP Windows utility 125 Windows. See also PC environment Mosaic network software and 177–178 Novell LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software and 167 performance based on memory 123 printing on Macintosh-compatible printers 55–57 reinstalling 123–124 Spry Air Series TCP/IP software and 173, 174–176 Windows Clipboard, exchanging information with Mac OS 48, 52–53 Windows control panel, selecting printer drivers 56 Windows for Workgroups, installing 173 windows on the desktop 13, 38 Windows PostScript driver 56 Windows Series Installation Instruction Diskette 1 of 6 124 work space, arranging 130, 131–132 192 Index Apple QuickTake 100 User’s Guide for MacintoshK Apple Computer, Inc. © 1994 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Apple Computer, Inc. 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014-6299 (408) 996-1010 © Image Software 1992, 1993, 1994. Portions Copyright Eastman Kodak Company. Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple SuperDrive, GeoPort, QuickTake, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Classic is a registered trademark licensed to Apple Computer, Inc. ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing, Inc. Helvetica and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Company. QMS is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc. QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc. SuperPaint is a registered trademark of Aldus Corporation. Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.iii Communications regulation information vi 1 Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 1 Do you have what you need? 2 System requirements 2 Your camera at a glance 3 Charging the batteries 4 Installing the batteries 5 Installing the QuickTake software 6 Custom installation 7 What if you upgrade your Macintosh system software? 8 What next? 8 2 Using the Camera to Take Pictures 9 Turning on the camera 10 Taking pictures 11 Focal range and flash range 11 ContentsUsing the controls 12 Flash settings 12 Resolution settings 13 Pictures taken and pictures available 14 Battery level 14 Timer 15 Waking the camera 16 3 Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 17 Connecting the camera to your Macintosh 18 Looking at the pictures in the camera 20 Transferring pictures to your Macintosh 21 Opening pictures on the Macintosh 22 Opening a picture in the image window 22 Opening a slide table 23 Working with your pictures 24 Editing slide names 25 Getting information about a slide 25 Opening a slide to a full-size image 26 Zoom views in the image window 27 Changing the printed size of a picture 27 Cropping a picture 28 Changing the bit depth of a picture 29 Copying a picture to another application 29 Rotating a picture 30 Saving a picture 31 Printing your pictures 33 Printing a slide table 33 Printing a single image 34 iv ContentsNaming the camera 35 Setting the clock in the camera 36 Taking pictures from the Macintosh 37 Erasing pictures from the camera 38 Using the camera with a power adapter 39 Traveling with the camera 40 Using the battery booster pack with the camera 40 4 QuickTake Software Menu Commands 41 The File menu 42 The Edit menu 46 The Image menu 47 The Camera menu 49 The Windows menu 50 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 51 Caring for your camera 51 Solving problems 52 Appendix A Specifications 55 Appendix B Battery Information 57 Appendix C Using the Camera with a Windows-Based PC 61 Appendix D Using QuickTake Setup 63 Index 65 Contents vCommunications regulation information Radio and television interference The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet helpful: Interference Handbook (stock number 004-000-00493-1). This booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission, is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. vi Communications Regulation InformationFCC statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. DOC statement DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications. Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des Communications. VCCI statement Communications Regulation Information viiThe QuickTake 100 is an easy-to-use camera that produces high-quality pictures you can quickly transfer to your Macintosh computer. With the QuickTake 100 you can capture images, and with your Macintosh you can manipulate and modify those images to suit your purposes. The QuickTake 100 is a valuable new tool for graphic artists, publishing professionals, and anyone who wants to use images to communicate. IMPORTANT Save this manual. It contains important safety and operating instructions. In this chapter m An inventory of items you need m System requirements m Features of the camera m How to charge NiCad batteries m Installing batteries in the camera m Installing the QuickTake software 1 1 Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 CameraDo you have what you need? Before you begin, unpack the QuickTake 100 package. Be sure you have the items shown in this illustration: System requirements To use the QuickTake 100 camera with your computer, you need m a Macintosh with a 68020 or higher central processing unit (any Macintosh except a Macintosh Plus, SE, Classic, Portable, or PowerBook 100) m system software version 7.0.1• (with Tune-Up 1.1.1) or a later version m 4 MB of RAM with 8 MB of virtual memory or 8MB of RAM m an Apple SuperDrive (or any floppy drive that can read high-density disks) m a hard drive with at least 10 MB available QuickTake 100 camera Battery charger Rechargeable NiCad batteries Serial cable QuickTake software Neck strap 2 Chapter 1Your camera at a glance This illustration shows the front, rear, and bottom of the camera. Shutter release Serial port and power adapter port (behind the cover) Sliding lens cover (opened) Camera lens Viewfinder lens (with light sensors above and below, for the light meter) Built-in flash Viewfinder Battery compartment Control buttons Control panel display Timer light Adjustable neck strap Tripod mounting hole Neck strap attachment points Front view Rear view Bottom view Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 3Charging the batteries The three NiCad batteries you received with the QuickTake 100 must be charged before you can use them. Use the battery charger that came with the camera. 1 Insert the batteries into the charger. 2 Plug the battery charger into an electrical outlet. It takes five hours to fully charge three NiCad batteries. (Be sure to fully charge the batteries the first time you use them.) If you want to take pictures right away, you can use three AA non-rechargeable batteries (not included) in the camera. For information about battery care, see Appendix B. 3 Unplug the battery charger, remove the batteries, and install them in the camera. See instructions for installing batteries on the next page. WARNING To reduce the risk of injury, charge only rechargeable nickelcadmium batteries in the battery charger that came with the QuickTake 100 camera. Charging other types of batteries may cause them to leak or explode, resulting in personal injury and property damage. Make sure you position the + and – ends of each battery as indicated on the battery charger. When batteries are charging, this red light glows. 4 Chapter 1Installing the batteries Use the three NiCad batteries that came with your camera. If the NiCad batteries are being charged, you can substitute three AA non-rechargeable batteries in the camera. 1 Flip open the door to the battery compartment. 2 Insert the batteries into the camera. 3 Close the battery compartment door. See also: Appendix B, “Battery Information.” Position the – and + ends of each battery as indicated on the door. Arrange the ribbon under the batteries so you can use it to pull them out when you need to replace them. WARNING Do not mix different types of batteries in the camera. Use only three NiCad batteries or three AA non-rechargeable batteries. Mixing batteries may cause a fire or a small explosion. Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 5Installing the QuickTake software Before you can transfer images from your camera to your Macintosh computer, you need to install the necessary software on your Macintosh. You’ll need the QuickTake disks that came with your camera. The disks contain m the Installer, a program that installs everything you need m QuickTake 1.0, a program that transfers pictures from the camera to your Macintosh m other files needed by the QuickTake 100 camera IMPORTANT If you have system software version 7.0.1• on your Macintosh, you must turn on AppleTalk before you install QuickTake software. Open the Chooser and make sure that AppleTalk is active. 1 Insert the appropriate installation disk into a floppy disk drive. The choice depends on whether you have a Power Macintosh or not. m If you have a Power Macintosh, insert QuickTake for Power Macintosh. m Otherwise, insert QuickTake Install Disk 1. If necessary, open the disk icon. 2 Double-click the Installer icon to open it. 3 In the Welcome dialog box that appears, click OK. 6 Chapter 1 Use the Installer to install the QuickTake software. For important late-breaking information, open the Read Me.4 In the Installer dialog box, click Install. A status box keeps you informed of progress during installation. 5 When you see a message on your screen, follow directions and insert the next disk. Near the end of the process, you’ll be asked to insert the first disk again. 6 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart. The Installer restarts your Macintosh. You’ll find a new folder containing the QuickTake software on your hard disk. Custom installation If you click the Customize button in the Installer, you’ll see a list of specific items you can install individually. To ensure that all the necessary software is installed, use Easy Install instead. Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 7 Make sure you install the QuickTake software on the disk you use as your startup disk. When you’re ready to begin, click Install. To switch to a different disk, click Switch Disk.What if you upgrade your Macintosh system software? If you decide to replace or upgrade your Macintosh system software after you’ve installed the QuickTake software, you may not be able to open the QuickTake application program. To fix this problem, reinstall the QuickTake software. As an alternative, you can use the custom Installer: 1 Insert the appropriate installation disk into a floppy disk drive. The choice depends on whether you have a Power Macintosh or not. m If you have a Power Macintosh, insert QuickTake for Power Macintosh. m Otherwise, insert QuickTake Install Disk 1. If necessary, open the disk icon. 2 Double-click the Installer icon to open it. 3 In the Welcome dialog box that appears, click OK. 4 In the Installer dialog box, click Customize. 5 Choose Shared Library Manager from the list. 6 Click Install. 7 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart. You have reinstalled the Shared Library Manager, and you can open the QuickTake program again. What next? To begin taking pictures, go on to Chapter 2. 8 Chapter 1 Use the Installer to install the QuickTake software.Because the QuickTake 100 camera is small and light and runs on batteries, you can take pictures with it anywhere. In this chapter m Turning on the camera m Taking pictures m Using the controls m Waking the camera from sleep 9 2 Using the Camera to Take PicturesTurning on the camera To turn the camera on, slide open the lens cover. Lens cover Be careful not to touch the camera lens. 10 Chapter 2Taking pictures Look straight through the viewfinder and take time to frame the subject you want to photograph. Hold the camera steady, and press the shutter release. Because the camera delays briefly before taking the picture, be sure to hold it still until you hear the shutter click. When the camera is ready for the next picture (in a few seconds), a green light glows in the viewfinder. The pictures can remain in the camera’s memory up to one year (or until you erase them). Focal range and flash range Try to keep a distance of at least four feet between you and the object you want to photograph. The camera can focus on objects as close as four feet and as far away as infinity. Objects closer than four feet may be out of focus, but objects in the range between four feet and infinity will be properly focused. The flash can illuminate objects as close as four feet and as far away as nine feet. 4' 9' (Distance) Infinity Focus Flash Press the shutter release. Viewfinder You can hold the camera horizontally or vertically. Using the Camera to Take Pictures 11Using the controls When the camera is on, the control panel display appears. Flash settings There are three possible settings for the flash. Each time you press the flash button, you cycle from one setting to the next. A To let the camera’s light sensor determine when to flash, press the button until you see this icon. For a flash with every picture, press the button until you see this icon. To turn off the flash, press the button until you see this icon. A stands for automatic. When you turn on or wake the camera, this setting always appears. When your subject is in shadow, and the background is brighter, use this setting. A Flash button Erase All button (explained in Chapter 3) Control panel display Resolution button Timer button 12 Chapter 2Resolution settings There are two possible settings for resolution. Each time you press the resolution button, you toggle from one setting to the other. m Standard resolution means 320 x 240 pixels. You can take up to 32 standard-resolution pictures. m High resolution means 640 x 480 pixels. Each picture contains more detail. You can take a maximum of eight high-resolution pictures; they take more space in memory than standard-resolution pictures. m You can mix high- and standard-resolution pictures on the camera, all in 24-bit color. A A For standard resolution, press the button until you see this icon. For high resolution, press the button until you see this icon. Using the Camera to Take Pictures 13Pictures taken and pictures available The number in the center of the control panel shows how many pictures you’ve taken. The smaller number next to the resolution icon shows how many pictures you can take before the camera is full. Battery level Just below the center of the panel is a battery icon. It tells you how much power is left in your batteries. If the batteries run out, the pictures in your camera are safe, but you need fresh batteries to take any more pictures. For information about battery care, see Appendix B. A A A Batteries fully charged (or power adapter connected) Batteries running low Batteries empty Recharge them or replace them with fresh batteries. A A Pictures taken Pictures you can take at the selected resolution This number changes when you change the resolution setting. The camera automatically switches to standard resolution when there isn’t enough memory for a high-resolution picture. 14 Chapter 2Timer The timer gives you 10 seconds before the camera takes a picture. 1 Press the timer button. 2 Press the shutter and prepare for the picture. On the top front of the camera, a red indicator light glows steadily for eight seconds, then it blinks rapidly for another two seconds. When time is up, the camera takes the picture. A When the timer is on, the timer icon blinks. Using the Camera to Take Pictures 15Waking the camera To conserve battery power, the camera goes to sleep after 60 seconds of inactivity (or after 5 minutes of inactivity when connected to your Macintosh). To wake it, you can press and release the shutter, or close and reopen the sliding lens cover. If the camera is connected to your Macintosh, you must close and reopen the lens cover to wake it. Pressing the shutter won’t work. To wake the camera, press and release the shutter. Or close and reopen the lens cover. 16 Chapter 2When you finish taking pictures (or when the camera is full), you can connect it to your Macintosh computer and transfer the pictures to the computer. In this chapter m Connecting the camera to your Macintosh m Looking at the pictures on the camera m Transferring pictures to your Macintosh m Working with pictures m Saving a picture m Printing your pictures m Naming the camera m Setting the clock in the camera m Taking pictures from your Macintosh m Erasing pictures from the camera m Using the camera with an AC power adapter 17 3 Using the Camera With Your MacintoshConnecting the camera to your Macintosh Use the serial cable that came with your camera. 1 Turn off the camera (shut the lens cover). 2 Plug one end of the serial cable into the modem or printer port on your Macintosh. If both ports are in use, free the one that’s most convenient and connect the camera. IMPORTANT It is not necessary to turn off your Macintosh before you connect and disconnect the serial cable. (As long as a serial port is free, it’s not active.) However, if you want to connect or disconnect other devices (for example, SCSI devices), you should check the appropriate manuals first. In many cases you must turn off the Macintosh before you connect or disconnect a cable. These icons identify the printer and modem ports on your Macintosh. Connect the camera to either port. Some Macintosh computers have a combined serial port with two icons. 18 Chapter 33 Plug the other end of the cable into the serial port on the camera. 4 Turn on the camera (open the lens cover). When the camera is connected and turned on, an animated rectangle appears on the control panel display. The edge of the rectangle moves. Press the cover in and slide it open. Serial port Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 19Looking at the pictures in the camera While the pictures are in the camera, you can see what they look like and work with them. (To move them to your Macintosh before you work with them, see the next section, “Transferring Pictures to Your Macintosh.”) 1 Connect the camera to your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter. 2 If necessary, turn on the camera by sliding open the lens cover. 3 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it. 4 Choose View Slides in Camera from the Camera menu. The pictures appear in a slide table on your Macintosh screen. For information about what you can do with the pictures, see “Working With Your Pictures,” later in this chapter. 20 Chapter 3Transferring pictures to your Macintosh Before you can transfer pictures from the camera, it must be connected to your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter. 1 If the camera is off, turn it on by sliding open the lens cover. When the camera is connected and turned on, an animated rectangle appears on the control panel display. 2 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it. 3 Choose Move All Camera Images to Disk from the Camera menu. In the box that appears, choose the location you want for the pictures. After the images have been moved to your Macintosh, a message appears that gives you a chance to erase the images from the camera. (If you prefer, you can use the Erase All button. See “Erasing Pictures From the Camera,” later in this chapter.) Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 21 When you’re ready, click Save. To create a new folder for the pictures, click this button.Opening pictures on the Macintosh Once the pictures are on your Macintosh, you can use the QuickTake software to look at them, make some changes, and save the pictures in a variety of formats and bit depths. (See “Working with Pictures,” later in this chapter.) Opening a picture in the image window 1 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it. 2 Choose Open from the File menu. 3 In the box that appears, click the picture you want to see and click Open. 22 Chapter 3 The X means Show Preview is on. You see a preview of any QuickTake picture you select. The picture appears in an image window.Opening a slide table 1 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it. 2 Choose Open Slide Table from the File menu. 3 In the box that appears, find the pictures you want to see. 4 To open the slide table, click the Choose button. The pictures appear in a slide table window. 5 To see a picture in detail, double-click the slide. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 23 When you’ve found the pictures you want to open as a slide table, click Choose. In this example, the pictures contained in the Mixed Pictures folder will open as a slide table. A slide like this represents an image with no preview imported from another application program. To see the image here, choose Create Slide from the Image menu.Working with your pictures Whether the pictures are in the camera or have been moved to your Macintosh, you can use the QuickTake software to look at them, make some changes, and save the pictures in a variety of formats and bit depths. With slides you can m edit the name under each slide, giving slides the names you want m use the Get Info command to get specific information (such as the image’s width and height) m print the slide table m open slides to full-size images With a full-size image you can m see different zoom views of an image m print the image m change the size of the printed image m crop the image m change the image’s bit depth m use the Copy command to copy the image (or selected parts of it) to paste into a document in another application program With slides or a full-size image you can m change the picture’s orientation by rotating it from vertical to horizontal (and vice versa) m save the pictures you like, using the Save or Save As command On the next few pages you’ll find instructions for doing the tasks listed here. 24 Chapter 3Editing slide names You can give your slides names that mean something to you. Getting information about a slide 1 Click the slide. 2 Choose Get Info from the File menu. An information window appears. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 25 Select the name under the slide and type a new name.Opening a slide to a full-size image To see the picture full size, double-click the slide. 26 Chapter 3 Double-click the slide to see it full size.Zoom views in the image window To see the picture in the image window enlarged, actual size, or reduced, choose View from the Image menu, then choose an item from the submenu. When you open an image the first time, the QuickTake software uses all the pixels to present the best possible image on your monitor. With a highresolution image, the picture appears at 200% magnification. Changing the printed size of a picture To change the size of a printed picture, choose Resize from the Image menu. In the box that appears, you can specify one aspect (width, height, or resolution) of the size you want the picture to be. (Resizing affects the entire picture displayed in the image window. You can’t select and resize one section of the picture.) Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 27 High-resolution images show 144 dots per inch (dpi). Standard resolution images show 72 dpi. When you choose Zoom In, the image doubles in size. When you choose Zoom Out, the image shrinks to half its previous size. To change the width, height, or resolution of a printed picture, type the number you want in the space provided. You can define one aspect of the size; QuickTake calculates the other two aspects. To choose the unit of measure you want (inches or centimeters), use this pop-up menu. This represents a QuickTake high-resolution image. This shows the size of the picture when it’s printed.Cropping a picture 1 Drag the pointer to include just the part of the picture you want in the selection rectangle. If you don’t get it right the first time, click outside the selection rectangle (or press x-Z) to cancel the selection. Then try again. 2 Choose Crop from the Image menu. The cropped image appears. 28 Chapter 3 Inside the rectangle is the part of the image you keep.Changing the bit depth of a picture You may want to change the image bit depth of a picture you take. For example, if the picture uses millions of colors, but you plan to print it on a grayscale printer, you can change the image bit depth to 256 shades of gray. Changing bit depth and compression scheme can reduce the amount of disk space required to store an image, but the changes may affect image quality. To change the bit depth, choose Change Image Depth from the Image menu. Then choose the bit depth you want. If you’re not happy with the result, choose Undo from the Edit menu. Copying a picture to another application You can copy QuickTake pictures and paste them into documents in other applications. (You cannot paste them into other QuickTake pictures.) 1 Drag the pointer to include in the selection rectangle the part of the picture you want to copy. To copy the entire image, choose Select All from the Edit menu. 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu. 3 Position the pointer in the target document and choose Paste from the Edit menu. A copy of the selected image appears in the document. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 29 This is an optimized palette depending on the scene or subject in the picture.Rotating a picture To rotate the selected slide or picture, choose Rotate from the Image menu. A submenu appears, and you can specify how far you want to turn the slide or picture. In the slide table, you can only rotate pictures that are in the PICT QuickTake format. You can rotate a single, full-size image in any format. If you rotate a picture that’s in the camera, you must save it to make the change permanent. (If you’ve already moved the image to the Macintosh, the computer remembers the change whether you save it or not.) 30 Chapter 3Saving a picture If you want to preserve changes you make, you have to save the modified picture. The Save and Save As commands in the QuickTake software behave like the same commands in other Macintosh application programs. In addition, the QuickTake software provides features that allow you to choose a specific file format (such as PICT or TIFF), bit depth, and file compression. 1 To save the picture in the active image window, choose Save As from the File menu. 2 In the box that appears, type a name for the picture. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 31 Type a name for the picture here.3 Choose the file format you want from the pop-up menu. The file format you choose depends on the requirements of the application into which you plan to import the picture. m PICT is the basic Macintosh file format for images and is used by almost all Macintosh programs that read image files. The PICT QuickTake format is created (and compressed) by the camera. To open images in this format on a Macintosh, you need the QuickTake Image and QuickTime extensions. To open images saved in the compressed PICT formats, you need only the QuickTime extension. To open images saved in PICT with no compression, use any application that reads PICT. m TIFF stands for Tagged Image File Format. TIFF is another commonly used file format for storing bitmapped images in various resolutions. 4 Choose the image depth you want from the pop-up menu. The image depth you choose depends on the printer to which you plan to send the picture or the monitor on which you plan to display it. 5 Click the Save button (or press Return). 32 Chapter 3 These three formats use JPEG compression for a smaller file size, but with some loss of image quality. If you use 256 colors, Custom Colors adjust to the scene or subject, showing an image at its best. However, this setting may cause other color images on your desktop to look strange. Default colors for a 256-color monitorPrinting your pictures You can use the QuickTake application to print the pictures you take, and you can print them while they are on the camera or after you transfer them to your Macintosh. Printing a slide table 1 Open the slide table you want to print. 2 Choose Print from the File menu. 3 In the box that appears, choose the settings you want. In a short while, the printed slide table is ready at your printer. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 33 When the options are set the way you want them, click Print. IMPORTANT Be sure to click Color/ Grayscale before you print QuickTake images.34 Chapter 3 Printing a single image 1 Make sure the picture you want to print is opened as a full-size image. 2 Choose Print from the File menu. 3 In the box that appears, choose the settings you want. Sometimes a printed high-resolution picture is smaller than it appears on your screen. m A high-resolution image takes full advantage of its 640 x 480 pixels on the screen and appears at twice its actual size. (The title bar of the image window tells you the magnification is 200%.) Its printed size is 100%. m A standard-resolution image appears in a 320 x 240 pixel size on screen and the same size when it prints. (The magnification is 100%.) To change the size of a printed picture, use the Resize command. For details, see “Changing the Printed Size of a Picture,” earlier in this chapter. When the options are set the way you want them, click Print. IMPORTANT Be sure to click Color/ Grayscale before you print QuickTake images.Naming the camera You can give your camera a name. When you look at the pictures while they’re on the camera, its name appears as the title of the slide table window. The camera must be connected to your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter. 1 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it. 2 Choose Set Camera Name from the Camera menu. 3 In the box that appears, type the name you want. 4 When you’re finished, click Set. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 35 The name you type can contain up to 31 characters.Setting the clock in the camera The camera’s internal clock keeps track of the date and time you take each picture. This information is useful, and in some circumstances important, so take time now to set the clock. The camera must be connected to your Macintosh. (For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter.) If you want to check the date and time on the Macintosh before you set the camera, use the General Controls panel. 1 If necessary, turn on the camera by sliding open the lens cover. 2 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it. 3 Choose Set Camera Date & Time from the Camera menu. 4 To set the camera to match your Macintosh, click OK in the box that appears. Whenever you want to check the accuracy of the camera’s clock, choose Set Camera Date & Time from the Camera menu. IMPORTANT If the batteries in your QuickTake camera go dead or you remove them and don’t replace them immediately, the camera’s clock stops. To guarantee that the clock in the camera matches the clock on your Macintosh, you must connect the camera to the computer and repeat the procedure described here. 36 Chapter 3Taking pictures from the Macintosh You can use the camera controls on your Macintosh to take pictures. 1 Connect the camera to your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh” earlier in this chapter. 2 Arrange the camera so it’s in a position to take the picture you want. 3 Choose Camera Controls from the Camera menu. 4 In the box that appears, change any settings to suit your needs. For details about the different settings, see “Using the Controls” in Chapter 2. 5 When you’re ready, click Take a Picture. You can use the Erase All button to erase the pictures on the camera. Remember that the control erases all the images permanently. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 37 Resolution button Timer button Flash button Erase All buttonErasing pictures from the camera After you transfer your pictures to your Macintosh, you should erase them from the camera to make room for new pictures. If the camera is connected to your Macintosh, there’s another way to erase pictures. You can open the QuickTake program and choose Camera Controls from the Camera menu. Then click the Erase All button on the Macintosh screen. WARNING This erases all of the pictures in the camera. You cannot erase a few and leave the rest in the camera. To erase all the pictures in the camera, lightly press the Erase All button. (Use any small, pointed object.) As the pictures are erased, the Trash icon in the control panel display blinks. In a few seconds, the display shows 0 (zero) pictures taken. 38 Chapter 3Using the camera with a power adapter To conserve battery power, you can use a power adapter and plug the camera into an available power outlet. Use only the QuickTake 100 AC Adapter (part number M2851LL/A) or the PowerBook AC Adapter with the QuickTake 100. It’s a good idea to use the power adapter for power while the camera is connected to your Macintosh. (Note: The power adapter does not recharge batteries in the camera. If you have rechargeable batteries, use the charger that came with the QuickTake 100. See “Charging the Batteries” in Chapter 1.) WARNING Never alter the plug on the power adapter. If it will not fit an electrical outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualifed electrician. Improper connection may result in electrical shock. Use of a power adapter not recommended or sold by Apple Computer, Inc., may result in a risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury. Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 39Traveling with the camera The QuickTake 100 Travel Case (part number M2848G/A) is available at authorized Apple resellers. The travel case includes a leather camera grip and a protective carrying case. Using the battery booster pack with the camera The QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack (part number M2655G/A) is available at authorized Apple resellers. The booster pack lets you take thousands of pictures with your QuickTake 100 camera. It comes with eight AA lithium batteries and plugs into the power adapter port on your camera. QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack QuickTake 100 Travel Case 40 Chapter 341 This chapter explains what happens when you choose any of the commands from the QuickTake software menus. In this chapter m The File menu m The Edit menu m The Image menu m The Camera menu m The Windows menu 4 QuickTake Software Menu CommandsThe File menu The commands in the File menu work on the contents of windows or folders. m Open Brings up a box that you can use to locate and open your pictures. When you open the selected picture, it appears by itself in an image window. 42 Chapter 4 The X means Show Preview is on. You see a preview of any QuickTake picture you select.m Open Slide Table Brings up a box which you can use to open slides of all the pictures in a folder you select. The pictures in the selected folder appear together in a slide table window. m Close Closes the active window. If you haven’t saved changes to the picture in the image window, a message appears asking you whether you want to save the picture before closing the window. m Save Saves a picture you’ve opened, including any changes you’ve made to it. Use Save (rather than the Save As command) for routine saving of your pictures. m Save As Saves a picture the first time you open it and want to save it. Also lets you save it with a different name, or in a different folder, or on a different disk, or in a different file format. QuickTake Software Menu Commands 43 When you’ve chosen the folder containing the pictures you want to see, click here. To change the file format and bit depth of an image, use these pop-up menus.The file format you choose depends on the requirements of the application program into which you plan to import the picture. The image depth you choose depends on the printer to which you plan to send the picture or the monitor on which you plan to display it. m Page Setup Lets you set the page size, orientation, and other options for pictures that you print using QuickTake software. 44 Chapter 4 To select enhancements to the printed image, click Options. When the options are set the way you want them, click OK.m Print Prints the picture displayed in the image window. A box appears with options for printing your document. m Quit Ends a session with the QuickTake software. If you’ve modified the picture in the image window but haven’t saved it, a message appears asking you whether you want to save the picture before quitting the program. QuickTake Software Menu Commands 45 When the options are set the way you want them, click Print. IMPORTANT Be sure to click Color/ Grayscale before you print QuickTake images.The Edit menu The commands in the Edit menu let you work with selected parts of the picture in the image window. m Undo Cancels your most recent changes to the picture. For example, if you used the Crop command and don’t like the results, you can choose Undo to cancel the crop. m Cut Removes the material you have selected and places it on the Clipboard. You can only use the Cut command to edit the names of pictures in the slide table. m Copy Copies the material you have selected to the Clipboard. The original material stays where it was when you selected it. m Paste Copies the material on the Clipboard to the active window in another program (not QuickTake). The program you are using determines where you can paste the material and how much freedom you have to move it around. You can continue to paste copies until you cut or copy a new selection (which replaces the old contents of the Clipboard). m Select All Selects everything in the picture, placing the selection rectangle around the outer edge of the picture. 46 Chapter 4The Image menu The commands in the Image menu work with the picture in the image window, and some of them work with slides in the slide table. m View Lets you see a picture in the image window enlarged or reduced or at its actual size (100%). Each time you choose Zoom In, the image doubles in size. When you choose Zoom Out, the image shrinks to half its previous size. m Rotate Rotates the selected slide or picture. When you choose Rotate, a submenu appears that lets you specify how far you want to turn the slide or picture. In the slide table, you can only rotate pictures that are in the QuickTake format. Full-size images can be rotated in any format. If you rotate a picture that’s in the camera, you must save it to make the change permanent. (If you’ve already moved the image to the Macintosh, the computer remembers the change whether you save it or not.) QuickTake Software Menu Commands 47m Resize Brings up a box that lets you specify one aspect (width, height, or resolution) of the size you want the picture to be. (Resizing affects the entire picture displayed in the image window. You can’t select and resize one section of the picture.) You can change the dimensions of the image to meet your specific requirements. m Crop Trims a picture to include only the part you’ve selected with the selection rectangle. m Change Image Depth Lets you change the bit depth of the picture in the image window. For example, if you don’t need all the information contained in millions of colors, changing to 256 shades of gray reduces the size of the file on your disk. m Create Slide Creates a preview image so you can see pictures from other sources alongside your QuickTake pictures in the slide table. m Sort Slides By Lets you choose to sort slides in numerical order by date or alphabetical order by name. 48 Chapter 4 To change the width, height, or resolution of a printed picture, type the number you want in the space provided. You can define only one aspect of the size; QuickTake calculates the other two aspects. To choose the unit of measure you want, use this pop-up menu. This represents a QuickTake high-resolution image. This shows the size (in inches or centimeters) of the picture when it’s printed.The Camera menu The commands in the Camera menu work with the camera. You must connect the camera to your Macintosh before you can use this menu. (For instructions on connecting the camera to your Macintosh, see Chapter 3.) m View Slides in Camera Lets you see slides of the pictures currently in the camera. m Move All Camera Images to Disk Transfers pictures from the camera to your Macintosh. When you choose this command, a box appears that lets you specify where to save the pictures. QuickTake Software Menu Commands 49m Set Camera Name Brings up a box that lets you give a unique name to your camera. This is especially helpful if more than one camera may transfer pictures to a particular Macintosh. m Set Camera Date & Time Brings up a box that tells you whether the clock needs to be reset to match your Macintosh. If it does, click OK. m Camera Controls Brings up a control panel like the one on the camera. The Windows menu The Windows menu lists the names of all the QuickTake windows currently open. You can choose which window should be frontmost. (If you haven’t saved and named their contents, image windows are identified as Image 1, Image 2, and so on.) 50 Chapter 4 The name you type can contain up to 31 characters. When you’re ready, click Set. To change the resolution, click here. To turn on (or turn off) the timer, click here. To change the flash To erase the pictures in the camera, click here. To take a picture, click here.This chapter offers suggestions to help you care for your camera and solve problems. In this chapter m Maintenance tips m Problem-solving tips Caring for your camera These suggestions should help you maintain the QuickTake 100 camera: m Protect the camera from moisture and excessive heat. m Don’t use harsh or abrasive cleaners on the camera. Wipe off dust with a clean, dry cloth. m When you are not taking pictures, close the lens cover to protect the lens and keep it clean (and to extend battery life). 51 5 Maintenance and Troubleshootingm To clean the lens, first blow away any surface dust or dirt. Breathe on the lens to form a mist, then gently wipe away the mist with a soft, lint-free cloth or lens cleaning tissue. Don’t press hard, or you may scratch the lens. Never wipe a dry lens. m If you store the camera for an extended period, remove the batteries. When you replace the batteries, remember to reset the date and time. (For instructions, see “Setting the Clock in the Camera” in Chapter 3.) Solving problems This section describes some problems you might encounter, and offers solutions you can try. IMPORTANT If you have a problem with your camera and nothing recommended here solves it, contact your authorized service provider. Camera won’t take pictures m The camera may not be turned on. Make sure the lens cover is open. m The camera may be asleep. Press the shutter release or close and then open the lens cover. m If you just took a flash picture, the flash may be recharging. Look for the green light in the viewfinder. When it comes on, the camera is ready to take another picture. m The batteries may be low or dead. Replace the batteries or connect the AC power adapter to the camera. m The batteries may not be installed correctly. (See “Installing the Batteries” in Chapter 1.) WARNING Don’t use solvents or solutions unless they are specifically designed for cleaning camera lenses. Don’t use chemically treated tissues intended for eyeglasses. 52 Chapter 5m The camera’s memory may have no room for another picture. Transfer the pictures from the camera to your Macintosh, then erase the pictures. (See “Erasing Pictures From the Camera” in Chapter 3.) m The camera may be connected to your Macintosh. You can use the camera controls on the Macintosh to take pictures (see “Taking Pictures From the Macintosh” in Chapter 3), or disconnect the serial cable from the camera. Can’t see anything through the viewfinder m Make sure the lens cover is open. m Move the camera around slightly as you look through it. You need to look straight through the viewfinder. Flash fails to go off m Make sure the flash is turned on. (See “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.) m The batteries may be low or dead. Replace the batteries. m The batteries may not be installed correctly. (See “Installing the Batteries” in Chapter 1.) The Macintosh doesn’t recognize the camera Different devices and programs may compete with the camera for the use of a serial port on your Macintosh. If there’s a problem, a message tells you that the camera is not responding. Make sure the serial cable is connected properly, the camera is turned on, and the batteries have enough power. If you have system software version 7.0.1•, try the following to resolve the problem: m Turn on AppleTalk in the Chooser. AppleTalk must be turned on to use the QuickTake software with system software version 7.0.1•. m Determine whether you have a LocalTalk device connected to the printer port. If you do, connect the camera to the modem port. m If you have a non-LocalTalk device, or no device at all, connected to the printer port, open the Network control panel and change the setting from LocalTalk to Remote Only. (If you use an EtherTalk network, leave the setting on EtherTalk.) Then connect the camera to either port. Maintenance and Troubleshooting 53Pictures are fuzzy, blurry, or blotchy m The lens may be dirty. Clean the lens. (See “Caring for Your Camera,” earlier in this chapter.) m The subject or the camera may have moved. Hold the camera steady, and use the flash. (See “Taking Pictures” and “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.) m The subject may be out of focal range. Keep a distance of at least four feet between you and the subject. The flash illuminates subjects between four and nine feet from the camera. m The resolution setting may not be appropriate for the subject. Change to high resolution. (See “Resolution Settings” in Chapter 2.) Pictures are too dark (underexposed) m There may not be enough light to take a picture. Turn on the flash. (See “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.) m The subject may be too far away for the flash to have an effect. Make sure the subject is no more than nine feet away. (See “Focal Range and Flash Range” in Chapter 2.) Pictures are too light (overexposed) m If the camera is set to use flash with every picture, that may be too much light. Change to automatic flash. (See “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.) m The subject may be too close. Make sure the subject is at least four feet away. (See “Focal Range and Flash Range” in Chapter 2.) m The camera may be pointed directly at a bright light. Try a different angle. m The light sensors (above and below the viewfinder lens) may be dirty. Use a soft, dry cloth to clean them. (To locate the light sensors, see “Your Camera at a Glance” in Chapter 1.) m One or both of the light sensors may be covered inadvertently. Be careful not to obstruct the light sensors while you take pictures. Part of a picture is missing m Some part of the lens may be covered. Keep your hands, the neck strap, and other objects away from the lens and the built-in flash. 54 Chapter 5Physical m Depth 6.1 in. (155 mm) m Width 5.3 in. (135 mm) m Height 2.2 in. (55 mm) m Weight 1 lb. (0.5 kg) Technical m Type CCD Still Frame Camera m Image size 320 x 240 pixels standard resolution; 640 x 480 high resolution m Interface GeoPort (Macintosh); RS-232C serial (Windows) m Bit depth 24-bit color m Memory 1 MB Flash EPROM 55 Appendix A SpecificationsCamera m Lens field of view 8 mm (equivalent to 50-mm lens on a 35-mm film camera) m ISO equivalent to approximately ISO 85 m Focus range 4 feet to infinity m Aperture ƒ2.8 to ƒ16 m Shutter speed 1/30 second to 1/175 second m Flash range 4 feet to 9 feet Temperature m Operating 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F) m Storage (6 months) –40° to 47° C (–40° to 117° F) m Transit (72 hours) –40° to 65° C (–40° to 149° F) m Humidity Classified as Class 1 equipment Power requirements m Standby <500 mW m Operating <4.5 W Operating environment m Temperature 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F) m Humidity 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing Electrical requirements m Internal power 3 AA batteries (3.6 V DC to 5.4 V DC) m External power 4.5 V DC/1.75 A to 8.0 V DC/1.0 A Accessories m QuickTake 100 Travel Case (part number M2848G/A) m QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack (part number M2655G/A) 56 Appendix AThe QuickTake camera comes with three AA rechargeable NiCad (nickelcadmium) batteries and a battery charger. In place of the NiCad batteries, the camera can use other AA batteries. This appendix contains important information about the battery charger and the batteries you can use in the QuickTake camera. Important safety instructions for using the battery charger m Save this manual. It contains important safety and operating instructions. m Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary markings on the charger, the batteries, and the QuickTake camera. m The battery charger is designed for indoor use only. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow. m Charge only NiCad rechargeable batteries. Charging other types of batteries with the charger that came with the camera may cause them to leak or explode, resulting in personal injury and property damage. m Use of an attachment (such as a battery charger, power supply, or serial cable) not recommended specifically for use with QuickTake 100 and sold by Apple Computer may result in a risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury. m Do not plug the charger into an extension cord. 57 Appendix B Battery Informationm If the charger has been hit, dropped, or damaged in any way, do not operate it. Take it to an authorized service provider for repair. m Do not disassemble the charger. If it needs service or repair, take it to an authorized service provider. Incorrect reassembly may result in fire or electric shock. m To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the electrical outlet before you attempt to clean it. Turning off power to the outlet will not reduce this risk. Caring for batteries Here are some general suggestions for good battery care. m Always handle batteries carefully. m Do not short-circuit battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry loose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or a fire. m Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate, or incinerate the batteries. m Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. m Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave batteries in hot locations (such as the trunk of a car) for more than a day or two. m Do not leave NiCad batteries in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging them. Store unused batteries in a dry place at normal room temperature. m Dispose of used batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s instructions. 58 Appendix BWays to improve battery performance Here are some tips that may help you get the most from your batteries. m When you replace used batteries, replace all the old ones with new ones. Mixing new and used batteries weakens the performance of the new ones. (If you are using rechargeable batteries, replace batteries that are running low with a complete set of fully charged batteries.) m Batteries work best when the contact surfaces are clean. If necessary, clean these surfaces by gently rubbing with a clean pencil eraser or a cloth. Rechargeable NiCad batteries If you’ve used a set of rechargeable batteries for a while, and they seem not to last as long as when they were new, discharge them completely before recharging them. Unless the batteries are wearing out, this should improve their lasting power. WARNING Damaged nickel-cadmium (NiCad) batteries may leak small amounts of potassium hydroxide. This substance can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes. If you touch a damaged battery, immediately rinse your hands and any other affected areas with water for at least 5 minutes. Do not use soap. Battery Information 59You can use the QuickTake 100 camera with a computer running Windows software, but you’ll need a special cable and the Windows version of the QuickTake software. You can purchase the QuickTake 100 Connection Kit for Windows with everything you need. 61 Appendix C Using the Camera with a Windows-Based PCThe QuickTake Setup control panel puts a camera icon on the desktop for convenient access to images on the QuickTake 100 camera. (By the way, you don’t need the camera icon to use the QuickTake 1.0 application program.) 1 Make sure the camera is connected to your Macintosh and turned on. 2 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu. 3 Open QuickTake Setup. 4 In the box that appears, click Connect To Camera. 63 Appendix D Using QuickTake Setup64 Appendix D The camera icon appears on your desktop. You can use the control panel to m rename the camera m make sure the camera’s clock is reset automatically when you connect your QuickTake 100 to the Macintosh m control the camera’s sleep schedule m erase the images on the camera 5 To see the images on the camera, double-click the camera icon to open it. You have several options for using the images on the camera: m To open an image in the QuickTake 1.0 application program, double-click the image icon. You can use QuickTake 1.0 to save images in formats other than PICT QuickTake (the original format of images on the camera). m To view the images and edit them, use an appropriate image-editing, image-database, or word-processing program. m To move the images to your hard disk, drag them to the disk. You can open and view images on the camera but cannot save them there. 6 To close the control panel, click its close box. 7 To remove the camera from your desktop, drag the icon to the Trash. By the way, you can move the QuickTake Setup icon out of the Control Panels folder to a more convenient place. This icon represents your QuickTake 100 camera. (You don’t need this icon on your desktop to use QuickTake 1.0.) IMPORTANT This erases everything on the camera. You cannot select individual images to erase. To change the time that elapses before the camera goes to sleep, use this pop-up menu. To rename your camera, type a name and click Set Name.A AC adapter 39 accessories 56 aperture 56 AppleTalk 6, 53 applications, copying pictures to 29 B batteries 57–59 caring for 58 charging 4 checking level of 14 cleaning 59 conserving with power adapter 39 conserving with sleep 16 damaged 59 discharging 59 disposing of 58 improving performance of 59 installing 5 rechargeable 57–59 recharging 58 removing for long-term storage 52 replacing 59 safety instructions for 4, 5, 59 storing 58 troubleshooting 59 types to use 57 battery booster pack 40 battery charger caring for 57–58 charging batteries with 4 safety instructions for 57–58 battery compartment 3 battery terminals 58 bit depth, changing 29, 43–44, 48 bit depth specifications 55 C cable, connecting 18–19 Camera Controls command (Camera menu) 37–38, 50 camera icon on desktop 63–64 camera lens 3 Camera menu 49–50 Camera Controls command 37–38, 50 Move All Camera Images to Disk command 21, 49 Set Camera Date & Time command 36, 50 Set Camera Name command 35, 50 View Slides in Camera command 20, 49 65 Indexcamera specifications 56 care of batteries 58 of battery charger 57–58 of camera 51–52 Change Image Depth command (Image menu) 29, 48 charging batteries 4 cleaning batteries 59 camera 51–52 lens 52 clock, setting 36, 50 resetting automatically 64 Close command (File menu) 43 closing active windows 43 color, 24-bit 13 colors (image depth) 44, 48 commands, undoing 46 compression scheme, changing 29 connecting camera to Macintosh 18–20 control buttons 3 control panel, QuickTake Setup 63–64 control panel display 3, 12 controls 12–15 battery level 14 flash settings 12 pictures taken and pictures available 14 resolution settings 13 timer 15 Copy command (Edit menu) 29, 46 copying pictures 46 to another application 29 Create Slide command (Image menu) 23, 48 Crop command (Image menu) 28, 48 cropping pictures 28, 48 customizing software installation 7 Cut command (Edit menu) 46 D date, setting 36, 50 desktop, camera icon on 63–64 disposing of batteries 58 E editing slide names 25, 46 Edit menu 46 Copy command 29, 46 Cut command 46 Paste command 29, 46 Select All command 29, 46 Undo command 29, 46 electrical requirements 56 Erase All button in QuickTake software 37–38 on camera 38 Erase Camera button 64 erasing pictures 37–38, 64 EtherTalk network 53 F file format, changing 31–32, 43–44 File menu 42–45 Close command 43 Get Info command 25 Open command 42 Open Slide Table command 23, 43 Page Setup command 44 Print command 33–34, 44 Quit command 44 Save As command 43–44 Save command 43 flash location of 3 range of 11, 54, 56 recharging 52 setting 12 troubleshooting 53 66 IndexFlash button in QuickTake software 37 on camera 12 flash icon 12 focal range 11, 54, 56 folders creating for pictures 21 opening pictures in 23, 43 format, changing 31–32, 43–44 framing subjects 11 G Get Info command (File menu) 25 grayscale printing 29, 33–34, 45 green light in viewfinder 11, 52 H hard disk, moving images to 64 high resolution, setting 13 high-resolution images 27 printing 34 humidity 56 I, J, K icons camera on desktop 63–64 flash 12 modem port 18 printer port 18 QuickTake 20, 22 resolution 14 serial port 18 timer 15 Trash 38 image depth, changing 29, 32, 43–44, 48 Image menu 47–48 Change Image Depth command 29, 48 Create Slide command 23, 48 Crop command 28, 48 Resize command 27, 48 Rotate command 30, 47 Sort Slides By command 48 View command 27, 47 image size specifications 55 image window changing image depth in 48 cropping pictures in 48 opening pictures in 22 resizing images in 48 rotating pictures in 47 zoom views in 27, 47 images. See pictures Installer 6–7 installing batteries 5 QuickTake software 6–8 custom installation 7 interface 55 interference vi–vii L lens 3, 10 cleaning 52 field of view 56 troubleshooting 54 lens cover 3 keeping closed 51 turning camera off with 18 turning camera on with 10, 19 waking camera with 16 lighting 54. See also flash lights green light in viewfinder 11, 52 red timer light 3, 15 light sensors 12, 54 LocalTalk devices 53 looking at pictures in camera 20 Index 67M Macintosh connecting camera to 18–20 failure to recognize camera 53 opening pictures on 22–23 taking pictures from 37 transferring pictures to 21 using camera with 17–39 working with pictures on 24–39 maintenance 51–53 memory, full 53 memory specifications 55 menu commands 41–50. See also specific menu or command modem port 18 modem port icon 18 Move All Camera Images to Disk command (Camera menu) 21, 49 moving images to hard disk 64 N naming camera 35, 50, 64 pictures 31 slides 25 neck strap 3 NiCad batteries. See batteries O Open command (File menu) 42 opening pictures 22–23, 42, 64 in image window 22 in QuickTake 1.0 64 in slide table 23, 43 opening slides to full-size image 26 Open Slide Table command (File menu) 23, 43 operating environment 56 P Page Setup command (File menu) 44 Paste command (Edit menu) 29, 46 pasting pictures 46 into other applications 29 PC, Windows-based 61 photography. See taking pictures physical specifications 55 PICT format 31–32, 44 PICT QuickTake format 30, 32, 44 pictures changing image depth of 32, 48 changing printed size of 27 changing size with Resize command 27, 48 changing size with View command 27, 47 copying 46 copying to another application 29 creating folder for 21 creating slides 23 cropping 28, 48 date and time stamp for 36, 50 editing slide names 25, 46 erasing from camera 21, 38, 64 getting information about slides 25 moving to hard disk 64 naming 31 number taken and number available 14 opening 22–23, 42 opening slides to full-size image 26 opening slide table 23 previewing 22, 42, 48 printing options for 44 printing single image 34 printing slide table 33 quality of 54 rotating 30, 47 saving 31–32, 43–44 sorting slides 48 68 Indextaking with camera 11–15 taking with Macintosh 37 transferring to Macintosh 21, 49 troubleshooting 52–54 undoing changes to 46 viewing different sizes of 27 viewing in camera 20, 49 working with 24–39 working with selected parts of 46 pixels 13 ports modem port 18 power adapter port 3, 40 printer port 18, 53 serial port 3, 18–19, 53 power. See batteries; power adapter power adapter 39 power adapter port 3, 40 PowerBook AC Adapter 39 power requirements 56 previewing pictures 22, 42, 48 Print command (File menu) 33–34, 44 printer port 18, 53 printer port icon 18 printers, grayscale 29, 33–34, 45 printing pictures 33–34, 44–45 grayscale 29, 33–34, 45 high-resolution images 34 low-resolution images 34 options for 43–44 printing a single image 34 printing slide table 33 Q QuickTake icon 20, 22 QuickTake 100 AC Adapter 39 QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack 40 QuickTake 100 Connection Kit for Windows 61 QuickTake 100 Travel Case 40 QuickTake Setup 63–64 QuickTake software AppleTalk and 6, 53 changing pictures with 24–25, 27–31 copying pictures to another application with 29 erasing pictures with 38 installing 6–8 menu commands 41–50 naming camera with 35 opening pictures with 22–31 printing pictures with 33–34 quitting 45 saving pictures with 31–32 setting clock with 36 taking pictures with 37 transferring pictures with 21 upgraded system software and 8 viewing pictures with 20, 26–27 Windows version of 61 Quit command (File menu) 44 R rechargeable batteries 57–59 recharging 4, 57–58 discharging 59 recharging flash 52 red timer light 3, 15 renaming the camera 64 repair 58 replacing batteries 59 resetting the clock automatically 64 Resize command (Image menu) 27, 48 Resolution button in QuickTake software 37 on camera 12 resolution icons 14 resolution settings 13 Rotate command (Image menu) 30, 47 rotating pictures and slides 30, 47 Index 69S safety instructions batteries 5, 59 battery charger 4, 57–58 Save As command (File menu) 31, 43–44 Save command (File menu) 31, 43 saving pictures 31–32, 43–44 Select All command (Edit menu) 29, 46 selecting whole picture 29, 46 serial cable connecting 18–19 disconnecting 53 serial port 3, 18–19, 53 serial port icon 18 service 52, 58 Set Camera Date & Time command (Camera menu) 36, 50 Set Camera Name command (Camera menu) 35, 50 setting camera clock 36, 50, 64 shadowed subjects, photographing 12 Show Preview 22, 42 shutter 3, 11 waking camera with 16 shutter speed 56 sleep setting time for 64 waking from 16 slides creating 23 editing names of 25, 46 getting information about 25 opening to full-size image 26 previewing 48 rotating 47 sorting 48 viewing in camera 20 slide table 20 creating slides in 48 opening 23 printing 34 rotating pictures in 47 sorting slides in 48 software. See applications; QuickTake software sorting slides 48 Sort Slides By command (Image menu) 48 specifications 55–56 standard resolution, setting 13 standard resolution images 27 printing 34 storing batteries 58 camera 52, 56 system requirements 2 system software version 7.0.1•, QuickTake software and 6, 53 upgrading 8 T taking pictures 11–15 focusing 11, 54, 56 framing subjects 11 from Macintosh 37 of shadowed subjects 12 resolution settings 13 tracking pictures taken and pictures available 14 troubleshooting 52–54 with or without flash 11–12 with timer 15 technical specifications 55–56 temperature specifications 56 TIFF format 31–32, 44 70 Indextime, setting 36, 50 Timer button in QuickTake software 37 on camera 12, 15 timer icon 15 timer light 3, 15 transferring pictures to Macintosh 21, 49 Trash icon 38 travel case 40 traveling with the camera 40 tripod mounting hole 3 troubleshooting 52–54 batteries 59 flash 53 Macintosh doesn’t recognize camera 53 picture quality 54 taking pictures 52–53 viewfinder 53 turning off camera 18 turning off flash 12 turning on camera 10, 19 U Undo command (Edit menu) 29, 46 upgrading system software 8 V View command (Image menu) 27, 47 viewfinder framing subject with 11 green light in 11, 52 location of 3 troubleshooting 53 viewfinder lens 3 viewing pictures in camera 20 View Slide in Camera command (Camera menu) 20, 49 W, X, Y waking the camera 16 windows, closing 43 Windows-based PCs, using camera with 61 Windows menu 50 Z zoom views in image window 27, 47 Index 71Apple Computer, Inc. 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, California 95014-6299 408.996.1010 TLX 171-576 030-6161-A Printed in U.S.A. ð Personal LaserWriter300 User’s Guide ðK Apple Computer, Inc. This manual and the software described in it are copyrighted, with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual or the software may not be copied, in whole or part, without written consent of Apple, except in the normal use of the software or to make a backup copy of the software. The same proprietary and copyright notices must be affixed to any permitted copies as were affixed to the original. This exception does not allow copies to be made for others, whether or not sold, but all of the material purchased (with all backup copies) may be sold, given, or loaned to another person. Under the law, copying includes translating into another language or format. You may use the software on any computer owned by you, but extra copies cannot be made for this purpose. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. © Apple Computer, Inc., 1993 20525 Mariani Avenue Cupertino, CA 95014-6299 (408) 996-1010 Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Chicago, Finder, Geneva, GrayShare, Monaco, New York, System 7, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated, registered in the United States. Adobe Photoshop is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Helvetica, Palatino, and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Co. ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation. MacPaint is a registered trademark of Claris Corporation. QMS is a registered trademark, and ColorScript is a trademark, of QMS, Inc. QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc. Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.Radio and television interference v Preface About Your Personal LaserWriter 300 vii Energy conservation mode vii TrueType fonts viii GrayShare viii Sharing your printer viii Printing grayscale viii Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Printer 1 Choosing a location for the printer 1 Carrying the Personal LaserWriter 300 2 Important safety instructions 2 Connecting the printer to a Macintosh 3 Choosing a port 3 Installing the printer software 4 System requirements 4 Installation 5 Chapter 2 Adding Toner and Paper 7 Removing the plastic shipping restraints 7 Installing or changing a toner cartridge 8 Plugging in the printer 10 Loading the paper cassette 11 Loading 3-hole punched paper 13 Loading letterhead paper 13 Loading legal-size paper 14 Chapter 3 Printing 15 Turning on the printer 15 Choosing face-down or face-up delivery 16 Using the Chooser the first time you print 17 Defining the page setup 18 Printing a document 19 Printing paper or envelopes with the manual feed slot 20 iii ContentsPrinting on both sides of a page 21 Sharing your printer with other users 21 Using a shared printer connected to another Macintosh 23 Controlling the use of your printer by others 24 Chapter 4 Tips and Troubleshooting 25 Safety precautions 25 Checking the printer’s status lights 27 Solving some common problems 28 About paper 37 About fonts 38 How to use different kinds of fonts 38 Use restraint when choosing fonts 39 Add emphasis and contrast 39 Be careful setting alignment and columns 40 Choose the right size 40 Find out more 40 Appendix Specifications 41 Index 43 iv ContentsImportant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and television interference The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the speci?cations in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult your authorized Apple dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. You may find helpful the following booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission: Interference Handbook (stock number 004-000-00345-4). This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. vS Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use shielded cables and connectors to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. For Apple peripheral devices, you can obtain the proper shielded cables from your authorized Apple dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. S DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Observation des normes—Classe B Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la Classe B prescrites dans les règlements sur le brouillage radioélectrique édictés par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. s Warning: Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your equipment’s manual may result in hazardous exposure. s s Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses, with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an authorized Apple service provider. s This printer is a Class 1 laser product. It carries a Class 1 label underneath the printer and a service warning label inside the printer. Service warning label Class 1 label viAbout Your Personal LaserWriter 300 The Personal LaserWriter 300 includes many features designed to produce high-quality text and graphics and deliver the performance of higher-priced laser printers. This preface describes the printer’s main features: m Energy conservation mode maintains your printer in a standby state that conserves energy by shutting off most of the printer’s functions when they are not in use. The printer “wakes up” automatically when you print a document. m TrueType fonts produce sharp characters at any size on the screen or printer. m GrayShare software lets you print grayscale images and share your personal printer with other users on a network. Energy conservation mode One of the first things you will notice about your Personal LaserWriter 300 is that it has no power on/off switch. This is because it is equipped with energy conservation mode, an automatic on/off feature that conserves energy by shutting off most of the printer’s functions when they are not in use. The printer remains in a standby state. When the printer detects something to be printed, it “wakes up” and goes to full power. After printing your document, the printer automatically returns to standby. As long as the Personal LaserWriter 300 is plugged in, it will be on standby. While on standby, the Ready/In Use status light (marked with the icon U) glows steadily. When you send the printer something to be printed, the light will flash and you will hear a fan come on. The Personal LaserWriter 300 is intended to be plugged in and on standby continuously. There is no need to unplug it, except for maintenance or moving. The printer consumes very little energy when it is on standby—less than 10 watts, about the same amount as a night-light. vii PrefaceTrueType fonts All fonts supplied with the LaserWriter are TrueType fonts. TrueType is a font technology from Apple Computer that produces sharp characters at any size on the screen or printer. The disks provided with your LaserWriter contain many widely used font families, including ITC Avant Garde® , ITC Bookman® , Courier, Helvetica® , Helvetica Narrow, New Century Schoolbook, Palatino® , and Times® , as well as four Apple fonts—Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, and New York—and three special-purpose fonts: Symbol, ITC Zapf Chancery® , and ITC Zapf Dingbats® . The Personal LaserWriter 300 is compatible with all font technologies for the Macintosh, including TrueType, bitmaps, and Type 1 fonts used with Adobe Type Manager. See “About Fonts” in Chapter 4, “Tips and Troubleshooting,” for more information. GrayShare Sharing your printer With the GrayShare printer software provided, you can either use the Personal LaserWriter 300 as a personal printer available to your Macintosh only, or share the printer with additional users connected to your network. When you share the printer, it remains connected to your own Macintosh. Network users can see the printer’s name and select it in the Macintosh Chooser like any other network printer. The documents they send to your printer are stored temporarily on your computer’s disk and printed in the order received. You have complete control over the shared printer. You can turn sharing on or off at any time. You use the Print Monitor program in your Macintosh system software to view and delete the print jobs that have been sent to your printer. Chapter 3 provides complete instructions about sharing. Printing grayscale The Personal LaserWriter 300 prints images in more than 30 levels of gray. Grayscale printing produces finer images. Choosing grayscale printing is explained in “Printing a Document” in Chapter 3. viii Preface: About Your Personal LaserWriter 300Setting Up Your Printer This chapter tells you how to connect the printer to your computer and install the printer software. S Important: Do not plug the printer in at this time. After you connect the printer to your computer, and install the printer software, you should continue with Chapter 2, “Adding Toner and Paper.” After you add the toner, you can plug the printer in. Plugging the printer in before adding toner can cause a paper jam when the printer starts up for the first time. S Choosing a location for the printer Choose a flat, stable surface with adequate room around the printer as shown. The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, or humidity. Allow 4 inches (10 cm) at the back of the printer for airflow. Allow 21 inches (52 cm) at the front of the printer to allow access to the paper cassette. Allow space for airflow around the vent. 1 Chapter 1Carrying the Personal LaserWriter 300 To carry the Personal LaserWriter 300, hold it firmly and level with both hands. Holding the printer in positions other than the one shown may cause an accident. Place the LaserWriter on the flat, stable surface you have chosen. s Warning: Never lift the LaserWriter by the front and rear of the cassette, or the face-down delivery tray; otherwise, the printer may drop and be damaged. s Important safety instructions Always take the following precautions: m Protect the printer from dampness and sources of liquids. m Don’t use devices that produce open flames, such as Bunsen burners, near the printer. m Don’t use alcohol-based or ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. m Clean the printer with only a damp cloth and, if necessary, a mild soap or detergent. Be careful to avoid getting liquid in the printer or the power cord receptacle. Disconnect the power plug immediately if any of the following situations occur: m The power cord or plug is frayed or damaged. m Liquid gets spilled on or into the printer. m The printer needs cleaning, servicing, or repair. s Warning: Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation of the printer must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of the printer and do not permit them to handle any cables. s 2 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your PrinterConnecting the printer to a Macintosh To connect the printer, you need an Apple Peripheral-8 cable, part number M0197. The Apple Peripheral-8 cable has special shielding to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. If you do not have an Apple Peripheral-8 cable, you can obtain one from an authorized Apple dealer. Choosing a port Your Macintosh has a printer port (marked with the icon [) and a modem port (marked with the icon W). You can attach the printer cable to either of these ports. If your computer is connected to a network, your printer port may already be connected to a network cable. If the printer port is unavailable, you can use the modem port. S Important: If your computer is not connected to a network, and you plug your printer cable into the printer port, you must make sure that AppleTalk is inactive in the Macintosh Chooser desk accessory. See “Using the Chooser the First Time You Print” in Chapter 3. S No matter which Macintosh you have, these icons identify the printer and modem ports. Press the cable firmly into this notch to secure it. Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Printer 3Installing the printer software Before you can print, you may need to install the software from the disks that came with your printer. To protect the disks, it is a good practice to lock them before use. See your Macintosh User’s Guide for information on locking floppy disks. v Is your software already installed? Some Macintosh computers come with printer software already installed on the hard disk. If your computer has the LaserWriter 300 software already installed, you do not need to install the printer software. v To see if your computer already has the LaserWriter 300 software, open the Apple (K) menu and choose the Chooser. If the LaserWriter 300 software is on your hard disk, the LaserWriter 300 icon will appear in the Chooser. If you see the LaserWriter 300 icon, skip this section of this book, and go on to Chapter 2, “Adding Toner and Paper.” System requirements The printer software can operate on a Macintosh using System 7 with at least 2 MB of memory, or System 6.0.7 with at least 1 MB of memory. Performance is best using System 7 with at least 4 MB of memory, or System 6.0.7 with at least 2 MB of memory. If your system software is an earlier version, you need to obtain a system software upgrade from your computer or software dealer. 4 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Printer LaserWriter 300 iconInstallation Before you install the printer software, quit any application programs that may be open. If you have virus protection software, turn it off. Then follow these steps: 1. Insert the LaserWriter 300 Install disk and open the disk icon. A window appears, showing the contents of the disk. 2. Drag the TeachText icon to your hard disk. If you already have a copy of TeachText on your hard disk, you don’t need to drag this icon. 3. Double-click the Installer icon to open it. The Installer’s Welcome screen describes the items that will be installed on your disk. 4. Click OK to clear the Welcome screen and display the Easy Install dialog box. v Installing customized printer software: These instructions cover the Easy Install process, which is recommended for most Macintosh users. If you click Customize before you click Install, you can select individual items to install from the disks. This is not recommended unless you are an experienced user and know which items to select. v continues . Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Printer 55. Make sure that the disk indicated on the screen is the one on which you want to install printer software. If the wrong disk name appears, click Switch Disk until the correct name appears. 6. Click Install. If any of your system’s application programs are open, a message appears warning you that you must quit the applications before installing the printer software. Click Continue to quit the applications. Status messages inform you of progress during installation. 7. Insert additional disks when messages on your screen request them. 8. When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart. Go on to Chapter 2 to install a toner cartridge and load the paper cassette, and then to Chapter 3 when you’re ready to begin printing. If you have virus protection software, turn it back on after the installation. v Read the ReadMe file: The ReadMe file on the LaserWriter 300 Install disk contains the latest information about your Personal LaserWriter 300. Double-click this file to open and read it; then choose Quit from the File menu to close it. v 6 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your PrinterAdding Toner and Paper This chapter tells you how to install a toner cartridge into the printer and load paper into a cassette. S Important: If you are setting up your Personal LaserWriter 300 for the first time, please add toner and paper before you plug your printer into an outlet. Otherwise, a paper jam may occur when your printer starts up. S Removing the plastic shipping restraints If you are installing a toner cartridge for the first time, you must remove the two orange plastic shipping restraints from inside the printer before you can install the cartridge. 1. Open the printer access door. 2. Remove the shipping restraints. Press on the restraints to remove them. If you are installing for the first time, remove the plastic shipping restraints. Press the release button to open the access door. 7 Chapter 2Installing or changing a toner cartridge Toner is the powdered ink that produces the image on the paper. Follow these steps to install a toner cartridge into the printer. 1. Open the printer access door. 2. If you are replacing a used cartridge, remove the old cartridge and set it aside. 3. Unpack the new toner cartridge and gently rock it to distribute the toner inside. Save the protective bag. If you move or transport your printer, you will need to remove the cartridge and transport it separately in the bag. Do not expose the cartridge to direct sunlight. Don’t expose it to room light for more than five minutes, or the life of the cartridge may be reduced. Gently rock the toner cartridge. Press the release button to open the access door. 8 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper4. Pull the tab to remove the tape. s Warning: Be sure to pull the tape in the direction shown. Don’t pull it too quickly or at too sharp an angle; otherwise, the tape may break. s 5. Insert the cartridge into the printer. Line up the markings on the sides of the cartridge with the arrows in the printer. 6. With both hands, press down gently on the cartridge to secure it in place. 7. Close the access door. Align arrows. Pull the tape completely out. Pull the tape in the direction shown. Do not pull it to either side or it may break. Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper 9Plugging in the printer A power cord is supplied with your printer. Be sure the power cord is within easy reach, in case you want to unplug the printer. When you plug the power cord into an outlet, the Ready/In Use light comes on. s Warning: The Personal LaserWriter 300 is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug fits only a grounding-type AC outlet. If you are unable to insert the plug into an outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded one. This equipment is meant to be electrically grounded. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug! s Press the power cord firmly into this notch to secure it. 10 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and PaperLoading the paper cassette The universal paper cassette supplied with your printer holds up to 100 sheets of copier-weight bond paper. The paper size can be U.S. Letter, A4, U.S. Legal, or Executive. For good advice on paper quality, see Chapter 4, “Tips and Troubleshooting.” To load the paper cassette: 1. Take the cassette out of the printer and place it on a flat surface. If you are loading the paper cassette for the first time, remove the orange cardboard and plastic shipping inserts. 2. Adjust the sliding backstop in the cassette so it clicks into the notch for the appropriate paper size. Be sure the backstop is in one of the notches. Setting it between notches will result in a printing error. To change paper size, slide the paper guide in the direction of the arrow and line up the paper guide pointer with the paper size you want. continues . Adjustable paper guide Sliding backstop If you are installing for the first time, turn the paper cassette over and press both clips to remove the plastic insert. Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper 113. Insert a stack of paper that fits below the top edge of the paper bracket inside the cassette. 4. Slide the cassette into the printer. To remove the cassette to refill it, grasp it and pull firmly straight out. Push firmly to make sure the cassette is in place. Make sure paper fits under the corner brackets. Insert paper this end first. Corner bracket 12 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and PaperLoading 3-hole punched paper Follow the instructions for loading ordinary paper, and position the sheets as shown below. Loading letterhead paper Follow the instructions for loading ordinary paper, and position the sheets as shown below. Insert letterhead paper face down with the top of the page at this end of the cassette. The holes should line up along this side of the cassette. Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper 13Loading legal-size paper Follow the instructions for loading ordinary paper, adjusting the sliding backstop to accommodate legal-size paper. Slide the cassette firmly into the printer. The cassette and paper will extend out the back of the printer. 14 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and PaperPrinting This chapter explains how to print documents on a Personal LaserWriter 300 connected to your own Macintosh, to share the printer with other users on a network, and to use shared printers connected to other computers on the network. More printing instructions can be found in the manuals for your applications, such as word processing programs. These programs may include additional printing controls. Before you use the printer, you should have installed the software as described in Chapter 1, and installed a toner cartridge and paper cassette as shown in Chapter 2. Turning on the printer One of the first things you will notice about your Personal LaserWriter 300 is that it has no power on/off switch. As soon as the printer is plugged into an outlet, its power is on and the printer is in a standby state. There is no wait for the printer to warm up. The Personal LaserWriter 300 is equipped with an energy conservation mode, an automatic on/off feature that conserves energy by shutting off most of the printer’s functions when they are not in use. The printer remains on standby. When the printer detects something to be printed, it “wakes up” and goes to full power. After printing your document, the printer automatically returns to standby. As long as the printer is plugged in, it will be on standby. While on standby, the printer’s Ready/In Use status light (marked with the icon U) glows steadily. When you send the printer something to be printed, the light will flash and you will hear a fan come on. The Personal LaserWriter 300 is intended to be plugged in and on standby continuously. There is no need to unplug it, except for maintenance or moving. When it is on standby the printer consumes very little energy—less than 10 watts, about the same amount as a night-light. 15 Chapter 3Choosing face-down or face-up delivery You can select either face-down or face-up paper delivery with your Personal LaserWriter 300, depending on the type of paper you are using. When you choose face-down delivery, paper comes out into the delivery tray on top of the printer, face down and stacked in order. The delivery tray can hold at least 25 sheets of standard copierweight bond paper. Face-down delivery is useful when you want your document collated; but it is limited to plain paper only. To select face-down delivery, set the paper delivery selector as shown here: In face-up delivery, paper comes out of the face-up delivery slot at the back of the printer. Face-up delivery uses a straight paper path, which helps to avoid paper jams and curl. Face-up delivery is required for envelopes, transparencies, labels, and other special papers. If you choose face-up delivery, be sure there is enough space behind the printer for the paper to come out. To select face-up delivery, set the paper delivery selector as shown here: Set the selector for face-up delivery. Paper delivery selector Set the selector for face-down delivery. Paper delivery selector 16 Chapter 3: PrintingUsing the Chooser the first time you print You use the Chooser desk accessory to tell the Macintosh where to send print jobs. In the Chooser, you choose the port to which you connected the Personal LaserWriter 300, and can also choose among printers connected to your network, if any. S Important: Once you choose the printer in the Chooser, you won’t need to repeat this step unless you change printers or change the way your printer is connected. S 1. Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu. 2. After you choose the printer, close the Chooser. Chapter 3: Printing 17 First click the LaserWriter 300 icon in this box. Then click the serial port that you used to connect the printer. Click here to share the printer over a network or to create a log of printed jobs. See “Sharing Your Printer With Other Users.” Be sure to make AppleTalk inactive if your computer is not on a network and you connected the printer to the printer port (marked with the icon [). Background Printing lets you use your computer for other things while it is printing. For details, see the Print Monitor instructions in your Macintosh User’s Guide.Defining the page setup The Page Setup command is found in the File menu of nearly all Macintosh programs. Depending on the program you are using, some of the options in this dialog box may change. You need to choose Page Setup only if you want to change settings. 18 Chapter 3: Printing Click here to reduce the image by 4%. This makes the printed dots proportional to the dots on your screen so there is no distortion when you print a bitmapped image. Click here to reduce the margins and print closer to the edge of the page. Click one of these icons to choose vertical or horizontal page orientation. Type any size from 5% to 999% or choose a preset size. Click Options to display the page setup options. Choose from six paper sizes: U.S. Letter, U.S. Legal, Executive, A4, #10 Envelope, and Monarch Envelope.Printing a document The Personal LaserWriter 300 prints your document using the cassette or manual feed. See the next section for instructions if you choose Manual Feed as the paper source. 1. Open the document you want to print or select its icon in the Macintosh Finder. 2. Choose Print from the File menu. 3. Choose the appropriate settings and click Print. After a moment, the Ready/In Use light begins to blink. Then you will hear the fan come on. There will be a brief wait before printing. Chapter 3: Printing 19 To print more than one copy, type a number here. Choose from an alert message or a system sound to notify you when a print job is finished. Choose the paper source from the top menu. To print the first page on special paper, click “First from” and use both menus. If you don’t want to print all pages, click in these boxes and type the first and last page to print. Click here to display the printer’s density control. See “The Image Is Too Light or Too Dark” in Chapter 4 for details. Choose Grayscale or Black and White printing. If your document contains colors or shades of gray, Grayscale produces a sharper image. Black and White printing is faster, but produces a coarser image. Printing paper or envelopes with the manual feed slot If you want to use paper that is different from the paper in the cassette, you can use the manual feed slot to insert sheets one at a time as the document is printed. You can also use this slot to print on envelopes and other nonstandard paper sizes. 1. Open the document you want to print or select its icon in the Macintosh Finder. 2. Choose Print from the File menu. 3. In the Print dialog box, choose Manual Feed from the Paper Source pop-up menu. 4. Click Print. The sheet you inserted is printed. If the document has additional pages, a message on your screen will alert you each time a new sheet is needed. To avoid paper jams, always wait for the prompt before inserting a new sheet. 5. Insert a sheet of paper or envelope as shown. Be sure to keep the page straight so it feeds correctly. Feed envelopes flap side down. Align along this edge. 20 Chapter 3: Printing Choose Manual Feed.Printing on both sides of a page Follow these steps to print a document using both sides of the paper. 1. Print the first side of the page using manual feed or the paper cassette. 2. Take out the printed sheet, turn it over, and print the second side using manual feed, inserting the sheet as shown here. Always use manual feed for printing the second side. To avoid jams, don’t load already printed pages into the paper cassette. Sharing your printer with other users If your Macintosh is connected to a network, you can set up your printer to let other users on the network use it. Follow these steps to turn on the printer’s sharing feature: 1. Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu. 2. Click the LaserWriter 300 icon. continues . Top of sheet Chapter 3: Printing 21 Click the LaserWriter 300 icon in this box. Click the serial port to which you connected the printer. Click Setup. Make AppleTalk active.3. Make AppleTalk active if it is not already active. 4. Click Setup. 5. Click Share this Printer and enter the options for the shared printer and in the Setup dialog box. Background printing is automatically turned on when a printer is shared. For details, see the Print Monitor instructions in your Macintosh User’s Guide. 6. Click OK. 7. Close the Chooser window. Network users can now choose your printer in their Chooser (see the next section for details). 22 Chapter 3: Printing Click to place an X in this checkbox. Type a name for the printer. This is the name other users will see in their own Chooser. Type a password if you want to share the printer with only users who know the password. Click to place an X here if you want to keep a record of all print jobs. The log file (a text file) is kept in the Printer Preferences folder in the Preferences folder inside your System Folder.Using a shared printer connected to another Macintosh To print on a shared Personal LaserWriter 300, network users must have the LaserWriter 300 driver installed on their computers, AppleTalk must be active, and the shared printer and Macintosh must be turned on. Each user wanting to use the shared printer should use the LaserWriter 300 installation disks and follow the instructions in Chapter 1 to install the printer software. Once the software is installed, the shared printer appears in the list of network printers available in the Chooser desk accessory. 1. Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu. 2. Click the LaserWriter 300 icon. 3. In the list of printers on the right, click the name of the shared LaserWriter you want to use. You can click the Get Info button in the Chooser window to see whether any fonts in your system are unavailable on the selected printer. If your document contains any such fonts, printing will be slower, because information about the fonts must be sent from your computer to the printer. (For faster printing, use a printer on which the fonts are available, or install the fonts on the Macintosh to which the shared printer is connected.) 4. Close the Chooser. Your Macintosh will now send all subsequent print jobs to the shared printer. Chapter 3: Printing 23 First click the LaserWriter 300 icon. Then click the name of the shared printer.Controlling the use of your printer by others After you turn on the sharing feature, you still have complete control over the shared printer: m You can turn sharing on or off at any time. m You can type a password in the Sharing Setup dialog box so only those who know the password can use your printer. m You can use the Print Monitor program in your Macintosh system software to view a list of print jobs that have been sent to your printer, and to delete any jobs in the list. The Print Monitor program is available when you have Background Printing turned on in the Chooser, and comes on automatically when others use your shared printer. Refer to your Macintosh User’s Guide for more information about the Print Monitor program. v Your computer’s performance: When others use your printer, their documents are printed in the background so your work is not interrupted. While your computer is printing in the background, you may experience an occasional pause or other symptoms of reduced performance. v 24 Chapter 3: PrintingTips and Troubleshooting This chapter provides solutions to printing problems you may encounter while using your printer. s Warning: If you have a problem with your printer and nothing presented in this chapter solves it, see the service and support information that came with your printer or computer. If you attempt to repair the printer yourself, any damage you may cause to the printer will not be covered by the limited warranty. s See page 2 for additional safety information. Safety precautions Consider these rules of safety before you open the printer or attempt to troubleshoot problems: m Don’t attempt to disassemble the printer. m Don’t use oil inside the printer. m Don’t use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. They may react with the toner. m Don’t use alcohol-based cleaners on or around the printer. They may react with the plastic case. m Don’t leave the access door open. Exposing the toner cartridge to light may damage the cartridge. continues . 25 Chapter 4m Don’t open the drum-protection shutter on the toner cartridge. m Be sure the power cord is within easy reach, should you want to unplug the printer at any time. Since the Personal LaserWriter 300 has no power switch, unplugging it is the only way to turn it off. m Never try to manually defeat the interlock switches inside the printer. S Important: The fixing assembly in the printer operates at very high temperatures. When you need to open the printer, be careful not to touch the fixing assembly. S Some odor from the heat of the printing process is normal. Fixing assembly. This area gets very hot. 26 Chapter 4: Tips and TroubleshootingChecking the printer’s status lights Always check the status lights first when a printing problem occurs. These often tell you the cause of the problem. m The Ready/In Use light should glow steadily whenever the printer is on, and blink when it is printing. m The Paper Out light is on only when there is no paper in the cassette, or the printer is waiting for manual feed. m The Paper Jam light is on when any obstruction occurs in the paper path. Paper Out light Ready/In Use light Paper Jam light Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 27Solving some common problems The Chooser doesn’t show the LaserWriter 300 icon If the LaserWriter 300 icon is missing from the box that identifies different printer types, you need to install the printer software from the disks that came with your printer. To install the software, follow the instructions in “Installing the Printer Software” in Chapter 1. Then make sure you select the printer, as shown in “Using the Chooser the First Time You Print,” in Chapter 3. The Macintosh can’t find the printer If you have selected the printer icon in the Chooser but nothing prints or you get a message that no printer has been found, one of the following may be the cause: m The printer has been unplugged. Make sure it is plugged securely into an outlet (the green status light should be on). m In the Chooser, you may have chosen the wrong printer or selected the wrong serial port (the modem port instead of the printer port, or vice versa). Select the correct Chooser options as described in “Using the Chooser the First Time You Print,” in Chapter 3. m There’s a loose plug somewhere. Check to make sure that both ends of the cable are properly connected. See Chapter 1, “Setting Up Your Printer.” m If you are connected to a network and are printing on a shared Personal LaserWriter 300, check to be sure you have chosen the correct zone in the Chooser. The Macintosh to which the printer is connected must be turned on. If you still can’t resolve the problem, the printer may not be functioning properly. Contact an authorized Apple service provider about repairs. 28 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting If there’s no LaserWriter 300 icon here, you haven’t installed the printer software correctly.Printing takes a long time Printing may be slow on pages containing complex graphics or pages printed using landscape (horizontal) orientation. The processing speed of your computer and the amount of memory it has directly affect printing time. A faster computer or more memory results in faster printing. The printer won’t print a particular page or document If a document contains a page with very complex graphic images, the printer may be unable to print the page. You will see a message telling you that your printer has “insufficient memory.” Remove some of the complex detail from that page (or spread the information over two pages) and try again to print it. You are more likely to experience this problem when printing legal-size documents. Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 29Type looks jagged or some text changes to the Geneva font The most likely cause of this problem is that you are using a nonTrueType font. LaserWriter 300 printers use two kinds of fonts: outline fonts and bitmapped fonts. TrueType fonts are outline fonts. Each character in an outline font is produced by instructions that describe its shape. A character from an outline font can be printed smoothly in any size you specify. Your Personal LaserWriter 300 comes with a set of TrueType fonts (see “About Fonts,” later in this chapter). Bitmapped fonts are fixed in shape and size: Your printer can produce smooth bitmapped characters only in the sizes for which it has instructions (a map of dots for each font size). If you use a bitmapped font in a size for which your printer does not have instructions, your system tries to create the size you want. The resulting type can look jagged. Even a font that looks good on your screen can look bad when printed out. The best solution to this problem is to switch to a TrueType version of the font you want to use. To see if you have a TrueType version: 1. Find your Fonts on your system. If you have System 7, version 7.1 or higher, open your System Folder and then open your Fonts folder. If you have an earlier version of System 7, open your System Folder. If you have System 6, insert your LaserWriter 300 Install disk and double-click the Font-DA Mover. 30 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting2. Look in the list of fonts for the font you wish to use. If it is a TrueType font, its icon will look something like this: If it is a non-TrueType font, its icon will look like this: If you are using System 6, you will see a list of font names in the Font-DA Mover. If the font name has a number next to it, then it is a non-TrueType font. If a TrueType version of your font is available, use it in your documents. When your computer runs low on memory, TrueType turns itself off and some TrueType fonts may be displayed and printed in the Geneva font. If you’ve installed fixed-size versions of your TrueType fonts, they will not change to Geneva, but they will look very jagged when TrueType is turned off. For more help with fonts, see “About Fonts,” later in this chapter. Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 31 This number tells you the size of the font.The printer prints on only part of the paper Make sure you have selected the appropriate paper size in the Page Setup dialog box. Check the adjustment of the sliding backstop in the paper cassette to make sure it is correct for your paper size. See “Loading the Paper Cassette” in Chapter 2. Paper is jammed To avoid paper jams, make sure the paper cassette is properly loaded with one of the recommended paper types. (See “Paper Feeds Improperly,” next.) If you are using manual feed, be sure to wait for the prompt before inserting a new sheet. Paper jams are sometimes caused by moving or jarring the printer. 32 Chapter 4: Tips and TroubleshootingIf the Paper Jam status light is on, follow these steps: 1. Remove the paper cassette. Be sure the paper is loaded correctly in the paper cassette. The stack of paper should fit under all the corner brackets. With the paper cassette removed, look inside the printer and remove any jammed sheets you see. 2. Open the printer and remove the cartridge. Look inside the printer and remove any jammed sheets you see. Pull the sheet straight out. Avoid pulling at an angle that might tear the paper and leave scraps inside the printer. Replace the toner cartridge when done. continues . Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 333. Open the printer’s back door as shown below. Press the paper release lever and pull the jammed sheet out through the front. This type of jam is often caused by an interruption in printing. 4. If the paper is wrapped around the roller, remove it as shown below. Press the paper release lever. 34 Chapter 4: Tips and TroubleshootingPaper feeds improperly If paper tears, gets skewed, or comes through the printer crumpled, it may not be entering the printer properly. Remove any jammed sheets from inside the printer. Remove the paper cassette, turn the stack of paper over, and replace the cassette (most paper has one side that prints better). It may also help to fan the edge of the stack with your thumb, in case some of the sheets are stuck together. Make sure the stack of paper is loaded correctly into the paper cassette, and fits under all the corner brackets. Some papers cause jams because they are not intended for use with laser printers. See “About Paper,” later in this chapter, for advice on choosing papers. Unwanted lines or stripes appear If white or dark lines appear on the page, try the following: m Remove the toner cartridge and rock it to redistribute the toner. Be sure to hold the cartridge horizontally. Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 35Toner stains appear on printed pages If the printed pages are not clean, there may be a buildup of toner on the printing rollers. If stains appear on the backs of printed pages, you may have printed an image that is larger than the paper, causing toner to be deposited in the paper path. To clean the rollers, print several blank pages until the stains disappear. The image is too light or too dark If printing is too light or too dark, try the following: m Take out the toner cartridge and rock it gently to distribute toner. If this doesn’t help, you may need to replace the cartridge. See “Installing or Changing a Toner Cartridge” in Chapter 2 for instructions. m Choose Print from the File menu and click Options to display the Print Density control. m If the problem occurs on paper other than the recommended copier-weight bond, the toner may not adhere well to the paper you are using. Try using a fresh package of paper. For advice on choosing paper for your laser printer, see “About Paper,” next. 36 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting Drag the slider toward the right to darken the image.About paper Many problems, such as toner smearing, paper curling, or paper feeding improperly, can be caused by the paper you are using. To assure good results, use only paper, envelopes, and transparencies that are manufactured for use with laser printers and photocopy machines. Make sure any paper you use is free of tears, wrinkles, dust, and oil stains. Paper with cutouts or perforations is not recommended. Here is a list of papers to avoid: m extremely slick or shiny paper m erasable typewriter paper m paper that is highly textured m coated paper m stapled paper m envelopes that contain fasteners or snaps m multipart forms s Warning: Do not use paper printed using low-temperature dyes or thermography. Such materials can peel away from the paper or melt inside the LaserWriter and cause damage. Colored paper can be used as long as the color is added during the paper-making process, not after, and the color can withstand the heat generated by the printer’s fixing assembly (approximately 190° C or 374° F). Envelopes, transparencies, and labels are acceptable as long as they contain no fasteners and can withstand the heat generated by the fixing assembly. s The paper cassette can hold U.S. Letter, A4, U.S. Legal, and Executive paper. Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 37About fonts The disks provided with your LaserWriter contain fonts from the most widely used font families. Font families (also called typefaces) can be classified into two groups: serif and sans serif. The small accents at the ends of the strokes of the letters are serifs. Fonts that do not have these accents are “sans” serifs. How to use different kinds of fonts Serif fonts are considered more readable than sans serif fonts. For long passages of text, typographers generally choose serif fonts. Sans serif fonts are used for headlines and short passages. Your font disks contain seven serif typefaces: ITC Bookman® , Courier, New Century Schoolbook, Palatino® , Times® , Chicago, and New York. All but Courier are commonly used for both long passages and headlines or captions. Courier is designed to look like output from a typewriter, and does not give a page a typeset appearance. Times is the most commonly used typeface in the selection, and is considered to be one of the most readable fonts. The disks include five sans serif typefaces: ITC Avant Garde® , Helvetica® , Helvetica Narrow, Geneva, and Monaco. These fonts are appropriate for headlines, posters, and captions; they are sometimes also used for short passages in brochures, invitations, and so forth. Helvetica and Helvetica Narrow are the most widely used of the sans serif typefaces in the selection. Because of its compact width, Helvetica Narrow is also convenient for mathematical expressions and spreadsheets. Your font disks also contain three special-purpose fonts: Symbol, ITC Zapf Chancery® , and ITC Zapf Dingbats® . Symbol is handy for technical documents that contain equations and formulas. Zapf Chancery is highly decorative, and is useful for invitations, diplomas, and the like. Zapf Dingbats contains arrows, pointing fingers, small pictures (icons), and other symbols for decorating and illustrating your documents. 38 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting T T Serif Sans SerifUse restraint when choosing fonts A good rule of thumb to use when choosing fonts for your documents is: Avoid using more than two font families on the same page. It is fine to use several sizes and styles (such as bold or italic) of the same font family on the same page. Using too many font families on the same page gives your document a “ransom note” appearance. A good combination is one sans serif font for your headings and one serif font for your body text. Avoid combining two serif or two sans serif font families on a page. The two-font family rule does not apply to the Symbol and ITC Zapf Dingbats® fonts: You can add these as needed in addition to the regular fonts you have chosen. Add emphasis and contrast To add emphasis and contrast to your documents, use bold, italic, and, occasionally, all caps. Don’t underline unless there is a special purpose for it, as in a formula or equation. Underlining is a throwback to the typewriter and gives your document an unprofessional look. Italics is the best choice for putting emphasis on passages within your body text. It is also useful for book titles and foreign phrases. Bold is best used for headings. Type set in bold looks important and authoritative. Using all caps has a similar effect. Use type set in all caps sparingly, however, because it is very difficult to read. Don’t use outline or shadow styles except for decoration on posters, in logos, and similar pieces. Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 39Be careful setting alignment and columns Properly aligning your text can enhance or detract from your document’s readability. One of the most common mistakes is to set a document in many narrow columns, with full justification (text lined up on the left and right). This allows for only a few words per line, and “darkens” a page by eliminating the white space around the edges of the text. Flush-left alignment with a ragged right edge lends an informal feeling, and is generally considered to be the most readable of settings. Centering is useful for formal announcements or invitations, but avoid centering long passages. Choose the right size Use 9- to 12-point type for long passages of body text. Smaller sizes can be very difficult to read. Note, however, that different typefaces of the same point size vary in “visual size”: 9-point Helvetica looks larger than 9-point Times. Find out more There are many excellent sources to help you produce professional-looking documents. Look for books and magazines on desktop publishing, graphic design, and typography. 40 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting41 Specifications Print quality m 300 dots per inch for text and graphics Printer RAM m 512K of RAM Printer fonts m Standard TrueType font families. The Personal LaserWriter 300 can support additional fonts from Apple and from other suppliers. Speed m Four pages per minute maximum. Actual speed depends on the images printed and the computer used. Interface m Serial, externally clocked Life expectancy m Minimum life expectancy is 150,000 pages, with no monthly page limit. Paper feed m Automatic feed from paper cassette; manual feed for single sheets Printing materials Apple recommends 20-lb. photocopy bond (75 g/m 2 ). You can use 16-lb. (64 g/m 2 ) to 28-lb. (105 g/m 2 ) paper with manual feed; the paper cassette accepts 16-lb. (64 g/m 2 ) to 24-lb. (90 g/m 2 ) paper. Accepts most letterhead and colored stock, and medium-weight laser printer transparencies. Print labels using manual feed. Use envelopes recommended for laser printers. Print envelopes, transparencies, and other special media using manual feed and face-up delivery. Paper sizes and capacity The paper cassette can hold up to 100 sheets of U.S. Letter, U.S. Legal, A4, and Executive paper sizes. Imageable area m Maximum printable line: 203 mm (8.00 in.) m Minimum top and bottom margins: 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) m Minimum left and right margins: 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) Actual imageable area may vary depending on the application program. AppendixDimensions m Height: 16.1 cm (6.3 in.) m Width: 38.5 cm (15.2 in.) m Depth: 37.9 cm (14.9 in.) Weight m 7 kg (15.4 lb.) not including cartridge Operating environment Temperature m 50° to 90.5° F (10° to 32.5° C) Humidity m 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing Toner cartridge storage environment m 32° to 95° F (0° to 35° C) Input electrical requirements U.S./Japan m 100–120 V (±10%), 50–60 Hz (±2 Hz) Europe/Australia m 220–240 V (±10%), 50 Hz (±2 Hz) Power consumption Operating m 450 W maximum at 115 V or 220 V Standby m 10 W or less Ozone emission m Less than 0.05 parts per million maximum, measured in accordance with ECMA 129 or UL114 standards for ozone density measurement Laser Specifications m Type: Anode Common Type m Wavelength: 775–795 nm m Output power: 5 MW 42 Appendix: SpecificationsA alert message, choosing 19 alignment, design tips 40 Apple Peripheral-8 cable 3 AppleTalk, setting up printer for 21–22 Avant Garde® font 38 B background printing on network 22, 24 setting up in Choose 17 bitmapped fonts Page Setup for 18 TrueType fonts vs. 30 Black and White printing, choosing 19 bold font, using 39 Bookman® font 38 C cable checking 28 connecting to printer port 3 carrying the printer 2 cassette feed, printing with 19. See also paper cassette centering 40 changing toner cartridge 8–9 Chicago font 38 Chooser LaserWriter 300 icon missing from 28 printer problems and 28 setting up printer in 17 setting up for network in 21–23 cleaning the printer 2, 25 colored paper 37 columns, design tips 40 connecting the printer 3 Courier font 38 customized software, installing 5–6 D density control, displaying 19, 36 design tips 39, 40 E Easy Install dialog box 5 electrical requirements 42 energy conservation mode vii, 15 envelopes acceptable types of 37 face-up delivery required for 16 printing 20 environmental requirements 42 F fixing assembly caution 26 font families 38 combining 39 fonts about 38–40 adding emphasis or contrast with 39 choosing 38–39 finding 30–31 jagged type problems 30–31 mixing types of 39 shared printer and 23 sizes 40 TrueType viii TrueType vs. bitmapped 30 43 IndexG Geneva font 38 TrueType fonts printed as 31 graphics, print speed and 29 grayscale printing viii choosing 19 GrayShare software viii H Helvetica® font 38 Helvetica Narrow font 38 horizontal page orientation choosing 18 print speed and 29 I icons font 31 Installer 5 LaserWriter 300 4 printer and modem port 3 Installer icon 5 installing paper cassette 11–12 installing printer software 4–6 installing toner cartridge 7–9 “insufficient memory” message 29 italic font, using 39 ITC Avant Garde font® 38 ITC Bookman® font 38 ITC Zapf Chancery® font 38 ITC Zapf Dingbats® font 38, 39 J, K jagged type problems 30–31 L labels acceptable types of 37 face-up delivery required for 16 landscape orientation. See horizontal page orientation laser specifications 42 LaserWriter 300 icon 4 missing from Chooser 28 legal-size paper “insufficient memory” message with 29 loading 14 letterhead paper, loading 13 location for printer 1 log file, for shared printer 22 M Macintosh computer, connecting to 3 maintenance, safety precaution vi, 2, 25–26. See also troubleshooting manual feed, printing with 20 paper jam and 32 on second side 21 margins design tips 40 imageable area 41 reducing 18 memory capacity print speed and 29 TrueType fonts and 31 modem port 3 modem port icon 3 Monaco font 38 multiple copies, printing 19 N network connecting printer on 3 GrayShare software for viii setting up in Chooser 17 sharing printer on 21–24 New Century Schoolbook font 38 New York font 38 O operating environment 42 ozone emission 42 P, Q page orientation, choosing 18 Page Setup defining 18 design tips 40 Palatino® font 38 44 Indexpaper about 37 face-down vs. face-up delivery 16 feeding improperly 35 jammed 32–34 loading 13–14 Page Setup options 18 printing both sides of 21 printing on only part of 32 printing too light or dark on 36 sizes and types 11, 18, 37, 41 status lights 27 unwanted lines or stripes on 35 paper cassette capacity 41 loading 11–12 printing with 19 removing 12 removing paper jam from 33 paper delivery selector 16 paper jams 32–34 Paper Jam status light 27 Paper Out status light 27 paper release lever 34 password, for shared printer 22, 24 plugging in the printer 10 portrait (vertical page) orientation, choosing 18 ports 3 setting up in Chooser 17 power consumption 42 power cord, plugging in 10 Print Density control 36 Print dialog box 19, 20 printer icon. See LaserWriter 300 icon printer port connecting to 3 setting up in Chooser 17 printer port icon 3 printing 15–24 on both sides of page 21 with cassette feed 19 Chooser setup for 17 face-down vs. face-up delivery 16 with manual feed 20 Page Setup options 18 problems. See troubleshooting “turning on” printer 15 Print Monitor program, controlling printer with 24 problems. See troubleshooting R radio interference vii cable for preventing 3 ReadMe file 6 Ready/In Use status light vii, 15 reducing printed image 18 roller cleaning toner from 36 paper wrapped around 34 S safety precautions vi, 2 grounding plug 10 troubleshooting and 25–26 sans serif fonts 38 selected pages, printing 19 serial port, setting up in Chooser 17 serif fonts 38 setup 1–6 carrying the printer 2 in Chooser 17 connecting to Macintosh 3 face-down vs. face-up delivery 16 installing software 4–6 installing toner cartridge 7–9 loading paper cassette 11–12 location options 1 Page Setup 18 plugging in printer 10 for printer sharing 21–24 safety precautions 2 turning on printer 15 shared printer controlling 24 setup for 21–23 shipping restraints, removing 7 software GrayShare viii installing 4–6 preinstalled 4 TrueType fonts viii Index 45specifications 41–42 standby status vii, 15 status lights Paper Jam 27 Paper Out 27 Ready/In Use vii, 15, 27 Symbol font 38, 39 system software fonts and 30, 31 requirements 4 T television interference v–vi cable for preventing 3 3-hole punched paper, loading 13 Times® font 38 toner 8 pages stained with 36 redistributing 35, 36 toner cartridge changing 8–9 installing 7–9 transparencies, face-up delivery required for 16 troubleshooting 28–36 “insufficient memory” message 29 jagged type 30–31 LaserWriter 300 icon missing 28 paper feed problems 35 paper types to avoid 37 printing on only part of paper 32 printing too light or dark 36 printing too slow 29 safety precautions 25–26 toner stains on page 36 unwanted lines or stripes on page 35 warranty caution 25 TrueType fonts viii bitmapped fonts vs. 30 finding 30–31 turning off the printer 26 turning on printer 15 typefaces. See fonts U underlining 39 V vertical page orientation, choosing 18 W, X, Y warranty caution 25 Z Zapf Chancery® font 38 Zapf Dingbats® font 38, 39 46 IndexApple Computer, Inc. 20525 Mariani Avenue Cupertino, California 95014-6299 (408) 996-1010 TLX 171-576 030-3858-A Printed in U.S.A. MASTER ART FOR BLACK LOGO Cinema Tools 4 Manuel de l’utilisateurK Apple Inc. © 2007 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Vos droits sur le logiciel sont régis par le contrat de licence du logiciel. Le propriétaire ou l’utilisateur autorisé d’une copie valide du logiciel Final Cut Studio est autorisé à reproduire cette publication à des fins d’apprentissage dudit logiciel. Aucune portion de cette publication ne peut être reproduite ni transmise à des fins commerciales, telles que la vente de copies de cette publication, ou pour fournir des services d’assistance payants. Le logo Apple est une marque d’Apple Inc., déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. En l’absence du consentement écrit préalable d’Apple, l’utilisation à des fins commerciales de ce logo via le clavier (Option + 1) pourra constituer un acte de contrefaçon et/ou de concurrence déloyale. Tout a été mis en œuvre pour que les informations pré- sentées dans ce manuel soient exactes. Apple n’est pas responsable des erreurs de reproduction et d’impression. Remarque : comme Apple publie fréquemment de nouvelles versions et des mises à jour de son logiciel système, de ses applications et de ses sites Internet, il se peut que les images incluses dans cet ouvrage soient légèrement différentes de ce qui apparaît à l’écran. Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 950142084 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, le logo Apple, Final Cut, Final Cut Pro, Final Cut Studio, FireWire, Mac, Mac OS, Monaco et QuickTime sont des marques d’Apple Inc., déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Cinema Tools, Finder et OfflineRT sont des marques d’Apple Inc. AppleCare et Apple Store sont des marques de service d’Apple Inc., déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les autres noms de produits et de sociétés sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Les produits commercialisés par des entreprises tierces ne sont mentionnés que pour information, sans aucune intention de préconisation ni de recommandation. Apple décline toute responsabilité quant à l’utilisation et au fonctionnement de ces produits. Les photos de production du film « Koffee House Mayhem » sont utilisées avec l’aimable autorisation de Jean-Paul Bonjour. « Koffee House Mayhem » © 2004 Jean-Paul Bonjour. Tous droits réservés. http://www.jbonjour.com Les photos de production du film « A Sus Ordenes » sont utilisées avec l’aimable autorisation d’Eric Escobar. « A Sus Ordenes » © 2004 Eric Escobar. Tous droits réservés. http://www.kontentfilms.com 3 1 Table des matières Préface 7 Introduction à Cinema Tools 8 Montage numérique de film 10 Pourquoi la vidéo 24P ? 10 Utilisation de la vidéo 24P 11 Montage offline et online 11 À propos de ce manuel 12 Sites Web Apple Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Chapitre 1 17 Avant de commencer votre projet 17 Avant de tourner votre film 18 Choix du film à utiliser 19 Transfert du film sur bande vidéo 19 Télécinéma 20 Techniques de transfert déconseillées 21 Quelle quantité de données faut-il transférer ? 23 Infos générales sur la vitesse de défilement des images 23 Utilisation de la vidéo NTSC 25 Utilisation de la vidéo PAL 26 Utilisation de la vidéo 24P 27 Prise en compte du timecode 30 À propos du son 30 Choix d’un enregistreur audio 30 Choix d’un format de timecode audio 31 Mixage de l’audio final 32 Synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo 34 Utilisation de Final Cut Pro 34 Réglage de la base temps des séquences 34 Sortie sur bande lors d’un montage à 24 ips 35 Utilisation d’effets4 Table des matières Chapitre 2 37 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 37 Étapes fondamentales du flux de production 37 Création de la base de données Cinema Tools 41 Capture des plans sources 45 Connexion des plans à la base de données 45 Préparation des plans pour le montage 46 Montage des plans dans Final Cut Pro 46 Génération de listes de film et de listes des modifications dans Cinema Tools 47 Cinema Tools Exemples de flux de production 47 Jusqu’où peut-on aller dans Final Cut Pro ? 49 Si vous avez utilisé des transferts scene-and-take 50 Si vous avez utilisé des transferts camera-roll Chapitre 3 53 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 53 Cinema Tools Fenêtres et zones de dialogues 64 Les zones de dialogues disponibles dans Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools Chapitre 4 69 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 71 Choix du mode de création de la base de données 71 Réalisation de la capture avant la création de la base de données 71 Si vous disposez d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE 72 Si vous ne disposez pas d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE 74 Autres usages de la base de données 74 Création et configuration d’une nouvelle base de données 74 Création d’une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de Cinema Tools 75 Création d’une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de Final Cut Pro 77 Réglages de la zone de dialogue Nouvelle base de donées 80 Utilisation de la base de données 80 Ouvrir une base de données existante 80 Recherche et ouverture d’enregistrements de base de donnée 84 Sauvegarde, copie, renommage et verrouillage de bases de données 84 Accès à des informations sur un plan source 85 Saisie d’informations dans la base de données 85 Importation des informations de la base de données 91 Saisie manuelle des informations de base de données 102 Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des informations de base de données 104 Modification d’informations dans la base de données 105 Suppression d’un enregistrement de la base de données 105 Changement de l’affiche d’un plan 106 Modification des réglages de base de données par défaut 107 Modification de tous les identifiants de bobine ou de bande 108 Vérification et correction de numéros de code de bordure de timecodeTable des matières 5 Chapitre 5 111 Capture des plans sources et création d’un lien avec la base de données 111 Préparation de la capture 112 Comment éviter les pertes d’images 113 Configuration de votre matériel afin de capturer un timecode exact 114 Avant de capturer de l’audio 115 Génération d’une liste de capture par lot dans Cinema Tools 121 Ce qu’il faut savoir avant de capturer des plans individuellement 121 Connexion des plans sources capturés à la base de données 123 Utilisation de la commande Connect Clips pour connecter des plans sources 124 Utilisation de la fenêtre Detail View pour connecter et déconnecter des plans sources 125 Utilisation de la fenêtre Clip pour connecter ou déconnecter des plans source 126 Réparation des liens rompus entre les plans et les enregistrements 127 Reconnexion de plans individuels ayant été renommés ou déplacés 127 Détection des liens rompus et reconnexion de groupes de plans ayant été déplacés Chapitre 6 129 Préparation des plans sources pour le montage 129 Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en vue du montage 131 Utilisation de la fonction de conformation 133 Inversion du pulldown télécinéma 145 Ajustements de la vitesse audio 146 Synchronisation séparée de l’audio et de la vidéo capturés 147 Division ou suppression de sections de plans sources avant le montage Chapitre 7 151 Montage dans Final Cut Pro 151 À propos des configurations simplifiées et du paramétrage de la base temps 153 Utilisation de vidéo à 25 ips conformée à 24 ips 154 Affichage d’informations relatives au film dans Final Cut Pro 159 Ouverture de plans Final Cut Pro dans Cinema Tools 159 Restrictions concernant l’utilisation de pistes multiples 160 Utilisation d’effets, de filtres et de transitions 165 Détection des usages multiples des plans sources 166 Exactitude des listes de conformation lors du montage de vidéo pulldown 3:2 ou 24 & 1 Chapitre 8 167 Création de listes de film et de listes de modification 168 Sélection du format de liste 169 Listes que vous pouvez exporter 174 Exportation de listes de film à l’aide de Final Cut Pro 182 Création de listes de modification Chapitre 9 191 Observations à propos de l’exportation et création de listes EDL audio 192 Observations à propos de l’exportation sur bande vidéo 192 Observations à propos de l’exportation audio 193 Exportation d’une liste EDL audio6 Table des matières Chapitre 10 199 Utilisation de fichiers EDL, XML et ALE externes 199 Création de listes de film basées sur une liste EDL ou un fichier XML 204 Utilisation de fichiers ALE Partie II Utilisation de la vidéo 24P Chapitre 11 209 Utilisation de la vidéo 24P et de listes EDL 24 ips 210 Éléments à prendre en compte lors de la création sur film 211 Montage de vidéo 24P avec Final Cut Pro 211 Utilisation du même système Final Cut Pro pour le montage 24p offline et online 212 Utilisation de la vidéo 24p avec Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools 213 Utilisation de Final Cut Pro comme système de montage 24p online 214 Utilisation de Final Cut Pro comme système de montage offline 24P 218 Ajout et suppression du pulldown dans les plans 24P 219 Utilisation du pulldown 2:3:3:2 220 Suppression de pulldown 2:3:3:2 avec Final Cut Pro 221 Suppression de pulldown 2:3:3:2 ou 2:3:2:3 avec Cinema Tools 225 Modèles de pulldown applicables à la vidéo 23,98 ips 227 Ajout d’un pulldown à une vidéo de 23,98 ips 227 Utilisation de listes EDL audio pour le son à deux systèmes Partie III Annexes Annexe A 231 Principes généraux 231 Notions élémentaires sur le film 237 Montage selon les méthodes traditionnelles 239 Montage à l’aide des méthodes numériques Annexe B 245 Création de listes de films avec Cinema Tools 246 À propos de la méthode basée sur les plans 247 À propos de la méthode basée sur le timecode Annexe C 249 Solutions aux problèmes fréquents et assistance client 249 Solutions aux problèmes fréquents 252 Contact de l’assistance AppleCare Glossaire 253 Index 263 7 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools Cinema Tools associé à Final Cut Pro est une solution qui apporte des possibilités sans précédent aux professionnels du montage de film et de vidéo 24p. Aujourd’hui, dans la postproduction, les monteurs et les réalisateurs se trouvent souvent confrontés à une multitude de formats, de fréquences d’images et de flux de production au sein du même projet. Un projet est souvent tourné, monté et sorti dans des formats totalement différents à chaque étape de la production. Pour les monteurs et les réalisateurs qui souhaitent tourner et finaliser sur film, Cinema Tools devient un composant essentiel du processus de postproduction lors du montage avec Final Cut Pro, en permettant de monter de la vidéo transférée à partir d’un film et de faire le suivi des opérations de montage numérique dans le but de pouvoir conformer ensuite les copies de travail et les coupes au négatif de caméra original. Par exemple, lorsque vous travaillez sur pellicule il est nécessaire de suivre la correspondance entre les images de la pellicule d’origine et leur contrepartie vidéo. Cinema Tools exploite une base de données sophistiquée qui suit et assure cette correspondance quel que soit le standard vidéo que vous utilisez, ce qui garantit que le film peut être conformé pour refléter votre montage dans Final Cut Pro. Vous pouvez aussi convertir les plans vidéo capturés en vidéo à 24 images par seconde (ips). Pour le format NTSC, cela inclut une fonction de télécinéma inversé qui élimine les images supplémentaires ajoutées durant le procédé de pulldown 3:2 couramment utilisé pour le transfert du film sur bande vidéo ou pour convertir à la baisse de la vidéo 24P. Cinema Tools, en combinaison avec Final Cut Pro, propose des outils conçus pour rendre le montage numérique de films et l’utilisation de la vidéo 24p plus faciles et moins chers, en offrant des fonctionnalités que l’on ne trouvait, jusque là, que dans des systèmes de montage haut de gamme ou très spécialisés. L’intégration entre Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro permet d’effectuer les tâches les plus courantes de Cinema Tools directement à partir de Final Cut Pro, Cinema Tools effectuant les tâches automatiquement en arrière-plan.8 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools Montage numérique de film La technologie informatique est en train de bouleverser le processus de création ciné- matographique. De nos jours, la grande majorité des longs métrages sont montés numériquement, sur des systèmes de montage non linéaires de haute technologie et très coûteux, conçus à cet effet. Jusqu’à il y a peu, ce type d’outil n’était pas disponible pour les réalisateurs disposant d’un budget limité. Cinema Tools complète Final Cut Pro en lui apportant les fonctionnalités de systèmes professionnels coûtant beaucoup plus cher, et ce à un prix abordable pour tous les réalisateurs. Si vous tournez en 35 mm ou en 16 mm et souhaitez faire un montage numé- rique et une finalisation sur film, Cinema Tools vous permet de monter les transferts vidéo provenant de votre film à l’aide de Final Cut Pro, puis de produire une liste de conformation précise pouvant être utilisée pour la finalisation du film. Même si vous ne prévoyez pas de conformer le négatif de caméra original, sachez que Cinema Tools fournit une grande variété d’outils pour la capture et le traitement de la vidéo de votre film. En quoi Cinema Tools est-il utile pour le montage d’un film ? Pour beaucoup, la pellicule constitue encore le meilleur support de capture d’images. Si votre objectif consiste à sortir votre film en salle ou à le projeter lors d’un festival, vous devrez disposer de l’œuvre finale sur pellicule. L’utilisation de Final Cut Pro avec Cinema Tools ne change pas le processus d’exposition de la pellicule dans la caméra ni la projection du film dans une salle de cinéma ; c’est toutes les opérations situées entre ces deux activités qui peuvent profiter des avancées technologiques. Le montage d’un film, de façon classique, c’est découper et coller bout à bout des morceaux de pellicule pour réaliser une copie de travail du film, une opération longue et fastidieuse et qui avait tendance à décourager l’expérimentation avec des versions de scène alternatives. Le transfert de la pellicule sur vidéo rend possible l’utilisation d’un système de montage non linéaire pour le montage de votre projet. La souplesse de ces systèmes simplifie l’assemblage de chaque scène et vous offre la possibilité d’essayer plusieurs options de montage. Le montage final vidéo n’est généralement pas utilisé, ce sont les décisions de montage prises qui comptent vraiment. Elles constituent les informations nécessaires pour couper et coller (conformation) le négatif original afin d’aboutir au film final. La difficulté est de faire correspondre le timecode des raccords vidéo au numéros de bord du négatif, afin qu’un monteur négatif puisse créer sur pellicule une version précise du montage vidéo.Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools 9 Voilà où Cinema Tools entre en jeu. Cinema Tools effectue un suivi de la correspondance entre le négatif original de la caméra et le transfert vidéo. Une fois que le montage dans Final Cut Pro est fini, vous pouvez utiliser Cinema Tools pour générer une liste de conformation basée sur les coupes que vous avez faites. Armé de cette liste, un monteur négatif peut transformer le négatif original de la caméra en film abouti. Si des projections et des modifications de la copie de travail font partie de votre processus de production, vous pouvez également utiliser Cinema Tools pour créer des listes de modification décrivant les changements à réaliser sur la copie de travail afin qu’elle corresponde à la nouvelle version de la séquence montée dans Final Cut Pro. Quelles sont les tâches prises en charge par Cinema Tools Cinema Tools assure le suivi de tous les éléments qui contribuent à la réalisation de l’œuvre finale. Il « connaît » la correspondance entre le négatif original, les bandes vidéo transfé- rées et les plans vidéo capturés sur l’ordinateur de montage. Il collabore avec Final Cut Pro pour stocker des informations sur la façon dont les plans vidéo sont utilisés et génère la liste de conformation nécessaire pour transformer le négatif de caméra original en film monté final. Cinema Tools contrôle aussi la présence ou l’absence de problèmes pouvant se poser dans le cadre de l’utilisation de Final Cut Pro, le plus courant étant la présence de doublons de plans sources : un plan (ou une partie de plan) utilisé plusieurs fois. Outre la création de listes d’éléments dupliqués, vous pouvez utiliser Cinema Tools pour géné- rer d’autres listes, telles qu’une liste traitant des effets d’optique, c’est-à-dire des emplacement des transitions, effets de mouvement (vidéo à une vitesse de défilement différente de la vitesse normale) et titres. Cinema Tools peut aussi travailler sur le son, en relevant la relation entre l’audio utilisé dans Final Cut Pro et les sources sonores originales. Il est possible d’utiliser l’audio monté provenant de Final Cut Pro pour créer une liste EDL (pour l’anglais Edit Decision List) et de traiter (ou de finaliser) l’audio dans un studio de postproduction audio spécialisé. Il est important de garder à l’esprit que vous n’utilisez Final Cut Pro que pour prendre les décisions de montage ; on ne tire en général pas de copie vidéo à partir de ce travail, puisque la vidéo de travail est en général compressée et assortie de timecode gravé (fenêtre d’affichage) et d’informations sur le film. C’est la cut list basée sur le montage, que Cinema Tools permet de générer, qui constitue l’objectif principal. Tournage du film Conversion du film en vidéo Conformation du négatif original Montage dans Final Cut Pro avec Cinema Tools Cut list Négatif original Création de copies d’exploitation10 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools Pourquoi la vidéo 24P ? La prolifération des normes vidéo haute définition (HD) et la volonté de diffuser des contenus vidéo dans le monde entier ont créé une demande pour une norme vidéo qui puisse être convertie facilement vers toutes les autres normes. Par ailleurs, une norme facilement convertible en film et offrant une méthode aisée et de haute qualité pour la création et le montage vidéo avant la finalisation sur film, s’avère nécessaire. La vidéo 24p permet tout cela. Elle utilise la même vitesse de défilement de 24 ips que les films, ce qui permet de tirer parti des dispositifs de conversion existants pour créer des versions NTSC et PAL de votre projet. Elle utilise le balayage progressif pour créer une sortie convenant à la projection sur grand écran et la conversion en film. De plus, la vidéo 24p permet de produire des transfert télécinéma 24 ips de haute qualité à partir d’un film. Ceux-ci sont particulièrement utiles si vous comptez diffuser le produit finalisé selon différents standard TV. Utilisation de la vidéo 24P Avec l’apparition des enregistreurs vidéo 24p HD, il est de plus en plus nécessaire que Final Cut Pro prenne en charge plusieurs aspects du montage 24 ips (dans certains cas, il s’agit en réalité d’un montage 23,98 ips). Pour cela, Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools proposent les fonctions suivantes :  L’importation et l’exportation de listes EDL 24 ips et 23,98 ips.  La possibilité de convertir des listes EDL 29,97 ips NTSC en 23,98 ips ou en listes EDL 24 ips.  Une fonction de télécinéma inversé permettant d’annuler le pulldown 3:2 utilisé lors de la conversion de pellicule ou de vidéo 24 ips en format NTSC 29,97 ips.  La possibilité de supprimer le pulldown 2:3:3:2 ou 2:3:2:3 de fichier de données NTSC afin de pouvoir monter à 24 ips ou 23,98 ips.  La possibilité de sortir de la vidéo 23,98 ips via FireWire au format NTSC de 29,97 ips.  La possibilité de mettre en correspondance les coupes d’audio dans une bande vidéo avec les bandes audio de production originales et de générer une liste EDL audio pouvant être utilisée pour recapturer et finaliser l’audio si l’on prévoit de le recapturer ailleurs pour le traitement final. Plusieurs des fonctionnalités mentionnées ci-avant figurent dans Final Cut Pro et ne requièrent pas Cinema Tools. Ces fonctionnalités sont toutefois décrites dans le présent manuel parce qu’elles concernent l’utilisation de la vidéo 24p, ce qui intéresse particuliè- rement de nombreux réalisateurs. Consultez la section « Infos générales sur la vitesse de défilement des images » à la page 23 pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation des différentes fréquences d’images.Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools 11 Montage offline et online Si vous utilisez un format 24p haute résolution, comme, par exemple, la vidéo HD non compressée, vous voudrez peut-être réaliser des copies basse résolution de votre métrage pour économiser l’espace disque et la puissance de calcul de votre ordinateur. Dans ce cas, le processus de montage comporte quatre grandes étapes :  Production (génération de la vidéo maîtresse) : transfert ou tournage du film en vidéo HD 24p sans compression.  Montage offline : conversion du métrage en vidéo NTSC ou PAL (d’une résolution généralement inférieure à 24p) et montage.  Compatibilité de formats : exportation d’un projet Final Cut Pro ou d’une liste EDL contenant vos décisions de montage finales.  Montage online : remplacement du métrage basse résolution et création d’une bande originale en pleine résolution. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Montage de vidéo 24P avec Final Cut Pro » à la page 211. À propos de ce manuel Le présent manuel ne documente pas seulement tous les aspects de l’utilisation de l’application Cinema Tools, mais aussi les fonctions liées de Final Cut Pro. Ce manuel est un document PDF avec hyperliens et doté de nombreuses fonctions qui facilitent l’obtention des informations que vous recherchez.  La page d’entrée donne un accès rapide à diverses fonctionnalités, y compris à l’index et au site web de Cinema Tools.  Une liste de signets complète vous permet de choisir ce que vous souhaitez voir en un instant, simplement en cliquant sur le lien.  Tous les renvois du texte sont reliés. Vous pouvez cliquer sur n’importe quel renvoi afin d’y accéder immédiatement. Vous pouvez ensuite utiliser le bouton Précédent de la barre de navigation pour revenir à l’endroit où vous vous trouviez avant de cliquer sur le renvoi.  La table des matières et l’index sont également reliés. Si vous cliquez sur une entrée de l’une de ces deux sections, vous passez directement à la page concernée. Source du master 24P Capture de vidéo Montage online (24 ips) Montage de plans Liste EDL 24 ips Vidéo NTSC ou PAL Vidéo 24P Conversion en 24 ips Final Cut Pro avec Cinema Tools (montage offline) Master 24P monté12 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools  Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le champ de recherche pour rechercher un terme ou une expression particulière. Ce manuel vous présente des informations conceptuelles de fond, des instructions étape par étape et un glossaire spécialisé. Il est conçu pour fournir les informations dont vous avez besoin pour commencer à travailler sans tarder et tirer pleinement parti des riches fonctionnalités de Cinema Tools.  Si vous souhaitez commencer par quelques informations élémentaires sur la comparaison entre le montage traditionnel et le montage numérique, consultez l’annexe A, « Principes généraux », à la page 231.  Pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur l’utilisation de Cinema Tools, ainsi que des remarques préliminaires sur la planification d’un projet, consultez la première partie intitulée « Utilisation de Cinema Tools, » ci-après.  Si vous êtes intéressé par l’utilisation conjointe de Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools pour le traitement de la vidéo 24P, consultez la deuxième partie intitulée « Utilisation de la vidéo 24P » à la page 207. Remarque : ce manuel ne prétend pas être un guide complet sur l’art de faire un film. La plupart des informations sur la réalisation de films présentées ici sont de nature très générale et sont fournies pour contextualiser la terminologie utilisée pour décrire les fonctions de Cinema Tools. Sites Web Apple Plusieurs sites web Apple contiennent des informations destinées à vous aider à profiter pleinement de la puissance de Cinema Tools et de votre système Apple. Site Web de Cinema Tools Pour des informations et des mises à jour générales ainsi que pour les dernières nouvelles sur Cinema Tools, visitez le site web suivant :  http://www.apple.com/fr/finalcutstudio/finalcutpro/cinematools.html Site Web Apple Service et Support Pour des mises à jour logicielles et des réponses aux questions les plus fréquemment posées sur tous les produits Apple, y compris Cinema Tools, visitez ce site web :  http://www.apple.com/fr/support Vous aurez également accès aux caractéristiques des produits, à la documentation de référence et aux articles techniques concernant les produits Apple ou de tierce partie. Pour des informations de support technique sur Cinema Tools, allez à l’adresse suivante :  http://www.apple.com/fr/support/cinematoolsPréface Introduction à Cinema Tools 13 Autres sites web Apple Démarrez à la page d’accueil du site web Apple pour tout savoir sur les produits Apple :  http://www.apple.com/fr QuickTime est une technologie standard de reproduction de la vidéo, du son, d’animation, de texte de musique et de scènes de réalité virtuelle (RV) à 360°. QuickTime permet de produire de la vidéo numérique très performante, très compatible et de qualité élevée. Visitez le site web de QuickTime pour des informations sur les types de données pris en charge, une visite guidée de l’interface de QuickTime, des spécifications, etc :  http://www.apple.com/fr/quicktime FireWire est l’une des normes standard de périphériques les plus rapides jamais développées, ce qui la rend particulièrement adaptée à l’utilisation des périphériques multimé- dias, tels que les caméscopes ou les disques durs ultra rapides de dernière génération. Visit this website for information about FireWire technology and available third-party FireWire products:  http://www.apple.com/fr/firewire Pour plus d’informations sur les séminaires, événements et outils tiers de publication sur le web, de conception et impression, de musique et d’audio, de films sur ordinateur et d’art multimédia en général, allez à cette adresse :  http://www.apple.com/fr/pro Pour des ressources, des récits et des informations sur des projets éducatifs menés par d’autres à l’aide de logiciels Apple, notamment Cinema Tools, allez à cette adresse :  http://www.apple.com/fr/education Rendez-vous sur Apple Store pour acheter du logiciel, du matériel et des accessoires directement auprès d’Apple et profiter de promotions et rabais portant également sur des produits logiciels et matériels tiers :  http://www.apple.com/fr/storeI Partie I : Utilisation de Cinema Tools Cette section détaille l’utilisation de Cinema Tools pendant le montage de projets de film. Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools Chapitre 5 Capture des plans sources et création d’un lien avec la base de données Chapitre 6 Préparation des plans sources pour le montage Chapitre 7 Montage dans Final Cut Pro Chapitre 8 Création de listes de film et de listes de modification Chapitre 9 Observations à propos de l’exportation et création de listes EDL audio Chapitre 10 Utilisation de fichiers EDL, XML et ALE externes 1 17 1 Avant de commencer votre projet Planifiez votre projet au plus tôt afin de garantir sa réussite. Le succès de la production d’un film requiert une planification minutieuse avant même d’avoir filmé la première scène. Si vous envisagez de procéder au montage numérique du film, pensez aux tâches supplémentaires que cela implique. Pensez notamment au film à utiliser, à la méthode d’enregistrement du son et à d’autres aspects de votre production. Dans ce chapitre vous trouverez des informations générales relatives aux difficultés susceptibles de survenir :  choix du film à utiliser,  choix du mode de transfert du film sur bande vidéo,  incompatibilités de vitesses de défilement entre le film, votre format vidéo et votre base temps de montage,  questions relatives au son, notamment quel enregistreur et timecode utiliser et comment synchroniser le son avec la vidéo,  questions relatives à Final Cut Pro, notamment quant à la sélection de la base temps d’une séquence et l’utilisation d’effets. Remarque : la plupart de ces informations sont de nature générale et ne constituent pas un guide complet pour la création d’un film. L’industrie du film numérique change rapidement, à tel point que ce que vous lisez ici n’est certainement pas le mot de la fin. Avant de tourner votre film Avant de commencer, vous devez discuter de votre projet avec toutes les personnes impliquées dans le processus, à savoir :  les fournisseurs du matériel qui seront utilisés pendant la production,  les personnes impliquées dans la production elle-même,  le studio chargé du développement de votre film, de la création de copies de travail et de la version finale,  le studio de transfert sur bande vidéo,  le monteur qui utilise Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro (si ce n’est vous-même),  le monteur négatif,  le studio de postproduction.18 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Toutes ces personnes connaissent parfaitement leur métier ; elles peuvent vous communiquer des informations d’une importance capitale qui vous permettront de réussir votre projet facilement sans vous heurter constamment à des obstacles. Choix du film à utiliser Lorsque vous créez un film, la première chose à faire est d’en choisir le format. Pour ce faire, vous devez prendre en compte les caractéristiques requises par Cinema Tools. Cinema Tools prend en charge les formats de film 35 mm à 4 perforation, 35 mm à 3 perforations et 16 mm-20. Consultez la section « Notions élémentaires sur le film » à la page 231 pour des détails sur ces formats. Vous choisirez probablement le format de votre film en fonction de votre budget. Il est recommandé d’employer le même format tout au long de la production, même si cette condition n’est pas nécessaire pour utiliser Cinema Tools. Chaque enregistrement de la base de données possède son propre réglage de format de film. Apprenez à gérer votre budget Au cours de la production de votre film, vous serez parfois confronté au dilemme suivant : choisir entre « faire les choses bien » et « faire les choses relativement bien ». Le choix que vous ferez dépendra du montant de votre budget ou du temps dont vous disposez. Assurez-vous de bien comprendre les conséquences de vos décisions avant de choisir des solutions qui, sur le long terme, pourraient vous coûter davantage de temps et d’argent que prévu. Des difficultés liées à des décisions prises plus tôt au cours du processus, telles que la décision de ne pas avoir recours à une liste télécinéma par exemple, peuvent resurgir plus tard et vous prendre de court. Si vous réalisez ce type de projet pour la première fois, il est fortement conseillé de vous adresser à des professionnels spécialisés pour chacune des tâches. Vous pouvez faire des économies en en dépensant un peu sur des tâches que vous pouvez réaliser vousmême, comme, par exemple, en faisant appel à un studio de postproduction audio. Par ailleurs, ne sous-estimez pas l’importance de l’utilisation d’une cut list pour conformer une copie de travail avant de conformer le négatif. La création et le montage d’une copie de travail rend votre projet plus onéreux, mais une mauvaise conformation du négatif original peut avoir des conséquences irréparables sur votre film.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 19 I Transfert du film sur bande vidéo Pour effectuer le montage numérique de votre film, vous devez le transférer sur bande vidéo afin que l’ordinateur puisse le capturer. Il existe différentes méthodes de transfert mais vous devez avant tout disposer d’un moyen fiable permettant de faire coïncider les numéros de bord du film avec le timecode de la vidéo montée. Ce lien permet à Cinema Tools de calculer avec précision des numéros de bord spécifiques à partir des valeurs de timecode des points de sortie et d’entrée de chaque coupe. Les vitesses de défilement du film et de la vidéo doivent également être prises en considération avant d’effectuer le transfert. En effet, ces vitesses affectent la base temps et ont un impact sur la précision de la cut list créée par Cinema Tools. Télécinéma La méthode la plus courante pour transférer un film sur bande vidéo est, de loin, le télécinéma. Les télécinémas sont des appareils qui numérisent une à une toutes les images d’un film à l’aide d’un capteur d’image CCD (Charge-coupled device) pour les convertir en images vidéo, qui fournit une image d’une excellente qualité. Il permet en outre de bloquer le lien entre le film et la vidéo (aucun décalage ne se produit), ce qui constitue un énorme avantage dans le cadre de l’utilisation de Cinema Tools. En général, un télécinéma ménage davantage votre film et offre une correction de couleur et un contrôle opérationnel plus sophistiqués que les chaînes de films, décrites ci-dessous. Le télécinéma présente un autre avantage, celui de pouvoir créer la vidéo à partir du négatif original, alors que la plupart des autres méthodes requièrent la création préalable d’un film positif (copie de travail). (La création d’une copie de travail est onéreuse, mais vous réaliserez qu’elle s’avère d’une grande utilité par la suite puisqu’elle procure la meilleure manière de regarder le film sur grand écran et de détecter d’éventuels problèmes, ce qui facilite la sélection des prises à utiliser. Autre avantage de poids des copies de travail: elles vous permettent de tester la cut list avant de travailler sur le négatif.) La plupart des télécinémas actuels ne se contentent pas de fournir un transfert de haute q ualité, ils peuvent également lire les numéros de bord du film et accéder au générateur de timecode du magnétoscope, afin d’incruster ces numéros sur la bande vidéo. Cette méthode de transfert permet en outre de synchroniser l’audio et la vidéo. Le système est capable de contrôler la source audio et d’incruster le timecode audio ainsi que le timecode vidéo et les numéros de bord.20 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Dans la plupart des cas, les télécinémas produisent une liste qui peut servir de référence pour créer la base de données Cinema Tools. Cela permet d’automatiser la capture vidéo sur l’ordinateur. Les studios de télécinéma sont de plus en plus souvent capables de capturer aussi les plans vidéo à votre place et de vous fournir les plans sur un disque DVD ou sur un périphérique FireWire en même temps que la liste télécinéma et les bandes vidéo. Techniques de transfert déconseillées Vous trouverez ci-dessous certaines techniques de transfert qu’il est préférable de ne pas utiliser. Chaînes de film Évitez, si possible, d’utiliser une « chaîne de film ». Il s’agit d’une technologie relativement dépassée par rapport au télécinéma. Une chaîne de film, c’est en fait un projecteur de film relié à une caméra vidéo. En général, les chaînes de film ne gèrent pas les fonctionnalités telles que la lecture des numéros de bord ou le contrôle des magnétoscopes et ne peuvent pas créer un positif vidéo à partir d’un film négatif. Pour utiliser une chaîne de film, vous devez créer une copie de travail. Les chaînes de film sont généralement moins coûteuses que les télécinémas, mais la création d’une copie de travail entraîne une augmentation significative du coût. Le plus grand défi est de parvenir à définir le lien entre les numéros de bord du film et le timecode de la vidéo. Cela est généralement réalisé à l’aide de perforations (ou d’autres types de marqueurs d’images) placées sur des images connues. Important : certaines chaînes de film plus anciennes ne permettent pas la synchronisation du projecteur et du magnétoscope, ce qui peut entraîner un décalage entre le film et la vidéo. Que faire si vous voulez un original propre ? Si vous prévoyez de conformer le négatif de caméra original, la présence d’un timecode et de numéros de bord gravés sur les plans vidéo que vous montez dans Final Cut Pro ne pose pas nécessairement de problème, en particulier si vous utilisez un format vidéo très comprimé. Les numéros gravés peuvent toutefois constituer un problème si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la vidéo montée pour des projections ou la diffusion. Si les numéros gravés sont très précieux aux yeux des monteurs, ils peuvent distraire lorsque l’on regarde un projet monté. Voici deux méthodes pour minimiser l’impact de ce problème :  Convertissez la vidéo au format Letterbox au cours de la capture en utilisant des proportions de 2:35 afin qu’il y ait assez d’espace sous la vidéo pour afficher les numéros.  Ne flashez les informations gravées que sur la première image. Bien que cela ne soit pas aussi pratique que la gravure continue, cela donne au monteur la possibilité de s’assurer que le lien entre numéro de bord et timecode est correct.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 21 I Enregistrement d’une image projetée à l’aide d’un caméscope En raison du fort pourcentage d’erreurs susceptible de se produire et des heures de travail supplémentaires à consacrer au suivi des numéros de bord, cette méthode de transfert est complètement déconseillée. Projeter votre film afin de l’enregistrer à l’aide d’un caméscope revient relativement bon marché mais la présence d’erreurs est quasiment inévitable dans le découpage final du négatif. Avec les systèmes de télécinéma et de chaîne de film, le film et la vidéo sont en général synchronisés, ce qui garantit un transfert réussi quelles que soient les vitesses choisies. Dans ce type de transfert, même si les vitesses du projecteur et du caméscope sont quasi idéales, elles se décaleront progressivement au cours du transfert et il sera alors impossible de garantir un lien fiable entre les numéros de bord du film et le timecode vidéo. Cela signifie que du temps supplémentaire devra être consacré à l’examen de la cut list afin de vérifier l’exactitude des images utilisées. Il se peut en outre qu’une fois sur bande vidéo, les images soient affectées d’un scintillement important, ce qui rend difficile la lecture de certaines d’entre elles et la sélection de celles qui serviront au montage. Étant donné que la bande vidéo ne sert presque exclusivement qu’à sélectionner des points de coupe, sa qualité ne revêt pas une grande importance. Comme dans le cas des chaînes de film, vous devez créer une copie de travail pour projeter votre film. Avec ce type de transfert, il est très important de pouvoir corriger votre cut list avant de travailler sur le négatif original. Quelle quantité de données faut-il transférer ? Pour déterminer la quantité de données du film à transférer sur support vidéo, vous devez considérer plusieurs facteurs, dont le plus important sera sans doute le coût. Il dépend du temps passé par l’opérateur télécinéma sur la réalisation du transfert. Vous devez déterminer au préalable s’il est plus intéressant de transférer des bobines entières de film (transfert « camera-roll »), y compris les mauvaises prises et les scènes qui ne seront pas employées, ou de consacrer du temps à la détection de prises particulières afin de ne transférer que celles dont vous ferez usage (transfert « scene-and-take »).22 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Transferts camera-roll Cinema Tools utilise une base de données pour réaliser un suivi du lien entre les numé- ros de bord du film et les timecodes audio et vidéo. La base de données est conçue pour contenir un enregistrement par prise, mais cette condition n’est pas obligatoire. Si vous transférez sur bande vidéo une bobine de film entière sans interruption, Cinema Tools n’aura besoin que d’un enregistrement pour établir le lien entre les numéros de bord et le timecode vidéo. Toutes les coupes utilisant l’une ou l’autre portion de ce grand plan unique pourront être associées avec précision aux numéros de bord correspondants du négatif caméra original. Un des inconvénients de cette méthode de transfert, c’est le volume important des fichiers, en particulier en cas d’utilisation de longs passages de métrage. Par ailleurs, l’audio, de par la façon dont il est enregistré, est difficile à synchroniser sur télécinéma quand il s’agit d’un transfert caméra-bobine. Pendant la production, l’enregistrement audio démarre généralement avant que le film ne se mette à tourner et s’interrompt après l’arrêt de la caméra. Il est également courant de tourner un film sans son (technique appelée plans MOS [Motion Omit Sound]). Cela signifie qu’il est impossible, même si la synchronisation audio est établie en début de bobine, de la conserver tout au long de la bobine. Vous devez dans ce cas synchroniser chaque plan individuellement. La base de données de Cinema Tools inclut des fonctionnalités permettant de réaliser un suivi des bandes son et du timecode du film original. Après la capture, un long plan peut être subdivisé en plusieurs petits plans, ce qui vous permet de supprimer la vidéo superflue. Même en présence de plusieurs plans, Cinema Tools est capable de créer une cut list complète avec un seul enregistrement. Une autre méthode consiste à ajouter manuellement des enregistrements pour chaque plan, ce qui permet de tirer parti des capacités de base de données étendues de Cinema Tools. Consultez la section « Création de la base de données Cinema Tools » à la page 37 pour une approche détaillée des options possibles. Transfert scene-and-take Les transferts scène et prise sont un peu plus onéreux que les transferts caméra-bobine mais offrent des avantages importants :  Avec les transferts scène et prise, l’audio est plus facile à synchroniser durant le transfert.  La liste télécinéma contient un enregistrement par prise, ce qui constitue une base de données solide une fois importée dans Cinema Tools.  À partir d’une base de données préétablie, Cinema Tools peut exporter une liste de capture par lot. Grâce à cette liste (et au contrôle de périphérique approprié), Final Cut Pro peut capturer et numériser les prises appropriées avec un effort minimal pour vous. Il est possible, grâce à une liste de film précise et à un clap, d’accélérer le processus du transfert et d’en réduire le coût.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 23 I Infos générales sur la vitesse de défilement des images Pour transférer un film sur support vidéo, il faut prendre en compte la différence de vitesse de défilement entre le film et la vidéo. Les films sont presque toujours tournés en 24 images par seconde (ips) ou 23,98 ips, alors que l’on utilise généralement 25 ips pour livrer le projet final sous la forme de vidéo PAL. La vitesse de la vidéo est, selon le format vidéo choisi, de 29,97 ips (NTSC), de 25 ips (PAL) ou de 24 ou 23,98 ips (24p). La vitesse de défilement de votre vidéo (que vous synchronisiez l’audio durant le transfert télécinéma ou pas) et la vitesse à laquelle vous souhaitez réaliser le montage peuvent déterminer les étapes à suivre pour préparer vos plans en vue du montage. Il est conseillé de lire la section « Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en vue du montage » à la page 129 avant de choisir les vitesses de défilement. Utilisation de la vidéo NTSC À l’origine, la vitesse de défilement de la vidéo NTSC était de 30 ips. Lorsque la couleur fut ajoutée, elle dut être légèrement modifiée de façon à atteindre la valeur de 29,97 ips. La fréquence de trame de la vidéo NTSC est de 59,94. On dit souvent que la vidéo NTSC a une fréquence d’images de 30 ips, mais, bien que la différence soit minime, elle ne peut pas être ignorée lors du transfert d’un film sur vidéo (à cause de son impact sur la synchronisation audio, comme c’est expliqué à la section « Synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo » à la page 32). Vous devez à présent penser au problème suivant: comment distribuer les 24 ips du film sur les 29,97 ips de la vidéo NTSC. Deux options s’offrent à vous :  réaliser un 3:2 pulldown  lire le film à 29.97 ips Réalisation d’un 3:2 pulldown La méthode la plus courante pour passer des 24 ips du film aux 29,97 ips de la vidéo est d’effectuer un pulldown 3:2 (appelé 2:3:2:3 pulldown). En alternant l’enregistrement de deux trames d’une image du film et de trois trames de l’image suivante, les 24 images qui défilent en 1 seconde de film finissent par remplir les 30 images d’une seconde de vidéo. 24 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Remarque : la fréquence d’images de la vidéo NTSC est de 29,97 ips. La fréquence d’images du film est changée en 23,98 ips pour créer le modèle 3:2. Comme illustré ci-dessus, le modèle 3:2 (qui est en réalité un modèle 2:3:2:3 étant donné que l’image A est enregistrée en deux trames, suivie de l’image B enregistrée en trois trames) est reproduit au bout de quatre images du film. Presque tous les spots publicitaires de haute qualité, les films et les programmes de télévision en différé utilisent ce procédé avant la diffusion. Notez qu’après ce pull-down, les images du film ne correspondent pas exactement à celles de la vidéo. En effet, la durée d’une image vidéo ne correspond qu’aux quatre cinquièmes de la durée d’une image du film. En raison de cet écart, si vous comparez un nombre précis d’images vidéo et le nombre correspondant d’images du film, vous vous rendrez compte que les deux durées sont rarement exactement les mêmes. Pour que la synchronisation de l’ensemble soit maintenue, il faut généralement ajouter (ou supprimer) une fraction d’une image du film à la durée de la coupe suivante. Cela signifie que Cinema Tools doit parfois ajouter (ou supprimer), dans la liste de conformation, une image du film à la fin d’une coupe pour conserver la synchronisation. Pour cette raison, si vous montez une vidéo à laquelle a été appliqué un 3:2 pull-down, la cut list de Cinema Tools n’est précise qu’à plus ou moins 1 image pour chaque coupe. Avant (23,98 ips) A B A B B C C D D D A B C D A D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D B C A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B C C D D D A A B B B D B C C D D D A B A B B C C D D A B C D A A B B B C C D D D Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 3:2 Pulldown Après (29,97 ips) Une secondeChapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 25 I Ce problème de précision peut être résolu facilement à l’aide de la fonction Reverse Telecine (ou du matériel ou des logiciels de tierce partie) pour supprimer les trames supplé- mentaires et revenir aux 24 ips originales du film avant de commencer le montage numérique, à condition qu’il y ait une relation de un à un entre les images de la vidéo et les images du film. Le choix de 24 ips (ou de 23,98 ips, voir « Synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo » à la page 32) comme base temps de montage Final Cut Pro dans l’Éditeur de préréglage de séquence vous permet de monter la vidéo et de générer une liste de conformation très précise. Consultez la section « Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en vue du montage » à la page 129 pour en savoir plus sur ces options. Lecture du film à 29,97 ips Une autre option en matière de transferts de vidéo NTSC consiste à faire tourner le film à 29,97 ips. De cette manière, les images du film coïncident exactement avec celles de la vidéo, mais l’action du film subit une accélération de 25 pour cent. En raison de facteurs liés à la synchronisation audio, cette méthode est rarement employée ou recommandée. Utilisation de la vidéo PAL La vitesse de défilement de la vidéo PAL est d’exactement 25 ips. Deux méthodes peuvent être utilisées pour transférer un film sur une bande vidéo PAL : lire le film à 25 ips (méthode appelée 24 @ 25) et ajouter deux trames supplémentaires par seconde (similaire au pulldown 3:2 de la vidéo NTSC, appelé méthode 24 & 1, ou à la méthode de pulldown 24 @ 25). Qu’est-ce qu’une image A ? Il est souvent fait référence aux images « A » au sujet de la vidéo pulldown 3:2. Comme le montre l’illustration ci-avant, l’image A est la seule dont toutes les trames tiennent dans une image vidéo. Les autres images (B, C et D) apparaissent dans deux images vidéo. L’image A étant le point de départ du modèle vidéo à cinq images, il est souhaitable qu’elle soit la première image de chacun des plans vidéo. En général, les images A sont placées aux numéros de timecode « non-drop frame » se terminant par « 5 » et « 0 ». Consultez la section « À propos des images A » à la page 142 pour en savoir plus.26 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Méthode 24 @ 25 En lisant le film à 25 ips, les images du film coïncident exactement avec les images de la vidéo. L’inconvénient réside dans le fait que l’action subit une accélération de 4 pour cent et qu’il faut par conséquent accélérer l’audio dans les mêmes proportions pour conserver la synchronisation. Pour tirer parti de la grande variété disponible d’équipements vidéo à 25 ips, vous pouvez choisir de réaliser le montage avec des images plus rapides de 4 pour cent. Vous pouvez également choisir la fonction Conform (conformation) de Cinema Tools pour faire passer la base temps du plan à 24 ips, corrigeant ainsi la vitesse. La vidéo peut ensuite être montée à l’aide de Final Cut Pro à condition que les séquences qui l’utilisent aient une base temps de 24 ips. Remarque : Final Cut Pro comprend une configuration simplifiée et un préréglage de séquence dont les noms contiennent « 24 @ 25 », ainsi qu’un format de timecode appelé « 24 @ 25 ». Ils sont tous les deux destinés à être utilisés avec des plans provenant de vidéo PAL à 25 ips mais ayant été conformés à la vidéo 24 ips. Consultez la section « Utilisation de vidéo à 25 ips conformée à 24 ips » à la page 153 pour en savoir plus. Méthode 24&1 L’ajout de deux trames vidéo supplémentaires par seconde (appelée également méthode de pulldown 24 @ 25 dans Final Cut Pro) offre l’avantage de conserver la vitesse originale du film tout en perdant la relation univoque film vers vidéo. Cette méthode consiste à enregistrer une trame vidéo supplémentaire toutes les 12 images du film. Utilisation de la vidéo 24P Avec sa fréquence d’images et son balayage progressif, la vidéo 24p convient bien aux transferts télécinéma. Il utilise la même vitesse que le film et permet par conséquent une concordance parfaite des images du film et de la vidéo, sans conversion de vitesse. 24 ips 25 ips 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 7 Première trame de la seconde suivante 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24 Une Seconde 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Trame répétée Trame répétée 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 24 24 Une seconde 24 ips 25 ipsChapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 27 I Votre système Final Cut Pro doit être équipé d’un matériel spécialisé pour capturer de la vidéo 24P, que ce soit en plans compressés ou décompressés. Vous pouvez également utiliser certaines caméras DV, telles que la Panasonic AG-DVX100, pour tourner de la vidéo 24P et utiliser la méthode 2:3:3:2 pulldown pour l’enregistrer sur bande à 29,97 ips (NTSC). À l’aide de Final Cut Pro et de Cinema Tools, vous pouvez capturer cette vidéo et supprimer le 2:3:3:2 pulldown afin de pouvoir effectuer le montage à 24 ips. Consultez la section « Ajout et suppression du pulldown dans les plans 24P » à la page 218 pour en savoir plus. Remarque : lorsque l’enregistreur de bande vidéo 24p est utilisé au sein d’un système NTSC, sa fréquence d’images est en réalité de 23,976 ips (on parle de 23,98 ips) pour être compatible avec la fréquence d’images de 29,97 ips du NTSC. Prise en compte du timecode Il est important de prendre en considération les remarques générales ci-dessous concernant le timecode. Si vous utilisez de la vidéo NTSC, vous pouvez choisir entre deux formats de timecode. Conseils généraux relatifs au timecode Si votre appareil audio ou vidéo vous permet de définir les réglages du timecode, il est recommandé de régler la partie « heures » du timecode de sorte qu’elle corresponde au numéro de la bande vidéo. Il est ainsi beaucoup plus facile de savoir de quelle bande provient un plan. Il est également fortement conseillé de ne pas « passer minuit » sur une bande. Cela arrive lorsque le timecode passe de 23:59:59:29 à 00:00:00:00 lors de la lecture. Vous avez le choix entre le timecode record run et le timecode free run au cours de la production :  Timecode record run : le générateur de timecode s’arrête chaque fois que vous arrêtez l’enregistrement. Vous obtenez de cette manière une bande à timecode continu puisque chaque fois que vous commencez à enregistrer, le timecode reprend au point où il s’était arrêté précédemment.  Timecode free run : le générateur de timecode tourne sans arrêt. Une rupture de timecode est donc générée chaque fois que vous relancez l’enregistrement. Pour éviter d’éventuels problèmes au moment de la capture des plans, il est recommandé d’employer la méthode record run, ce qui permet d’éviter les ruptures de timecode sur une bande. Dans le cas où une bande contiendrait des ruptures de timecode (avec des sauts de numérotation entre les prises), veillez à laisser suffisamment de temps (poignées) pour les pre-roll et post-roll requis durant la capture lorsque vous listez vos plans. Consultez la documentation de Final Cut Pro pour des informations supplémentaires sur l’utilisation du timecode.28 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools À propos du timecode NTSC Le timecode NTSC normal (appelé non-drop frame fonctionne comme son nom l’indique : chaque image utilise le numéro libre suivant. Il y a 30 images par seconde, 60 secondes par minute et 60 minutes par heure. Étant donné que la vitesse d’images réelle de la norme NTSC est un peu inférieure à 30 ips (29,97 ips), le timecode non-drop frame finit par prendre du retard (3 secondes et 18 images par heure) par rapport au temps réel écoulé. Pour compenser cela, le timecode drop frame saute en avant de deux images par minute, sauf pour les minutes se terminant par « 0 ». (Le saut se fait uniquement par rapport aux numéros, pas par rapport aux images vidéo.) Cette correction permet de faire coïncider le timecode avec le temps réel, mais rend le montage numérique du film plus confus. Avec le timecode non-drop frame, une fois que vous avez trouvé une image A, vous savez que l’image A suivante correspond au numéro de cette image plus 5, et ainsi de suite. Si vous trouvez par exemple une image A à 1:23:14:15, vous savez que toutes les images terminant par « 5 » et « 0 » seront des images A. Avec le timecode drop frame, il est difficile d’établir ce type de lien. Remarque : en général, les images A sont placées aux numéros de timecode « non-drop frame » se terminant par « 5 » et « 0 ». Il est vivement recommandé de ne pas utiliser de timecode non-drop frame pour la vidéo et l’audio dans vos projets de montage, même si Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro sont capables de le traiter. Quel que soit le type de timecode que vous utilisez, n’oubliez pas d’utiliser le même pour les bandes vidéo et pour les bandes audio. Remarque : le timecode PAL ne pose pas ce problème : il lit à une vitesse réelle de 25 ips. Qu’arrive-t-il au timecode après que vous ayez utilisé la fonction Reverse Telecine ? La fonction Reverse Telecine (utilisée pour convertir de la vidéo 29,97 ips en vidéo 23,98 ips) a une incidence directe sur le timecode des images vidéo. Comme Cinema Tools doit géné- rer un nouveau timecode 23,98 ips pour les images (à partir du timecode original), il se peut qu’il y ait une différence entre les numéros de timecode gravés et les numéros affichés dans Final Cut Pro. Bien que les différences de timecode entre la fenêtre d’affichage et le timecode de Final Cut Pro puissent provoquer une certaine confusion, Cinema Tools gère le nouveau timecode de la vidéo 23,98 ips et est capable de le remettre en correspondance avec les valeurs NTSC ou PAL originales et donc avec les numéros de bord du film. Remarque : la fonction Reverse Telecine est généralement utilisée pour convertir de la vidéo NTSC en 23,98 ips afin qu’elle corresponde au timecode audio, mais elle peut aussi convertir la vidéo en 24 ips. Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 29 I Le timecode passe par les modifications suivantes : le télécinéma inversé supprime six images par seconde afin que les valeurs de timecode coïncident toujours au début de chaque seconde. Cela signifie qu’un plan qui dure 38 secondes s’il est lu à la vitesse NTSC de 29,97 ips conservera sa durée de 38 secondes s’il est lu à la vitesse de 23,98 ips du télé- cinéma inversé. Dans l’illustration ci-avant, les trames NTSC bleues représentent les trames supprimées au cours du processus de télécinéma inversé sur un plan à l’aide du pulldown 3:2 traditionnel. (Consultez la section « Ajout et suppression du pulldown dans les plans 24P » à la page 218 pour des informations sur le pulldown 2:3:3:2.) La fenêtre d’affichage du timecode NTSC sera différente de ce que Final Cut Pro affiche pour toutes les images sauf la première de chaque seconde, quelle que soit la longueur du plan. Qu’arrive-t-il au timecode après que vous ayez utilisé la fonction Conform ? L’on utilise la fonction Conform dans trois situations :  Conversion de vidéo 25 ips PAL en 24 ips : le timecode n’est pas modifié, ce qui garantit qu’une liste EDL exportée après le montage des plans fera bien référence au timecode PAL original. L’inconvénient, c’est que le timecode, à 25 ips, ne représente plus exactement le passage du temps réel lors de la lecture à 24 ips car chaque image est affichée un peu plus longtemps. Consultez la section « Utilisation de vidéo à 25 ips conformée à 24 ips » à la page 153 pour en savoir plus.  Conformation de vidéo 29,97 ips en 29,97 ips : le timecode n’est pas modifié. Ce processus est utilisé pour corriger des problèmes dans un fichier QuickTime avant l’utilisation de la fonction Reverse Telecine. Consultez l’annexe C, « Solutions aux problèmes fréquents et assistance client », à la page 249 pour en savoir plus.  Conversion de vidéo 29,97 ips NTSC en 23,98 ips : le timecode est modifié, un numéro étant passé toutes les cinq images. Cette situation de conformation est rare. Consultez la section « Utilisation de la fonction de conformation » à la page 131 pour en savoir plus. 1:00 1:11 1:01 1:02 1:03 1:04 1:05 1:16 1:06 1:07 1:08 1:09 1:10 1:12 1:13 1:14 1:15 1:17 1:18 1:19 1:20 1:21 1:22 1:23 1:24 1:25 1:26 1:27 1:28 1:29 2:00 2:01 2:02 1:00 1:01 1:02 1:03 1:04 1:05 1:06 1:07 1:08 1:09 1:10 1:11 1:12 1:13 1:14 1:15 1:16 1:17 1:18 1:19 1:20 1:21 1:22 1:23 2:00 2:01 2:02 Images vidéo NTSC (29,97 ips) Images vidéo télécinéma inversé (23,98 ips) Début du plan Trames éliminées Une seconde30 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools À propos du son Le son d’un film étant enregistré séparément sur un enregistreur audio, certains aspects sont à prendre en considération :  choix du type d’enregistreur audio à utiliser  format de timecode à utiliser  mode de mixage audio final  mode de synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo Choix d’un enregistreur audio Il existe plusieurs types d’enregistreurs audio : le magnétophone analogique (en géné- ral un Nagra), le magnétophone numérique (DAT, pour Digital Audio Tape) ou l’enregistreur de disques numériques. Qu’il soit analogique ou numérique, l’essentiel est qu’il gère les timecodes. Choix d’un format de timecode audio Contrairement à la vidéo ou au film, qui doivent être structurés avec une vitesse spécifique, l’audio est linéaire et dépourvu de divisions dues aux images. L’ajout de timecode à l’audio sert donc à déterminer des points dans le temps afin de faciliter la synchronisation de l’audio avec les images de la vidéo ou du film. Durant le tournage, vous pouvez choisir le format de timecode audio à utiliser (généralement 30 ips, 29,97 ips, 25 ips, 24 ips ou 23,98 ips). Vous pouvez également choisir, pour les formats 30 ips et 29,97 ips, d’utiliser le timecode drop frame ou non-drop frame. Pour les transferts de vidéo NTSC, il est fortement recommandé d’utiliser le timecode non-drop frame tant pour la vidéo que pour l’audio (même si Cinema Tools est compatible avec les deux). Consultez la section « À propos du timecode NTSC » à la page 28 pour en savoir plus sur les timecodes drop frame et non-drop frame. Au moment de choisir votre réglage de timecode audio, vous devez tenir compte du mode de mixage du son final :  Si le mixage final doit être réalisé à l’aide de Final Cut Pro : ce réglage doit correspondre au réglage Editing Timebase dans l’Éditeur de préréglage de séquence de Final Cut Pro.  Si le mixage final doit être réalisé dans un studio de postproduction audio : le timecode doit être compatible avec l’équipement du studio. Remarque : contactez le studio afin de confirmer ces réglages avant de commencer le tournage. En général, si vous synchronisez l’audio au cours du transfert télécinéma, le timecode doit correspondre à celui du format vidéo (29,97 ips pour NTSC, 25 ips pour PAL ou 24 ips pour 24p). Consultez le monteur son avant le tournage, afin de vous assurer qu’il pourra travailler avec le timecode choisi.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 31 I Mixage de l’audio final La méthode utilisée pour mixer l’audio final dépend de la complexité de la bande sonore (le nombre de pistes, les effets sonores et l’overdubbing peuvent la rendre très complexe) et de votre budget. Vous pouvez soit finaliser l’audio dans Final Cut Pro soit le faire finaliser dans un studio de postproduction. Finishing the Audio With Final Cut Pro Si vous capturez des plans audio en haute qualité, vous pouvez terminer l’audio de votre projet à l’aide de Final Cut Pro, qui comprend des outils de montage du son sophistiqués. N’oubliez toutefois pas qu’il faut absolument disposer d’audio de bonne qualité pour faire un bon film et que choisir de ne pas confier l’audio à un studio de postproduction audio familier aux problèmes liés à la création d’audio pour les films peut donner des résultats décevants. Vous pouvez exporter l’audio de Final Cut Pro sous la forme d’un fichier Open Media Framework (OMF) pouvant être utilisé dans un studio de postproduction audio. Un fichier OMF exporté contient le son ainsi que les informations sur les point d’entrée et de sortie audio. Cela signifie que tous les éléments d’effets sonores que peut contenir votre projet sont inclus dans le fichier. Lorsque vous utilisez un fichier OMF, la qualité de l’enregistrement doit être optimale car elle correspond exactement à ce que les spectateurs entendront. Veillez par conséquent à utiliser un appareil de capture de bonne qualité et des niveaux d’enregistrement appropriés. Exportation de listes EDL audio Une autre façon de faire consiste à utiliser des plans de moindre qualité dans Final Cut Pro, puis à les exporter dans une liste EDL audio (Edit Decision List) que l’on fournit au studio de postproduction audio. Dans le studio, des éléments audio de haute qualité peuvent être capturés directement à partir de la source sonore d’origine, puis montés en se basant sur la liste EDL. Pour que cela marche, il faut que le timecode et les numéros des bandes sonores originales soient consignés et utilisés pour créer la liste EDL audio. Les plans audio capturés dans des plans vidéo ne conservent pas leur timecode ni leur numéros de bobine originaux et la liste EDL de Final Cut Pro ne peut pas être utilisée par les studios de postproduction audio. Cela arrive souvent avec les plans créés à partir d’un transfert scene-and-take, car l’audio est alors synchronisé avec le film, puis enregistré sur la bande vidéo et perd le timecode audio original. Toutefois, étant donné que la liste télécinéma produite lors du transfert contient généralement les informations de timecode et de numéro de bande de l’audio et de la vidéo, il suffit de l’importer dans la base de données de Cinema Tools afin que la base de données puisse assurer le suivi de l’audio et que vous puissiez exporter une liste EDL audio depuis Cinema Tools une fois le montage terminé. Consultez la section « Exportation d’une liste EDL audio » à la page 193 pour en savoir plus sur ce procédé.32 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools Synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo Le son de production d’un film est enregistré séparément sur un enregistreur audio ; ce procédé est connu sous le nom de méthode du système d’enregistrement dual (ou double) system recording. La synchronisation du son avec le film et la bande vidéo (pour une synchronisation labiale parfaite) est une étape fondamentale dans la réalisation d’un film. La méthode de synchronisation dépendra de l’équipement dont vous disposez ainsi que du moment choisi pour la synchronisation. D’autres considérations liées au format vidéo, à la méthode de transfert télécinéma et au timecode employés ont également un impact sur le processus et ne doivent pas être oubliées. La synchronisation est particulièrement importante lors des trois étapes suivantes :  durant le transfert télécinéma  durant le montage  au moment de la création de la version finale Pour conserver la synchronisation à chacune de ces étapes, différentes stratégies peuvent s’avérer nécessaires. Veillez à planifier votre travail en conséquence. Synchronisation : informations générales La synchronisation du son avec l’image vidéo ne doit pas poser de problème majeur si les précautions nécessaires ont été prises lors du tournage. La synchronisation du son comporte deux aspects : l’établissement de la synchronisation à un point particulier de chaque plan et la lecture du son à la bonne vitesse afin qu’il reste synchronisé. Lorsque vous filmez, vous devez créer des repères sonores et visuels qui serviront à la synchronisation. La méthode la plus courante consiste à utiliser un clap (également appelé ardoise ou claquette) au début de chaque prise. L’idéal est d’employer un clap avec timecode sur lequel est affiché le timecode de l’enregistreur audio. Pour synchroniser l’audio et la vidéo, positionnez la vidéo sur la première image où le clap est refermé, puis localisez le son (ou timecode) correspondant. Sachez que pour des raisons liées à la production, il est parfois nécessaire que le clap soit effectué à la fin de la prise. En géné- ral, il doit alors être tenu à l’envers. Le transfert par télécinéma engendrant souvent une accélération ou un ralentissement du film, la vitesse audio doit également être modifiée.